JP2022025371A - Heating cooker - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a heating cooker which includes a plurality of heat sources such as an induction heat source and the like, and which has enhanced convenience of a user.SOLUTION: The heating cooker includes: a microwave heat source and an oven heat source using a heating chamber; an induction heat source for cooking in a place other than the heating chamber; and an integrated control device. The integrated control device can perform a coordination cooking mode in which three heat sources are coordinated. A shared operation part for setting the coordination cooking mode and an individual operation part are provided. The shared operation part can determine start and cancel of the coordination cooking mode. The individual operation part can determine start and end of the cooking step of the induction heat source. During an input period for setting the cooking condition of the coordination cooking mode by the shared operation part, an input in the individual operation part is restricted, and unnecessary input is prevented. Reversely, in the cooking step using the individual operation part, the input in the shared operation part is restricted. In the case where abnormality is detected in the process of the coordination cooking mode, a heating operation is stopped, a cooing fan continues a heat radiation operation under a specific condition, and superheating is prevented.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 58

Description

The present disclosure relates to a cooking device that heats an object to be heated such as a pot placed on a top plate.

There are roughly three types of cooking cookers in view of the environment in which they are used.
One of them is the so-called "built-in type" that is installed in kitchen furniture such as kitchen counters. The second is a "stationary type" that is used by placing it in a predetermined position of kitchen furniture like a gas table (also referred to as a "gas combustion type table"). The third is a small and portable "tabletop type" that is placed and used at an arbitrary position on a table or the like.

There are many types of "built-in type" cookers equipped with multiple types of heating sources, and they are popular as those that can handle various types of cooking. However, since it is installed inside the kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed according to the standard of general kitchen furniture, and the design is more flexible than the "stationary" or "desktop" ones. The degree is extremely low, and the difficulty to make it a practical product is high.

As a typical built-in type heating cooker, an induction heating part is arranged on the top plate part at the upper part of the main body so that the range of cooking can be expanded, and a heating chamber heated by the heating body is placed inside the main body ("" Although it is also referred to as a "grill storage", there is a structure that is uniformly provided with a "heating chamber") and cooks the food to be cooked in the heating chamber (for example, Patent Document 1).

Similarly, in order to expand the range of cooking, an induction heating unit is provided in the top plate portion at the upper part of the main body, and a heating chamber heated by microwaves and a heating source is provided inside the main body. There is a structure in which the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber is cooked (for example, Patent Document 2).
Those provided with a plurality of heating sources having different heating principles, such as Patent Documents 1 and 2, are called a combined cooking cooker.

JP-A-2018-67413 (Page 7, FIG. 4) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2020-87506 (Page 20, FIG. 18)

As proposed in Patent Documents 1 and 2 above, when heat sources located at a plurality of locations are used, an unintended heating source may operate or stop even if the user's operation command is incorrect. It is necessary to take measures to prevent it. If this measure is not sufficient, it may cause confusion for users and may lead to cooking failure. That is, it is necessary to overcome difficult technical problems such as cooperation of a plurality of heating sources and timely notification and display of the cooperation status of the heating sources to the user.

In particular, in the process of finishing one cooking, when the object to be cooked is moved between the upper part of the top plate portion and the heating chamber and cooked twice or more (hereinafter referred to as "cooperative cooking"). The user is at a loss when starting and stopping the heating operation between the cooking process using one heating source (including the process of preheating the object to be heated such as a pot) and the cooking process 2 using another heating source. A case is assumed. For example, there is a case where the cooking liquid is about to overflow from the object to be heated (such as a metal pot) and an emergency stop is made, or a user who comes in contact with an Earthquake Early Warning hurries to stop cooking.

In response to these problems, Patent Document 1 above proposes to stop heating only a specific heating source by operating the main power switch, but assume the situation of cooperative cooking. However, there is room for improvement. This also applies to the above-mentioned Patent Document 2.

A first object of the present disclosure is to obtain a highly convenient cooking cooker that can be widely used for various kinds of cooking by improving the operability of the user.
The second object of the present disclosure is the convenience of being able to handle a wide range of cooking by appropriately dealing with an abnormality during the heating operation on the device side and improving the sense of security and reliability. To get a high cooker.

The cooking utensil according to the first disclosure regarding the first purpose is
With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber, and
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit.
It is provided with an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit.
The input operation unit includes a shared operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode executes the cooking step 1 by the first heating means and the cooking step 2 by the second heating means.
The control unit
(1) In response to the input from the shared operation unit, the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
(2) The start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed in response to a command from the individual operation unit.
(3) During the period of the cooking step 1, a part or all of the input function for the second heating means in the shared operation unit is disabled.
(4) When the cooking step 1 is completed, the input function for the second heating means in the shared operation unit is restored.
(5) The start and end of the cooking step 2 are executed according to a command from the shared operation unit.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooking utensil according to the second disclosure regarding the first purpose is
With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber, and
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit.
It is provided with an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit.
The input operation unit includes a shared operation unit and an individual operation unit for the first heating means.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode executes the cooking step 1 by the second heating means and the cooking step 2 by the first heating means.
The control unit
(1) In response to the input from the shared operation unit, the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
(2) The start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed in response to a command from the shared operation unit.
(3) During the period of the cooking step 1, a part or all of the input functions in the individual operation unit are disabled.
(4) When the cooking step 1 is completed, the input function for the first heating means in the individual operation unit is restored.
(5) The start and end of the cooking step 2 are executed according to a command from the individual operation unit.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooking utensil according to the third disclosure regarding the first purpose is
With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber, and
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit.
It is provided with an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit.
The input operation unit includes a shared operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode includes at least two cooking steps 1 and 2.
The first cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means is used in the cooking step 1 and the second heating means is used in the cooking step 2, and the second heating means is used in the cooking step 1. It also has a second linked cooking mode in which the first heating means is used in the cooking step 2.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooperative preheating cooking mode in which a preheating step by either the first heating means or the second heating means is executed in addition to the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2.
The control unit
(1) When the cooperative cooking mode is selected, the first specific screen is displayed on the notification unit.
(2) Display multiple cooking menu candidates on the first specific screen, and display them.
(3) When one of the candidates for the cooking menu is selected, either the first linked cooking mode or the second linked cooking mode is automatically determined.
(4) It is requested that the input of the control condition applied to the selected cooking menu be input from the shared operation unit.
(5) During the period of the preheating step, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, the input functions in the individual operation unit and the shared operation unit are restricted.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooking utensil according to the fourth disclosure regarding the first purpose is
With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber,
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit.
It is provided with an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit.
The input operation unit includes a shared operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit.
The control unit has an operation program of a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order.
The linked cooking mode comprises a cooking step 1 and a cooking step 2, and for the first linked cooking mode in which the first heating means is used for the cooking step 1 and for the cooking step 1. A second cooperative cooking mode using the second heating means, and the like.
In both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode,
(1) In the shared operation unit, the selection of the cooperative cooking mode and the decision to start the cooking step 1 are made.
(2) The end of the cooking step 2 is performed by the individual operation unit when the cooking step 2 is executed by the first heating means, and the cooking step 2 is executed by the second heating means. If so, use the shared operation unit.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooking cooker according to the fifth disclosure regarding the second purpose is
With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber,
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
An upper cooling fan whose operation is started when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven, and
A lower cooling fan whose operation is started when the second heating means is driven, and
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan, respectively.
Anomaly detection unit and
An input operation unit that gives a command signal to the control unit is provided.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 by the first heating means and a cooking step 2 by the second heating means.
When the abnormality detecting unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking step 1, the control unit may detect an abnormality.
(1) The heating operation of the cooking step 1 is stopped, and the cooking step 1 is stopped.
(2) Stop the operation of the cooperative cooking mode and
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan continues until the stop condition A is satisfied.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooking cooker according to the sixth disclosure regarding the second purpose is
With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber,
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
An upper cooling fan whose operation is started when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven, and
A lower cooling fan whose operation is started when the second heating means is driven, and
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan, respectively.
Anomaly detection unit and
An input operation unit that gives a command signal to the control unit is provided.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 by the first heating means and a cooking step 2 by the second heating means.
When the abnormality detecting unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking step 2, the control unit may detect an abnormality.
(1) The heating operation of the cooking step 2 is stopped, and the cooking step 2 is stopped.
(2) Stop the operation of the cooperative cooking mode and
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan is continued until at least the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped.
(4) The operation of the lower cooling fan continues until the stop condition B is satisfied.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooking utensil according to the seventh disclosure regarding the second purpose is
With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber,
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
An upper cooling fan whose operation is started when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven, and
A lower cooling fan whose operation is started when the second heating means is driven, and
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan, respectively.
Anomaly detection unit and
An input operation unit that gives a command signal to the control unit is provided.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 by the second heating means and a cooking step 2 by the first heating means.
When the abnormality detecting unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking step 1, the control unit may detect an abnormality.
(1) The heating operation of the cooking step 1 is stopped, and the cooking step 1 is stopped.
(2) Stop the operation of the cooperative cooking mode and
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan is continued until at least the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped.
(4) The operation of the lower cooling fan continues until the stop condition B is satisfied.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooking utensil according to the eighth disclosure regarding the second purpose is
With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber,
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
An upper cooling fan whose operation is started when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven, and
A lower cooling fan whose operation is started when the second heating means is driven, and
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan, respectively.
Anomaly detection unit and
An input operation unit that gives a command signal to the control unit is provided.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 by the second heating means and a cooking step 2 by the first heating means.
When the abnormality detecting unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking step 2, the control unit may detect an abnormality.
(1) The heating operation of the cooking step 2 is stopped, and the cooking step 2 is stopped.
(2) Stop the operation of the cooperative cooking mode and
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan continues until the stop condition A is satisfied.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooking utensil according to the ninth disclosure regarding the first purpose is
With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on the upper surface of the main body,
A second heating means HM2 for cooking in the heating chamber, and
A notification unit that provides information and
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating hand, and the notification unit.
It is provided with an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit.
The input operation unit has an individual operation unit dedicated to the first heating means, and a shared operation unit for the second heating means and the first heating means.
The control unit has an operation program of a coordinated preheating cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode includes a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated by the second heating means, a cooking step 1 of cooking by the second heating means following the preheating step, and the cooking step 1. After the cooking step 1, the cooked object used in the cooking step 1 is moved onto the heating unit of the first heating means to further heat the cooked object.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode is
(1) In the shared operation unit, the selection of the cooperative preheating cooking mode and the decision to start the preheating step and the cooking step 1 are made.
(2) The end of the preheating step and the start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed by the shared operation unit.
(3) The start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed by the shared operation unit 40M.
(4) The start and end of the cooking step 2 are performed by the individual operation unit.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

According to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of widely supporting various kinds of cooking by linking a plurality of heating means.

It is a conceptual diagram which showed the communication system between one house and the outside which showed Embodiment 1. FIG. FIG. 1 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the kitchen of one house shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view 2 showing the configuration of the kitchen of one house shown in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the home electric appliance and the home gateway of one house shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the whole of the kitchen furniture in which the built-in type composite cooking apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 1 is installed. It is a perspective view which shows the state of the kitchen furniture before incorporating the cooking apparatus shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the intermediate stage of the work of incorporating the cooking apparatus shown in FIG. 5 into the kitchen furniture. FIG. 5 is a schematic vertical sectional view showing a dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture and the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged part of the front part of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. It is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 8 when viewed from diagonally forward. It is a top view of the cooking apparatus shown in FIG. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut along the line ZZ of FIG. FIG. 5 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air obtained by cutting the cooking device of FIG. 5 along the line ZZ of FIG. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut along the WW line of FIG. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut along the YY line of FIG. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut along the VV line of FIG. It is a vertical sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut by the X-ray line of FIG. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a main part on the right side when the cooking device of FIG. 5 is installed in kitchen furniture. It is a simplified plan view for demonstrating the input operation part of the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 5 is a plan view of a front portion for explaining the arrangement of an input operation unit and various display units in the cooking device of FIG. 5. It is an enlarged plan view which shows the central operation part and the integrated display part of the cooking apparatus of FIG. It is an enlarged plan view of the right operation part and the right side display part of the heating cooker of FIG. It is an enlarged plan view of the left operation part and the left side display part of the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 5 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the cooking device of FIG. It is a schematic diagram which simplified the main structure shown in FIG. 24. It is a vertical sectional view in the case of cutting along the SS line of FIG. 24. The schematic diagram shown in FIG. 25 is enlarged and is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle. It is a simplified perspective view explaining the positional relationship between the cooling air from the outlet of the 1st cooling fan, and the inverter circuit board. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a main control-related portion of the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a main control-related portion of the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a main control-related portion of the cooking device of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main cooling air passage of the cooking apparatus of FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the detail of the inverter circuit of the heating cooker of FIG. It is a list which shows the correspondence relationship between the main (range grill) control menu and the display area in the integrated display part of the cooker of FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the cooking device of FIG. 5 and the central operation unit. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the cooking device of FIG. 5 and the central operation unit. It is a list of explanations of the cooking menu of the combined cooking mode of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 and the single cooking mode of induction heating. It is the flowchart 1 for demonstrating the control operation of the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 2 is a flowchart 2 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. It is the flowchart 3 for demonstrating the control operation of the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart 4 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. 5 in chronological order. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. 5 in chronological order. It is a list which shows the correspondence relationship between the cooling fan of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 and the type of cooking. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the cooking device of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the relationship between a cooling fan and a cooking process in the case of abnormality detection of a heating cooker of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the timing of operation start and end of the 1st to 4th cooling fans in the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 2 is a time chart 2 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the case of cooperative cooking with the heating cooker of FIG. FIG. 3 is a time chart 3 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when both the induction heating source and the oven heating source are simultaneously driven by the cooking device of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the control operation at the time of performing the fried food cooking (automatic) which is one kind of induction heating cooking in the heating cooker of FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the cooking cooker of FIG. FIG. 1 is an operation explanatory view of the left operation portion of the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 1 is an operation explanatory view 1 of the left operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking device of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 3 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 4 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during combined cooking of the cooking device of FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during cooperative cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows each input operation and process in the case of carrying out the cooperative cooking mode, the combined cooking mode and the single cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode, and the single cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode, and the single cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between an input key and a cooking process in the input operation unit from the selection of the cooperative cooking mode to the transition in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in chronological order. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operation and the display up to the transition between the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in chronological order. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various cooking processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various cooking processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various cooking processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. It is a flowchart 1 which shows the notification operation of the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. It is a flowchart 2 which shows the notification operation of the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the cooking process of the cooperative preheating cooking mode which is one kind of the cooperative cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the cooking process of the cooperative preheating cooking mode which is one kind of the cooperative cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the permission condition and the determination result before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the permission condition and the determination result before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 2 is a flowchart 2 showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart 3 showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart 5 showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the combined cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 1 is a plan view showing a control operation of an input operation unit and a display unit (integrated display unit / left side display unit) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 5 is a plan view and an explanatory view showing an operation of a central operation unit and a display operation of an integrated display unit when a cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the kind of the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. It is a list which shows the display content of the 1st specific screen in the integrated display part when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the linked cooking mode is selected. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the linked cooking mode is selected. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the linked cooking mode is selected. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the display content of the integrated display part at the time of cooking "hamburger steak" in a cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger steak” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger steak” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger steak” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 6 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram 8 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 9 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. 11 is an explanatory diagram 11 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger steak” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram 13 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking “karaage” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "karaage" is selected in the linked cooking mode. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "karaage" is selected in the linked cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "karaage" is selected in the linked cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "karaage" is selected in the linked cooking mode. It is a flowchart which shows the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing in chronological order the exchange of information between the refrigerator and the cooking device during cooking in the cooperative cooking mode. In the example shown in FIG. 110, FIG. 2 is a system explanatory diagram 2 showing the exchange of information between a refrigerator, a home gateway, and a cooking device. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "karaage" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode in the example shown in FIG. 110. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display operation of the integrated display part in the example shown in FIG. 110. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the cooking device in the example shown in FIG. 110. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the cooking cooker in the example shown in FIG. 110. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the cooking cooker in the example shown in FIG. 110. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway in the example shown in FIG. 110. It is a flowchart which showed the operation of the integrated control device which shows the example of the use of the inventory information of a refrigerator. FIG. 1 is an enlarged plan view 1 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking device in the example of FIG. 115. FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking device in the example of FIG. 115. FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view 3 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking device in the example of FIG. 115. It is a block diagram which showed the main control-related part of the built-in type composite cooking apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the input key and the cooking process in the input operation part from the selection of the cooperative cooking mode to the transition in the heating cooker of FIG. 122 in chronological order. FIG. 3 is a plan view of a front portion for explaining the arrangement of an input operation unit and various display units in the cooking device according to the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the input key and the cooking process in the input operation part from the selection of the cooperative cooking mode to the transition in the heating cooker of FIG. 124 in chronological order. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the input key and the cooking process in the input operation part from the selection of the cooperative cooking mode to the transition in the heating cooker which concerns on Embodiment 4 in chronological order.

(Definition)
The "home appliance" 400 means an electric device designed mainly for home use. Home appliances 400 include an induction cooker 1, a refrigerator 401, a television receiver 402, an air conditioner 403, an air purifier 404, a ventilation device 405, an electric rice cooker (including an electric jar rice cooker) 406, which will be described later. A microwave oven 408, a lighting appliance 409, and an air purifier 410 are included. In the following description, the "refrigerator" includes both a freezer with a built-in freezer (freezer) and a freezer having only a freezing function, unless otherwise specified.

The "device identification information" of the home electric appliance 400 is unique information for identifying the home electric appliance 400. Specifically, it is important information required for information communication, such as a MAC address, a manufacturer name of a home electric appliance 400, a model name (model name), a model number, and a serial number.

The "home gateway" 411 is an information processing device for relaying information between two or more home appliances 400 in one home and participating in a coordinated operation. Further, in addition to this, the operation of giving an operation command signal to one home electric appliance 400 or acquiring information (also referred to as "data") from one home electric appliance 400 is performed.

The home gateway 411 may have a power control function such as a peak cut function in order to manage the total power consumption of one household for all or a part of the home electric appliance 400. In this case, it may be called a "power control device", an "integrated management device", or the like.

The home gateway 411 has a function of acquiring information on the current status such as operation, stop, and standby state of the home electric appliance 400 from the home electric appliance 400 by a wired or wireless signal.
When using wireless communication, the home gateway 411 is connected to the target home electric appliance 400 by using the device identification information.

Even if the home gateway 411 may function as an "integrated management device" or a "power command device" for one home appliance (for example, an induction heating cooker 1) 400, another home appliance (for example). For example, for a lighting appliance 409), if the power consumption is not limited, it does not correspond to an "integrated management device" or a "power command device". For example, even if the home gateway 411 acquires the operation information of the lighting fixture 409, the total power consumption combined with the power consumption of the other household appliances 400 does not exceed the specified upper limit of the total power consumption. This is a case where there is no function of regulating the power consumption of the luminaire 409 itself. Therefore, the home gateway 411 does not fall under any of the integrated management device and the power command device when viewed from the lighting fixture 409.

Embodiment 1.
1 to 121 disclose the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the built-in type composite (induction) cooking device 1 is disclosed. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, it is simply referred to as a "cooker".
In each figure, the reference numeral RT indicates the right direction of the cooking device 1, and LE indicates the left direction. FT indicates the front and BK indicates the rear.

In the first embodiment, the "first heating means" HM1 is an object to be cooked on a top plate 15 such as an induction heating source 9 and a gas combustor (burner) (not shown) described later. Refers to a means for heating the object to be heated N containing the above. The object to be heated N is, for example, a metal pan or frying pan.

In the following description, the term "heated object N placed on the top plate" refers to the case where the heated object N such as a pot is directly placed on the upper surface of the top plate 15 described later and heated, and the gas combustor. It means that both are included when the object to be heated N is placed on a support member such as a trivet arranged above the top plate and heated, such as (burner).

In the first embodiment, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a heating source for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber 113, which will be described later.

In the first embodiment, a plurality of heating sources having different heating principles are provided. The heating source may be a microwave heating source 189, an oven heating source 188, or a gas combustor (burner) (not shown), which will be described later. A plurality of microwave heating sources 189 and a plurality of heating sources that exert a heating effect by other heating principles may be provided. Further, the second heating means may be a steam generator (boiler) that supplies high-temperature steam (overheated steam, etc.).

In the first embodiment, the "induction heating cooker" means a device having a heating unit that induces and heats the object N to be heated. When there are a plurality of heating parts, they are heated by using a method different from the induction heating method, for example, another method of a radiant electric heat source (sheath heater, carbon heater, ceramic heater, infrared heater, radiant heater, etc.). There may be a heating source.

In the first embodiment, the "composite type cooking device" is provided with a plurality of heating sources having different heating principles, such as the relationship between the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 composed of an electric heater or the like. Those that can be cooked in one heating chamber 113 by these two types of heating sources. The heating chamber 113 may be heated by both an oven heating source 188 composed of an electric heater or the like and a gas combustor (burner). Further, an induction heating source may be used as a heating source for heating the heating chamber 113.

In the first embodiment, the "heating means (referred to as" oven heating source "in the following description)" of the heating chamber 113 is a heating source for heating the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 from the outside, and the inside of the heating chamber 113. Any of the heating sources installed in the space may be used.
Further, regardless of the form in which a heat generating member that becomes high in temperature by an induction heating method is arranged and the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 is heated from the outside or the air inside the heating chamber 113 is heated by the heat generating member. good.

For example, in Japanese Patent Document No. 2017-74305, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-74305, there is a second heating body (a second heating body that heats a cooking dish arranged in a heating chamber (grill storage) on which an object to be cooked is placed from below. An induction heating coil) and a third heating element (induction heating coil) for heating an object to be cooked from the side have been proposed.

Further, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-85996, an electric insulator is provided below the heating chamber, and an induction heating coil (hereinafter referred to as "IH coil") is provided in the space below the electric insulator, and the IH heat is described. A configuration has been proposed in which a cooking plate placed on a coil is induced and heated. The cooking plate is made of an induction heating material. For example, iron, stainless steel, a carbon material having a carbon content of 90% or more, a ceramic material containing Si (silicon) or FeSi (ferrosilicon) as a conductive material, and the like are used.

Further, as a typical example in which a heat generating member that becomes high temperature by an induction heating method is arranged, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-071695 supplies a high frequency current to an IH coil to generate a high frequency magnetic flux in the IH coil. A high-frequency magnetic flux is linked with a heater arranged in the heater to allow an induced current to flow in the heater, and the Joule heat generated by the electric resistance of the heater itself is used to heat and cook the object to be cooked in the heater. Is disclosed.

Further, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-247048, an electrically closed circuit heater is arranged inside the heating chamber, and a high frequency magnetic flux generated from an IH coil arranged outside the heating chamber is chained to this heater. It has been proposed to mix and heat the heater to a high temperature to dissipate heat in the heating chamber. The heater referred to here electrically forms a closed circuit, and a round bar or round pipe made of stainless steel or high nickel alloy is bent into a predetermined shape, and both ends are joined to each other by welding or brazing. It was formed in an endless shape.

As a typical example of the "IH coil" referred to in the first embodiment, about 30 thin copper wires or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm are bundled, and a plurality of these bundles are twisted into a spiral shape. (For example, Japanese patent document, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-79580). Alternatively, there is also a structure in which about 1000 to 1500 pieces of about 0.05 mm are wound.

Further, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-32551, which is another patent document, proposes an induction heating cooker in which an annular conductor formed in a ring shape with a flat plate-shaped conductive material is used as an IH coil.
Any of these forms corresponds to the "IH coil" which is the main part of the induction heating source 9.

In the first embodiment, "cooperative cooking" means two or more cooking objects (including foods, meats, vegetables, etc.) having different heating locations and capable of independently setting heating operation conditions. Cooking that uses a heating source.

The above-mentioned "cooperative cooking" corresponds to the case where a plurality of heating sources are used with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing one cooking, after microwave heating is finished and preheating is performed, the object to be cooked is moved to another place, and at the place after the movement, the cooking is completed by heating with the IH coil 17L described later. The case is a kind of "cooperative cooking" here.

Further, the food to be cooked is heated by a gas combustor (burner) inside the heating chamber 113, and then the food to be cooked is moved onto the top plate 15 to be moved to the gas combustor (burner) and the induction heating source 9. A form of "cooperative cooking" is also a form of heating with a burner to increase the degree of perfection of cooking.

Cooperative cooking is proposed in the form of a built-in cooking cooker in Japanese Patent No. 5833699 and Japanese Patent No. 5500944.

(Overall configuration and operation management system for home appliances)
First, the operation management system of the home electric appliance 400 will be described.
In FIG. 1, HA shows one house.
Although not actually shown, the inside of the house HA is divided into a plurality of living spaces by walls and doors, and the kitchen KT (see FIG. 2), which is one of the living spaces, has a refrigerator 401 and an induction heater. Home appliances 400 such as a heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, and an electric rice cooker 406, and kitchen furniture 2 are arranged. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the living space also includes a "living room", a "bathroom", and a room with a toilet. There may be other rooms in the living space.

All living spaces are supplied with, for example, 200 V of electric power from the commercial power supply EP of the electric power company outside the house. The electric power is drawn into the house HA via the electricity meter 414.

Reference numeral 415 is a power supply line (main trunk line) connected to a commercial power supply EP having a voltage of 200 V via a breaker BK. The power line 415 includes a television receiver (TV receiver) 402 capable of receiving various broadcasts, an air conditioner 403, a lighting fixture 409, an induction heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, an electric rice cooker 406, and a home gateway. The 411, the wireless router 419, and the environment detection unit 413 are connected to each other.

The home gateway 410, the environment detection unit 413, the TV receiver 402, the air conditioner 403, the cooker 1, the refrigerator 401, and the lighting fixture 409 are always connected to the power line 415 via a predetermined power cord. The number of lighting fixtures 409 is not limited to one, but the other lighting fixtures are not shown.

Subsequently, FIG. 1 will be described.
416 is a wide area communication network (sometimes referred to as "communication network" or "Internet").
The wide area communication network 416 is connected to the home gateway 411 via a wireless router 419.

The 417 is an external server that transmits useful information to the home gateway 411 and the information communication terminal device 418. For example, a server installed by an external organization such as an earthquake information providing organization or an electric power company in a specific area may be used, or a server prepared by a manufacturer of the cooking cooker 1 may be used. This external server may be a distributed processing type server called a so-called "cloud server". It is known that there are three types of "cloud computing" that use a cloud server: "IAaS", "PaaS", and "SAaS".

The home gateway 411 can receive various content distribution services from the external server 417. This content also includes recipe information (text, images) for various cooking.

Although not shown, the environment sensor of the above-mentioned environment detection unit 413 may be additionally provided with a temperature sensor or a humidity sensor that detects the temperature and humidity outside the house.

Further, the external server 417 functions as an information providing means for the home electric appliance 400. That is, the external server 417 may be installed by an organization such as a manufacturer (manufacturer), a distributor, a repair company, or an information service provider of the home electric appliance 400 alone or jointly by two or more organizations. , Various services related to the home electric appliance 400 are provided to the user via the wide area communication circuit network 416.

Further, the external server 417 may be generally called a "Web server" (hereinafter referred to as "Web server"). A web server conforms to HTTP (a protocol used for exchanging data such as HTTP documents and images between a web server and a web browser), such as various information communication terminal devices 418, home gateway 410, and the like. It refers to a service program that provides display information of HTTP and objects (images, etc.) to the web browser of the information processing device (client) side software of the "information receiving side", and the server computer on which the service operates.

The external server 417 stores and stores control application software that enables remote control of the home gateway 411 from the house HA or a remote location thereof. The remote control described above is realized by accessing the external server 417 and downloading (reading) the control application software from the information communication terminal device 418 described in detail later, for example, a device called a smartphone. Can be done.

The information communication terminal device 418 can be easily carried by a user to make a call or communicate data (including e-mail information) indoors, outdoors, or on the go. It is a device that can download information from an outdoor information providing site, send / receive mail, and send a remote control signal via the wide area communication circuit network 416, but it may be a device that cannot make a call, and such a portable device. Communication devices are collectively called information communication terminal devices 418. A small portable personal computer is also a kind of information communication terminal device 418.

The information communication terminal device 418 according to the first embodiment has a function of transmitting and receiving signals by short-range communication in a state of being close to (or may be in contact with) several centimeters from the input / output unit of each home electric appliance 400. I have. This short-range communication is an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the home electric appliance 400 side including the induction heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401.
On the other hand, control data (also referred to as a "control command") can be sent from the information communication terminal device 418 side to the NFC storage unit of the home appliance 400, and the home appliance 400 can be controlled according to the control command.

In the first embodiment, direct remote control from the information communication terminal device 418 to the home appliance 400 side is disabled. Since some home appliances 400 generate high heat such as a cooking device 1, remote control from outside the house 413 via the Internet, which is used by many people, is not adopted. Instead, as an integrated information processing device, all home electric appliances 400 can be operated via the home gateway 411.

As is clear from the above description, the home gateway 411 of the first embodiment refers to an information processing device for relaying information between two or more home electric appliances 400 and causing them to operate in cooperation with each other. Further, in addition to this, an operation of giving a command signal to one home electric appliance 400 or acquiring information (also referred to as data) from one home electric appliance 400 is performed.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, a range hood 422, which will be described later, and a ceiling-embedded air purifier 404 are installed in the kitchen KT in the house HA.

Reference numeral 413A is a sensor unit of the environment detection unit 413 of the home gateway 411. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the sensor unit 413A includes an environmental sensor 453 (see FIG. 4) and a motion sensor 452 (see FIG. 4) that detects the presence of a person (infrared rays or ultrasonic waves). And have. The environment detection unit 413 will be described in detail later.

The "environmental information" refers to three types of information: temperature information of the atmosphere of the space (kitchen KT) in which the cooking device 1 and the refrigerator 401 are used, dust scattering amount information, and light amount information. The dust scattering amount information is the result of measuring the amount of dust (including pollen) existing in the air.

"Use of environmental information" includes the following examples.
(1) When the temperature is high, the heat retaining function of the electric rice cooker 406 is continuously operated at the end of the rice cooking process. In addition, the refrigerating target temperature and the freezing target temperature of the refrigerator 401 are raised above the standard values.
(2) When the humidity is high, the air conditioner 403 is operated in the "dehumidification mode" or the "cooling mode". Alternatively, the operation of the ventilation device 405 is started. Alternatively, if the air conditioner 403 is in operation, its operating conditions (target room temperature, etc.) are changed.
(3) When fine dust floating in the air is scattered, the air purifier 404 is operated. Alternatively, the operation of the ventilation device 405 is started.
(4) When the amount of pollen scattered is large, the operation of the air purifier 404 is started.
(5) When the amount of light (the amount of visible light) is small, the lighting fixture 409 is turned on.

"Resident" means a person who resides in one house HA shown in FIG. Residents include parents and children, siblings, sisters, etc. who are related to each other. When using the home electric appliance 400, it is called a "user" regardless of whether or not it is a resident.

"Home" means one house HA managed by a specific manager, and may include an apartment house having a plurality of rooms and a plurality of families. That is, even in such an apartment house, the upper limit of commercial power is centrally managed by one power cutoff device (one breaker BK, a plurality of power breakers, etc.) as in the case of one house HA. If so, it is considered to be the home here.

"Power limit information on the home appliance side" means information on some signal related to power consumption received by the home appliance 400 from the home gateway 411. This "power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information related to a transmission command such as a power reduction request signal AS1 and a power reduction command signal AS2, which will be described later. The information includes information indicating the reception time (year / month and time in seconds) of the signal and the meaning of the signal. For example, it is information such as "Transmission time: July 29, 2020, 17:00, the instantaneous maximum power consumption is reduced by 2%" for the power reduction command signal AS2 at a certain point in time for the cooking device 1.

For example, in the heating cooker 1, the power limit information on the home appliance side is stored in time series in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC described later, and disappears even if the main power switch 98 is turned on or off. do not have. It is considered that turning the main power switch 98 on and off is considered as one cooking, and the memory is retained for at least several times. The amount exceeding that is automatically deleted in sequence.

Next, FIG. 2 will be described.
FIG. 2 shows a configuration example of hardware to which the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment and the operation management system of home electric appliances are applied. As one living space, the kitchen KT will be described below as an example.

The kitchen KT to which the first embodiment is applied is provided with an air purifier 404 installed on a ceiling surface (horizontal wall surface) 420, a plurality of freezer chambers 401A having different freezing temperatures, and a refrigerating chamber 401B. Refrigerator 401, microwave oven 408, built-in (induction) cooker 1 placed in kitchen furniture 2, range hood (a type of ventilation device 405) 422 placed directly above the cooker 1, home -Gateways 411 are installed respectively. The electric rice cooker 406, the air conditioner 403, and the lighting fixture 409 described with reference to FIG. 1 are not shown.

The plurality of freezing chambers 401A in the refrigerator 401 have, for example, -18 ° C ± 2 ° C, -10 ° C, -2 ° C, etc., which are suitable freezing temperatures for frozen foods (including processed foods) and fresh foods (meat, fish, etc.). The freezing room (temperature range) can be selected.

In addition, the freezing temperature and the freezing temperature range also affect the aging of fresh foodstuffs (for example, beef) when they are stored for a long period of time. It can be changed.

The range hood 422 has an exhaust port 423 penetrating the ceiling surface 420, and one end of a duct 424 communicating with the outside is connected to the exhaust port 423.
Reference numeral 425 is a hood in which the entire lower surface is opened as a suction port 425A, and an electric fan 426 for exhaust is installed inside the hood. The range hood 422 is fixed to the ceiling surface 420, but the detailed configuration will be omitted.

The operating status of the range hood 422 is transmitted to the central control unit 447 (described in detail later) of the home gateway 411 at any time. Therefore, in order to transmit various operation information such as the start and stop of the exhaust operation and the intensity of the operation (large or small of the exhaust capacity) with the home gateway 411 inside the range hood 422, the transmission unit ( It is provided with a receiving unit (not shown) and a receiving unit (not shown). For example, the transmitting unit and the receiving unit are integrated by hardware and provided as a communication unit 427. The communication unit 427 exchanges information with the home gateway 411 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

When the electric fan 426 is rotationally driven, air is sucked from the suction port 425A of the range hood 422, odors and smoke during cooking are also sucked, and the air is exhausted to the outside of the house HA through the duct 424. The range hood 422 is a method of receiving an operation signal such as an infrared signal from the side of the cooking cooker 1 and starting the exhaust operation. This will be explained later.

In FIG. 2, the arrow FF1 indicates an air flow rising from the cooking device 1. FF2 indicates the exhaust flow from the duct 424. FF3 indicates an air flow moving laterally near the ceiling surface 420. FF4 shows the air flow blown out from the air purifier 404.

A heat sensing sensor (heat electromotive force element) may be arranged in the range hood 422 toward the cooking device 1. According to this configuration, the range hood 422 itself senses the start of operation of the cooking cooker 1, and itself controls the operation of the electric fan 426.

The ceiling-embedded air purifier 404 is installed so as to be embedded in the ceiling surface 420. Inside the box-shaped main body 428 of the air purifier 404, a blower fan 429 and a filter 430 are provided.

Reference numeral 431 is an air guide plate, which covers the entire lower part of the air purifier 404. Reference numeral 432 is a suction port formed at one end (the side closer to the range hood 422) by the air guide plate 431. Reference numeral 433 is an air outlet formed by the air guide plate 431 at the end opposite to the suction port 432.

The blower fan 429 sucks dirty air in the kitchen from the suction port 432, passes it through the filter 430, and discharges the purified air from the outlet 433 toward the lower part of the kitchen KT. In this way, dust and odors in the air are removed and the air in the room is purified.

Reference numeral 434 is an odor sensor of the air purifier 404, and is arranged so as to face the inlet portion of the suction port 432. This detects an odor from the air taken into the air purifier 404 during operation, and detects the degree of air pollution. If the position of the odor sensor 434 is in the air passage on the suction port 432 side and is in front of the filter 430, there is no big difference in the effect regardless of where it is placed.

The detection result of the odor sensor 434 is that the odor intensity is determined by the odor sensing unit (not shown) arranged inside the main body 428 of the air purifier 404, and the result is the home gateway 411. It is transmitted to the environment detection unit 413 at any time. Therefore, inside the air purifier 404, there is a transmission unit (not shown) that transmits various information such as the start and stop of the air cleaning operation and the determination result of the odor intensity with the home gateway 411. , A receiver (not shown). For example, the transmitting unit and the receiving unit are integrated by hardware and provided as a communication unit 435. The communication unit 435 exchanges information with the home gateway 411 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

The air purifier 421 can detect the odor when the air purifier 404 is in operation and the odor generated somewhere in the kitchen KT reaches the air purifier 404 from the place where the odor is generated. Is.

This air purifier 404 is generally configured to include one or a plurality (multiple layers) of filters 430 having fine air passages in order to capture dust, pollen, etc. in the air. Therefore, when the oil smoke generated by cooking with cooking oil (for example, “fried food”, “tempura”) is filtered by the cooking device 1, oil particles adhere to the surface of the filter 430, and the oil particles adhere to the surface of the filter 430. Combine to form an oil film.
Due to this oil film, the filtration performance of the filter 430 deteriorates. That is, the amount of air passing through the filter 430 is reduced, which leads to a situation in which the air purification capacity of the air purifier 404 is reduced. Therefore, an idea of avoiding the operation of the air purifier 404 as much as possible when the exhaust gas generated by cooking contains oil smoke generated by oil cooking has already been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-). No. 95126).

In FIG. 2, the refrigerator 401 is drawn so as to be installed near the right side of the kitchen furniture 2, but in an actual situation, it may be installed in a place different from that in FIG. Further, not only one refrigerator 401 but a plurality of refrigerators 401 may be used.

Reference numeral 412 is a main body case constituting the outer shell of the home gateway 411. The main body case 412 is fixed to the vertical wall surface 436 of the kitchen at a height so that the resident can confirm the input operation and the display.

The 445 is an alarm device fixed to a vertical wall surface 436 near the main body case 412, and will be described in detail later. 2D is a water supply port 2D installed in the kitchen furniture 2.

Next, FIG. 3 will be described. FIG. 3 is a schematic vertical sectional view showing the relationship between the cooking device 1 and the range hood 422.
In FIG. 3, 440 is a temperature monitoring device for the cooking device 1. In the first embodiment, this temperature monitoring device is one component of the range hood 422 on the hardware. However, it may be configured as one component of the home gateway 411 on the hardware.

The temperature monitoring device 440 includes a temperature detection unit 441 and a communication unit 442. The temperature detection unit 441 includes an infrared sensor (not shown), a thermal image camera (not shown), and a temperature determination circuit 443.

As shown in FIG. 2, the temperature monitoring device 440 is always energized regardless of the exhaust operation of the range hood 422 even if it is one component of the range hood 422 on the hardware. In other words, the temperature monitoring device 440 constantly executes the temperature monitoring operation even when the exhaust operation is not performed.

For example, the temperature detection unit 441 divides the entire region of the top plate 15, which will be described later, into at least 64 regions (8 vertical × 8 horizontal) (hereinafter referred to as “detection region”), and determines the temperature of each region. To detect.

The detection region includes an induction heating unit 17H of the cooking device 1 described later.
The temperature monitoring device 440 repeatedly measures the temperature in the detection region at predetermined time intervals not only during the operation of the range hood 421 but also during the period when the operation is stopped.

The temperature monitoring device 440 transmits the measured temperature monitoring information from the communication unit 442 to the home gateway 411. In addition to transmitting to the home gateway 411, a configuration may be adopted in which transmission is directly performed to the cooking cooker 1. Further, the temperature measurement interval for obtaining temperature monitoring information is not a fixed time (for example, every 5 seconds), but the time interval is shortened in a region where the temperature is high.

When the light receiving unit 444 of the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal from the infrared transmission unit 48 of the cooking cooker 1, the range hood 421 starts operation. The temperature monitoring device 440 starts acquiring temperature information of the top plate 15 of the cooking device 1 when the range hood 421 starts operation.

The temperature monitoring device 440 continues the temperature acquisition operation even after the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal (from the infrared transmission unit 48) indicating the end of operation of the cooking device 1. Then, acquisition of temperature information is continued at predetermined time intervals until the estimated temperature of the entire region of the top plate 15 becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined temperature (for example, 40 ° C.). When the temperature becomes lower than the predetermined temperature, the interval between temperature measurement operations becomes slower. When the temperature becomes low, the monitoring operation as described above may be temporarily terminated, but at least at the time when the operation of the cooking cooker 1 is started, the temperature monitoring operation is restarted.

The cooking device 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, which will be described in detail later. Reference numeral 113 is a heating chamber formed inside the cooking apparatus 1, and 114 is a door that rotatably covers the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

The heating cooker 1 places an object N to be heated such as a magnetic metal pot or a frying pan on a top plate 15 covering the upper surface thereof, and induces heating by an IH coil 17. 16S is a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the cooking device 1 into two upper and lower spaces.

The CK is an installation space above the bottom wall surface 16S, and accommodates the IH coil 17.

Next, FIG. 4 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the home gateway 411, the home electric appliance 400, and the temperature monitoring device 440. Of the home appliances 400, the cooker 1 and the microwave oven 408 receive electric energy control from the home gateway 411.
For this reason, the home gateway 411 also serves as a power command device for the cooker 1 and the microwave oven 408, but this point has been described earlier and will not be described in detail here. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the air conditioner 403 is also a home electric appliance 400 that receives electric energy control.

The electric energy control unit 448 constantly acquires information on the amount of electric power used from the target home appliances (for example, the heating cooker 1 and the microwave oven 408) so as not to exceed the preset total electric energy amount. It has a function of limiting the power consumption of the home electric appliance 400, and is already known as HEMS (household electric power management system).

When the power consumption control unit 448 acquires information indicating a power reduction request or a power reduction instruction from the outside via the communication unit 446, the power consumption control unit 448 becomes a target home electric appliance (for example, with the heating cooker 1) according to a predetermined priority. , Microwave oven 408, air conditioner 403) to reduce the power consumption.

In this case, the information (command signal) received by the cooking cooker 1 is the power reduction request signal AS1, the power reduction command signal AS2, or the like.

In FIG. 4, in the home gateway 411, there is an environment detection unit 413 having a built-in human detection unit 413H that receives the detection output of the human detection sensor 452. The integrated environment detection unit 413 also receives detection results from a pollen sensor (not shown), a sensor that detects the temperature and humidity of the kitchen, and the like in a predetermined format. Reference numeral 453 is an environmental sensor that measures the temperature, humidity, and the like of the kitchen KT.

The human detection sensor 452 detects the presence of a person in the kitchen KT, particularly in the front area of the cooker 1 and the front area of the door (not shown) of the refrigerator 401. The human detection sensor 452 is installed one or more inside the kitchen KT.

For example, when the distance between the front of the cooker 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401 is short, the person detection sensor is placed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT toward the space between the front of the cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401. 452 is installed.

Further, when the distance between the front of the cooking cooker 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401 is a little, one person detection sensor 452 faces the space near the front of the cooking cooker 1 and the ceiling surface of the kitchen KT. Install at 420 etc. Then, another human detection sensor 453 may be installed on the ceiling surface 420 or the like of the kitchen KT toward the space in front of the door of the refrigerator 401.

One person detection sensor 452 may be attached to the lower end of the hood 425 of the range hood 422 to detect that the user is in front of the cooking cooker 1.
As described above, the place where the human sensing sensors 452 and 453 are installed may be appropriately determined in consideration of the positional relationship between the refrigerator 401 and the cooking cooker 1 and the sensing ability of the human sensing sensor.

The human detection sensor 452 functions as one sensor of the environment detection unit 413, but is a home detection device for detecting the presence of a person inside the house HA, that is, in the kitchen KT or the like (not shown). It may function as one of the sensors. In that case, information such as an unlocking sensor that detects that the door of the entrance (entrance) of the house HA has been unlocked may also be used in the home detection device. This makes it possible to improve the accuracy in the determination process of being at home and being away from home.

The input unit 449 can operate various functions of the home gateway 411 by operating a touch input type key formed on the liquid crystal display screen. As one of the functions, it is possible to specify a home electric appliance 400 for setting an upper limit value of power consumption, and then set an upper limit value of power consumption, a usable time zone, and the like. For example, the user can input the maximum power consumption of the cooking device 1, for example, 4800W, 5400W.

The input unit 449 has a function of inputting by voice in addition to a function of operating and inputting a touch input type key formed on the liquid crystal display screen, and the voice emitted by the resident is input by a microphone unit (shown in the figure). You can enter various desired functions by issuing to (1).

The 445 is an alarm device that gives an alarm to a resident by means of sound or light. The central control unit 447 receives the measurement data from the environment detection unit 413 and the monitoring data from the temperature monitoring device 440, and transmits an alarm instruction signal to the alarm device 445. Since this alarm device 445 is not subject to control by the electric energy control unit 448, the electric power is not limited or cut off due to a change in the power consumption of the home electric appliance 400.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 further includes a communication unit (reception unit / transmission unit) 446, a central control unit 447, and a storage device 450.
The communication unit 446 is a communication unit capable of wireless communication or infrared communication individually with a home electric appliance 400 such as a cooking device 1 and a refrigerator 401.

In FIG. 4, the storage device 450 has relatively such information as the operation history information of the home gateway 411, the history information of the daily power control of the home electric appliance 400, and the daily "environmental information" acquired by the environment detection unit 413. It is a device that records a large amount of data. The storage device 450 is, for example, various semiconductor memories, HDDs, or the like.

The central control unit 447 contains a microcomputer that is the core of information processing, a ROM, and a RAM, and stores a computer program that regulates various operations.

In FIG. 4, 416 is a wide area communication network (Internet) that performs wireless communication via a communication unit (reception unit / transmission unit) 446 of the home gateway 411 and a wireless router 419.

In FIG. 4, only one communication unit 446 is described in the home gateway 411, but the communication unit (reception unit / transmission unit) for the home electric appliance 400 and the communication unit for the wireless router 419 are individually described. It may be provided in. Further, an NFC communication unit may be separately provided so that information can be directly exchanged with the NFC (Near Field Communication) provided in the information communication terminal 418 by wireless communication.

Reference numeral 451 is a schedule management unit. This schedule management unit has a calendar function and can store event schedule information for at least January (up to 31 days).

The schedule management function itself has already been proposed in many patent documents. In the first embodiment, the scheduled date and the scheduled start time (or time zone) of the event (for example, shopping, going out, etc.) for each resident can be registered by the input unit 449.

When the event information is stored in the schedule management unit 451 and the stored date and time arrives, the schedule management unit 451 issues a notification. The form of the notification is to display on the liquid crystal display screen of the input unit 449 or to notify by a voice synthesizer (not shown). Further, a method of issuing a notification to the information / communication terminal device 418 possessed by the resident may be used.

When the home electric appliance 400 such as the heating cooker 1 is activated, a notification may be given based on the event information registered from the schedule management unit 451.

(Overview of cooking cooker)
Next, in FIGS. 5 to 121, the cooking apparatus 1 of the first embodiment will be described.
In FIG. 5, the cooking cooker 1 is a built-in type cooking cooker incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2. 2A is an installation port formed in the kitchen furniture 2. As will be described later, the heating cooker 1 is supplied with AC power having a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz from a commercial power source 99.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 19, the cooking cooker 1 has two heating units 17L and 17R on the left and right.
In FIG. 19, CL1 indicates a center line passing through the left and right center points of the upper unit 100 in the front-rear direction, and AL indicates a range in which the top plate 15 is exposed on the upper surface of the upper unit 100.

In FIG. 19, 17HR is a right heating portion (corresponding to the “first heating portion”) provided in the range on the right side from the center line CL1 and can be induced and heated directly above this.
17HL is a left heating portion (corresponding to the “second heating portion”) provided in the range on the left side from the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this. As described above, the cooking device 1 is a cooking device in which two "heating ports" (heating portions) are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 15.

In addition, another induction heating unit is provided between the right heating unit (first heating unit) 17HR and the left heating unit (second heating unit) 17HL so as to straddle the left and right center lines CL1, and three ports (induction) are provided. ) It may be used as a cooking device. Alternatively, any one of the IH coils 17L and 17R (details will be described later) constituting the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL may be replaced with a radiant electric heat source such as a radiant heater or an infrared heater.
In the following description, 17H is used as a reference code when referring to the "induction heating unit".

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 19, circular position marks 17LS and 17RS are provided to indicate a desirable position on which the object to be heated (see FIG. 3) such as a metal pot or plate (baked plate) is placed. , Is provided on the upper surface of the top plate 15. The position marks 17LS and 17RS are formed by printing on the upper surface of the top plate 15.

By looking at the position marks 17LS and 17RS, the user (user) of the cooking cooker 1 can recognize that there are two induction heating portions 17H on the left and right. The voice guide of the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later, also allows the user to recognize that there are two induction heating portions on the left and right.

Immediately below the position marks 17LS and 17RS, IH coils (induction heating coils) 17L and 17R, which will be described later, are installed. The position marks 17LS and 17RS do not have to be circular, and for example, only the center point of a desirable position on which the object to be heated N is placed may be indicated by a figure, a symbol such as "+", or a character. ..

Since the position marks 17LS and 17RS are circular marks indicating reference positions that can be induced and heated by the IH coils 17L and 17R, they are drawn with a diameter slightly larger than the maximum outer diameter of the IH coils 17L and 17R. ..

In the first embodiment, when the IH coils 17L and 17R are collectively referred to as an IH coil, the reference numeral 17 is used. Therefore, when it is called "IH coil" 17, it may be either the IH coil 17L on the left side or the IH coil 17R on the right side.

In the first embodiment, the "induction heating source" 9 refers to a configuration including the IH coil 17 and inverter circuits 81R and 81L described later, unless otherwise specified.

(Basics of heating source and control menu)
The cooking device 1 of the first embodiment includes three types of heating means having different heating principles. That is, the first heating means HM1 is an induction heating source 9 (first heating source), and the second heating means HM2 is a microwave heating source 189 (second heating source) and an oven heating source 188 (second heating source). 3 heating source) is included.

The above-mentioned three heating sources can be used as follows.
(1) Since the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 can be energized independently of each other, each heating source can be used for cooking independently. The operation pattern of this form is the "single cooking mode" KM1, which will be described later.

(2) The induction heating source 9 and at least one of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used in combination, and one cooking can be performed using two or more different places. .. The operation pattern of this form is the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later.

(3) One cooking can be performed by using both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 in combination. This operation pattern is the "composite cooking mode" KM2. The "operation pattern" here means that the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are operated in a series, at the same time, or with a time lag. Including any of.

(4) The induction heating source 9 has a dedicated input operation unit. Specifically, it is a right operation unit (first individual operation unit) 40R and a left operation unit (second individual operation unit) 40L. By operating the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L, the induction heating operation can be started, the heating conditions (thermal power, etc.) can be set, and the induction heating operation can be stopped.
(5) Both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 do not have a dedicated input operation unit. The central operation unit 40M is shared. Therefore, the central operation unit 40M may be referred to as a "shared operation unit".

(6) There is no superiority or inferiority between the single cooking mode KM1 using any one of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2. .. The rule is that cooking of the heating source that started to be used first is prioritized. Therefore, for example, even if an attempt is made to select a linked cooking mode using the right heating unit 17HR of the induction heating source 9, if the right heating unit 17HR has already performed an independent heating operation for another cooking. Since the right heating unit 17HR cannot be used in the cooperative cooking mode, the heating source is partially restricted in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

(7) Regarding the input operation, there is a superiority or inferiority relationship between the single heating cooking using any one of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189, and the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. There is no. Therefore, for example, if an attempt is made to set the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the input is left halfway without shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (for example, nothing is input for 30 seconds), it is automatically performed. The input up to is canceled. Further, if, for example, an input for the independent cooking mode KM1 is performed from the right operation unit 40R of the induction heating source 9 in the middle of the left state, the cooking can proceed to the induction heating.

(8) The linked cooking mode KM3 includes a "first linked cooking mode" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the first cooking step (cooking step 1) and oven heating in the first cooking step (cooking step 1). It has a "second cooperative cooking mode" in which at least one of the source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 is used. This will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

(9) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 has a "cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the preheating step. The case where the preheating step is executed in the heating chamber 113 using the second heating means HM2 is also one form of the “cooperative preheating cooking mode”, but in the first embodiment, this form will be described in detail. do not have.

(Kitchen furniture 2)
As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the cooking cooker 1 is supported by being placed on the upper surface 2P of the mouth edge portion of the installation port 2A. As shown in FIG. 6, in the first embodiment, the kitchen furniture 2 is provided with a water tank 2 CP capable of temporarily storing water discharged from the water supply port 2D of the water supply. Reference numeral 2B is a front opening formed at a predetermined position of the kitchen furniture 2. The front opening 2B is for exposing the front constituent portions (door 114 and front cover 112, which will be described later) to the front when the cooking cooker 1 is incorporated.

If the size of the front opening 2B and the installation port 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 is standard, it is mostly pre-formed with standard dimensions because standardization is being promoted by the industry. be. This will be explained in detail later.

The usual method of incorporating the cooker 1 into the kitchen furniture 2 is as shown in FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of the work of incorporating into the kitchen furniture 2.
As shown in FIG. 7, the cooker 1 is placed in the installation port 2A while the front side (front side) of the cooker 1 is tilted downward, and then the rear side of the cooker 1 is placed. Is lowered as shown by the solid arrow BD, the cooking cooker 1 is placed on the peripheral edge of the installation port 2A of the kitchen furniture 2.

After that, the screws are tightened to move (rotate) the fixing bracket (not shown) installed on the rear peripheral edge of the lower unit 100, which will be described later, and the fixing bracket is strongly pressed against the kitchen furniture 2. And the installation is completed. Since such an installation method has already been widely adopted, the detailed structure will not be described.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main body 110 of the cooking cooker 1 is combined and integrated in a state where the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 are stacked one above the other, and such an integrated form is used. Is shipped from the manufacturer. Therefore, in the assembling work of FIG. 7, only the upper unit 100 is (directly) fixed to the kitchen furniture 2 with the screw. If the fixing bracket (not shown) is removed, the entire cooking cooker 1 can be taken out from the kitchen furniture 2. As a result, inspections and repairs can be performed outside the kitchen furniture 2 thereafter. In addition, when it is called a "main body" within the range of only the upper unit 100, it is distinguished by adding a reference numeral 10.

In the first embodiment, the "main body case" HC is a general term for the upper case 16 constituting the outer shell of the upper unit 100 and the lower case 101 constituting the outer shell of the lower unit 200. The upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be configured as an integrated case (housing).

As shown in FIG. 6, the installation port 2A formed in the kitchen furniture 2 has a rectangular planar shape. However, the four corners are arcuate.
The width dimension W1 of the installation port 2A is 560 mm to 564 mm. Further, the dimension D1 in the front-rear direction is formed to be 460 mm to 464 mm.

In FIGS. 5 and 6, 3 and 4 are surface materials constituting the surface of the kitchen furniture 2. 5 and 6 are surface materials adjacent to both the left and right sides of the kitchen furniture 2 when the cooking cooker 1 is incorporated.
When the cooker 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2, the front surfaces of the surface materials 3 to 6 are substantially flush with the front surface of the cooker 1. In other words, when the cooking device 1 is incorporated, the surface materials 3 to 6 and the cooking device 1 can give the user a design feeling as if they are a unified flat surface.

In FIG. 7, FIG. 8 is a wall that divides the inside of the kitchen furniture 2 into a plurality of rooms at the top and bottom, and the lower part of the wall is often used as a storage for kitchen utensils, food, and the like. Note that the wall 8 is not shown in FIG. Further, the wall 8 may be installed inside the kitchen furniture 2 so as to be removable.

According to the configuration described above, when the cooking cooker 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2, the entire front surface of the kitchen furniture 2 exhibits a substantially one flat surface. When the user looks at the kitchen furniture 2, the front surface (front surface) is designed so that it can be recognized as a clean and unified design.

The kitchen furniture 2 and the cooker 1 do not have to be designed by the same manufacturer. The kitchen furniture is manufactured and sold by the kitchen furniture and the housing equipment manufacturer, while the cooker 1 is manufactured by the home appliance manufacturer. In many cases, they are sold.

In FIGS. 5 and 6, reference numeral 7 is a frame line printed on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5, and does not form physical unevenness on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5. It should be noted that a thin decorative plate made of a glossy metal, a tape, or the like may be attached to indicate the presence of the frame line 7 to give a high-class feeling. On the contrary, the frame line 7 may be omitted.

The four types of surface materials 3 to 6 may be the same. Further, these surface materials 3 to 6 do not have to move back and forth like doors and drawers. For example, it may be fixed on the surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and may not move at all.

If the color and surface morphology (pattern, glossiness, unevenness, etc.) of the front surface of the four types of surface materials 3 to 6 are unified, the unified design feeling of the kitchen furniture 2 is enhanced. For example, when the entire front surface of the surface material 4 is unified with a single color or wood grain design, the front surface of the surface material 3 may also be unified with the same single color or wood grain design.

Next, FIGS. 8 and 9 will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture 2 of FIG. 1 and the cooking utensil 1. FIG. 9 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged part of the front part of the kitchen furniture 2 shown in FIG.

In Japan, the standardization (common) of housing parts and materials is being promoted by the "Long-term Use Housing Material Standardization Promotion Council" (abbreviation: Nagazumikyo) in addition to the Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) for kitchen furniture 2 and the like.

According to the "Standards for long-term use materials" regarding the "IH cooking heater (built-in)" established by the "Nagazumikyo", the conditions that the countertop (kitchen furniture 2) to which the IH cooking heater is attached should be as follows. It is stipulated.
(1) The width dimension W1 of the installation port 2A is 560 mm to 564 mm. The dimension D1 in the front-rear direction shall be 460 mm to 464 mm.
(2) The height dimension C1 of the front lowering portion 2F shall be 40 mm or less.
(3) The depth (front-back direction) dimension D3 of the front lowering portion 2F shall be 45 mm or less.
(4) The ceiling depth (front-back direction) dimension D2 of the front lowering portion 2F shall be 58 mm to 70 mm.

Further, according to the above-mentioned "Standards for Long-term Use Members", the external dimensions of the built-in type IH cooking heater (induction heating cooker) are also specified as follows.
(1) The height dimension H2 from the lower end of the top plate to the lower end of the front panel shall be 215 mm to 223 mm.

The cooker 1 of the present disclosure is designed so as to satisfy the above-mentioned various constraint conditions.
In FIG. 8, A1 is a dimension in the front-rear direction of the top plate 15 described later, and is 510 mm. A2 is the maximum dimension in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the front cover 112 that covers the front surface of the main body 110 to the rearmost end of the main body 110, and is 498 mm. A3 is a dimension in the front-rear direction from the inclined portion 111 formed at the rear portion of the main body 110 to the front surface of the front cover 112, and is 451 mm.

The front cover 112 is formed by integral molding of plastic or metal. Further, the front cover 112 is formed in a symmetrical shape, and several protrusion-shaped mounting legs 112P are formed on the back surface side to be mounted (see FIG. 18). The mounting legs 112P are inserted into a plurality of vertically long fitting holes (not shown) formed in the front plate 102 of the lower case 101, and slightly slid downward so that the mounting legs 112P engage with the fitting holes. I try to do it. In this state, the front cover 112 is fixed to the lower case 101 by a fixing tool (not shown). By this fixing, the front cover 112 does not move upward, so that it is in a state of being attached to the lower case 101.

In FIG. 8, reference numeral 113 denotes a heating chamber formed entirely from a thin metal plate described later, which is formed inside the lower unit 200. A cooking utensil (heated object N) such as a frying pan, or an opening 113A (see FIG. 15) through which a cooked object or the like can be taken in and out is formed on the front surface of the heating chamber 113. The opening 113A is covered with a door 114 so as to be openable and closable.

The front surface of the door 114 and the front surface of the front cover 112 are designed to be flush with each other. The door 114 has two hinges 176 (see FIG. 12) and two arms 116 arranged on the left and right so that the front surface thereof is flush with the front surface of the front cover 112 except for the handle portion 115 (see FIG. 12). (Not shown), it is rotatably supported with respect to the main body 110. Therefore, the door 114 functions as a "front opening" door that opens forward with the hinge 176 at the lower end thereof as a fulcrum (center of rotation).

After the cooking device 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the front cover 112 is attached to the front surface of the cooking device 1 by a specialist such as a store or an installer. The door 114 is attached at the stage of shipping the cooker 1 at the factory so that a person other than a specialist, that is, a user of each household cannot remove the door 114 after the fact. This prevents the situation where microwaves leak from the inside of the heating chamber 113 due to the poor sealing degree of the door 114 after mounting.

In FIG. 8, H1 is the maximum height dimension of the cooking device 1. That is, the dimension from the upper surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom surface of the lower unit 200 is 227 mm.

In FIG. 8, H2 is a height dimension from the lower end of the top plate 15 to the lower end of the front cover 112, and is 215 mm to 223 mm. H3 is a dimension from the upper end to the lower end of the front cover 112 or the door 114, and is set to 171 mm. H4 is a dimension of the top plate 15 in the height direction, and is 11 mm. By making such a dimensional relationship, when the cooking cooker 1 is installed, a front gap 302 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later, is secured below each of the lower surface of the door 114 and the lower surface of the front cover 112. It is supposed to be done.

Next, FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. In FIG. 10, 2G is a step portion formed at both left and right corners of the front opening 2B. This stepped portion is a portion where the front cover 112 of the lower unit 200, which will be described later, faces each other in close proximity. W2 is the maximum width dimension of the installation space formed directly below the installation port 2A. The maximum width dimension W2 is about 560 mm.

Next, the configuration of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 11 to 24.
FIG. 11 is a plan view of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking utensil 1 when the cooker 1 is cut along the line ZZ of FIG. FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air obtained by cutting the cooking device 1 along the ZZ line of FIG. FIG. 14 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking cooker 1 cut along the WW line of FIG. FIG. 15 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking cooker 1 cut along the YY line of FIG. FIG. 16 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking utensil 1 when the cooking device 1 is cut along the VV line of FIG. FIG. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking utensil 1 when it is cut by X-rays of FIG. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of a main part on the right side when the cooking device 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2. FIG. 19 is a simplified plan view for explaining the input operation unit 40 of the cooking device 1. FIG. 20 is a plan view of a front portion for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit 40 and various display units in the cooking device 1. FIG. 21 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking device 1. FIG. 22 is an enlarged plan view of the right operation unit 40R and the right display unit 31R of the cooking device 1. FIG. 23 is an enlarged plan view of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L of the cooking device 1. FIG. 24 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit 100 of the cooking device 1.

(Characteristic overall configuration and function of the cooker)
Before going into the detailed description of the first embodiment, the whole picture of the cooking cooker 1 described in the first embodiment will be described below.

(1) A top plate 15 is arranged on the upper surface of the main body case HC, and the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 is induced by an induction heating source 9 which is one of the first heating means HM1. Can be heated.

(2) Inside the main body case HC, there is provided a heating chamber 113 in which the front opening is closed by the door 114 so as to be openable and closable.

(3) At least one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, which is one of the second heating means HM2, for heating the food to be cooked placed inside the heating chamber 113, or It has both.

(4) The main body case HC is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B, the upper space 300A is provided with an upper air passage AH, and the lower space 300B is provided with a lower air passage UH. There is.

(5) Upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are arranged in the upper air passage AH. The upper air passage AH is introduced with outside air by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 without passing through the lower space 300B.

(6) Lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are arranged in the lower air passage UH. The lower air passage UH is introduced with outside air by the lower cooling fans 60 and 61 without passing through the upper space 300A.

(7) The induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan are integratedly controlled by the integrated control device MC. The integrated control device MC centrally controls individual control units such as the IH control unit 90, the microwave heating control unit 130, and the heating chamber control unit 159.

(8) Power is supplied to the integrated control device MC via one main power supply operation unit (main power supply switch) 98 operated by the user.

(9) It has an input operation unit 40 that receives a user's command, and the input operation unit 40 has a function of giving a command to start and stop a cooking operation to the integrated control device MC.

(10) There are three types of cooking modes executed by the integrated control device MC: a single cooking mode KM1, a combined cooking mode KM2, and a cooperative cooking mode KM3.

(11) In the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, at least two of a plurality of driven heating sources and a driving order of the heating sources are defined.

(12) When any one of the three cooking modes is selected, a specific screen for notifying the user of the cooking mode and control conditions is displayed before the heating operation (operation) is started. The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is the first specific screen 30SP, the combined cooking mode KM2 is the second specific screen, and the single cooking mode KM1 is the third specific screen 30ST.

(13) Since the induction heating source 9 has a dedicated operation unit (individual operation unit), the user can first select the "control menu" (for example, "boiler") based on the heating source.

(14) The third specific screen ST is displayed only when the induction heating source 9 is selected. This is because the single cooking mode KM1 can be selected only by the induction heating source 9 by the dedicated individual operation units 40L and 40R.

(15) Since the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 do not have a dedicated operation unit (individual operation unit) and use the shared operation unit 40M, the control menu can be selected first based on the heating source. Can not. That is, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 cannot first select the single cooking mode KM1.

(16) The microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 share a second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode KM2. Therefore, when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected in the shared operation unit 40M, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed, and the specific control menu (for example, "range manual", "warming" displayed in the second specific screen 30SC is displayed. As a result of selecting "), the single cooking mode KM1 can be finally selected. Due to such a configuration, the third specific screen 30ST is exceptionally not displayed.

(17) The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting an abnormality while the cooking cooker 1 is in operation. There are a plurality of types of abnormalities that can be detected, but the main one is overheating of the upper space 300A containing the induction heating source 9.

(18) During the cooking operation, if the main power supply is cut off by the main power supply operation unit (main power supply switch) 98, all the cooking processes in the cooking operation / cooking mode are stopped, but the upper cooling fan 60 that has been in operation is stopped. If there are 61 or lower cooling fans 128, 129, the operation will continue for a limited time or will continue depending on the temperature environment.

(19) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is a cooking method in which one object to be cooked is heated in at least two different places, an internal space of the heating chamber 113 and an upper space of the top plate 15. The induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188 may be operated with a time lag or may be operated at the same time zone.

(20) It may be operated with the time difference or in the same time zone, but it may be a preheating step of preheating the object N to be heated by the induction heating source 9, or the oven heating source 188. The control unit MC can execute the preheating step of preheating the heating chamber 113 (this is referred to as “cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4” in the cooperative cooking mode KM3).

(21) When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed, at least two cooking steps (cooking step 1 and cooking step 2) are performed, but the input operation unit 40 determines the start of the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2. can. Further, the started cooking step 1 or cooking step 2 can be ended in the middle stage by the input operation unit 40.

(22) When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input operation unit 40, it is possible to cancel (cancel) the selection of the cooperative cooking mode before the execution is started.

(23) When the linked cooking mode KM3 is executed, the order of the preheating step, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 is determined by the control program of the control unit MC before the execution of the linked cooking mode KM3 is started. To.

(24) The preheating step can be completed at any time by the input operation unit 40. The setting of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not canceled by the end.

(25) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be stopped in the middle of the process after the cooking step 1 is started. Reservation (occupation) for the heating source (in the case of an induction heating source, the heating unit) used in the cooking step 1 at the stage when the cooking step 1 is completed (including the case where the user terminates the cooking step 1 at any time). The relationship can be broken automatically. Therefore, when the heating source used in the cooking step 1 is the first heating means HM1 (for example, the right heating unit 17HR of the induction heating source 9,), the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9). The right heating unit 17HR) can be used for another cooking.

(26) The upper air passage AH formed inside the upper space 300A by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 and the lower air passage UH formed in the lower space 300B by the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are Since each outside air intake port is located at a different position, outside air is individually introduced into the upper space 300A and the lower space 300B from the outside of the main body case HC, and then individually discharged to the outside. ..

(27) The lower cooling fan 128, 129 is operated according to the operation of the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189 to cool the cooling target portion of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. ..

(28) The integrated control device MC detects an abnormality in the range of the top plate 15 or the upper space 300A, etc. during the execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and performs the heating operation of the first heating means HM1. When automatically stopped, if the second heating means HM2 has started the cooking process in the lower space 300B, the heating operation of the second heating means HM2 is also stopped. Then, the setting of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled.

(29) There is a notification unit AN for notifying the operating status of the cooking device 1. The notification unit displays the standby initial screen 30D that displays information immediately after the main power is turned on by the main power operation unit (main power switch) 98, and information that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being executed. A display unit (integrated display unit 30) for displaying 1 specific screen 30SP is provided.

(30) In the case where the object to be heated N is moved between the (at least) two (left and right) heating portions set on the top plate 15 and heated twice or more to complete the cooking, the cooperative cooking ( Mode) is not. However, in the middle of cooking, the mode in which the object to be cooked is moved to the heating chamber 113 and cooking is continued (additional heating) is cooperative cooking.

(31) The input operation unit 40 that gives a command to the integrated control device MC by the user is
It may be either a form provided with an input key that can be touch-operated by the user from above the main body case HC, or a voice input form in which a part of the input is performed by voice.

(32) A specific input key capable of selecting each of the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is arranged in the input operation unit 40 for which the user directly touches and performs an input operation.

(33) The input key 43MS for determining the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43MS for determining the selection of the combined cooking mode KM2 use the same input key 43MS. However, the input keys (43L1, 43R1) for selecting the single cooking mode KM1 exist only in the individual operation units 40L and 40R of the induction heating source 9.

(34) The input key 43MS for determining the start of the cooking process by the second heating means in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43MS for determining the start of the cooking process in the combined cooking mode KM2 use the same input key. ..

(35) The input key 43MT for determining the end of the cooking process by the second heating means in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43MT for determining the end of the cooking process in the combined cooking mode KM2 use the same input key. ..

(36) When the input key 43MT for determining the end of the cooking process is operated once or twice in succession in the middle of the cooking process, the cooking mode being executed (cooperative cooking mode KM3, combined cooking) There is a function to cancel the entire operation (that is, the entire cooking process) of the mode KM2 (single cooking mode).
For example, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, when the cooking step 1 is "microwave heating" and the cooking step 2 is "induction heating", in the cooking step 1 (in the case of microwave heating), the heating stop is also an input key. Since the 43MT is also used, the input key 43MT is pressed for the heating stop, and the input key 43MT is pressed once more for the cancellation in order to distinguish between the heating stop and the cancellation of the entire cooking mode (all cooking processes).
On the other hand, when the cooking step 2 becomes "induction heating", the heating stop is the input key 43L1 (or 43R1), so that the heating stop and the cancellation of the entire cooking mode (all cooking steps) can be distinguished. Therefore, the heating stop is 43L1 (43R1), and the cooking mode cancellation is 43MT (it is not necessary to press 43MT twice, but there is no effect even if it is pressed).
When the cooking step 2 is "microwave heating", since the shared operation unit 40M is used, the heating is stopped by pressing the input key 43MT once, and the cooking mode is canceled (all canceled) by pressing the input key 43MT once again.

(Upper unit 100)
In the first embodiment, the upper unit 100 alone functions as the cooking cooker 1. Therefore, the commercial (alternating current) power supply 99 is supplied only to the upper unit 100. However, the power cord 106 (not shown) for directly connecting to the commercial power supply 99 via the plug 106A (not shown) is pulled out from the lower unit 200 to the outside of the cooking cooker 1.

The upper unit 100 includes a box-shaped upper case (upper housing) 16 constituting the outer shell of the main body 10 and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing plate (support frame) 22 fixed to the upper part of the upper case (FIG. 12) and a top plate 15 made of heat-resistant tempered glass or crystallized glass mounted on the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22 so as to cover substantially the entire surface except the rear portion. .. In other words, the main body 10 of the upper unit 100 includes an upper case 16 and a top plate 15 which are outer shells, respectively.

The upper case 16 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate such as a zinc steel plate. Alternatively, a plurality of thin metal plates are joined by spot welding or screws to form a box shape.
In the first embodiment, in the upper case 16, the peripheral portion of one thin metal plate is vertically bent as described later, and the bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, the rear wall 16B, the front vertical wall 16F, (left and right). The side vertical walls 16L and 16R are integrally formed. The bottom wall 16S also serves as a "partition wall" as will be described later.

The upper case 16 may be formed in another form. For example, one metal flat plate is pressed to form one "body portion" in which three surfaces of a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, and a front vertical wall 16F are formed. On the other hand, separately from this, two side vertical walls 16L and 16R are individually formed. Then, these two side vertical walls 16L and 16R are attached to the end portion of the above-mentioned "body portion" by screws, spot welding or the like, and finally, the entire upper surface is formed into a box shape with an opening.

The top plate 15 is formed in a flat plate shape having a substantially uniform thickness as a whole, and the entire lower surface thereof is covered with a painted surface through which visible light does not pass. Therefore, the functional component below the top plate 15, for example, the IH coil 17, cannot be visually recognized from above the top plate 15.

The IH coil 17R on the right side has a donut-shaped planar shape. The maximum thermal power of this IH coil 17R is 3200 W. The maximum external dimension (diameter) is 168 mm.

The left IH coil 17L also has a donut-shaped shape. The maximum thermal power of this IH coil 17L is 3200W. The maximum external dimension (diameter) is 168 mm. The diameter may be expanded to about 180 mm so that the object to be heated N such as a large pot or frying pan can be accommodated. FIG. 11 shows a case where the diameter of the IH coil 17L on the left side is made larger than that of the IH coil 17R on the right side.

In FIG. 12, 18 is a horizontally elongated opening at the rear of the upper case 16, and 19 is an exhaust cover installed above this opening, which is a shutter or a large number of through holes for ventilation. Is formed. Reference numeral 20 is an exhaust port formed between the exhaust cover 19 and the opening 18.

In FIGS. 12 and 14, reference numeral 22 denotes a metal reinforcing plate fixed to the rear upper end portion of the upper case 16, as described above. The reinforcing plate 22 has a length equivalent to the width of the trailing edge of the upper case 16.

Reference numeral 21 is a metal decorative frame fixed to the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22. This decorative frame projects to the rear of the upper case 16 and is formed longer than the width of the upper case 16. That is, when viewed from above, it seems that the rear side of the exhaust cover 19 and both the left and right sides are surrounded in a series (see FIG. 11).

In FIGS. 11, 12, and 14, 25 is a metal decorative frame. The decorative frame 25 is installed so as to protect the left and right end faces and the front end faces of the top plate 15 from an impact from the outside.

Reference numeral 26 denotes an annular cushion material made of a highly elastic material such as silicon rubber, which is attached to the entire lower surface of the decorative frames 21 and 25. As a result, the upper unit 100 is placed on the kitchen furniture 2 via the cushion material 26. It should be noted that the design may be such that the three parts (sides) of the left and right end faces and the front end face of the top plate 15 or the four parts (peripheral four sides) including the rear end face are surrounded by one decorative frame 25.

(Integrated display unit 30 and left and right display units 30L, 30R)
In FIGS. 11 and 19, reference numeral 30 is an integrated display unit. The integrated display unit 30 is installed at the front portion of the top plate 15 and below the left and right center portions.
31L is a left side display unit, and 31R is a right side display unit. The left and right display units 31L and 31R are also installed one on the left side of the front portion of the top plate 15 and one on the lower side of the right side.

Since the right side display unit 31R is a display unit corresponding to the right operation unit (first individual operation unit) 40R, it may be referred to as a "first individual display unit".
Similarly, since the left side display unit 31L is a display unit corresponding to the left operation unit (second individual operation unit) 40L, it may be referred to as a “second individual display unit”.

The integrated display unit 30 is a display means used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2, which will be described later. That is, it is used during microwave cooking and oven cooking.

The integrated display unit 30 has a first specific screen 30SP (see FIG. 60) used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a second specific screen 30SC (see FIG. 55) used in the combined cooking mode KM2, and a second. 3 Specific screens 30ST (see FIG. 54) are alternately displayed. In addition, the standby initial screen (see FIG. 52) is also displayed. The standby initial screen (see FIG. 52) and the first to third specific screens 30SP, 30SC, and 30ST are not displayed at the same time.

The integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are mainly composed of a liquid crystal display screen (not shown), and the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are oriented in the left-right direction. It is installed on a long horizontal operation board 41.

Corresponding to the positions directly above the integrated display unit 30, the left and right display units 31L, and 31R, the lower surface of the top plate 15 is not provided with a painted surface that blocks visible light as described above. Therefore, the display contents of the integrated display unit 30, the left and right display units 31L, and 31R can be visually recognized from above the top plate 15.

The integrated display unit 30 displays common information and alarms of the cooking device 1. For example, the selection result of the three types of heating sources of the cooking device 1 and the caution information and the warning information indicating the operating state of the heating sources are displayed. That is, the integrated display unit 30 is referred to as an integrated display unit 30 because it may display information related to the induction heating source 17, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189.

Further, the integrated display unit 30 also has a function of displaying the names of various cookings corresponding to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, which will be described later, and the control conditions thereof.

Further, the integrated display unit 30 also has a function of displaying "inventory information" of the refrigerator 401, which will be described later.

(Right side display 31R, left side display 31L)
The left side display unit 31L displays information regarding the operation of the left side IH coil 17L. For example, as will be described later, when timer cooking is set, it can be set in 1-minute units and the set time can be displayed. It also displays the elapsed time from the start of the heating operation and the "remaining time" until the timer set time ends. Furthermore, when preheating cooking is selected, the automatically set temperature (default temperature), the current temperature, and the like are displayed. The above "remaining time" is displayed as 9 minutes 59 seconds from the stage when it becomes less than 10 minutes, and the remaining time is displayed in 1 second units.

Similarly, the right side display unit 31R displays information regarding the operation of the right side IH coil 17R. The right side display unit 31R basically displays information on various control conditions such as the timer setting time of the right side IH coil 17R, the preheating temperature, and the elapsed time, similarly to the left side display unit 31L.

(Input operation unit 40)
In FIG. 19, 40 is an input operation unit. The input operation unit 40 is arranged laterally in a long strip shape along the front end edge portion of the top plate 15.
The input operation unit 40 is arranged on the upper surface of the operation board 41 which is horizontally long and is installed in a band shape.

Various electronic components are mounted on the operation board 41. The operation board 41 is made of a plastic material having excellent electrical insulation. On the rear side of the operation board 41 of the upper unit 100, there is a central operation board 32 supported by the holder 50. The integrated control device MC described later is mounted on the back surface side of the central operation board 32.

Below the operation board 41, flat plate-shaped auxiliary support plates (not shown) are installed so as to be vertically overlapped with each other so as to face the operation board 41 with a gap. That is, it has a structure of two upper and lower layers (two sheets) facing each other at intervals, so that as many electric components and circuits as possible can be mounted.

F2 is a second air passage through which cooling air from the second cooling fan 61 described later flows, and is formed by a space between the cover 70 described later and the front vertical wall 16F in front of the upper case 16. (See FIGS. 12 and 24).

In FIG. 12, 16B is the rear vertical wall of the upper case 16. The lower case 101 and the upper case 16, which will be described later, are integrated with screws 51 at a plurality of places.

As is clear from FIG. 12, the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the upper end portion of the lower case 101 face each other closely within a range of about 20 mm to 30 mm, and the facing portion is tightened by the screw 51. Is fixed. In addition to the screw 51, a screw 51F (not shown) for fixing the facing portions of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 is also provided, and the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are connected at a plurality of places. Has been done.

The 16BX is a horizontally bent portion formed by further bending the upper end portion of the rear vertical wall 16B to the rear BK. The positions of the horizontally bent portion 16BX and the flange 16A (see FIG. 14) described later are on the same horizontal line.

Due to the above configuration, when the kitchen furniture 2 supports both the heavy objects of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A and the horizontal bent portion 16BX cooperate to firmly support such a load. It may function as a part. That is, a structure is realized in which the flange 16A whose mechanical strength is increased by bending a metal plate in a series and the horizontally bent portion 16BX support the upper case 16 itself, and as a result, the lower case 101 is also reliably supported. Has been done. In the first embodiment, the horizontal bent portion 16BX does not come into direct contact with the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12, 104 is a cavity having a large depth and flat area. The cavity 104 is a space from the lower surface of the bottom wall (bottom surface) 16S of the upper case 16 to the upper surface of the bottom plate 101U at the rear of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. BH indicates the depth (vertical) dimension of the cavity 104.

As is clear from the structure shown in FIG. 12, in the first embodiment, there is a flat upper case 16 (which constitutes the outer shell of the main body 10) in which the opening on the upper surface is closed by the top plate 15. ing. When the upper case 16 is placed on the lower case 101, which will be described later, the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 also serves as the ceiling surface of the lower case 101.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the space where the distance between the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 is the largest is the cavity 104.
In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 constituting a part of the microwave heating device 120 described later is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113.
Further behind the waveguide 123, a housing case C154 of the power supply circuit board 127 on which circuit components for supplying electric power to the microwave heating control unit 130 are mounted is arranged long in the left-right direction.

The microwave heating control unit 130 is mainly composed of a microcomputer, and is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 inside the case C154. In other words, the power supply circuit board 127 housed inside the case C also serves as a control board on which the microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted. Although such a control board and a power supply circuit board 127 may be provided separately, in the first embodiment, they are integrated in order to minimize the installation space.

In FIG. 12, 101T is a front horizontal wall made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101. The front horizontal wall 101T is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F (see FIG. 15) of the lower case 101 backward.

Reference numeral 198 is a support metal fitting for connection formed of a metal plate, and includes a horizontal portion 198H and a vertical portion 198V. The horizontal portion 198H is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101.

One or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 have a box shape formed of a thin metal plate, and by fastening the screws 51 and 51F (not shown), the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are separated from each other. It is a strong box-shaped structure.

In the first embodiment, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are tightly fitted as follows.
That is, the vertical and horizontal dimensions (inner maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions) of the upper surface opening of the lower case 101 are the front-rear maximum width dimension D5 (not shown) and the left-right maximum width dimension W4 (not shown) of the upper case 16. The dimensions are the same in design. Alternatively, it is only 0.2 mm larger (at the maximum) than the maximum dimension D5 in the front-rear direction and the maximum dimension W4 in the left-right direction of the upper surface opening of the lower case 101.

When a little force is applied outward to the upper ends of the left and right vertical walls 101L and 101R and the rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) 101B, the upper surface opening of the lower case 101 widens a little, so the upper case 16 is tightly placed inside. Can be fitted (just).

The "fitting" in the first embodiment does not necessarily mean a state of tight fitting as in the first embodiment. The outer dimensions of the upper case 16 inserted inside may differ by up to 1 mm from the inner dimensions (front-back / left-right direction) of the lower case 101, which is the outer side, and they are in close contact with each other as a whole. It does not have to be in a state. Further, even if there is such a slight dimensional difference, it can be fixed with a screw 51 or the like to form a strong main body case HC.

Since the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are one strong box-shaped structure, the support structure of the door 114, which will be described later, can be firmly realized, and the door 114 and the peripheral portion of the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113 can be firmly realized. It is useful for preventing microwave leakage during the period.

In particular, the top plate 15 of the upper unit 100 is supported by the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and receives the full load of the lower unit 200, so that the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 as a whole are not distorted or deformed. Is important. Since the cushion 26 is attached to the entire circumference of the lower surfaces of the decorative frames 21 and 25, it is the cushion material 26 that actually contacts the upper surface of the lower part 2 of the kitchen.

In FIG. 12, reference numeral 80 denotes an inverter circuit board, which is horizontally installed in the center of the upper case 16.
The inverter circuit board 80 is a rectangle whose planar shape is long in the left-right direction. The length W16 of the inverter circuit board 80 is 316 mm, and the length (width) W7 in the front-rear direction is 195 mm (see FIG. 25).

In FIG. 12, the holder 50 is made of an insulating material, such as a plastic material. The holder 50 has a size corresponding to the entire area of the input operation unit 40 and the range of the integrated display unit 30, the right side display unit 31R, and the left side display unit 31L, and is provided in a long strip shape in the left-right direction. The central operation board 32 is attached so as to overlap with each other with a slight gap on the lower surface of the holder 50.

(Cooling structure of inverter circuit board)
Next, FIGS. 25 to 28 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the cooking device 1. FIG. 26 is a vertical cross-sectional view when cut along the SS line of FIG. 24. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle by enlarging the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 25. FIG. 28 is a simplified perspective view illustrating the positional relationship between the cooling air from the outlet of the first cooling fan 60 and the inverter circuit board 80.

In this type of inverter circuit board 80, when a circuit is made of various electronic parts, parts such as semiconductor integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, and transistors are fixed to an insulator board, and copper foil is used between these parts. It is formed by wiring. Since it is such a complicated and detailed work, it is currently mass-produced by mounting it on an automatic charging machine or the like. Therefore, there are various restrictions on the shape and size of the substrate, and even when used in this type of cooking cooker, the shape of the circuit board is basically a square or a rectangle. Therefore, in order to accommodate this type of inverter circuit board in the limited space in the upper unit 100, it is necessary to devise ways to avoid interference and overlap with surrounding parts. Moreover, if the number of inverter circuits is increased, the number of components to be mounted also increases, and the area of the inverter circuit board 80 inevitably increases.

The inverter circuit 81 mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 includes an inverter circuit 81L that supplies high-frequency power to the left IH coil 17L and an inverter that supplies high-frequency power to the right IH coil 17R. It is composed of a circuit 81R and. These will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29, 30 and 33.

A total of four aluminum heat sinks (heat sinks) 82 are attached to the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. The heat sink 82 is as shown in FIGS. 12, 15, and 26. That is, the heat sinks 82 are installed in two rows so that the two heat radiation fins 82FN face each other, and are close to each other to about several mm to 10 mm.

In FIG. 27, GP2 is a gap formed by facing the heat radiation fins 82FN of the two heat sinks 82. The size (width in the front-rear direction) of the gap GP2 is the same over the entire left-right direction of the heat sinks 82 in the two front-rear rows. For example, it is 8 mm. In order to distinguish it from the (second) void GP12 described later, this void GP2 may be referred to as a "first void".

As can be seen from FIGS. 12 and 26, the heat sink (heat dissipation sink) 82 has electric power constituting a part of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R on inclined surfaces existing on opposite sides to each other. A control switching element 83 is attached to each. Therefore, the heat generated during the operation of the switching element 83 can be cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 passing around the heat radiation fin 82FN.

The power control switching element 83 is, for example, an IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor). On the other hand, the power control switching element 83 on the inverter circuit 81L side is attached to the rear side of the heat sink 82 having two rows of front and rear rows.
The power control switching element 83 on the other inverter circuit 81R side is attached to the front side of the heat sink 82 having two rows of front and rear rows. It may be attached to the opposite side.

In FIGS. 12 and 26, 70 is a cover integrally formed of a thin metal plate or a plastic material that covers the entire upper part of the inverter circuit board 80. The left and right end surfaces of the cover 70 are open, and as shown in FIG. 24, the left end surface of the cover 70 serves as the inlet FI for the cooling air RF1 and RF2 described later, and the right end surface of the cover 70 becomes the cooling air RF1 and RF2. Consists of the exit FO of.

The cover 70 is in a position where a constant gap GP11 is secured between the cover 70 and the lower surface of the coil base 17C supporting the IH coils 17L and 17R (see FIG. 26). The gap GP11 has a linear distance of about 1 mm to a maximum of several mm.

In the first embodiment, the gap GP11 is 2 mm. As a result, a space of at least 5 mm or more is secured between the lower surface of the IH coils 17L and 17R and the upper surface of the cover 70. This space has the effect of mitigating the magnetic influence of the IH coils 17L and 17R on the cover 70, and facilitating the flow of cooling air between the cover 70 and the lower surface of the IH coils 17L and 17R.

The cover 70 has a size that secures a constant gap GP12 with the uppermost surface of the inverter circuit board 80. In the first embodiment, the GP12 is 20 mm.
In order to distinguish it from the (first) void GP2, this void GP12 may be referred to as a "second void".

In FIG. 26, H5 is the height dimension of the cover 70. H5 is 27 mm.
H6 is the height dimension of the heat sink 82 with respect to the bottom surface 16S of the upper case (upper housing) 16 and is 28 mm. H7 also has a height dimension from the bottom surface 16S, which is 31 mm. Reference numeral 71 is a support plate, which will be described later. An insulating sheet or a magnetic shield sheet (thin aluminum plate or the like) may be installed between the upper surface of the support plate 71 and the cover 70 or the inverter circuit board 80.

In FIG. 26, H9 is the maximum height dimension of the IH coil installation space CK. In other words, it is a straight line distance from the lower surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom wall surface of the upper case 16. In the first embodiment, the height dimension H9 is 44 mm or 44.5 mm.

The maximum height dimension H10 of the side wall surface of the upper case 16 described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17 is 40 mm. The height dimension H10 and the maximum height dimension H9 of the IH coil installation space CK do not match because the top plate 15 is installed above the horizontal flange 16A or the like.

Since the cover 70 is directly below the IH coil 17L and is in a state of being close to the cover 70, if the cover 70 is expected to have a magnetic shielding effect, the cover 70 may be made of a non-magnetic metal such as aluminum. .. If it is made of iron, magnetic stainless steel, or the like, there is a concern that the cover 70 will be heated by the leakage magnetic flux and the temperature will rise. Therefore, in this case, it is preferable to cover the upper surface of the cover 70 with a non-magnetic metal. For example, it is advisable to adopt a method of stacking aluminum sheets or attaching an aluminum tape.

When the cover 70 is made of metal, it is more preferable to electrically connect the cover 70 to the upper case 16. For example, a metal screw (not shown) for attaching the cover 70 is set to reach the screw hole of the cover 70 directly.

Since the upper case 16 is connected to the lower case 101, which will be described later, with a metal screw or the like, it is electrically connected to a ground terminal (not shown) provided in the lower case 101, and noise is absorbed by the ground. By doing so, the magnetic shield effect of the cover 70 can be expected to have a noise shielding effect on various electric components mounted on the inverter circuit board 80.

Further, if the cover 70 is injection-molded from a plastic material, the cross-sectional shape of the cover 70 can be determined relatively freely. Therefore, there is an advantage that the flow (direction) of the cooling air RF1 flowing through the first air passage F1 can be adjusted. For example, a rib-shaped wind direction plate or the like may be integrally formed on the lower surface of the cover 70 so that a large amount of cooling air RF1 flows particularly to a specific portion of the heat sink 82.

Next, the cover 70 will be described in more detail.
In FIG. 26, FH is the height dimension of all heat sinks 82 (82F, 82B) themselves, which is 20 mm.
The gap GP12 between the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70 is secured to be about 20 mm, and the height of the gap GP12 is also the height of the first air passage F1.

The distance (gap) dimension GP13 between the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the cover 70 and the lower surface of the top plate 15 is about 13 mm. A series of hanging walls 70B are formed from both front and rear edges of the cover 70 downward.

The facing distance between the pair of hanging walls 70B in the front-rear direction, that is, the dimension W9 (see FIG. 26) of the space in the front-rear direction is 205 mm. The lower end surface of the hanging wall 70B is in contact with the upper surface of the support plate 71, but even if there is a minute gap between the two, the guiding effect of the cooling air is not hindered.

In FIG. 26, the GP 16 is a gap formed between the upper surface of the heat radiation fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70. The gap GP16 is, for example, about 1 mm.

With the above configuration, the first air passage F1 is formed between the gaps GP12, GP16 and the heat radiation fins 82FN formed inside the cover 70.
In FIG. 26, W7 is the width of the inverter circuit board 80 in the front-rear direction, which is 195 mm. Further, W9 is the facing distance (dimension of the space in the front-rear direction) of the hanging wall 70B, which is 205 mm.

Next, it returns to FIG. 25 and will be described.
W10 indicates the distance from the right end surface of the cover 70, that is, the exit side end surface to the side vertical wall 16R of the upper case 16. This distance W10 is about 110 mm, and since there is a space at this distance, the power supply circuit board 55 is arranged using that space.

In FIG. 25, 70A is the left edge of the cover 70, that is, the anterior notch formed at the inlet side end. The front notch 70A is for guiding a part of the cooling air of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 to the outside immediately before the cover 70.
A plurality of front notch portions 70A may be formed.

In FIG. 25, GP 14 shows a gap between the first cooling fan 60 and the left end surface of the cover 70. This gap GP14 is about 40 mm. A gap GP15 (not shown) may also be provided between the second cooling fan 61 on the front side and the left end surface of the cover 70. In FIG. 25, the gap GP15 is small, so it is not shown.

In FIGS. 25 and 27, the XB passes through the center point of the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and is orthogonal to the tip surface of the outlet 60A with the “outlet line” FL1 (see FIG. 27) and the partition. It shows the intersection with the wall 11.

The outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is tilted by a predetermined angle θ1 with respect to the center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction. It should be noted that the center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction may be inclined with respect to a straight line that simply crosses the partition wall 11 (corresponding to the reference line BL in FIG. 27).

XF indicates a point (intersection point) where the "outlet line" FL2 passing through the center point of the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and orthogonal to the tip surface of the outlet 61A and the partition wall 11 intersects. ing. These intersections XB and XF will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 27. The blowout line FL1 and the blowout line FL2 are fictitious straight lines provided for convenience in the explanation of the first embodiment, and the cooling air does not actually travel along the blowout lines FL1 and FL2.

In FIG. 25, the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is tilted by a predetermined angle θ2 with respect to the center line CL5.
The installation interval W14 measured at the center point of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is 150 mm.

As is clear from FIG. 27, the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 (82B) are separated by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD1. This linear distance LD1 is about 110 mm.
Further, the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and the heat sink 82 (82F) are separated by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD2. This linear distance LD2 is about 100 mm.

With the above configuration, the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 sandwiches a straight line (reference line) BL penetrating the central portion of the gap GP2, and the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82F are located behind the straight line (reference line) BL. It is aimed at the heat sink 82B.
The outlet 60A is oblique (angle is θ1) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL.

On the contrary, the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is oblique (the angle is θ2) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL from the front direction of the straight line (reference line) BL.
The magnitude relationship between the angles θ1 and θ2 is “θ1> θ2”, but they may be the same.

As can be seen from FIG. 27, in the first embodiment, the two intersections XB and XF are not at the same position. It changes depending on the positions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, the direction of the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60, and the direction of the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61.

As shown in FIG. 28, the heat sink 82 has 82F1 and 82F2 as the heat sink 82F on the front FR side. There are 82B1 and 82B2 as the heat sink 82B on the rear BK side. Of the two rows of heat sinks 82 in the front and rear, the heat sink on the front left side is called the "front first heat sink" 82F1 when viewed from the front side of the cooking cooker 1, and the heat sink is installed on the front right side at a distance. May be referred to as "front second heat sink" 82F2.

As shown in FIG. 28, among the two rows of heat sinks 82 in the front and rear, the heat sink on the rear left side is called the "rear first heat sink" 82B1, and the heat sink installed on the rear right side at a distance is called the "rear second heat sink". It may be called "heat sink" 82B2.

Returning to the description of FIG. 26 again.
Reference numeral 11 is a partition wall integrally formed so as to integrally project downward from the ceiling surface of the cover 70. When the cover 70 is injection-molded from a plastic material, it can be integrally formed as described above, but a plate-shaped member different from the cover 70 may be used, in which case it is referred to as a partition member 11. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, they are collectively referred to as "partition wall" 11.

The partition wall 11 has a front surface and a back surface (back surface) formed flat over the entire length from the right end portion to the left end portion. This is to reduce the air passage resistance of the cooling air RF1 and RF2 flowing through the first air passage F1 as much as possible. The thickness of the partition wall in the front-rear direction is about 2.0 mm.

The partition wall 11 is preferably made of a material having high electrical insulation (for example, a plastic material). Note that in FIGS. 12, 13 and 15, the partition wall 11 is not shown.

Returning to FIGS. 24 and 25, D6 is the maximum width dimension in the front-rear direction that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16. This dimension D6 is determined by the distance between the partition plate 52, which will be described later, and the front vertical wall 16F (see FIG. 12).
GP1 is a gap formed continuously in the lateral direction on the back side of the partition plate 52.

In FIGS. 24 and 25, D7 is a distance between the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the partition plate 52 described later, and is a dimension that determines the size of the gap GP1 (see FIGS. 13 and 24). Is. W8 is the maximum (horizontal width) dimension in the left-right direction that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16.

The two IH coils 17L and 17 are supported from below by a component called a coil base 17C (see FIG. 12) made of heat-resistant plastic. The coil base 17C is provided individually for the two IH coils 17L and 17R. It may be formed by one structure in common with two IH coils 17L and 17R.

The coil base 17C has a structure in which the coil base 17C is directly placed on the upper surface of the cover 70 and fixed to the cover 70 with a fixing tool such as a screw. Alternatively, an elastic body such as a compression spring is interposed between the cover 70 and the upper surface of the cover 70, and the cover 70 is supported in a form of being constantly pushed up toward the top plate 15. Detailed description of these support structures will be omitted. In any case, in the IH coils 17L and 17R, the facing distance (distance) from the back surface (lower surface) of the top plate 15 does not change for a long period of time. The coil base 17C is formed with a plurality of large communication holes (not shown) so that air can easily pass in the vertical direction throughout the coil base 17C.

Due to the above configuration, the distance between the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 and the IH coils 17L and 17R does not change during induction heating. As a result, changes in the high-frequency voltage and high-frequency current generated in the inverter circuits 81L and 81R that supply high-frequency current to the IH coils 17L and 17R can be suppressed, and the induction heating performance can be stabilized.

The IH coils 17L and 17R are located above one horizontal plane (hereinafter referred to as "first horizontal plane HP1") corresponding to the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, it exists on the second horizontal plane HP2 (see FIG. 15).

The cover 70 is arranged below the IH coils 17L and 17R, and is in a position where it is not in contact with both the coil base 17C and the heat sink 82.

The cover 70 is fixed so as to be in close contact with the upper surface of the flat plate-shaped support plate 71, which is larger than the planar shape of the cover 70. Then, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, a first air passage F1 long in the left-right direction is formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70. The support plate 71 is made of an insulating material, for example, heat resistant plastic.

In FIGS. 12 and 15, 102 is a metal exhaust duct to which the exhaust flow from the lower unit 200 is guided. The exhaust port side end portion 102E of the exhaust duct 102 penetrates through the gap GP1 formed between the partition plate 52 described later and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 (see FIG. 13). That is, the exhaust duct 102 vertically penetrates through the gap GP1 like a chimney.

In FIG. 15, the TS10 is a contact-type temperature sensor such as a thermistor, which measures the temperature of the food to be cooked inside the heating chamber 113 and the ambient temperature around it.
The temperature sensor TS10 is installed in close contact with the outer wall surface of the exhaust duct 102 so that the heat-sensitive portion is exposed inside the exhaust duct 102.
Further, since the temperature sensor TS 10 is preferably installed at a position close to the back surface of the heating chamber 113, it is located near a communication port 174 formed at the rear of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113.

The temperature sensor TS10 is in operation for cooking (for example, thawing of frozen food) by the microwave heating source 189 as well as during cooking by driving the oven heating source 188 (cooking step of the combined cooking mode KM2 described later). In), the temperature is always measured. The temperature detection data of the temperature sensor TS10 is input to the heating chamber control unit 159 (see FIG. 30).

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 16A is a horizontal flange formed by bending outward at a right angle in a series from the upper ends of the side vertical walls 16L and 16R of the upper case 16.
The 101A is a horizontal flange formed by bending the side vertical walls 101L and 101R of the lower case 101, which will be described later, in a series from the upper ends at right angles to the outside.

In the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A described above overlaps the flange 101A. In this polymerization state, the side wall surface of the upper case 16 and the side wall surface of the lower case 101 are fixed by the screw 51 (see FIG. 12) described above. Therefore, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are a strong integral structure by fixing with the screw 51 and closely fixing the flange 16A and the flange 101A. In other words, the total weight of the upper case 16 is received by the upper surface of the flange 101A of the lower case 101, so that even if the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are formed of a thin metal plate, they are integrated. Then, it can be made into a box-shaped structure with mechanical strength.

The means for fixing the flange 16A and the flange 101A in an overlapping state may be other fastening means such as bolts and nuts instead of the screw 51. The flange 16A and the flange 101A do not come into contact with the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2. Since the flange 16A and the flange 101A are made of a hard material (metal), there is a concern that the kitchen furniture 2 may be damaged. Further, if the flange 16A and the flange 101A hit the kitchen furniture 2, the cushion material 26 cannot be installed in a compressed state. If the cushion material 26 is not in close contact with the cushion material 26, there is a concern that the effect of preventing the intrusion of water or the like may be impaired.

Next, the gap between the main body case HC, which is the outer shell (housing) of the cooking device 1, and the kitchen furniture 2 will be described.
8 and 12 to 15, 311 is a lower gap formed between the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 constituting the outer shell of the main body case HC and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 10 mm. Is.

In FIG. 14, 301R is a right-side gap formed between the side vertical wall 101R on the right side of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.
The 301L is a left side gap formed between the left side vertical wall 101L of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.

In FIGS. 13 and 15, 302 is a front gap formed between the lower surface of the door 114 or the lower surface of the hinge portion 176 and the kitchen furniture 2 with the door 114 closed, and has a size of about 10 mm. That's right. Since the position of the lower surface of the front cover 112 also coincides with the position of the lower surface of the door 114 on the horizontal plane, a gap having the same size as the front gap 302 is secured below the front cover 112. It is a configuration that exists.

The size of the front gap 302 changes depending on the opening and closing of the door 114, but as shown in FIG. 12, the size of the front gap 302 is large (for example, about 5 mm to 10 mm) so that the outside air can be sucked in the state where the door 114 is closed. It should be secured. In the description of the cooking device 1, the "outside air" refers to the air existing outside the cooking device 1, and does not refer to the outdoor air of the house HA shown in FIG. 1.

As shown in FIGS. 12 to 15 and 18, the lower gap 311 and the right side gap 301R, the left side gap 301L and the front gap 302 communicate with each other. Therefore, when the outside air is sucked from the front gap 302 by starting the operation of the cooking cooker 1, the sucked outside air is appropriately distributed to the lower gap 311, the right side gap 301R, and the left side gap 301L, respectively. The gap 303 described with reference to FIG. 18 also communicates with each of the gaps 311 and the right side gap 301R, the left side gap 301L, and the front gap 302.

Next, it returns to FIG. 18 and will be described.
W3 is the maximum width dimension in the front portion of the cooking device 1. The width dimension W3 is larger than the maximum width dimension W2 (560 mm) of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2, for example, 595 mm.

Reference numeral 303 is a gap formed between the inner surface (right side surface) of the right side wall material existing on the right side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2 and the right end surface of the front cover 112. This void is secured so as not to collide with the kitchen furniture 2 when the cooking cooker 1 is installed. The size may be about 1 to 2 mm.

Also in the front cover 112 on the left side, a gap similar to the gap 303 is formed between the front cover 112 and the inner surface (left side surface) of the left side wall material existing on the left side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2. Depending on the installation of the cooking device 1, the sizes of the left and right voids 303 may be slightly different. Further, depending on the type of kitchen furniture 2, an elastic sealing material (cushion material) may be arranged in the step portion 2G (see FIG. 10), and the space 303 may be installed in a state where the gap 303 is almost closed. However, even in such a state, there is no problem in the internal cooling function of the cooking device 1.

As shown in FIG. 18, the front cover 112 extends to the outside of the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L. Therefore, in the state where the cooking cooker 1 is installed, the front side of the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L is covered by the two left and right front covers 112.

Since the front side of the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L is covered, when the user looks at the kitchen furniture 2 from the front side, it feels as if there is a large gap between the cooking cooker 1 and the kitchen furniture 2. I will not give it.

In the installed state of the cooking cooker 1, the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L are secured, so that the outside air for the upper air passage AH of the upper unit 100 and the lower air passage UH of the lower unit 200, which will be described later, is surely introduced. Can be done.

In FIG. 18, WS is a width dimension in which the door 114 faces the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. This width dimension is necessary for the door 114 and the lower case 101 to be in close contact with each other to prevent microwave leakage, and for forming the choke chamber 194, which will be described later, at the front / rear / left / right positions of the opening 113A. See FIG. 11).

(1st cooling fan 60, 2nd cooling fan 61)
As shown in FIG. 24, a first cooling fan 60 (upper cooling fan) and a second cooling fan 61 are installed near the lateral vertical wall 16L on the left side of the upper case 16, respectively. The rotary shaft 60T (not shown) at the center of the rotary blades (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 extends in the vertical (vertical) direction, and the rotary blades are: Rotate on one horizontal plane (first horizontal plane HP1).

A centrifugal fan (blower) is adopted as the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61. The reason for this is that the static pressure is high and the ventilation resistance is large in a space with a high mounting density. In general, there is also a type of centrifugal fan in which one suction port is provided and the blowing (sending) direction is the entire radial direction. However, the one of the first embodiment is a type having only one blowing direction.

In FIG. 24, 60A is an outlet formed integrally with the fan case 60C of the first cooling fan 60, and 61A is an outlet formed integrally with the fan case 61C of the second cooling fan 61.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 cool the IH coil installation space CK inside the upper space 300A, which will be described later. Therefore, the cooling fans 60 and 61 may be collectively referred to as "upper cooling fan" for these two.

The outlets 60A and 61A are directed to the inverter circuit board 80. That is, the two outlets 60A and 61A are both located above the common first horizontal plane (HP1) and are directed to the right. The "first horizontal plane" HP1 in the first embodiment means one plane that coincides with the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, as described above.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same "rated specifications", and are assumed to be operated at the same rotation speed during normal induction heating operation. .. However, in the first embodiment, the rotation speed is changed by the IH control unit 90 to change the amount of air blown. For example, when the driving power applied to the IH coils 17L and 17R is increased to increase the heating capacity, or when it is detected that the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 or the input operation unit 40 is higher than in normal times. In order to increase the cooling effect, the number of revolutions may be increased to increase the amount of air blown. Further, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be operated at different rotation speeds due to measures against "beating noise" described later.

The rated specifications are, for example, rated voltage, operating voltage range, rated current, rated rotation speed, maximum air volume, maximum static pressure, sound pressure level, and the like. The rotation speed can be changed by changing the voltage applied or the voltage application time (on DUTY time) within the working voltage range.
On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the PWM control (Pulse Width Modulation) method is adopted, and the duty cycle (pulse width) of the pulse width is adopted according to the magnitude of the input signal (DC level). The motor of the first cooling fan 60 is controlled by changing the ratio of H and L). This PWM control is also adopted in the second cooling fan 61.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have a configuration in which a rotary blade (not shown) is surrounded by fan cases 60C and 61C, and a circular suction port (not shown) is formed on the lower surface of the fan case. Not shown) is provided.

Vent holes 64 (FIG.) composed of a large number of round holes or elliptical holes at positions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 directly below the suction ports (not shown). 14 and FIG. 16). The ventilation holes 64 are formed on the bottom wall surface of the lower case 16. The ventilation holes 64 communicate with the ventilation holes 164 formed on the left side wall surface of the lower case 101, which will be described later. Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can directly introduce outside air from the outside of the lower case 101 through the ventilation holes 164.

In FIG. 14, 165 is a recess (intake duct), and the ventilation hole 64 is provided to directly communicate with the ventilation hole 164 of the lower case 101. The recess 165 is formed by recessing it by a certain depth (dimension) DP1 from the left side. The dimension DP1 is 99 mm.

As shown in FIG. 14, an electric component mounted on the vertical center point of the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60, the vertical center point of the heat sink 82, and the upper surface of the power supply circuit board 55 described later. The vertical center point of 85 is at the position of one horizontal line HL1. In other words, the cooling air RF1 blown out from the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is in a positional relationship so as to reach the heat sink 82 and the electric component 85 when traveling straight to the right. The horizontal plane determined by the horizontal line HL1 is above the first horizontal plane HP1.

In FIG. 14, AC power from the commercial AC power supply 99 is supplied to the power supply circuit board 55 via a filter circuit board 54 described later. Then, in the power supply circuit board 55, alternating current is converted to direct current. Therefore, an electric component 85 such as a diode for converting alternating current to direct current and a transformer 57 (not shown) is mounted.

When the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80 rises abnormally, the IH control unit 90 that controls induction heating reduces the heating amount of the IH coils 17L and 17R. In addition to this operation, the amount of air blown per unit time of the first cooling fan 60 may be temporarily increased. The temperature of the heat sink 82 is detected by contact-type temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 (see FIG. 24) such as a thermistor fixed in close contact with the surface of the heat sink 82.

When the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rated specifications, the procurement cost at the time of manufacturing can be reduced.
If cooling fans with the same specifications are arranged and operated in parallel, there is a high possibility that a growl noise will be generated. Therefore, in the first embodiment, as a measure against the roaring noise, the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are controlled to have different values within the range where the roaring noise is likely to occur. There is. In other words, they are not always operating at different rotation speeds.

In FIG. 24, reference numeral 52 denotes a metal partition plate that is long left and right at the rear of the upper case 16 and is fixed to the upper case 16. The partition plate 52 is a wall extending vertically so as to partition the internal space of the upper case 16 in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that the term "partitioning" here does not mean a strict shielding that completely blocks the flow of air. The cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be prevented from flowing backward to some extent beyond the upper end surface of the partition plate 52.

The upper air passage AH, which will be described later, refers to an air passage in the range from the ventilation hole 64 to the partition plate 52 inside the upper unit 100. The exhaust duct 102 from the lower unit 200 is present in the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52. Therefore, the lower air passage UH, which will be described later, does not pass through the upper passage AH and has a structure that substantially communicates with the outside of the cooking cooker 1.

In FIG. 24, 52A is an exhaust window formed in the left half of the partition plate 52, and 52B is an exhaust window formed in the right half of the partition plate 52.
The 53L is an exhaust port plate (on the left side) installed so as to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52A, and a large number of through holes 53L1 are formed so that the cooling air toward the exhaust window 52A of the partition plate 52 passes through. It has become.

The 53R is an exhaust port plate (on the right side) installed so as to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52B, and a large number of through holes 53R1 are formed so that the cooling air toward the exhaust window 52B of the partition plate 52 passes through. It has become. The cooling air that has passed through the exhaust windows 52A and 52B is discharged to the external space of the cooking cooker 1 through the exhaust cover 19.

In FIG. 24, the LF is an exhaust port dimension indicating a range (horizontal width dimension) on the left side of the partition plate 12 described later with respect to the exhaust gas exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L and 17R. The exhaust port dimension is determined by the formation range of the through hole 53L1 and the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A. When the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A is narrower than the formation range of the through hole 53L1 (the form shown in FIG. 24), the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A determines the exhaust range LF (on the left side).
The width dimension of the exhaust window 52B on the right side and the formation range of the through hole 53R1 are the same.

In FIG. 24, reference numeral 54 is a filter circuit board arranged in the rear right corner of the upper case 16. In this filter circuit board, the noise in the power supply from the commercial power supply 99 is removed and supplied to the output terminal side, and conversely, the noise is not leaked (backflow) to the commercial (alternating current) power supply side on the input terminal side. Electrical components (not shown) such as resistors and inductors (choke coils), line-to-line capacitors, relays, and current fuses are mounted. The end of the power cable (not shown) connected to the commercial power supply 99 via a plug is connected to the filter circuit board 54 via the inside of the lower unit 200 described later.

The power supply circuit board 55 is on the opposite side (right side) of the first cooling fan 60 with the inverter circuit board 80 interposed therebetween. In other words, since the power supply circuit board 55 is on the right side of the outlet FO of the first air passage F1 formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, cooling immediately after exiting from the first air passage F1. Cooled by the wind.

In FIG. 24, CL3 is a center line passing through the center point of the left IH coil 17L in the front-rear direction, and CL4 is a center line passing through the center point of the right IH coil 17R in the front-rear direction.
CL5 is a center line that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction. CL2 is a center line that penetrates the rotation centers of the rotary blades (not shown) in the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the front-rear direction. As is clear from FIG. 24, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are aligned in a straight line in the front-rear direction.

In FIG. 24, RF1 shows the cooling air blown from the first cooling fan 60. RF2 indicates the cooling air blown from the second cooling fan 61.

RF3 indicates the cooling air after exiting from the outlet FO of the first air passage F1. Further, RF4 indicates the cooling air after passing through the second air passage F2. A part of the cooling air RF3 after exiting from the outlet FO and the cooling air RF4 after passing through the second air passage F2 merge in the middle. That is, the cooling air RF3 and the cooling air RF4 merge before reaching the through holes 53L1 and 53R1 of the exhaust port plates 53L and 53R.

In FIG. 24, GP1 is a gap formed between the partition plate 52 and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16. The width of the gap GP1 in the front-rear direction is about 30 mm to 50 mm.

In FIGS. 24 and 25, reference numeral 12 denotes a partition plate, which is vertically installed in the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52. Reference numeral 13 is also a partition plate, which is vertically installed in the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52.

The space GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52 is divided into two spaces on the left and right by the partition plate 12. On the left side of the partition plate 12, the exhaust duct 102 is vertically present from below. Further, on the right side of the partition plate 13, a terminal portion (exhaust port) of an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) for discharging air after cooling the magnetron 122 of the lower unit 200 may be arranged. However, in the first embodiment, such an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) is not arranged.

In FIGS. 24 and 25, reference numeral 14 is a vertically installed plate-shaped or rib-shaped (raised object-shaped) partition wall. The partition wall 14 is integrally formed or fixed to the upper surface of a support plate 29 (not shown) installed so as to overlap the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16.

The support plate 29 (not shown) is made of an electrically insulating plastic material like the support plate 71.
The partition wall 14 is formed from the rear of the cover 70 to the front surface of the partition plate 52. However, the partition wall 14 does not extend vertically to a position where it comes into contact with the lower surface of the top plate 15. That is, although the partition wall 14 extends close to the lower surface of the top plate 15, the space behind the cover 70 is not completely divided into two on the left and right by the partition wall 14.

As shown in FIG. 25, a part of the cooling air RF4 guided to the right side of the cover 70 mainly via the first air passage F1 is divided into two cooling air RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14. It is divided and guided in the directions of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

As shown in FIG. 25, a part of the cooling air RF4 guided to the right side of the cover 70 mainly via the first air passage F1 is divided into two cooling air RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14. It can be divided and guided in the directions of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

With the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 24, the cooling air RF4L and RF4R are exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L and 17R through the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.
In FIGS. 24 and 25, the cooling air exhausted from the right side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4R, and the cooling air exhausted from the left side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4L. When these two cooling airs are generically referred to, RF4 is used as the reference numeral in the following description.

(Detailed configuration of input operation unit 40)
Next, returning to FIGS. 19 and 20, the main part of the input operation unit 40 will be described.
In FIGS. 19 and 20, reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation unit formed on the front upper surface of the top plate 15, and as described below, the change in capacitance when the user lightly touches the top plate 15 with a finger or the like is used. Various input keys (touch-type keys) that can be input are arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction.

The input operation unit 40 includes a right operation unit 40R, a central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40M, and a left operation unit 40L. Reference numeral 98 is an operation button or operation key (touch input type) of the main power switch 97 capable of supplying and shutting off the commercial power supply 99 described later. The operation button or operation key 98 is arranged at a position adjacent to the right end portion of the right operation unit 40R. The operation buttons or operation keys 98 will be described below on the assumption that they are within the range of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

As described above, the right operation unit 40R may be referred to as an "individual operation unit" because it performs an input operation only for the induction heating source 9. Similarly, the left operation unit 40L may also be referred to as an "individual operation unit".
On the other hand, the central operation unit 40M may be referred to as a "shared operation unit" because it is commonly used for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. It should be noted that this "shared operation unit" also includes a "cooperative operation unit" 40M for executing the cooperative cooking mode described later. These will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

The main power switch 97 is attached to the filter board 54 of the upper unit 100 as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. The commercial power supply 99 is supplied to the power supply circuit board 55, the inverter circuit 81, and the power supply circuit unit (not shown in FIG. 25) of the lower unit 200.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, a total of five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R are arranged on the right operation unit 40R. These input keys 43R1 to 43R4, 44R are assigned one or a plurality of input functions as described below.

43R1 is an input key for selecting heating in the right heating unit 17HR. Further, the operation of the right IH coil 17R that has started the heating operation can be stopped. Therefore, when it is pressed once for the first time, it exerts a function of selecting the right heating unit 17HR, and when it is pressed once after that, it has a function of instantly issuing a stop command for the heating operation. As described above, each time the input key 43R1 is touched, the content of the command to the IH control unit 90, which will be described later, is automatically switched.

The input key 43R1 may be referred to as a third selection means. That is, the input key 43L1 on the left side and the input key 43R1 on the right side, which will be described later, select the "single (heating) cooking" mode using either one of the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9. Moreover, it is a means for instructing the start of the heating operation.

43R2 and 43R3 are a pair of input keys that specify the thermal power (power consumption) at the time of induction heating.
When the input key 43R2 on the left side of the two input keys 43R2 is touched, the heating power is reduced by one step each time the operation is performed. For example, in the case of 3200 W (rated maximum thermal power: thermal power level 9), if the input key 43R2 is touched once, it is lowered to 2500 W (thermal power level: 8).

When you touch the input key 42R3 on the right side, the heating power is increased one step at a time for each operation. For example, in the case of a thermal power of 2500 W (thermal power level 8), 3200 W (rated maximum thermal power: thermal power level 9) can be selected by touching the input key 42R3 once.

43R4 is an input key for selecting a control menu for timer cooking. Timer cooking is a control method in which when a user sets a cooking time, an induction heating operation can be performed only during the set time. For example, when timer cooking is started by designating 10 minutes, a predetermined display is performed on the right side display unit 31R when 10 minutes have passed, and the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later, automatically notifies the end of cooking by voice. It is done in. The induction heating is automatically stopped when the set time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, but the induction heating time can be extended by performing an extension operation before the set time elapses.

In the first embodiment, both the display unit such as the integrated display unit 30 and the right display unit 31R and the voice synthesizer 95 may be collectively referred to as a "notification unit" AN.

The 44R is a touch-type input key for selecting a "control menu" for induction cooking, and one can be selected from a plurality of control menus each time a touch operation is performed. In this induction heating cooking, the "control menu" refers to the induction heating source 9 as shown in FIG. 38, for example, "boiled water", "boiled", "fried food (automatic cooking)", and the like. The control mode, in other words the type of control. In other words, "boiled water", "simmered", "fried food", etc. have individual control menus. Further, the control conditions related to one control menu include, for example, the drive time (of the IH coil 17R), the thermal power value, and the like. Even if the control menu is the same, the control conditions are not necessarily the same.

The "control menu" for the right heating unit 17HR is different from the name of the final cooked product or the name of the food material obtained by induction heating. For example, "hamburger" and "tempura" are the names of the food to be cooked, not the "control menu" here. In other words, the "control menu" can be said to be a comprehensive expression of the type of heating, cooking method, conditions, etc. until the cooking is completed.
The control menu of the induction heating source 9 may be referred to as an "IH control menu" in order to distinguish it from the control menus of other heating sources.

Next, the left operation unit 40L will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 23. The left operation unit 40L is provided with a total of five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L.

43L1 is an input key for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL. Further, after the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L is started, the operation can be stopped at any time. That is, when it is pressed once for the first time, it exerts a function of selecting the left heating unit 17HL, and when it is pressed once after the induction heating is started, the heating operation can be stopped instantly.
The input key 43L1 may be referred to as a third selection means.

43L2 and 43L3 are a pair of input keys that specify the thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating unit 17HL, similarly to the input keys 43R2 to 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R. Similar to the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R, each time the touch is made, the thermal power that has been increased by one step is selected or specified by one step in the specified thermal power value data table. You can choose the firepower of.

43L4 is an input key for selecting timer cooking. Like the input key 43R4 of the right operation unit 40R, the input key 43L4 can specify the time for induction heating. Further, at the end of timer cooking, the end of timer cooking is displayed on the left side display unit 31L as in the input key 43R4, and the voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the end.

44L is a touch-type input key that can select a "control menu" for induction cooking. Similar to the input key 44R of the right operation unit 40R, one control menu can be selected from a plurality of "control menus". The control menu that can be selected with the input key 44L on the left side is exactly the same as the control menu that can be selected with the input key 44R on the right side.

As is clear from FIGS. 20 and 23, a total of five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L arranged on the left operation unit 40L are arranged on a straight line in the left-right direction.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, a total of 10 touch-type input keys are arranged on the central operation unit 40M. These input keys are assigned one or more input functions.
Hereinafter, 10 touch-type input keys will be described.

The input key 43KP on the far left is for setting various operations, displays, and the like of the entire cooking cooker 1 as desired by the user.

When the input key 43KP is pressed, the integrated control device MC described later switches to the "function mode", and the following "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys)
(2) Ventilation fan interlocking mode setting (3) Cleaning guide setting (cleaning time automatic notification function setting for heating chamber 113 and exhaust cover 19)
(4) Peak cut setting (Select one of the maximum power consumption of 5700W, 5000W, 4800W and 4000W)
(5) Voice setting of voice guide (6) Volume setting of voice guide (7) Setting to prevent forgetting to take out cooked foods, cooking utensils, etc. from the heating chamber 113 (voice synthesizer 95 and integrated display unit 30) Necessity of alarm)
(8) HEMS registration setting (setting related to the power usage restriction function by the household power control device)
(9) Timer cooking time unit (1 minute unit setting changed to 5 minutes or 30 minutes unit) setting (10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (expert) mode (11) Inventory information acquired from the microwave oven 401 Setting the type (range) (12) Setting the display priority (specific cooking menu to be displayed as default, identification information 330) of each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") of the linked cooking mode KM3 (13) Composite Setting the display priority (specific control menu that should be the default display) of each control menu of cooking mode KM2 (for example, "range grill", "boiled leaf vegetables") (14) ON of the main power switch 97 After that, when the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened, the cooking mode is automatically set to be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (display priority, etc. between the two of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2). ..

The beginner mode is an optional function for a person (user) who is unfamiliar with the use of the cooking device 1, and when this beginner mode is set, the content of the voice guide in the voice synthesis device 95 becomes more detailed and polite. become. Further, regarding the input operation in the input operation unit 40, the number of voice guides increases and the display information on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 increases.

When the beginner mode is set, in particular, in the case of cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the reference information displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 in the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 (described later). The amount of additional information 331) is increased, or the content of the voice guide in the voice synthesizer 95 is increased. Therefore, the function that can support the input operation of the user is enhanced.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the cooking mode setting automatically displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is either the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2. It means to set one. Since both the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 use one integrated display unit 30, the user can set to prioritize the display of either one. This will be explained in detail later.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC detects the opening of the door 114.
It is presumed that the user cooks using the heating chamber 113, and either the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed first. This is a function for automatically displaying on the integrated display unit 30.
The first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC is automatically set immediately after the door 114 is opened after the standby initial screen (display screens 1, 2A, 2B: FIG. 46) described later is displayed. Is displayed in.

After the "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30, "long press" (hereinafter, "long press") a specific input key other than the input key 43KP on the central operation unit 40M. You can select one of the setting menus in the above-mentioned "function setting menu" and then change to the desired setting contents.

Alternatively, when two specific input keys other than the input key 43KP are "long-pressed" at the same time, one setting menu in the above-mentioned "function setting menu" can be called and changed to the desired setting content. can.

The "long press" means, for example, a state in which the press is continuously performed for 5 seconds or longer.
Whether or not the state is in the "long press" state is determined by the integrated control device MC by comparing the timing of the touch input in the input operation unit 40 with the reference value. That is, the timing at which the input keys (for example, 43M1 and 43M2) are simultaneously pressed in the central operation unit 40M is ON (at the time of touch) -OFF (at the time of non-touch) transmitted from the input operation unit 40 to the integrated control device MC. ) Although it can be discriminated by the signal, the integrated control device MC measures the time from the time when the ON signal is changed to the time when the signal is changed to the OFF signal, and determines whether or not it is a "long press".

The type (range) of inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 401 is, for example, limited to frozen foods or limited to foods that can be heated by the microwave heating source 189.

By pressing the input key 43KP to switch the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 to the "functional mode" and then operating the touch-type input keys 43M1 to 43M3 arranged in the central operation unit 40M, which will be described later, the cooking cooker The above 14 types of individual functions defined in the "function setting menu" of 1 can be individually changed.

When the control mode and control conditions (temperature, thermal power, time, etc.) of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are selected on the integrated display unit 30, the input key 43KP is used so as not to switch the function mode. The input function of is disabled. Therefore, the light emitting unit 27M1 corresponding to the input key 43KP does not emit light during the setting work of the control mode and the control condition (see FIG. 21).

For example, the setting of the peak cut value of the cooking device 1 will be described. Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to either 5000W, 4800W or 4000W when installed at the user's home. In this way, the function of the cooking cooker 1 can be changed according to the user's wishes, the usage environment (electric power situation of the installed home), and the like. When such a peak cut value is set, the setting result is stored in the integrated control device MC or the power control unit 72. Therefore, when the user selects the cooperative cooking mode KM3 as described later, the setting result is stored in the integrated control device MC or the power control unit 72. It is used to determine whether or not to permit the use of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

As shown in FIG. 21, the range of the central operation unit 40M is referred to as a shared operation unit or RG operation unit 40M2 commonly used for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Includes range. The range of the central operation unit 40M is the range surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG.
On the other hand, in the range of the central operation unit 40M, the range excluding the input key 43KP is the cooperation operation unit 40MC for executing the cooperation cooking mode described later.

In the following description, since the "RG operation unit" 40M2 also serves as an input operation unit of the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means), it may be referred to as a "second operation unit" 40M2. ..

The 43MC is a selection input key for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 arranged at the left end of the cooperative operation unit 40MC. It consists of touch-type keys.
The input key 43MC is illuminated from below by a light emitting diode (LED) or the like, and the characters "cooperative cooking" and a figure indicating the characters can be easily confirmed by the user. However, the input key 43MC can only be seen shining during the period of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. That is, after all the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are completed, the LED stops the light emission and displays that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not effective.
The input key 43MC may be referred to as a "first input key".

43M1 is an input key for selecting cooking in the heating chamber 113 by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. A combined cooking mode KM2 using both an oven heating source 188 and a microwave heating source 189 can also be selected. That is, the input key 43M1 is an input means (input key) for selecting the "composite cooking mode" KM2. When the input key 43M1 is operated, as will be described later, by executing the "composite cooking mode" KM2, either microwave heating or oven heating can be independently cooked.

When the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display unit 30 switches to a special display screen configuration. That is, the second specific screen 30SC used for the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed. This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59.

Further, when the input key 43MC is operated, the integrated display unit 30 displays a special display screen so that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be executed. That is, the configuration is switched to display the first specific screen 30SP. This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 81 to 108.

The display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 is a single liquid crystal display screen on the hardware, but as shown in FIG. 21, a maximum of three display areas 30L and 30M are provided by the display unit drive circuit 63. It is displayed separately in 30R.

Of the three display areas, the display area 30L located on the left side is hereinafter referred to as "first area". The display area 30M located in the center is hereinafter referred to as a "second area". The display area 30R located on the right side is hereinafter referred to as a "third area". It should be noted that a method for displaying a single display screen by dividing it into a plurality of parts has been proposed, for example, in Japanese Patent No. 5425171 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-172940. Omit.

The 43M1 is a pair of left and right input keys for switching the screen displayed in the first area 30L of the display screen 30D after operating the input key 43MC. The information displayed in the first area 30L is selected by the display unit drive circuit 63 according to the display program of the integrated control device MC.

Next, a state in which the input key 43M1 is operated and individual names indicating the “composite cooking mode” KM2 and the “single cooking mode” KM1 are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 will be described.

When the input key 43M1 on the left side of the two input keys 43M1 arranged side by side is operated, the display screen of the first area 30L moves forward, and the information displayed on the rear side is displayed in the center of the front and back. The display screen is switched according to the image to be displayed. That is, when the input key 43M1 on the left side is operated once, the "control menu" (in the case of the combined cooking mode KM2) and the identification information of the object to be cooked (in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3) stored in the integrated control device MC (in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3). ) And the like, one of the desired display information (for example, a name that specifies "range grill" cooking, which is one of the control menus) can be selected. It should be noted that the display screen itself does not actually move forward, but only visually appears to have moved forward.

On the contrary, when the input key 43M1 on the right side is operated once, the display screen of the first area 30L moves backward, and instead, another information is displayed in the center of the front and back of the first display area. Then, the display screen is switched. That is, even if the input key 43M1 on the right side is operated, one of the "display information group" defined by the display program of the integrated control device MC is selected, but the selection direction (selection order) of the displayed information is selected. ) Is the opposite.

In this way, the user can display desired information from the display information group in the central portion of the first area 30L by operating either the input key 43M1 on the right side or the input key 43M1 on the left side. ..

43M2 is a pair of input keys for switching the screen displayed in the second area 30M of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M2, the display information of the second area 30M can be sequentially switched one by one in the same manner as the input key 43M1.

43M3 is a pair of input keys for switching the screen displayed in the third area 30R of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M3, the display information of the third area 30R can be sequentially switched one by one in the same manner as the input key 43M1.

The input key 43M3 also serves as a guide key for supporting the input of the user for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.
When the input key 43M3 is touch-operated in a specific scene such as when no information is displayed in the third area 30R or when the guidance information 30P described later is displayed, the third area 30R is described. In the area 30R, "guidance information" 30P that is helpful for the user's operation is displayed (see FIG. 55).

The display of the guidance information 30P automatically disappears after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and returns to the state of the immediately preceding display screen. Details of such an operation will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

The 43MS is a “starting unit” that can command the start of microwave cooking and oven cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is specifically a touch-type input key. It also serves as an input key that can command the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. The input key 43MS may be referred to as a "start input key" when particularly distinguished from other input keys.

On the contrary, the 43MT is an "end portion" capable of stopping the operations of microwave heating and oven heating, and specifically, is a touch-type input key. It also serves as an input key that can issue a command to cancel the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. The input key 43MT may be referred to as an "end input key" when particularly distinguished from other input keys.

When the operation key 98 of the main power switch is pressed to start cooking, for example, in the right operation unit 40R, the five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4, 44R do not always need an input function.

Similarly, in the left operation unit 40L, the five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L do not always need an input function. The same applies to the central operation unit 40M. In order to avoid unnecessary input such as when the user touches it without recognizing it, in the integrated control device MC, immediately after starting the cooking device 1, depending on the input process of cooking conditions, the progress of cooking, etc. Except for the input keys that require input, the input functions of other input keys are temporarily disabled to prevent input.

Therefore, in order to show that the input function of each input key as described above is effective, as shown in FIGS. 20 to 23, the light emitting display units 27R and 27L are used for each of the three operation units 40R, 40L and 40M. , 27M is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, in the right operation unit 40R, individual light emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R. Since the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 are a pair, the individual light emitting units 27R2 share one.

The individual light emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 have one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) arranged below the right operation unit 40R, and the individual light emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 emit light and turn off by the display unit drive circuit 63. Is controlled. Alternatively, it is controlled to change the emission color.

For example, before the input key 43R1 (see FIG. 22) of the right operation unit 40R (individual operation unit for the right heating unit 17HR) is operated, the individual light emitting unit 27R1 immediately behind the input key 43R1 is operated. Is glowing blue. From this, it can be seen that the operation input can be accepted.

When the user operates the input key 43R1 and the integrated control device MC accepts the input, the individual light emitting unit 27R1 emits light in a unified color (red) to indicate that the user is accepting the operation. indicate. The control for this display is performed by the display unit drive circuit 63 based on the command of the integrated control device MC. It should be noted that instead of emitting light with one color, for example, the emission color may be changed from blue to red to indicate to the user that the operation is being accepted. This also applies to the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 and 27L1 to 27L4, which will be described later.

It should be noted that even in a method in which the individual light emitting unit 27R1 immediately behind the input key 43R1 is not emitted before the input key 43R1 is operated, the light emission is started when the operation is accepted, and the light emission is continued. good. Further, a method may be adopted in which only the fact that the operation input is possible is indicated by light emission in advance (the stage before the operation), and the acceptance of the operation input is not displayed by light. Further, a form may be adopted in which operation input is possible and blinks when waiting for input, and changes to continuous light emission when the operation input is accepted.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23, in the left operation unit 40L as well, the individual light emitting units 27L1 to 27L4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L. Since the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are a pair, the individual light emitting units 27L4 share one.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, even in the central operation unit 40M, the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are arranged immediately behind the ten touch input keys 43KP, 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, and 43MT. is doing.

When the input key 43MS is pressed and induction heating is started, each input key (43M1, 43M2, etc.) in the central operation unit 40M cannot be input. However, the input function of the input key 43MT is effectively maintained.

The input key 43MT can cancel the input of the control menu and the cooperative cooking mode KM3. For example, when the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started (in the heating chamber 113), pressing the input key (end portion) 43MT once causes the second heating means HM2 corresponding to the heating chamber 113. The heating operation stops. When the button is pressed once more, the setting of the linked cooking mode KM3 is canceled at that time, and as will be described later, the occupied state of the left heating unit 17HL used in the linked cooking mode KM3 is immediately canceled.
Therefore, after this release, the input of the single cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL for other cooking can be started.

When the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode is carried out using the induction heating source 9, pressing the input key (end portion) 43MT twice in succession sets the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Is canceled. That is, the cooking step 1 by the induction heating source 9 is completed at that time, and the reserved state of the next cooking step 2 is canceled. Therefore, as will be described later, the state in which the microwave heating source 189 of the heating chamber 113 is in the occupied state is immediately released.

When the input key 43M1 and the input key 43MC are operated to display the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 on the integrated display unit 30, if the input key 43MT is operated before the start of the cooking process, the input settings before that are set. Are all released. Therefore, in order to display the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MC again.

The individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 have one or a plurality of light emitting diodes arranged below the central operation unit 40M, and the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are provided by the display unit drive circuit 63 (see FIG. 30). Light emission and extinguishing with a unified emission color are controlled. Further, a form may be adopted in which operation input is possible and blinks when waiting for input, and changes to continuous light emission when the operation input is accepted.

As shown in FIG. 21, the pair of input keys 43M1 share one individual light emitting unit 27M3. Since the two input keys 43M2 and 43M3 are also paired with each other, the individual light emitting units 27M4 and 27M5 are shared one by one. In the following description, when the individual light emitting units in the central operation unit 40M are generically referred to, the reference numeral 27M is used.

As shown in FIG. 22, the individual light emitting unit 27R5 is also arranged directly behind the operation key (or operation button) 98 of the main power switch 97 located adjacent to the right end portion of the right operation unit 40R.

It is desirable that the light emission modes (continuous light emission, blinking, light emission color, etc.) of the light emission display units 27R, 27L, and 27M as described above are unified among the three operation units in order to avoid unnecessary confusion and misunderstanding by the user. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the light emitting modes of the light emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are unified in the right operation unit 40R, the left operation unit 40L, and the central operation unit 40M.

In order to show that the input function of each input key is effective, there is also a method of making the operation unit of the input key emit light, but in that case, the light emitting unit is arranged directly under the operation unit of the input key and the operation unit is concerned. It is also necessary to manufacture the material with a light-transmitting material, and there is also a problem of ensuring the sensitivity of the operation unit of the input key, so that there are many problems in terms of structure and cost.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, as described above, the light emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided at adjacent positions while avoiding the operation unit of the input key. The term "adjacent" as used herein means a positional relationship in which the input key 43R1 and the light emitting display unit 27R are close to each other from the user's point of view and the one-to-one relationship can be instantly understood, such as the relationship between the input key 43R1 and the light emitting display unit 27R. .. Therefore, for example, the case where the input key 43R1 and the light emitting display unit 27R are partitioned by a structure such as a wall protruding upward with respect to the surface of the input key 43R1 is excluded. However, since the input key 43MC is particularly important for indicating the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a structure of illuminating with light from below is adopted.

In FIG. 20, thermal power display units 67L and 67R are provided at rear positions of the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L so as to indicate the thermal power stage during induction heating cooking.
These thermal power display units 67L and 67R indicate the thermal power stages in the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL by light emission (red). Nine stages from the rated minimum thermal power (thermal power level 1: 150 W) to the rated maximum thermal power (thermal power level 9: 3200 W) are shown by light.

The thermal power display units 67L and 67R are composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) installed in the space below the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L. The emission color may be changed depending on the magnitude of the thermal power. In the first embodiment, for example, the thermal power levels 1 and 2 are configured as follows.
(1) (Minimum) Thermal power level 1: 1 red lighting, 8 remaining blue lighting (2) Thermal power level 2: 2 red lighting, 7 remaining blue lighting In addition, the left end of the thermal power display units 67L, 67R The heat-retaining display unit that emits light and displays the LED when operated in the "heat-retaining mode" (see "display screen 3A" in FIG. 54) in which the object to be heated is heated with a heating power smaller than the minimum heating power level 1. 67H is provided.

On the left display unit 31L, the thermal power level value of the left heating unit 17HL is displayed by numbers 1 to 9. "1" is displayed when the minimum firepower level is 1, and "9" is displayed when the maximum firepower level is 9. The thermal power display on the left display unit 31L matches the thermal power stage displayed by the thermal power display unit 67L, and is displayed at the same timing.

Further, also in the right display unit 31R, the thermal power level value of the right heating unit 17HR is displayed by numbers 1 to 9. The display conditions are exactly the same as in the case of the left display unit 31L.

As can be seen from FIG. 20, the three light emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two thermal power display units 67L, 67R are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. Moreover, the three light emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two thermal power display units 67L, 67R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction.

In this way, the three light emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two thermal power display units 67L, 67R are on a straight line in the left-right direction behind the three input operation units 40L, 40M, 40R. Because it is lined up in, operability and visibility are good. Further, the integrated display unit 30, the left side display unit 31L, and the right side display unit 31R are also arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction, and the entire operation is performed from the viewpoint of the user who operates while standing on the front side of the cooking cooker 1. It has a good design and visibility.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, 68 is a heating source display unit arranged behind the integrated display unit 30.
Since the heating source display unit 68 uses a plurality of heating sources by using the central operation unit 40M, the heating source that is actually operating is displayed by the LED light.

The heating source display unit 68 is composed of three display units. The leftmost display unit 68L is a display unit indicating that the microwave heating source 189 is used, and the character "range" is displayed in the vicinity of the front side, so that microwave heating can be easily performed. I'm trying to understand.

The central display unit 68M is a display unit indicating a case where "grill cooking" is performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. "Grill" is written on the front side so that it can be easily understood that the food is grilled.

The rightmost display unit 68R is a display unit indicating the case where "oven cooking" is performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.

Unlike grill cooking, "oven cooking" grasps the temperature in the heating chamber 113 and reflects (feeds back) it to the energization control of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. These will be described in detail later.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, 69 is a high temperature display unit provided at a position immediately behind the heat source display unit 68. The high temperature display unit 69 causes the LED light emitting unit to emit light based on a command from the integrated control device MC, and displays that the temperature monitoring target portion is at a high temperature.
As will be described later, the integrated control device MC commands the high temperature display based on the temperature information from the temperature detection circuit 93 that receives the temperature detection signals from various temperature sensors and the heating chamber control unit 159.

The high temperature display unit 69 is not shown in FIG.
The high temperature display unit 69 defines three temperature monitoring target portions, a left heating unit 17HL, a heating chamber 113, and a right heating unit 17HR, and individually displays the status of these temperature monitoring target portions. Therefore, for example, after induction heating cooking in the left heating unit 17HL, it is possible to notify the user that the temperature in the range from the center to the left side of the top plate 15 corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL is high.

In order to shorten the period of high temperature display on the high temperature display unit 69 as much as possible, for example, if the temperature of the top plate 15 is still high immediately after the end of one induction heating cooking, the IH control unit 90. Continues the operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, and cools the internal space of the upper unit 100, that is, the upper space 300A by the outside air.

It will be described back to FIG.
Reference numeral 47 is a touch-type input key for an Internet connection command for requesting wireless communication from the integrated control device MC. Each time the input key 47 is pressed, the user is wirelessly connected to the home gateway 411 and can acquire information from the outside via the home gateway 411.

The 46L and 46R are windows for transmitting an infrared signal as a command signal for starting operation to the ventilation device 405 (range hood 422) installed outside. Below this window, an infrared transmitter 48 (see FIGS. 29 and 30) is installed. Actually, the windows 46L and 46R are covered with an inconspicuous surface sheet so as not to be visible from above the top plate 15. The sheet is, of course, made of a material that transmits infrared signals.

When manually displaying the details of the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 on the integrated display unit 30 while the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being executed, the input key 47 may be pressed. Specific inventory information is automatically displayed in all or part of the first area 30L to the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 for a certain period of time. In that case, the inventory information may be, for example, displayed as the name of the frozen food (for example, "rice" or "dumpling") and its amount (for one person, weight of 200 g, etc.).

While executing the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the heating cooker 1 automatically acquires inventory information at a predetermined timing regardless of the operation of the input key 47. This will be described later with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110.

In FIG. 19, reference numeral 49 denotes a wireless communication unit (communication module), which includes an antenna (not shown) and a transmission / reception circuit (not shown) that receive radio waves from the outside and transmit radio waves or infrared signals to the outside. I have. The wireless communication unit 49 is installed below the right end of the display board 41 at a slight distance from the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. The purpose of maintaining such an interval is that if the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 is too close to the bottom wall surface 16S, there is a concern that the radio wave reception sensitivity may be lowered.

In the state of being installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the upper surface of the cooking device 1 is exposed on the kitchen furniture 2. Therefore, the input operation unit 40 can also be operated from above, and the exhaust gas from the exhaust port side end portion 102E (see FIG. 15) of the exhaust duct 102 can also be discharged above the kitchen furniture 2.

(Control means of upper unit 100)
Next, the control means of the upper unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31.
In FIGS. 29 to 31, some configurations are omitted, and the filter circuit of the filter circuit board 54 is not described. Further, a part of the configuration of the lower unit 200 is also shown.

FIG. 29 shows the control means of the upper unit 100 and the control means of the lower unit 200. In FIG. 31, only the main control means in FIG. 29 is extracted, and the transmission / reception of control command signals, the power supply relationship, and the like are indicated by arrows.

In FIG. 30, reference numeral 97 denotes a main power switch that is opened and closed by the user, and is connected to a 200 V commercial power supply 99 via a power cord and a power plug (not shown). Reference numeral 91 is a power supply circuit to which electric energy is supplied via the main power supply switch 97, and reference numeral 92 is a direct current power conversion unit for converting AC power from a commercial power source into direct current. The power supply circuit 91 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 55 (see FIG. 25).

In FIGS. 29 and 30, the MC is an integrated control device and has the function of a main controller or a host computer. This integrated control device MC is a control device mainly composed of a microcomputer. A predetermined constant pressure current is supplied to the integrated control device MC from the power supply circuit 91.

As described above, the integrated control device MC is located on the lower surface of the central operation board 32 (indicated by a broken line frame in FIGS. 24 and 25). However, this may be arranged on the back (lower) surface side of the operation board 41. In any case, the integrated control device MC is built in the upper unit 100 and is not provided in the lower unit 200.

The integrated control device MC is composed of four parts, an input unit, an output unit, a storage unit, and a CPU (arithmetic control unit), and the storage unit stores the energization control programs of the three heating sources in advance. It is (stored). Further, apart from the storage unit (ROM, RAM) of the microcomputer, a large-capacity storage device (main memory) MM for recording abnormality monitoring information is built in. The storage device MM may store the energization control programs of the three heating sources.

Reference numeral 90 denotes an IH control unit that controls control during induction heating, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer. The IH control unit 90 stores (stores) in advance an energization control program corresponding to various control menus at the time of induction heating. It also has a built-in storage device (not shown) that records abnormality monitoring information.

A part of the function of the IH control unit 90 may be assigned to a second IH control unit 90A (not shown) provided separately. For example, a microcomputer may be mounted on the inverter circuit board 80, and the microcomputer may be in charge of input and output control of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

During all cooking operations such as induction cooking and microwave cooking, the presence or absence of an electrical abnormality is centrally monitored by the integrated control device MC.

In FIG. 30, 96 is a clock circuit also called a real-time clock, and power is supplied from a dedicated power supply (built-in battery) BT1 different from the power supply circuit 91 connected to the main power supply switch 97 for a long period of time. It is designed to be driven over. This may be, for example, a radio-controlled clock, which always informs the current date and the exact time in seconds if requested by the integrated control device MC, and is set to the correct date and time at the manufacturing stage of this cooking cooker 1. There is.

Even if the main power of the heating cooker 1 is turned off and then turned on again, the time information of the clock circuit 96 is not affected, and there is a function of always transmitting the latest correct time to the integrated control device MC. Therefore, the abnormality monitoring information recorded in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC is always recorded and stored at the same time with an accurate time. The clock circuit 96 may be omitted and the timekeeping function may be possessed by the integrated control device MC.

In FIG. 30, 72 is a power control unit (also referred to as a “demand control unit”). The power control unit 72 analyzes a command signal for induction heating or microwave heating by the integrated control device MC, and the total power consumption of the heating cooker 1 exceeds a specified value or an upper limit value individually set by the user. There is a function to monitor so that it does not exist, and a function to automatically limit the thermal power (power consumption) during induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating so that the total power consumption does not exceed the specified value or the arbitrarily set value. There is.

Generally, the "demand control device" or "demand control device" means a device that controls the value of demand (demand power). It automatically checks the power usage status, and if it is likely to exceed the set value, it will notify you with an alarm etc., and if you set the automatic stop of the device that can be stopped, the device itself will stop as decided. Automatically shut down possible electrical equipment. After that, it is known that the electric device is automatically restored after a certain period of time, and it is said that each household also exerts great power in contract power management with an electric power company.

The electric power control unit 72 of the first embodiment is provided so that the cooking cooker 1 itself has the above-mentioned power consumption suppressing function. The power control unit 72 may be provided as a control function in the integrated control device MC without providing special hardware, and a control program for demand may be incorporated in the integrated control device MC from the beginning, or may be provided. It can be realized even if it is added later.

The power control unit 72 of the first embodiment can set the maximum power consumption of the entire cooking cooker 1 by operating the function setting input key 43KP in only one of the four stages as described above. It should be noted that this setting can be set in the input operation unit 40 while observing the above-mentioned four-step numerical values displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when a plurality of specific keys in the input operation unit 40 are pressed at the same time. .. Such a simple setting method is introduced, for example, in Japanese Patent No. 6012780.

As described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, when the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated control device MC switches to the “functional mode”, and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 displays the “peak cut value”. Since the display that allows "setting" and "HEMS registration setting" is displayed, the function for suppressing the total power consumption of the cooking device 1 as described above can be easily additionally set, or the function can be changed or canceled. Can be done. In the determination of the "permission condition" described later, the data of the upper limit value of the maximum power consumption (total power consumption) set in the power control unit 72 is used.

Reference numeral 73 is a signal transmission unit provided for transmitting various control signals between the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200. For example, a signal line and a connector that can transmit a signal by wire are applicable. Further, for example, an infrared communication unit may be used so that signals can be exchanged wirelessly. The signal transmission unit 73 is also provided between the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90.

The IH control unit 90 obtains temperature information from the temperature detection circuit 93 and monitors whether or not the main part of the upper unit 100 has an abnormally high temperature. For example, electronic parts and semiconductor parts corresponding to the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, 43MT and the like are arranged in the central operation unit 40M, but since these parts are relatively sensitive to heat, a predetermined temperature is provided. It is monitored through the temperature detection circuit 93 so as not to exceed (for example, 60 ° C.).

The IH control unit 90 determines that the measured temperature is in the "abnormal preliminary state" when the temperature exceeds the predetermined temperature. The abnormal preliminary state is limited to the case where the detection temperature is in the range of 60 ° C to 65 ° C. If the temperature exceeds 65 ° C, the risk increases, and the IH control unit 90 recognizes it as a true abnormal condition.

In this abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation does not stop immediately, and control is performed to reduce the thermal power of the induction heating. However, when the temperature exceeds 65 ° C., an abnormal state is determined by the IH control unit 90, and the induction heating operation is immediately stopped. Specifically, for example, when the driven IH coil is the right side IH coil 17R, the power supply of the inverter circuit 81R that supplies high frequency power to the IH coil 17R is cut off. Then, the operation of the induction heating circuit 94R including the IH coil 17R and the capacitor for resonance is stopped. Note that 94L is an induction heating circuit for the left IH coil 17L.

In the above-mentioned abnormal preliminary state, it may be improved by increasing the blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 that cools the IH coil installation space CK of the upper unit 100 while maintaining the thermal power of the induction heating. Further, it may be used in combination with a measure for lowering the thermal power of induction heating.

Then, at least, the electrical and physical (as an example, the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 described above) change state of the main part during the induction heating during the period from the abnormal preliminary state to the emergency stop is shown (abnormality monitoring). The information is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90.

In the above-mentioned abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation does not stop immediately, and the ventilation capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 is not increased (the rotation speed of the rotary blade is not changed), and the IH coils 17L and 17R are used. The firepower may be improved by forcibly lowering it.

The abnormality monitoring information stored in the storage device of the IH control unit 90 is acquired during the period from the time when the start command is received from the integrated control device MC until the cooking is normally completed. Therefore, the information on the "IH control menu" (for example, "boiler", "simmered", "fried food", etc. in the case of the left operation unit 40L) in the single cooking mode KM1 and the thermal power of the induction heating is also in chronological order. Recorded. If an emergency stop is caused due to an abnormal state on the way, the abnormality monitoring information and the information for identifying the IH control menu are stored in the storage device 90R in chronological order up to that point.

Further, in the first embodiment, in order to monitor the operation of the cooking cooker 1 over a wider range and acquire data, after turning on the main power switch 97, all the heating on the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 side is performed. The integrated control device MC has acquired the monitoring information regarding the cooking state. The integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information for the presence or absence of an abnormality from the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 via the signal transmission unit 73.

In the inverter circuit board 80, an inverter circuit 81R dedicated to the IH coil 17R on the right side and an inverter circuit 81L dedicated to the IH coil 17L on the left side are mounted one by one.

The two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are driven independently of each other by the IH control unit 90. When these inverter circuits are generically referred to, "81" is used as the reference numeral.

Details of the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, 95 is a speech synthesizer that synthesizes electronically created speech. The voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user of an input operation and a notification when an abnormality occurs by voice from the speaker 95S each time. The voice synthesizer 95 is a part constituting the notification unit AN (see FIG. 29).

The temperature detection circuit 93 described above is connected to at least seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9. Specifically, there are temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 for detecting the temperature of the top plate 15, the ambient temperature of the IH coil installation space CK, the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80, the temperature of the integrated display unit 30, and the like. .. The temperature detection circuit 93 receives temperature detection information from the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, respectively, and sends the temperature detection results to the IH control unit 90.

The temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 may be either a non-contact type such as an infrared sensor or a contact type such as a thermistor, and they are used alone or in combination.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are non-contact sensors such as infrared sensors. As shown in FIG. 19, these two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are arranged in the gaps in the center of the IH coils 17L and 17R, respectively, and receive infrared signals from the top plate 15 direction. That is, this makes it possible to measure the bottom surface temperature of the object to be heated, such as a metal pan or frying pan containing the object to be cooked, in a non-contact manner.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 use a thermistor as a contact type sensor. These temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 are in direct contact with the lower surface of the top plate 15, or are in contact with the lower surface of the top plate 15 via a heat conductive inclusion. This makes it possible to measure the temperature of the top plate 15.

One of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, the temperature sensor TS7 (see FIG. 19), uses a thermistor as a contact type sensor and is installed on the upper surface of the holder 50. Then, the atmospheric temperature of the integrated display unit 30 and the input operation unit 40 is detected. Further, the two temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 use a thermistor and are attached to the upper surface of the heat sink 82 as described above.

The lower unit 200 is also provided with at least two temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 in order to detect the internal space temperature of the lower unit 200, but the details will be described later. As described above, a thermistor type temperature sensor TS10 that detects the internal atmospheric temperature of the heating chamber 113 is also installed.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, 62 is a cooling fan drive circuit, which controls the drive power of the drive motors 60M and 61M of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61. That is, the ventilation capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are independently changed from each other in multiple stages by the control by the cooling fan drive circuit 62.

In FIG. 30, reference numeral 63 denotes a display unit drive circuit, which can control the operation of the integrated display unit 30, the left side display unit 31L, and the right side display unit 31R, and has a function of displaying necessary information.
The display unit drive circuit 63 may be configured by a dedicated microcomputer. Further, the control program (software) that exerts the function of the display unit drive circuit 63 may be incorporated in the integrated control device MC. The display unit drive circuit 63 is mounted on the upper surface of the operation board 41 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

In FIG. 30, 84 is a vibration sensing device that detects shaking when an earthquake occurs, and when it detects a predetermined seismic intensity (acceleration) or higher, it sends a vibration detection signal to the integrated control device MC, and the integrated control device MC Upon receiving the signal, it is determined that an earthquake has occurred, and the power supply of all the heating means in use is cut off instantly.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, reference numeral 49 denotes a wireless communication unit also shown in FIG. 19, which transmits information in response to a command from the integrated control device MC. In addition, information from the outside is acquired in response to a command from the integrated control device MC. For example, it receives a "peak cut signal" that reduces total power consumption.

In the first embodiment, the abnormality detection unit EM detects various abnormalities related to the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) capable of detecting various abnormalities generated on the top plate 15 and the electrical components inside the upper space 300A. An abnormality detection unit 2 (EM2) that can detect an abnormality and an abnormality detection unit 3 (EM3) that can detect various abnormalities related to electrical components inside the lower unit 300B are provided.

The main abnormalities that can be detected by the abnormality detecting unit 1 (EM1) include, for example, the following three types of abnormalities 1 to 3.
Abnormality 1: When the water or cooking liquid contained in the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 boils and blows out, and an abnormality is detected.
Abnormal 2: During induction heating, the bottom surface of the object to be heated (metal pot, etc.) N is deformed (the degree of curvature is expanded), and it is determined that the mounting state is abnormal (determined by the IH control unit 90).
Abnormality 3: When the object to be heated (metal pot, etc.) is moved during induction heating and is not immediately returned to the original heating unit (determined by the IH control unit 90).

In addition to this, there are also the following abnormalities 4 and 5.
Abnormality 4: When the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the control command contents (corresponding with the abnormality detection unit 2).
Abnormality 5: When the rotation speeds of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 do not match the control command contents (corresponding with the abnormality detection unit 3).

The functions of the abnormality detection unit 2 (EM2) are, for example, a temperature detection circuit 93 (see FIG. 30) for acquiring temperature information from the temperature sensors TS8 and TS9, and a temperature determination circuit (FIG. 30) included in the IH control unit 90. I can't show it) and is in charge. Further, an abnormality (abnormality 4) relating to the rotation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can be detected by the cooling fan drive circuit 62.

The functions of the abnormality detection unit 3 (EM3) are, for example, a microwave heating control unit 130 (see FIG. 30) that acquires temperature information from the temperature sensor TS1 and a heating chamber control that acquires temperature information from the temperature sensor TS10. Department 159 (see FIG. 30) is in charge.
Further, it also corresponds to the case where the rotation speed of the third cooling fan 128 does not match the content of the control command from the heating chamber control unit 159.

Further, the abnormality detection unit 3 (EM3) is in charge of the microwave heating control unit 130, and detects a rotation or rotation defect of the motor 126 that rotates or rotates the antenna 125 (see FIG. 15).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the abnormality detection unit EM is configured separately from the IH control unit 90 on the hardware, but the software that constitutes the control program of the IH control unit 90 and the integrated control device MC. It may be configured by incorporating it into a part of the wear.

The abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) adopted in the first embodiment flows to the detection electrode (not shown) arranged on the back surface of the top plate 15 and the detection electrode in order to correspond to the above-mentioned “abnormality 1”. It is equipped with a determination circuit (not shown) that monitors changes in the current and determines that hot water, cooking liquid, or the like has boiled and overflowed from the object N to be heated during induction heating.

When the abnormality detection unit EM (EM1) detects an abnormality, the abnormality detection unit EM (EM1) transmits an abnormality detection signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the integrated control device MC issues an emergency stop command signal to the IH control unit 90 to urgently stop the heating units 17HL and 17HR during the heating operation. Even in this case, the operation of the two cooling fans 60 and 61 continues.

Further, when only the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) of the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality in the upper unit 100, microwave heating or oven cooking (in the case of the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode) in the heating chamber 113. When) is executed, the cooling fans 128, 129 of the lower unit 200 continue to operate without being affected. These will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47.

The abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) for detecting various abnormalities generated on the top plate 15 is as described above.

In the first embodiment, in addition to the temperature of the heat sink 82 itself, the atmospheric temperature in the vicinity of the integrated liquid crystal display unit 30 is set by the temperature detection circuit 93 as another abnormality detection unit during the induction heating operation and during a certain period thereafter. , Repeated measurement (abnormality detection unit 2).
Therefore, the IH control unit 90 that has acquired the measurement data of the temperature detection circuit 93 monitors so as not to exceed the temperature regulation value around the integrated display unit 30. Therefore, the abnormality detection unit 2 (EM2) also includes the temperature detection circuit 93 and the IH control unit 90.

The rotation abnormality of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is in the category of the abnormality detection unit 2 (EM2) and the abnormality detection unit 3 (EM3). For example, with respect to the first cooling fan 60, the cooling fan drive circuit 62 measures the input current for rotation drive with a current sensor, and frequency-analyzes the current to detect rotation abnormality. When an abnormality is detected, unlike the case of abnormality 1, the rotation drive is immediately stopped to stop the cooling fan 60 (abnormality detection unit 2).

Regarding the "abnormality 4", in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the abnormality detecting unit 2 (EM2) has a function of detecting an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 as described above. Have. When the abnormality detection unit EM2 (EM2) detects an abnormality in one or both of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 during the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2, the integrated control device MC cooperates with the above. The operation of the cooking mode is canceled, the driving of all the heating means during the heating operation is stopped, and the operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is immediately stopped.

Therefore, when an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is detected, all the heating sources automatically stop the operation, and the safety is high. Further, since the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are immediately stopped, if the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are out of order, it is possible to avoid aggravating the situation.

(Lower unit 200)
Next, the lower unit 200 will be described.
In FIGS. 12 to 17, 101 is a lower case (lower housing) constituting the outer shell of the main body 110 of the lower unit 200. The lower case 101 is formed by pressing a single metal thin plate such as a zinc steel plate, or by joining a plurality of metal thin plates by spot welding or screws. The first embodiment is composed of three thin metal plates as described below.

101H is a body portion forming three surfaces (vertical surfaces) at the rear and left and right portions of the lower case 101, and 101U is a flat plate-shaped bottom plate that completely closes the bottom opening of the body portion 101U. 101C is an inclined portion, and is a wall surface inclined forward as it goes downward so as not to hit the installation port 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 when the cooking device 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2.

The 101F is a front plate constituting the front surface of the lower case 101, and is a flat plate as a whole. When the door 114 is closed, the rear surface of the door 114 is in close contact with the front surface of the front plate 101F so that microwaves do not leak from the gap between the front plate 101F and the door 114. Reference numeral 101B is a rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) that continuously rises vertically to the upper end of the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101.

The lower unit 200 includes two independent heating sources. One of them is the microwave heating source 189 of the microwave heating device 120. The other is the oven heating source 188 of the oven heating device 140.

The oven heating source 188 heats the heating chamber (oven storage) 113 from the outside of the wall surface thereof, but may be present inside the heating chamber 113 and directly heat the food to be cooked. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, the "microwave heating source 189" will be described on the premise that the "inverter circuit board 121" described later is not included.

12, 13, and 15 show the main parts of the microwave heating device 120.
From the front side, the main parts are installed in the following order.
An inverter circuit board 121 (see FIG. 14) on which the inverter circuit 121A (see FIG. 30) is mounted is arranged on the frontmost side.

Behind the inverter circuit board 121, a magnetron 122 that is a source of microwaves and a waveguide 123 that surrounds the oscillating portion 122A of the magnetron 122 are arranged.

Further, behind the waveguide 123, an antenna case 124 connected to the waveguide 123 and an antenna 125 in the antenna case are arranged respectively.
Behind the antenna case 124, a motor 126 that rotates or rotates the antenna 125 during microwave heating is arranged (see FIG. 15).

In FIG. 13, 127 is a power supply circuit board that supplies electric power to the output of microwave heating and the magnetron 122, and is described later with a power supply circuit unit 120P (not shown) that receives commercial power from the filter circuit 54. A microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 128 is a third cooling fan, which is arranged directly below the box-shaped case A150 accommodating the inverter circuit board 121. The entire lower surface of the case A150 is open. That is, it has a box shape without a bottom surface.

Reference numeral 129 is a fourth cooling fan, which is arranged directly below the box-shaped case B151 on which the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is placed. Several heat radiation fins are formed in parallel in the heat radiation unit 122H for the cooling air from the fourth cooling fan 129 to pass through. The case B151 has a box shape with the entire lower surface open and no bottom surface.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 may be collectively referred to as a "lower cooling fan". This is because these two cooling fans 128 and 199 have a function of cooling the inside of the lower space 300B.

The case A150 constitutes one of the inlet ends of the lower air passage UH.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the case A150 has a vertical portion 308 extending in the vertical direction away from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 at a position directly above the intake port 152F.
The inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 188 is housed in the vertical portion 308 in the vertical direction.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are, for example, axial fans. Then, it is supported by the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 so that the rotation axis in the center of the rotary blade is in the vertical (vertical) direction.

As described above, the case A150 and the case B151 have an entire bottom surface open, and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are arranged inside the openings so as to lie down, respectively.

In FIG. 12, the wind direction plates 199 provided in two rows inside the case A150 are integrally or separately formed inside the case A150. The wind direction plate 199 is installed in order to efficiently flow the cooling air from the third cooling fan 128 to the inverter circuit board 121 and the two communication ports 138A and 138B described later.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 152F is an intake port on the front side and is formed on the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. The air intake is composed of a number of small circular through holes, or rectangular or oval through holes. The intake port 152F is for the third cooling fan 128.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 152B is an intake port on the rear side and is formed on the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. The air intake is composed of a number of small circular through holes, or rectangular or oval through holes. The intake port 152B is for the fourth cooling fan 129.

As shown in FIG. 14, the ventilation hole (first intake port) 164 for introducing the outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 into the inside of the upper unit 100, and the outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189. The second intake ports 152B and 152F for introducing the above into the lower unit 200 are arranged on opposite sides of the heating chamber 113.

In other words, when the heating cooker 1 is viewed from the front side, the second intake ports 152B and 152F are on the right side of the heating chamber 113, and the ventilation holes (first intake port) are on the left side. There are 164 and vents 64.

In FIG. 13, reference numeral 153 is a duct installed above the heat radiating unit 122H, and guides the cooling air RF6 from the fourth cooling fan 129 that has passed through the heat radiating unit 122H to the downstream side as shown in FIG. It is a thing.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 154 is a case C, and houses the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control unit 130 in a sealed state. The case C154 is made of a plastic material having excellent electrical insulation.

The case C154 is configured by superimposing the lid 154A on the rear side and the container-shaped or box-shaped main body 154B on the front side. The lid 154A closes the large opening formed on the front surface side of the main body 154B from the rear.

In the case C154, a power supply circuit board 127 and a board (not shown) to which the microwave heating control unit 130 is attached are attached to the main body 154B on the front side. At the time of maintenance and inspection, the lid 154A is opened so that various inspections and repairs of the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control unit 130 inside can be performed.

The case C154 is installed as far as possible from the back surface of the heating chamber 113 so as not to be affected by the heat from the heating chamber 113. Further, it is installed away from the bottom plate 101U so that even if a liquid such as water or a cooking liquid enters the inside of the lower case 101 from the upper unit 100 side, the electrical insulation property is not impaired. ing.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the space having the largest facing distance between the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 is the cavity 104.
In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 forming a part of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113, and the case is behind the waveguide 123. C154 is arranged long in the left-right direction.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the front horizontal wall 101T made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101 is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101 rearward. The support metal fitting 198 on the lower case 101 side is fixed to the upper case 16.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 131 is a door open / close detection mechanism provided as a countermeasure against radio wave leakage during microwave heating.
In order to ensure the safety of the microwave heating device, it is legally required to install the door open / close detection mechanism 131. A typical door open / close detection mechanism 131 of this type is known in patent documents such as Japanese Patent No. 4372099 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147.

According to the above patent document, as the door open / close detection mechanism 131, three types of switches, a latch switch, a door switch, and a monitor switch, are built in, and these switches are interlocked with the opening / closing of the door to detect the opening / closing with a time lag. Has been proposed.

Further, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147, the power supply of the inverter circuit is opened and closed by the first interlock switch and the second interlock switch, and the first interlock switch is inserted into the power supply circuit when a short circuit failure occurs. It has been proposed to provide a monitor switch to turn off the fuse.

12 and 13 show the main parts of the door open / close detection mechanism 131 used in the first embodiment. In these figures, 132A is a latch switch and 132B is a door switch. When either one or both of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B are not opened due to an abnormality, the monitor switch 133 (FIG. 6) for shutting off the power supply of the inverter circuit 121A mounted on the inverter circuit board 121. Not shown) is also provided.

The latch switch 132A is pushed by a pin 134 fixed and protruding on the door 114 side to open and close the built-in contact. The door switch 132B is pushed by a pin 135 fixed to the door 114 side and protruding, and a built-in contact is opened and closed.

In FIG. 12, 136A is an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the latch switch 132A, and is urged toward the door by a compression spring (not shown) so as to always return to the door side.
Reference numeral 136B is an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the door switch 132B, and is urged toward the door by a compression spring so as to always return to the door side.

In FIG. 12, reference numeral 137 is a support plate to which the latch switch 132A, the door switch 132B, the monitor switch 133 (not shown), the interlocking rods 136A, 136B, and the like are collectively attached. The support plate 137 is fixed to the lower case 101 by a plurality of screws. The door open / close detection mechanism 131 is mainly configured with various switches mounted on the support plate 137 in this way.

If there is a variation in the mounting position of the latch switch 132A or the door switch 132B in the manufacturing process, there is a concern that the timing of operating each switch may deviate from the specified value. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the closing detection unit 139 (see FIG. 30) of the door 114, which will be described later, is attached to the support plate 137 so that the entire support plate 137 can be removed. Specifically, as described above, the lower case 101 is firmly fixed to the support plate 137 with a plurality of screws. During manufacturing and after-sales service, the operation of the closure detection unit 139 can be checked, adjusted, and replaced.

In FIGS. 12 and 14, 138A is a communication port formed in the upper part of the case A150 accommodating the inverter circuit board 121, and 138B is a communication port formed in the upper and lower intermediate portions of the case A150.

As shown in FIG. 14, the communication port 138A guides a part of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to the space 141 described later.

As shown in FIG. 14, the communication port 138B guides a part of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to the space 142 described later, and uses it for cooling the infrared temperature sensor 160 described later. There is.

The temperature sensor 160 includes a hollow sensor case (not shown), a sensor substrate housed inside the sensor case (not shown), and one or more infrared rays mounted on the surface of the sensor substrate. A detection element (not shown) and a lens (not shown) that faces the infrared detection element and is attached and fixed to the sensor case are configured as main components.

The temperature sensors 160 may be provided at a plurality of locations in the heating chamber 113 so that the temperature can be detected in a wide range, and the direction of the temperature sensor 160 is not fixed and is automatically swung within a certain angle range. It may be in the form of detecting the temperature at a wide angle.

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 161 is a detection window facing the temperature sensor 160, and a gap may be formed between the temperature sensor 160 and the outer peripheral surface of the temperature sensor 160 so that cooling air can pass therethrough. In the first embodiment, a gap of about several mm is formed.

In FIGS. 14 and 15, 162 is a cooking dish made of porcelain or heat resistant plastic. The cooking dish 162 is formed to have external dimensions so that it can be taken out and put in from the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 14, the HV is an effective height dimension from the upper surface of the cooking dish 162 to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113. In FIG. 15, HX is the maximum height dimension from the upper surface of the cooking dish 162 to the ceiling surface of the recess 113T formed in the center of the heating chamber 113.

In the first embodiment, the effective height dimension HV is 94 mm and the maximum height dimension HX is 100 mm. This is an example, and the present disclosure is not limited to the configuration of this dimension.

In FIG. 14, WH is the inner width dimension of the heating chamber 113. Since the heating chamber 113 is formed up to the front opening 113A in this inner width dimension, it can be said to be a frontage dimension that determines whether or not a cooking utensil such as an object to be cooked or a frying pan can be inserted. The inner width dimension WH is 310 mm.

In FIG. 15, WB is the depth dimension of the heating chamber 113. Similar to the width dimension WH (see FIG. 14), it can be said to be a dimension that determines whether or not a cooking utensil such as an object to be cooked, a cooking dish 162, and a frying pan can be inserted. This depth dimension WB is about 310 mm.

The oven heating source 188 has a heater 163.
The heater 163 is an electric radiation type heater that heats the heating chamber 113 from the outside, for example, a sheathed heater. Alternatively, it is a mica heater in which a heater wire is wound around the entire thin support plate made of mica.

The heater 163 is composed of two, an upper heater 163A and a lower heater 163B. The energization of these two heaters 163A and 163B is controlled independently of each other.
Reference numeral 163A is an upper heater fixed in close contact with or close to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and 163B is a lower heater fixed in close contact with or close to the bottom surface of the heating chamber 113. ..

The upper heater 163A can select a multi-stage thermal power in the range of a maximum thermal power of 1000 W to a minimum thermal power of 50 W. As for the lower heater, a multi-stage thermal power can be selected in the range of a maximum thermal power of 1000 W to a minimum thermal power of 50 W.

In FIG. 14, 166R is a right partition plate vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5R between the heating chamber 113 and the right wall surface, and is formed of a thin metal plate.
166L is a left partition plate vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5L between the heating chamber 113 and the left wall surface, and is formed of a thin metal plate.
A heat insulating material (not shown) is inserted into the gaps GP5L and GP5R on the left and right sides of the heating chamber 113 to suppress heat conduction (heat dissipation) from the heating chamber 113.

Reference numeral 167 is an upper heat shield plate that covers the entire upper part of the upper heater 163A, and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.
The GP6 is a gap formed between the upper heat shield plate 167 and the upper heater 163A, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP6 is a closed space so that air does not flow to the outside. The peripheral edge of the upper heat shield plate 167 is fixed to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact with the upper end edge of the right side partition plate 166R and the left side partition plate 166L.

168 is a lower heat shield plate having a vertically symmetrical vertical cross-sectional shape with the upper heat shield plate 167. The lower heat shield plate covers the entire lower part of the lower heater 163B, and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.

The GP 7 is a gap formed between the lower heat shield plate 168 and the lower heater 163B, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. This void is a closed space so that air does not flow to the outside. The peripheral edge of the lower heat shield plate 168 is fixed to the bottom wall surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact with the lower end edge of the right side partition plate 166R and the left side partition plate 166L.

Reference numeral 169 is an upper case that is overlapped with the peripheral portion of the upper heat shield plate 167 so as to cover the entire upper portion of the upper heat shield plate 167. Reference numeral 170 is a lower case that is overlapped with the peripheral portion of the lower heat shield plate 168 so as to cover the entire lower portion of the lower heat shield plate 168.

As shown in FIG. 14, the upper case 169 and the lower case 170 have a vertically symmetrical shape and are made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic. The GP8 is a gap formed between the upper case 169 and the upper heat shield plate 167, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. The gap GP8 is a closed space so that air does not flow to and from the outside.

The GP9 is a gap formed between the lower case 170 and the lower heat shield plate 168, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP9 is also a closed space so that air does not flow.

A sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175A (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP6. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175B (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP8.

A sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175C (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP7. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175D (not shown) is arranged in the GP9. If each of these heat insulating materials 175A to 175D has a form in which a plurality of layers are stacked instead of a one-layer structure, the heat insulating performance is further improved. The planar size (vertical / horizontal dimensions) of each of the heat insulating materials 175A to 17D is at least larger than the respective installation ranges of the upper heater 163 and the lower heater 163B.

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 171 is a partition plate in which a passage 172 through which the cooling air RF5 flows is partitioned above the upper case 169. A communication port 173 is opened in the upper part of the rear wall surface of the partition plate 171, and the inlet end of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to the communication port 173.

In FIG. 15, reference numeral 174 is a communication port formed at the rear portion of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and the entrance portion of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to the communication port 174. 102E is a terminal portion that is the final outlet of the cooling air.

As shown in FIG. 15, the exhaust duct 102 includes two independent internal passages 102A and 102B at the top and bottom, and the inverter circuit board 121 is cooled in the internal passage 102A on the upper side thereof. After that, the cooling air RF5 flows.
Further, in the other internal passage 102B, the cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 and having an increased temperature flows.

As will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32, the exhaust duct 102 includes an internal passage (internal route) 102A passing through the outside of the heating chamber 113 and an internal passage (internal route) 102B passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113. This is the part where they meet.

The wind speed of the cooling air RF5 is increased by the discharge port of the cooling air RF5 in which the opening area of the air passage is narrowed. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 is attracted by the cooling air RF5 in the vicinity of the discharge port. By such an action, the gas inside the heating chamber 113 is sucked into the internal passage 102B.
As a result, both the two cooling air RF5 and RF6 are efficiently discharged to the outside of the cooking device 1 from the exhaust port 20. It should be noted that instead of adopting such an attraction structure, a method of merging at the upstream stage before entering the exhaust duct 102 may be adopted.

In FIG. 15, 180 is a large feeding port formed on the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113, and 181 is a cover that closes the feeding port 180 from the outside, and is a heat-resistant plastic that transmits microwaves. It is formed in the shape of a plate from heat-resistant glass. The cover 181 is fixed to the outside of the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B.

The cover 181 is in close contact with the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B. The antenna case 124 is fixed to the back wall 113B of the heating chamber 113 so as to cover the entire back side of the cover 181. The cover 181 is inserted inside the front opening of the antenna case 124 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 15, 123 is a waveguide connected to the back side of the cover 181. The antenna driving motor 126 is thus fixed to the back surface side of the waveguide 123 via a heat-resistant sealing material 184.

The 126A is a rotation shaft of the antenna driving motor 126, and is installed horizontally in the front-rear direction. The antenna 125 is fixed to the free end side (front end portion) of the rotating shaft 126A. Although the rotating shaft 126A is made of plastic or ceramic material, only a certain range from the antenna 125 side is made of metal, and from there to the antenna driving motor 126 is heat-resistant and insulated from plastic, ceramic, etc. It may be formed of a material rich in properties.

In FIG. 15, reference numeral 185 is a radio wave sealing chamber formed around the rotation shaft 126A with a predetermined dimension around the rotation shaft 126A. This radio wave sealing chamber has a so-called choke chamber structure. Further, in order to prevent microwave leakage more effectively, a radio wave absorber (not shown) is arranged closer to the antenna driving motor 126 than the choke structure, and microwaves from the periphery of the rotating shaft 126A are arranged. You may try to prevent leakage. As for the choke structure in the microwave heating device, Japanese patent documents include, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-174669, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-255978, and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 63-172828 (a quarter wavelength choke). Since there is a combination of a room and a radio wave absorber), detailed explanation will be omitted.

In FIG. 15, LA shows the dimensions from the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113 to the tail end of the antenna driving motor 126. Hereinafter, this dimension is referred to as "protruding dimension". It is desirable to reduce this protruding dimension LA, but in reality, as described above, the dimensions of the antenna case 124 and the radio wave sealing chamber 185 are also required, and even if the external dimensions of the antenna driving motor 126 are reduced, there is a limit. There is. This protrusion dimension LA is 70 mm.

In FIG. 15, GP10 is a gap between the back surface of the antenna drive motor 126 and the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101, 69 mm at the upper end of the motor 126, and conversely, the gap between the lower end and the lower case 101C is 53 mm. Degree. It is dimensionally impossible to arrange the case C154 in the gap GP10. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the case C154 is arranged so as to be displaced to the right from directly behind (behind) the antenna drive motor 126.
This makes it possible to incorporate the microwave heating device 120 in a narrow space behind the heating chamber 113.

(Door 114)
Next, the internal structure of the door 114 will be described.
In FIG. 15, 190 is a metal or plastic frame constituting the outer shell of the door 114, and is formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front side. Reference numeral 192 is an inner frame, which is made of a metal plate. An opening serving as a viewing window 192W is formed in the central portion of the inner frame 192.

Reference numeral 191 is a cover in which an outer peripheral edge portion is fixed between the inner frame 192 and the frame 190 so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 192, and is transparent and heat resistant so that the heating chamber 113 can be seen. It is made of plastic or glass.

Reference numeral 193 is an inner seal frame having innumerable small holes having dimensions that do not allow microwaves to pass through the portion corresponding to the viewing window 192W. The inner seal frame is formed by press-molding a thin metal plate as a whole, and a choke chamber 194 having an inlet (slit) formed on the heating chamber 113 side is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion.

Reference numeral 195 is a sealing plate made of a thin metal plate. As shown in FIG. 15, the outer peripheral edge portion of the seal plate 195 is bent in a series toward the inner seal frame 193 side. The choke chamber 194 is a space surrounded by the outer peripheral edge portion of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193.

When the door 114 is completely closed, both the outer peripheral edge portion of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193 are in contact with the surface of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. Therefore, the microwave supplied to the inside of the heating chamber 113 does not leak from the door 114 and the opening 113A on the front surface of the heating chamber 113.

Reference numeral 196 is a transparent sealing plate provided inside the portion of the inner frame 192 corresponding to the viewing window 192W, and is made of heat-resistant glass. Reference numeral 197 is a metal upper shielding plate having a width dimension equal to at least the width of the door 114 along the upper surface of the door 114. The upper shielding plate 197 is provided in an eaves shape close to the upper surface of the door 114, and is fixed to the lower case 101 with a fixing tool such as a metal screw so as to be electrically connected to the lower case 101.

Since the lower portion of the door 114 is supported by a hinge 176 (see FIGS. 12 and 13) in the lower case 101, the door 114 can be opened to a horizontal position by pulling the door 114 toward the handle portion 115.
At the initial stage of such opening, there is a concern that a gap is momentarily generated in the overlapping portion between the door 114 and the lower case 101 and a part of the microwave leaks. However, in the first embodiment, the upper shielding plate 197 is used. Thereby, such unwanted microwave leakage can be suppressed above the door 114.

As described with reference to FIG. 5, in view of the fact that the height dimension C1 of the front lowering portion 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 is recommended to be 40 mm or less, in FIGS. 16 and 17, H10 is the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. The height is from to the lower surface of the flange 16A. In the first embodiment, it is set to 40 mm.

As described above, since the height dimension C1 of the front lowering portion 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 and the height dimension H10 below the flange 16A of the upper case 16 are the same (40 mm), when installed in the kitchen furniture 2 The upper case 16 does not protrude below the front lowering portion 2F. Therefore, the space below the upper case 16 becomes larger than before, which is advantageous when the lower case 101 is installed as described below.

In FIG. 17, reference numeral 201 denotes an introduction port formed in the front portion of the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, which is formed of a large number of through holes having a diameter so as not to leak microwaves. The reason why the introduction port 201 is provided in the front portion of the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 is to supply a part of the cooling air RF6 to the vicinity of the inside of the door 114 and suppress fogging of the viewing window 192W of the door 114. be.
The cooling air RF6 after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is guided to the introduction port 201 by the gap GP5R.

The temperature sensor 160 is located upstream of the introduction port 201 in the flow of the cooling air RF6, and a part of the cooling air RF6 is blown into the heating chamber 113 at the portion of the temperature sensor 160. The amount of cooling air RF6 reaching the introduction port 201 is small. However, the purpose of injecting air from the introduction port 201 is to "suppress fogging" of the seal plate 196 inside the door 114, and there is no problem with a small air volume. It is not necessary to adopt the supply of air from the narrow gap around the temperature sensor 160.

(Control means of lower unit 200)
Next, the details of the various control means in the lower unit 200 will be described with reference to the block diagram shown in FIG. 30 again.
In FIG. 30, the microwave heating control unit 130 controls the electric power supplied to the inverter circuit 121A of the inverter circuit board 121, the magnetron 122, the antenna driving motor 126, and the two cooling fans 128 and 129, and these are controlled. It controls the start, stop, operating conditions, etc. of the operation of.

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control unit 130 is prepared separately from the power supply circuit 91 mounted on the power supply circuit board 55, and is a dedicated circuit of the microwave heating device 120. The power may be supplied from the power supply circuit 91.

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 12). Various electric components (diodes and the like) that convert AC power to DC are mounted on the power circuit board 127, and are housed in a sealed state in the case C154.

When the microwave heating control unit 130 receives the command signal from the power control unit 72, the microwave heating control unit 130 operates so as to reduce the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 in response to the command signal, and outputs the magnetron 122. There is a function of transmitting a command signal that lowers the power consumption to the inverter circuit 121A.

The microwave heating control unit 130 includes a temperature sensor TS1 that detects the temperature of the heat radiation unit 122H of the magnetron 122. If the temperature of the heat radiating unit 122H of the magnetron 122 is higher than the specified value even after microwave cooking is completed, the command signal for continuing the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 until the temperature drops is sent to the fourth cooling. Send to fan 129. In FIG. 30, the cooling fan drive circuit for the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 is not shown.

Reference numeral 139 is a closing detection unit for the door 114. The closure detection unit 139 determines the open / close status of any one or two or more of the latch switch 132A, the second door switch 132B (see FIG. 12), and the monitor switch 133 (not shown) by the current flowing through each circuit or the open / close signal. It is electrically detected. That is, it is a detection unit corresponding to the operation of the door open / close detection mechanism 131 described above.

Since the circuit board constituting the closure detection unit 139 is attached to the support plate 137, whether or not the circuit board can be operated normally by removing the support plate 137 for inspection or measuring with the support plate 137 installed. Can be inspected (see FIG. 12).

Reference numeral 158 is a non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit) that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, and receives the temperature sensor 160 and the measurement signal from the temperature sensor. It consists of a circuit (not shown) that analyzes and converts it into temperature information.

The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the electric power supplied to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and controls the start and stop of their operation, operating conditions (thermal power, that is, calorific value) and the like. The control circuit of the heating chamber control unit 159 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 13).

When the heating chamber control unit 159 receives the command signal from the power control unit 72, the heating chamber control unit 159 operates so as to reduce the total power consumption of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B in response to the command signal, and the upper heater 163A. And there is a function to transmit a command signal that lowers the output of the lower heater 163. In addition, in order to reduce the outputs of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163, the energization rate per unit time is changed to change the substantial thermal power.

(Drive circuit of induction heating source 9)
Next, the configuration of the drive circuit of the IH coils 17L and 17R of the cooking cooker 1 will be described. For the sake of brevity, FIG. 33 illustrates an example of a circuit showing only one IH coil 17R.

In the heating cooker 1, the induction heating operation is performed by supplying high frequency power to the IH coils 17L and 17R by the drive circuit 74.
The drive circuit 74 is provided for each IH coil. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the drive circuit 74 of the IH coil 17R on the right side. Even with the IH coil 17L on the left side, the drive circuit may be the same or different.

As shown in FIG. 33, the drive circuit 74 includes a DC power supply circuit 75, an inverter circuit 81R, a resonance capacitor 76, an input current detection unit 77a, and an output current detection unit 77b.
The current detection data of the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detection unit 77b are sent to the IH control unit 90.

The input current detection unit 77a detects the current input from the AC power supply 99 to the DC power supply circuit 22, that is, the current input to the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal indicating the detected value, that is, the input current value to the IH control unit 90. Output to. 99 is a commercial AC power supply.

The DC power supply circuit 75 includes a diode bridge 78a, a reactor 78b, and a smoothing capacitor 78c, converts an AC voltage input from the AC power supply 99 into a DC voltage, and outputs the AC voltage to the inverter circuit 81R.

The inverter circuit 81R is a so-called half-bridge type inverter in which the IGBTs 79a and 79b as the switching element 83 are connected in series to the output of the DC power supply circuit 75. In the inverter circuit 81R, diodes 79c and 79d are connected in parallel with the IGBTs 79a and 79b as flywheel diodes, respectively.
The inverter 81R converts the DC power output from the DC power supply circuit 75 into high-frequency AC power of about 20 kHz to 80 kHz, so-called high-frequency power, and supplies the DC power to the resonance circuit including the IH coil 17R and the resonance capacitor 76.

The resonance circuit including the resonance capacitor 76 has a resonance frequency corresponding to the inductance of the IH coil 17R, the capacitance of the resonance capacitor 76, and the like.

With this configuration, a high-frequency current of about several tens of A flows through the IH coil 17R, and the high-frequency magnetic flux generated by the flowing high-frequency current induces the heated object N on the top plate 15 directly above the IH coil 17R. It is heated.

The IGBTs 79a and 79b are composed of, for example, a silicon-based semiconductor, but may be configured using a wide bandgap semiconductor such as silicon carbide or a gallium nitride-based material.

The power control switching element 83 described with reference to FIG. 12 is the IGBTs 79a and 79b referred to in FIG. 33.
By using a wide bandgap semiconductor for this IGBT, it is possible to reduce the energization loss as a switching element. Further, even if the switching frequency, that is, the drive frequency is set to a high frequency, that is, the switching is performed at high speed, the heat dissipation is good. Therefore, the heat radiation fins of the heat sink 82 to which the switching elements (IGBTs) 79a and 79b are attached can be miniaturized, and the drive unit can be miniaturized and the cost can be reduced.

The output current detection unit 77b is connected to a resonance circuit including an IH coil 17R and a resonance capacitor 76. The output current detection unit 77b detects, for example, the current flowing through the IH coil 17R, that is, the current output from the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal corresponding to the detected value to the IH control unit 90. In this configuration, the half-bridge type inverter has been described, but the circuit for driving the IH coil 17R may be a full-bridge type inverter. Further, although the circuit described with reference to FIG. 33 is a current resonance type, a voltage resonance type may be adopted.

As described in FIG. 19, the wireless communication unit 49 is a wireless communication means for wirelessly communicating with the home gateway 411 that comprehensively manages the power consumption and operation information of the home electric appliance 400 in the home. Yes, it can send and receive wireless signals.

The wireless communication unit 49 is connected to the integrated control device MC by communication wiring, but the longer the wiring, the more easily it is affected by noise. Therefore, the wireless communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC are arranged close to each other and wirelessly. It is desirable to shorten the wiring connecting the communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC.

Considering the influence of the above-mentioned noise, in the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 is installed at the right end of the input operation unit 40. Specifically, the wireless communication unit 49 is installed at the right end of the operation board 41. Further, the integrated control device MC is installed in the left and right center portions of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

(Cooling air passage)
Next, the configuration of the cooling air passage will be described.
In FIG. 12, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the inside of the main body case HC installed in the kitchen furniture 2 has an upper space 300A and the bottom surface 16S by the bottom surface 16S of the metal upper case 16. It is divided into two spaces, a lower space 300B formed below and a lower space 300B. That is, the bottom surface 16S functions as a "partition wall" 16S, and the inside of the main body case HC is divided into two upper and lower spaces.

The IH coils 17L and 17R housed in the upper space 300A and the upper air passage AH for guiding cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coil have the ventilation holes 64 penetrating the partition wall 16S. The outside air is introduced from the outside of the lower case 101.

On the other hand, the lower air passage UH for guiding the cooling air for the microwave heating device 120 is formed in the lower space 300B. The heat radiating portion 122H of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged in the lower air passage UH. The heat radiating portion 122H is cooled by the air introduced from the second intake port 152B formed at the right end portion of the bottom surface of the lower case 101. Further, the inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating device 120 is cooled by the air introduced from the first intake port 152F formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101.

The cooling air flowing through the upper air passage AH and the cooling air flowing through the lower air passage UH do not merge in the middle. The cooling air inside the upper unit 100 is discharged into the gap GP1 behind the partition plate 52, and is discharged to the outside of the cooking device 1 from the exhaust port 20.

On the other hand, the cooling air from the lower unit 200 passes through the exhaust duct 102 extending up and down in the same void GP 1, and is finally discharged from the exhaust port 20 to the outside of the cooking cooker 1.

Next, the entire path of the cooling air passage will be described with reference to FIG. 32.
As is clear from FIG. 32, the air (outside air) outside the cooking device 1 passes through the inside of the main body case HC of the cooking device 1 in two ways.

First path: From the ventilation hole 164 formed on the left side surface of the lower case 101, via the ventilation hole 64 on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, the inverter circuit board 80 and the IH coils 17L and 17R are connected from the first cooling fan 60. The path to cool and reach the exhaust port 20. In FIG. 32, this is referred to as "upper air passage" AH.
Second path: Outside air is sucked from two intake ports 152F and 152B formed at the right end of the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. Then, one of the outside air cools the inverter circuit board 121 via the third cooling fan 128. The other outside air cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 via the fourth cooling fan 129. As described above, although there are two second paths, they eventually enter the common exhaust duct 102 and reach the exhaust port 20. In FIG. 32, this is referred to as a "lower airway" UH.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the inside of the main body case HC is formed into an upper space 300A by the bottom surface (partition wall) 16S of the metal upper case 16 and a lower space below the partition wall 16S. It is divided into two spaces, 300B and 300B, each of which has independent air passages (upper air passage AH and lower air passage UH), and cooling fans 60, 128, 129 dedicated to each of these air passages. It is a configuration equipped with.
The upper unit 100 also has a second cooling fan 61, which cools the inside of the upper unit 100 in cooperation with the first cooling fan 60.

(Control menu and cooking menu of the central operation unit)
Next, a control menu displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by the central operation unit 40M and selectable will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

As described above, the "IH control menu" of the "independent cooking mode" that can be selected by the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R that use the induction heating source 9 is, for example, boiling water as shown in FIG. Boiled, fried food (automatic cooking), etc.

However, as shown in FIG. 34, there are 11 types of control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (except in the case of the cooperative cooking mode described later). These 11 types of control menus may be collectively referred to as a "control menu group" of the central operation unit 40M. An instruction for executing these control menu groups is a "control menu program", which is stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC.

The "control menu" that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M is not classified by the name of the final cooking or the name of the food material obtained by heating with the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188. That is, the food to be cooked cannot be directly selected in the "control menu".

The "control menu" in the "single cooking mode" KM1 and the "combined cooking mode" KM2 selected by the central operation unit 40M are roughly classified in consideration of the type, method and conditions of heating until the cooking is completed. Therefore, the names of the control menus are conceptual and comprehensive, such as "warm" and "oven (cooking)".

The control menu selected by the central operation unit 40M includes a control menu called "range grill control menu" or "RG control menu" using the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. The control menu selected by the central operation unit 40M does not include the cooking menu of the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later.

In the first embodiment, the induction heating source 9 has individual operation units 40L and 40R, and the single cooking mode KM1 such as “warming” can be directly selected.
On the other hand, since the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 use the central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40M, a dedicated display screen (third specific screen 30ST) for selecting the independent cooking mode KM1 is used. ) Cannot be displayed.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, the single cooking mode KM1 cannot be directly selected for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Instead, in the "RG control menu" described below, the same "single heating menu" as the single cooking mode KM1 can be selected.

The RG control menu and the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later, are basically different from each other. Further, the "cooking menu" of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 directly corresponds to each object to be cooked. In other words, the "cooking menu" of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is an individual control pattern (control menu) based on each object to be cooked. These will be described in detail later.

Various control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 34. It should be noted that what is shown in FIG. 34 includes a control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 using the microwave heating source 189 (for example, “range manual”), but even if the control menu is selected, it is exceptional. The third specific screen 30ST cannot be displayed.

The “left display area” in FIG. 34 means the first area (display area) 30L of the integrated display unit 30.
The "center display area" is also the second area 30M.
The “right display area” also means the third area 30R.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the control menu "warm" in the left display area of FIG. 34 is always displayed first in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30. This is because the RG control menu "warm" is set by default.

As is clear from the "left display area" in FIG. 34, a total of 11 RGs such as "microwave oven", "leafy vegetable boiled", "RG cooking", "grill", and "oven" other than "warm" There is a control menu. However, the "center heater" described at the bottom of the "left display area" in FIG. 34 is not actually displayed because it is not supported by the upper unit 100.

The "RG control menu" is a control pattern (in the combined cooking mode KM2) in which microwave heating (range) and oven (heating chamber 113) heating are used in combination.
However, in the first embodiment, the control pattern of either one of microwave heating (microwave oven) and oven heating (single cooking mode KM1) is exceptionally included.

The "central heater" corresponds to the case where another induction heating unit (central induction heating unit) is added between the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL in the upper unit 100. Strictly speaking, it is neither a "range" nor a "grill".

"RG" is an abbreviation for range grill. Here, the "microwave oven" refers to cooking using a microwave heating source 189. "Grill" refers to cooking using an oven heating source 188.

In the first area of FIG. 34, a total of 10 types such as "warm" and "grill" are displayed, but "combined cooking" in which two or more heating sources are used together means "RG cooking" and "RG". "Manual" etc. Further, since "warming" uses only the microwave heating source 9, it does not originally belong to the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2. However, it is included as an exception. In addition, "warming", "grill", "microwave oven manual" and the like shown in FIG. 34 do not correspond to the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

The content described in the "center display area" of FIG. 34 indicates the content displayed in the second area (display area) 30M of the integrated display unit 30. The contents of the default settings of the "center display area" are listed in the right column of the "center display area".

The content described in the "right display area" of FIG. 34 indicates the content displayed in the third area (display area) 30R of the integrated display unit 30. The contents of the default settings of the "right display area" are listed in the right column of the "right display area". The blank area means that nothing is displayed.

A database of RG control menu is created by the above rules.
For this reason,
(1) When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the first specific screen 30SP, which will be described later, is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, which is a reference guide for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Information 30P is displayed.
(2) When the input key 43M1 is operated without pressing the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M, the control menu group of the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected, and the control menu group is selected as the default display in the first area 30L. One "warm", the second area 30M is "80 ° C." indicating the temperature condition, and the third area 30R is not displayed with any control condition. Further, in the first embodiment, the guidance information 30P used as a reference for cooking is displayed in the third area 30R. These will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 and the like.

When the user operates the input key 43M1 to display one RG control menu in the center of the first area, the RG control menu can be changed to one RG control menu from the 11 types of menus shown in FIG. 34. The corresponding "control conditions" (temperature, thermal power, time, etc.) are displayed simultaneously in the second area 30M and the third area 30R.

If the selected RG control menu belongs to the "combined cooking mode KM2" such as "RG cooking", then the input key 43MS for instructing the start of the heating operation is operated by the user. Then, the cooking operation is started by shifting to the "composite cooking mode KM2" by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be described later.

Detailed data such as specific contents, control conditions, and additional information of the RG control menu group shown in FIG. 34, a display program, and the like are stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC.
The outline of the main RG control menu will be described below.

(1) Warming: Since the food is heated using the microwave heating source 189, it is originally one of the "control menu of the single cooking mode KM1". However, it is exceptionally classified as one of the combined cooking modes KM2.
This "warming" is also suitable for reheating food. Since the default setting is "80 ° C", microwave irradiation is automatically stopped when the food is heated to 80 ° C. In addition, "80 ° C." is a target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user before the start of heating.
As shown in FIG. 34, it can be set in 5 ° C increments in the range of 0 ° C to 90 ° C. For heating frozen foods, it can be set in 2 ° C increments in the range of -10 to 0 ° C. The microwave heating output is fixed at 500 W.

(2) Manual microwave oven: Heating food using a microwave heating source 189, which is performed by setting a heating time. The microwave heating output can also be selected from three stages of 500W, 200W, and 100W. The default heating time is 1 minute, but it can be set from 10 seconds to 15 minutes at 500 W output.
This "microwave oven manual" also belongs to the "control menu of the independent cooking mode KM1" because it is originally heated only by microwave oven. However, as an exception, this is also classified as one of the control menus of the combined cooking mode. That is, the RG control menu shown in FIG. 25 includes the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 of the microwave heating source 189 as described above.

(3) Boiled leafy vegetables: Suitable for boiling foods, especially leafy vegetables such as spinach and Chinese cabbage, using a microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "standard" is displayed as the default display in the second area. The non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit) 158 measures the temperature rise and automatically stops heating. This "leafy vegetable boiled" is also originally a kind of "control menu of independent cooking mode KM1".

(4) Boiled root vegetables: It is suitable for boiling foods, especially root vegetables such as potatoes that eat roots and rhizomes, using a microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "standard" is displayed as the default display in the second area. Since the heating power value is determined in advance on the cooking device 1 side, when adjusting the heating power, change the default display "standard" in the second area to "weak" or "strong" ( Must be selected).
This "leafy vegetable boiled" is also originally a kind of "control menu of independent cooking mode KM1".

(5) Meat thawing: This is an RG control menu suitable for thawing various frozen meats.
Since the food is heated using the microwave heating source 189, it is one of the "control menus of the independent cooking mode KM1".
(6) RG cooking: It is suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is cooked by combining microwave heating and oven heating. In other words, it is one of the control menus of the pure "combined cooking mode KM2".
The microwave heating is performed first, the food is heated to some extent, and then the control pattern of heating with the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, the control pattern of heating in the reverse order, and the microwave heating and the heater heating are performed at the same time. There are three types of control patterns. The heating power value (watt) at the time of microwave heating is not displayed, and the user can select one of "weak", "strong", etc. by looking at the display of the second area 30M and select the heating intensity. ..

(7) RG re-cooking: Suitable for reheating cooked food using the heating chamber 113. This is also one of the pure "complex cooking mode KM2" control menus. A microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 are used in combination.
(8) RG manual: Suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is for cooking by combining microwave heating and oven heating. It should be noted that microwave heating is performed first, the food is heated to some extent, and then the pattern of heating with the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, the pattern of heating in the reverse order, and the microwave heating and the heater heating are performed at the same time. There are three types of patterns. This is also one of the pure "complex cooking mode KM2" control menus.

(9) Grill: The heating chamber 113 is used to heat food, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used as the heating source. As described above, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is not controlled, and the control of detecting the temperature rise of the food and stopping the heating operation is not performed. The heating power of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is determined in advance by the heating chamber control unit 159 on the heating cooker 1 side. Grilled fish is a typical applicable cooking. Incidentally, the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000 W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000 W. This is actually one of the control menus of the "single cooking mode KM1", but in the first embodiment, it is prepared as one control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2.

(10) Oven: Food is heated using the heating chamber 113, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used as the heating source. The temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured by the heating chamber control unit 159, and the energization control is performed by the heating chamber control unit 159 so as to reach the set target temperature.
As shown in FIG. 25, the default temperature is 180 ° C., so the user can change this target temperature if desired. As described in the section of "grill", the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000 W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000 W. Then, the energization rate for the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is controlled by the heating chamber control unit 159, and the calorific value of these two heaters 163A and 163B is controlled. This is one of the control menus of the "single cooking mode KM1".

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M.

The data indicating the individual control menu names (for example, "warm", "range manual", etc.) in the total of 10 RG control menus that can be displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 is the storage device. It is stored in the first layer of MM.

Data indicating "control conditions" (for example, "microwave output value", "energization time", etc.) that can be displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30 are stored in the second layer of the storage device MM. There is.

The data indicating "control conditions" (for example, "heating time for grill cooking" and the like) that can be displayed in the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30, and the reference information 30P and 30P1 are the third layer of the storage device MM. I remember it.

(Collaboration cooking mode)
Next, the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, inside the storage device MM, the data of the first specific screen 30SP displayed when the input key 43MC is operated and the data of the first specific screen 30SP which is subsequently read out when the input key 43M1 is operated are "coordinated". The control data of the "cooking mode KM3" and the operation program (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "cooperative operation program") are stored in a storage area different from the RG control menu.

Here, the data of the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" and the "cooperative operation program" are information for specifying a plurality of heating sources used to execute an individual object to be cooked (for example, a hamburger steak), and various control conditions. Includes information on cooking processes, including information on (heat power, standard heating temperature, etc.) and control parameters, and the order (sequence) of heating sources to operate. That is, it is necessary for the microcomputer to execute the control procedure of the internal processing circuit and the processor that realize each function of the integrated control device MC.

When one cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 is specified, the available (plural) heating sources and the order in which they operate are automatically determined. For example, for "hamburger", which is one of the cooking menus that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is not necessary to first select either one of the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL. First, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the display means 30, and after the user sees the display, for example, if the right heating unit 17HR is selected, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be actually started.

The first specific screen 30SP is displayed with the content of using the left heating unit 17HL in advance. The user can pre-set to use the right heating unit 17HR instead of using the left heating unit 17HL. However, such a setting may not be possible in some cases.
Further, when the right heating unit 17HR is used in the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 is heated by the oven heating source 188 in the heating chamber 113, the information of the series of cooking steps is stored in the storage device MM. There is.

In addition, as additional information 331 that can be used as a reference for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, for example, information on the cooking process described later, information on the heating source to be used, control conditions (preheating completion temperature, etc.), and the next cooking process. Guidance information, instruction information, etc. that prompt the user's input operation to proceed are stored in correspondence with each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger", "karaage") in each cooperative cooking mode.

In the following explanation, when preheating is required, the process until the temperature rises to the set (target) temperature is called the "preheating process", and after reaching the set temperature, the food to be cooked is actually heated to contribute to cooking. The process is called "cooking process 1" or "cooking process 2".
For example, in induction heating, the "cooking process" is the time when the user puts the object to be cooked on the object N to be heated, for example, a frying pan, which has already been heated to a desired temperature after the preheating process is completed, and actually starts heating. It will be the start point of.
In this way, when the same heating source is used, the central operation unit can clearly distinguish the time when the preheating step is completed and the time when the cooking step 1 is started (by the integrated control device MC). Operations such as pressing a specific input key with the 40M or the individual operation units 40L and 40R may be added.

(Information on how to use the RG control menu, etc.)
Next, the RG (range grill) control menu described with reference to FIG. 34 and the control menu of the independent cooking mode KM1 by the induction heating source 9 will be described properly.

FIG. 37 is a classification table of the RG control menu and the control menu of the independent cooking mode KM1 by the induction heating source 9.
A part of the name of the control menu shown in the classification 3 of FIG. 37 is also displayed in the first area 30L as shown in FIG. 34, and is used for the user to select the control menu.

Further, as shown in Category 2 of FIG. 37, information indicating the main points of each control menu is also stored as data of the first layer or the second layer of the storage device MM as described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. There is.

Therefore, at the stage of operating the input key 43M1, the user can optionally display information indicating the main points of each control menu shown in the classification 2 of FIG. 37. Further, the integrated control device MC can automatically display the information shown in the classification 2 on the integrated display unit 30 at the stage where the user selects the RG control menu to support the user's input operation. For example, when the user holds down the input key 43M1 once and the time elapses, for example, a predetermined reference time (example: 10 seconds), in any of the above-mentioned first area 30L to third area 30R. Information indicating the main points of each control menu shown in the classification 2 of FIG. 37 is displayed. Alternatively, it may be notified by voice by the voice synthesizer 95. For example, "warm" guides you to say, "It's best to warm rice or bento to your favorite temperature."

As shown in categories 1 to 4 of FIG. 37, information that can be guided even in the scene of selecting the induction heating source 9 is stored in the storage device MM. Therefore, at the stage of step ST4 shown in FIG. 38 below, the information of the classification 2 of FIG. 37 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 at an appropriate timing to assist the selection operation of the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL. It is configured.

(Operation of cooking cooker)
Next, an outline of the operation of the cooking cooker 1 having the above configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 47.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart for explaining the entire control operation of the cooking device 1 before the start of cooking. FIG. 39 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation at the time of induction cooking in the cooking device 1. FIG. 40 is a flowchart for explaining a control operation when microwave heating is performed during induction cooking in the cooking device 1. FIG. 41 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. FIG. 42 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. FIG. 43 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. FIG. 44 is a list showing the correspondence between the cooling fan of the cooking device 1 and the type of cooking. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the cooking device 1. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the cooking device 1. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process in the case of abnormality detection of the cooking device 1.

FIG. 38 will be described.
The basic operation program from turning on the power to starting cooking preparation is stored in the storage device MM inside the integrated control device MC.
In the built-in type cooker 1, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (alternating current) power supply 99 from the time when the kitchen furniture 2 is installed, so that the user can use the operation button 98 of the main power switch 97. Press (see FIGS. 20 and 30) to turn on the power (step ST1 in FIG. 38).

A predetermined low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC via the DC power supply conversion unit 92 in the power supply circuit board 55, and the integrated control device MC is activated. The integrated control device MC itself starts diagnosing the presence or absence of an abnormality by its own control program.

Then, the presence or absence of abnormalities in the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130 that centrally control the induction heating source 9 is checked.

In the temperature detection circuit 93 of the upper unit 100, a total of seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 are provided in order to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the temperature of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, the temperature in the vicinity of the integrated display unit 30, and the like. Since they are connected, the detection temperature of those temperature sensors is transmitted to the temperature detection circuit 93. As a result, the IH control unit 90 can determine the presence or absence of an abnormality (ST2).

Further, the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 can also acquire the detected temperatures from the temperature sensors TS1, TS2, and TS10 to determine the presence or absence of an abnormality.

In step ST2, there is "transmission of activation information to the outside", which means that the wireless communication unit 49 gives a notice to the home gateway 411 in the kitchen KT of the start of operation of the cooking cooker 1. This will be explained later.

Since the temperature information of the main component built in the upper unit 100 is collected in the IH control unit 90, the IH control unit 90 performs an abnormal heating determination process as an abnormality monitoring control before the start of cooking. For example, when the temperature detected by the temperature sensor TS7 is higher than the heat resistant temperature (for example, 70 ° C.) of an electronic element such as the liquid crystal display screen 30D in the integrated display unit 30, the IH control unit 90 determines that the temperature is abnormally high. Then, the integrated control device MC is notified of the abnormality, and processing such as displaying or notifying that the operation cannot be started is executed. It should be noted that this process may be executed by the integrated control device MC.

If no abnormality is found, the IH control unit 90 transmits a signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays that "cooking can be started because there is no abnormality" (ST3). The display screen at this initial time point will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.
At the same time, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the content similar to the content displayed by the integrated display unit 30 by voice (ST3).

In step ST3, the wireless communication unit 49 accesses the home gateway 411 and acquires information such as control menus and recipe information useful for health management within a range set in advance by the user. For example, the information previously transmitted by the user of the cooking cooker 1 to the home gateway 411 via the Internet 416 using the information communication terminal device 418 or the like can also be acquired when the integrated display unit 30 is activated.

When the heating cooker 1 acquires some information, it is preferable to turn on a dedicated caution information lamp (not shown) provided near the input operation unit 40 of the upper unit 100 to notify the user.

The inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is not acquired at this point. However, as shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted to the home gateway 411 at this point.

Next, after the abnormality determination is completed as described above, the integrated control device MC performs notification and voice guidance for prompting the selection of the heating means by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (ST4).

Then, it is determined whether or not the independent cooking mode KM1 is selected by the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, which are individual operation units, without operating the input key 43M1 (STC).

As described above (see FIGS. 34 and 37), the control menu "warm" in "microwave heating" using only the microwave heating source 189 belongs to the single cooking mode KM1, but this control menu ("warm"). ) Is selected by the input key 43M1. Therefore, the central operation unit 40 cannot directly select the single cooking mode KM1. Only the induction heating source 9 can directly select the heating source in the heating cooker 1.

If neither the input key 43M1 nor the input key 43MC is selected within a certain grace period (for example, 10 seconds or 30 seconds), the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 are selected. Judge that it was not broken. If the user operates at least one of the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R immediately after step ST4 or within the above grace time, the heating source of the upper unit 100, that is, the IH coils 17L, 17R Only is determined to be selected (“Yes” in step ST6).

On the other hand, when the input key 43MC is operated in the step STC, the process proceeds to the processing step STR1 of the cooperative cooking mode. The processing step STR1 in the cooperative cooking mode will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 60 to 108 and the like.

If step ST6 is "Yes" as described above, the process proceeds to the next step ST10. Subsequent control steps for induction heating will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, when the heating source of the lower unit 200 is selected in step ST5, the integrated control device MC proceeds to the menu selection step ST8 of the two heating sources included in the lower unit 200. Note that this step ST5 is a case where the central operation unit 40M (input key 43M1) is operated.

In step ST8, as shown in FIG. 38, three types of control menus (ST9A to ST9D) are sequentially displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in a fixed order. These three types of control menus are a total of 10 control menus (see FIG. 34) displayed in the first area 30L described above.

The control menu displayed at the stage of step ST8 in FIG. 38 displays the following three types of control menus on the premise that the heating source of the lower unit 200 is used.
(1) A cooking menu (ST9A) using at least one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. The "grill" and "oven" of the control menu shown in FIG. 34 correspond to this.
(2) A control menu (ST9B) in which the microwave heating device 120 is used in combination with the above (1). This corresponds to the "range grill" heating (cooking) of the control menu shown in FIGS. 34 and 37.
(3) A control menu (ST9C) that uses only the microwave heating device 120. This corresponds to "range manual", "leafy vegetable boiled", "warm" and the like in the control menu shown in FIG. 34.
Here, the above-mentioned "cooperative cooking mode KM3" is not displayed.

If it is found that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is better from the middle, the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M can be operated to advance to the stage of step STR1 in FIG. 73. That is, it is possible to proceed until immediately before the determination of the permission condition 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

FIG. 39 shows the operation steps of the integrated control device MC after the step (ST11) in which the induction heating control menu is selected.

Next, the control operation during induction heating will be described with reference to FIG. 39.
The following will be described with an example of using the right heating unit 17HR.
When the input key 43R1 on the right side is touched, the IH control unit 90 determines that the user has commanded the heating preparation operation.

It is estimated whether or not the object to be heated (metal pot, frying pan, etc.) N is placed above the IH coil 17R, or whether the bottom area of the object to be heated is larger than a predetermined value, and this estimation result is obtained. Is transmitted to the IH control unit 90, and it is determined whether the heat treatment is suitable for a pan with a standard diameter or a heat treatment suitable for a pan with a large diameter (step MS1).
If the pot is compatible but has a large diameter, or if it is not compatible with heating, the treatment is different from that of the standard pot.

In response to a command from the IH control unit 90, the integrated control device MC displays a display prompting the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 to select the "IH control menu" of the desired cooking (MS2).

When the user selects and inputs the "IH control menu" for cooking, the heating power, the cooking time, etc. with the right operation unit 40R (MS3), the induction heating operation is started in the right heating unit 17HR in earnest (MS4).
There are seven "IH control menus" displayed on the integrated display unit 30, "high-speed heating", "fried food", "boiler", "preheat", "cooking", "boiled", and "boiled + heat-retaining". be. However, in order to simplify the operability, it may be set so that a part or all of the above seven IH control menus cannot be selected in the above-mentioned "function setting".

When the user selects any one of these seven IH control menus, the control conditions corresponding to those IH control menus are automatically selected by the built-in program of the IH control unit 90, and the energization amount of the IH coil 17R. (Firepower), energization time, etc. are set. Depending on the IH control menu, a display prompting the user to set an arbitrary thermal power, energization time, etc. is displayed on the display unit (MS5). The operation program of the control conditions corresponding to the IH control menu may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the IH control unit 90.

Unless the user touches the input key 43R1 again to stop using the input key 43R1 within a certain period of time (for example, 15 seconds or 30 seconds) after the above display is performed, the IH control unit 90 will be used after the certain period of time has elapsed. Drives the inverter circuit 81R of the induction heating circuit 94R and starts induction heating (MS6). The input function of the input key 43R1 changes each time it is touched, and it is possible to command the start of the heating operation and the stop of the heating operation.

The case of the "large diameter pan" is basically the same as in steps MS1 to MS7, but as the IH control menu, some of the seven IH control menus shown in step MS3 in FIG. 39 cannot be selected.

The "high-speed heating menu" of FIG. 39 can be heated only in the case of a "normal pot" or a "large-diameter pot" using the IH coil 17L on the left side. The small pot means that the diameter of the bottom surface of the pot is less than 10 cm in the first embodiment, and it is detected as unsuitable for induction heating, and induction heating cannot be performed.

Next, the integrated power control operation when two or more different types of heating sources are used at the same time, such as induction heating and microwave heating, will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. The examples described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41 are not the case of the above-mentioned cooperative cooking mode KM3.

The example shown in FIG. 40 is a case where the user tries to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 during the period in which the induction heating cooking is performed in the upper unit 100 first. Even when oven cooking, grill cooking, etc. are performed using both or one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B during the period of induction cooking, as described in FIG. 40. Basic total power control (in the entire cooking cooker 1) is performed by the integrated control device MC and the power control unit 72.
Further, in this case, it is necessary to select the combined cooking mode KM2 by the central operation unit 40M.

When the user tries to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200, the main power switch 97 is first turned on, and the heating source of the lower unit 200 is selected by the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40. There is a need to.
However, an easy way to do this is to open the door 114 as is. That is, in the first embodiment, when the upper unit 100 is operated (when the main power switch 97 is in the ON state), cooking by the lower unit 200 can be started as it is. Therefore. It is not necessary to turn on the main power switch 97 as in the upper unit 100.

When the door 114 is opened, as described in the main part of the door open / close detection mechanism 131, there are a latch switch 132A and a door switch 132B that are opened / closed according to the opening / closing of the door 114. Then, the integrated control device MC can detect the opening of both or one of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B (by the action of the door open / close detection mechanism 131).

In FIG. 40, when a signal indicating that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 has been opened is received as described above (step S1), the integrated control device MC provides voice guidance to the user (step S2). The content of the voice guide is, for example, "To start heating, select microwave oven heating and press the start button."

In the default setting of microwave heating, the target temperature is 80 ° C., so even if the door 114 is closed and heating is started as it is, it automatically stops when it is detected that the temperature of the object to be cooked reaches 80 ° C. When changing the temperature to 80 ° C. (for example, 75 ° C.), the input key 43MS (see FIG. 21) may be pressed after changing the temperature conditions.

When the user selects, for example, "microwave oven manual" from the combined cooking menu with the input key 43M1 and then gives the instruction "start heating" with the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, it is determined by the magnetron 122. Using the power consumption value known in advance by reflecting the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc. to the rated power consumption value, the integrated control device MC regulates the total power in step S3. Determine if the value is exceeded.

For example, since the integrated control device MC holds the thermal power value of the induced heating cooking started earlier and the power consumption of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 as data, the power consumption of the upper unit 100 And the total value of the power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 can be calculated. The integrated control device MC may predict the maximum power consumption amount by using the power consumption data of the inverter circuit 81 or the like at the stage when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated.

When step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to reduce either the output of the operating IH coil 17R or the thermal power of microwave heating. In step S3, the priority of the cooking of the induction heating at that time is determined from the control menu of the induction heating and the cooking step. For example, when rice is cooked in the upper unit 100 (particularly, the "boiling step"), the rice cooking (boiling step) is prioritized and the heating power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

Further, when the upper unit 100 is performing "fried food", the fried food is automatically controlled to increase the heating power so that the temperature of the cooking oil does not drop excessively according to the input of ingredients and the like. Therefore, even in such a case, the thermal power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

If it is determined in step S5 that the induced heating is prioritized, the power consumption of the microwave heating is reduced. Therefore, if the rated output of the microwave is 500 W (power consumption is 900 W), the power consumption is temporarily reduced. For example, the output is set to 300 W. Then, the user is notified that such a restriction is applied. The notification is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (S6).

Then, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130, and starts microwave heating with low thermal power (S7).
Since it has a non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit) 158 that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, whether or not the food has been heated and reached the target temperature. Is monitored by the microwave heating control unit 130 (S8).

If the target temperature is not reached, it is determined whether or not the induction heating operation of the upper unit 100 is completed (S9). Unless the induction heating operation is completed, the above steps S8 and S9 are repeated until the target temperature is reached.

When the target temperature is reached, a signal is output from the microwave heating control unit 130 to the integrated control device MC. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S12, and the notification that the microwave heating is completed is notified.

On the other hand, when the induction heating of the upper unit 100 is completed, the process proceeds to step S10, a command is issued to the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating power is initially restored to the set thermal power intended by the user, and the microwave heating is continued. Then, the monitoring of the temperature of the object to be cooked is continued (S11).

Then, when the target temperature is reached, the integrated control device MC receives a signal from the microwave heating control unit 130, proceeds to step S12, and notifies that the microwave heating is completed.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the power priority between two parties, microwave cooking and induction heating, is the control menu (eg, “fried food”) and cooking process (eg, “fried food”) being performed in induction heating. , It was a premise to judge the priority with induction heating at that time from the "boiling process" of rice cooking.

Therefore, when the power priority between the two parties of microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking is always set to the induction heating side, an instruction to start microwave heating is given by the input key of the central operation unit 40M. Before the 43MS, for example, a warning message is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. Further, an alarm message is also output from the voice synthesizer 95. Further, even if microwave heating is started thereafter, there may be a case where the thermal power value is forcibly lowered as in the above example.

The power priority of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 in the entire heating cooker 1 can be set in the above-mentioned "function setting". Once the power priority is set, even if the main power switch 97 is turned off, the setting conditions are stored in the integrated control device MC and are inherited after the next cooking.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the temperature of the object to be heated was monitored, and when the target temperature was reached, the microwave heating was terminated. However, since there is also a control method for measuring the microwave irradiation time and ending the cooking when the set time elapses, FIG. 41 will be described next.

FIG. 41 is an example in the case where a control method for terminating cooking by the irradiation time of microwaves is adopted.
Since the steps up to step S6 are the same as those in FIG. 40, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the microwave heating is started in step 7, the microwave heating control unit 130 calculates the correction (extension) of the heating time when the output of the magnetron 122 is lowered to a certain value. Then, in step S8, the time after the extension is determined as "set time 1" (S8), and steps 9 and 8 are repeated.

In the process, when the induction heating of the upper unit 100 is completed, the operation required time (set time 2) is recalculated in consideration of the elapsed time from the start of heating (step S7).

Then, when the set time 2 has elapsed, the microwave heating is terminated and this is notified (S12). Until the set time 2 elapses, the temperature monitoring by the non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit) 158 may be used together.

(Integrated control device and total electric energy control)
Next, FIGS. 42 and 43 will be described.
42 and 43 are flowcharts for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. The examples shown in these two figures are microwave heating (in single cooking mode KM1) using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 while the user is initially performing induction heating in the upper unit 100. When trying to do. Even in this case, the basic total electric energy control (in the entire cooking cooker 1) as described with reference to FIG. 40 is performed by the integrated control device MC and the electric power control unit 72.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, unlike FIGS. 40 and 41, there is an integrated control device MC and an induction heating device including a microwave heating device 120, an IH coil 17L, 17R, an inverter circuit 81, and the like. It also shows the sending and receiving of signals.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, L1 to L10 indicate the generation timing of each operation signal, command signal, or the like. When the main power switch 97 is turned on in the upper unit 100, a start signal is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L1).

After that, when the input operation unit 40 determines the thermal power of the IH coils 17L and 17R, the control menu, and the like (see steps MS2 and MS3 in FIG. 39), information indicating the contents is transmitted via the integrated control device MC (L2). .. That is, the IH control unit 90 receives information indicating conditions such as the maximum thermal power and the operating time at the time of induction heating from the integrated control device MC. If there is an induction heating start command from the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 starts the heating operation by the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R.

A case where the induction heating is started in this way and the microwave heating is also started will be described. It is assumed that the induction heating is started at the maximum thermal power of 3200 W of the left IH coil 17L.

When the user opens the door 114, both or one of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B opens as described with reference to FIG. 40. Therefore, the door open / close detection mechanism 131 (closed detection unit 139) that monitors this opens. Therefore, a signal indicating the opening of the door 114 is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L3).

When the user inputs the thermal power in the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal for starting operation to the microwave heating control unit 130. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S3.
Alternatively, when the user simply gives an instruction to "start heating" in the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal for starting operation to the microwave heating control unit 130.

If there is no abnormality on the microwave heating control unit 130 side, a "notice signal" for starting cooking is transmitted from the microwave heating control unit 130 to the integrated control device MC (L4). For example, in the case of a microwave output of 500 W, when the rated power consumption of the entire microwave heating device is 1000 W, it becomes a "notice signal" including information using 1000 W as shown in FIG. 42.

Next, upon receiving information from the integrated control device MC, the power control unit 72 reflects the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc. in advance in the rated power consumption value determined by the magnetron 122. Using the power consumption value known in, find the total power consumption when microwave heating and induced heating are performed at the same time, and determine whether this total value exceeds the total power consumption regulation value. (Same as step S3 in FIGS. 40 and 41). Then, the result is transmitted to the integrated control device MC.

As another method, the upper limit of the total electric energy of the lower unit 200 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) is determined (for example, 2000 W), and the lower unit 200 and the upper unit 100 (induction heating source 9) are determined. ) May be used at the same time to determine whether or not the total electric energy regulation value is exceeded.

When step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to reduce either the output of the operating IH coil 17R or the thermal power of microwave heating. In the next step S4, the integrated control device MC determines the cooking priority of the induction heating at that time from the control menu of the induction heating and the heating step.

In the example of FIG. 42, since the microwave heating is set to be prioritized, the thermal power of the microwave heating is not reduced.

When it is determined in step S5 that microwave heating is prioritized, in order to reduce the power consumption of induction heating, the IH control unit 90 is instructed to control the target thermal power of the IH coil 17R to temporarily reduce the power consumption. Lower the target. Notify the user that such restrictions will be applied. The notification operation is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95.

Then, the IH control unit 90 instructs the inverter circuit 81R to change the induction heating to a low thermal power (L5).

When the power reduction process on the inverter circuit 81R side is completed, the IH control unit 90 determines from the current values of the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detection unit 77b that the power has been reduced. Then, the fact that the power reduction is completed is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L6). In response to this transmission, the integrated control device MC transmits a permission signal for starting the heating operation to the microwave heating device 120 (L7).

The inverter circuit 121A has a current detection unit (not shown) such as the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detection unit 77b used in the inverter circuit 81R of the upper unit 100.

Therefore, when the microwave heating is completed, the microwave heating control unit 130 determines from the current detection value of the inverter circuit 121A that the heating operation has been completed, and notifies the integrated control device MC of the heating operation with a specific signal ( L8). Further, the microwave heating may be performed only for a certain time depending on the timer setting, and in that case, the microwave heating control unit 130 detects the lapse of the time and notifies that the heating operation is completed (L8).

After the microwave heating is completed, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the IH control unit 90 so as to return to the set thermal power initially desired by the user (L9). Then, the thermal power is raised to the initial target level and the induction heating is continued (S10).

Then, when the set cooking time or the target temperature is reached, the IH control unit 90 ends the induction heating. Then, the integrated control device MC is notified that the operation has been completed (L10).

(Basic operation and cooling operation of induction heating)
Next, in the cooking apparatus 1 according to the first embodiment, the basic operation of each part when induction heating is performed will be described.

When the input operation unit 40 is instructed to start induction heating, the IH control unit 90 issues a drive command to the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R corresponding to the designated heating unit, and the IH coils 17L and 17R. Drives the inverter circuits 81L and 81R of.

An operation command signal is output from the IH control unit 90 to the cooling fan drive circuit 62.
The operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is started at the same time as or slightly delayed from the start of driving the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

The ventilation capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not have to be fixed. For example, the blowing capacity may be automatically changed between the weak operation and the strong operation according to the temperature of the temperature sensor TS 8 of the heat sink 82 and the temperature sensor TS that detects the temperature in the vicinity of the integrated display unit 30.

Generally, if the cooling fan is changed from weak operation to strong operation, the wind noise of the fan becomes louder, which may cause noise. Therefore, the temperature detected by the two temperature sensors TS7 and TS8 and the operating strength of the cooling fans 60 and 61 are determined as a correspondence table (data table) from the data of the preliminary ventilation test, etc., and this correspondence table is determined. It is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90. Then, the IH control unit 90 may change the operating conditions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 at any time according to the data table.

The correspondence table (data table) that determines the operating strength of the cooling fans 60 and 61 may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90.

When the first cooling fan 60 is operated, air is sucked from the ventilation hole 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60. The cooling air RF1 is pushed into the first air passage F1 from the outlet 60A as shown by a thick arrow in FIG. 24.

When the second cooling fan 61 is operated, air is sucked from the ventilation hole 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 61. The cooling air RF2 is pushed into the second air passage F2 from the air outlet 61A as shown by a thick arrow in FIG. 24.

Here, one of the features of the first embodiment will be described. In particular, the supply of cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24, 25, 27 and 28.

In the first cooling fan 60, the flat rotary blade 60T rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD1. Then, the outside air sucked into the inside of the fan case 60C advances to the outlet 60A while swirling as shown in FIG. 27, and is blown out from the outlet 60A toward the inverter circuit board 80.

The wind speed distribution of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A will be described.
The wind speed of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is not uniform over the entire front-rear direction of the air outlet 60A. The cooling air that swirls around the outermost side of the inside of the fan case 60C has the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the inside. This situation is schematically shown in FIG. 27 by three solid arrows.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 60A travels in the direction of the outlet line FL1, but the rotation direction RD1 of the rotary blade 60F of the first cooling fan 60 and the cooling air 60FL itself. Due to the speed difference between the two, the cooling air gradually changes its direction to the rear side as shown by the arrow of the broken line in FIG. 27 toward the heat sink 82 side.

The main component of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is concentrated on the rear surface (rear surface) side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the heat sink 82 having two rows of front and rear rows. Then, it advances to the right while being restricted from advancing forward on the rear surface of the partition wall 11. In FIG. 27, what is indicated by the broken line arrow is the flow of the cooling air RF1 flowing around the heat radiation fin 82FN.

Since the cover 70 is installed so as to surround the front and back and the upper part of the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape, the main component of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 60A does not diffuse to the surroundings but is a partition wall. It is pushed into the narrow space of the heat radiation fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 on the rear side of 11.

Since the first air passage F1 starts from the point where it passes through the left end portion of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 60A to the inlet F1 of the first air passage F1. Is introduced and is transported linearly as cooling air RF1 to the outlet FO on the right side.

However, since the outlet 60A and the left end surface of the cover 70 are not directly connected and there is a gap GP14 and a front notch 70A, a part of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown from the outlet 60A is Turn backward before reaching the entrance FI of the first air passage F1. And it flows to the part where the pressure is relatively low. Therefore, cooling air flowing in the direction of the rear exhaust port plate 53L is also generated.

The flow of the cooling air from the second cooling fan 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25, 27 and 28.

The flat rotor 61T rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD2. Then, the outside air sucked into the inside of the fan case 61C travels in the direction of the outlet 61A while turning as shown in FIG. 27. Then, it is blown out from the outlet 61A in the direction of the inverter board 80.

The wind speed of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A is not uniform over the entire front-rear direction of the outlet 61A. The cooling air that swirls around the outermost circumference inside the fan case 61C has the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the inside. This situation is shown by three solid arrows in FIG. 27.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A travels in the direction of the outlet line FL2, but the rotation direction RD2 of the rotary blade 61F of the first cooling fan 61 and the cooling air 61FL itself. Due to the speed difference between the two, the cooling air gradually changes its direction to the rear side as shown by the arrow of the broken line in FIG. 27 toward the heat sink 82 side.

The main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A is concentrated on the front surface side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the heat sink 82 having two rows of front and rear rows. Then, it advances to the right while being restricted from advancing forward in front of the partition wall 11. In FIG. 27, what is indicated by the broken line arrow is the flow of the cooling air RF2 flowing around the heat radiation fin 82FN.

A cover 70 is installed so as to surround the front, back, and above of the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape with a slight gap.
Therefore, the main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A is not diffused to the surroundings, but is pushed into the narrow space of the heat radiation fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 on the front side of the partition wall 11. ..

Since the first air passage F1 starts from the point where it passes through the left end portion of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A to the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. Is introduced and is transported linearly as cooling air RF2 to the outlet FO on the right side.

However, since the outlet 61A and the left end surface of the cover 70 are not directly connected and there is a gap (not shown) and a front notch 70A, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown from the outlet 61A A part of the air leaks forward before reaching the entrance FI of the first air passage F1. And it flows to the part where the pressure is relatively low. Therefore, it flows as cooling air branched in the spatial direction directly below the input operation unit 40 in front, and becomes cooling air RF2A (see FIG. 25).

The ventilation holes 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60 and the ventilation holes 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 60 are individually provided adjacent to each other on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, but a large number of them are provided. The small hole group may be provided and the small hole group may be shared.

A diode 79c (see FIG. 33) and other electrical components are mounted on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, and they are cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

Two IGBTs 79a and 79b (power control switching element 83) are used for one IH coil 17L. Further, the power control switching element 83 is also used for the other IH coil 17L.

The two power control switching elements 83 generate heat during the induction heating operation, but are continuously cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

The cooling air RF2A proceeds to the right while cooling parts such as various switches, a liquid crystal display screen, and a display unit drive circuit 63 that receive input operations arranged in the input operation unit 40.

As shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 24, the cooling air RF1 may change its direction upward when it exits the outlet FO of the cover 70, but the cooling air RF2 merging from the front side also has the momentum. It is roughly divided into one that travels by reversing the top of the cover 70 to the left like the cooling air RF3 and one that travels in the direction of the filter circuit board 54 as shown by the cooling air RF4.

The cooling air RF3 flows below the IH coil 17R on the right side, and then flows directly below the IH coil 17L on the left side. In this process, the two IH coils 17R and 17L are cooled. Generally, the temperature of this type of IH coil rises to around 250 ° C to 300 ° C during the induction heating operation. Therefore, as described above, the two cooling air RF1 and RF2 are combined and cooled by the cooling air RF3 and RF4.

As described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the cooling air RF4R traveling to the right side of the partition plate 14 travels backward while cooling the filter circuit board 54, and is discharged from the exhaust window 52B. The 53R is an exhaust plate and forms a large number of through holes 53R1.

The cooling air RF3 that has cooled the IH coils 17L and 17R also turns in the direction of the exhaust window 52A that is the final exhaust port, passes through a large number of through holes 53L1 provided in the exhaust plate 53L, and passes from the exhaust window 52A. It is discharged.
As a result, the cooling air RF3 and RF4 flowing inside the upper case 16 reach the exhaust port 20. Then, it is discharged from the exhaust cover 19 into the room.

As described above, the parts group such as the IH coils 17L and 17R and the inverter circuit board 80 are the parts group to be cooled inside the upper unit 100 (IH coil installation space CK). The space for cooling these parts is located in front of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B. In other words, downstream of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B, there is a gap GP1 that communicates with the exhaust port 20, but inside this gap GP1, there is no component group to be cooled as described above, so the upper unit. It is not a cooling space of 100.

(Basic operation during microwave heating)
Next, in the cooking apparatus 1 according to the first embodiment, the basic operation of each part when microwave heating is performed will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, microwave cooking can be started as it is even if the upper unit 100 does not actually execute induction cooking. However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, it is necessary to first turn on the main power switch 97 in order to start microwave cooking.

For safety reasons, the main power switch 97 automatically resets after a certain period of time (for example, 30 minutes) from the last timing when any of microwave heating, oven (heating chamber 113) heating, and induction heating is finished. Will be released. Alternatively, when the temperatures of the top plate 15 and the heating chamber 113 all drop below the specified value, the main power switch 97 is automatically opened. Such safety measures are adopted.

Next, the door 114 is opened, a food or the like to be cooked is put into the heating chamber 113, and after occupying the door 114, the input key 43MS (see FIG. 20) is used in the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40. When the start of microwave cooking is commanded, the integrated control device MC issues a drive command to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129.

The microwave heating control unit 130 drives the inverter circuit 121A of the magnetron 122 to radiate microwaves from the oscillation unit 122A. The microwave referred to here is a radio wave of 2450 MH ± 50 MHz.

The generated microwave is guided from the waveguide 123 into the antenna case 124. Since the driving motor 126 of the antenna 125 starts operation at the timing when the microwave is oscillated, the microwave introduced in the antenna case 124 is caused by the action of the rotating antenna 125 and the rotating shaft 126A. It can be evenly propagated inside the heating chamber 113. Since the operation of this type of antenna and the rotating shaft 126A is described in detail by, for example, Japanese Patent No. 4836965 and Japanese Patent No. 5674914, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, outside air is sucked into the case A150 from the intake port F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 to become the cooling air RF5. Then, the cooling air RF5 first cools the inverter circuit board 121, and cools various electric components mounted on the circuit board.

Next, the cooling air RF5 passes through the communication port B138B and the communication port A138A provided at two locations above and below the case A150, and the cooling air RF5 passing through the communication port B138B hits the back surface of the temperature sensor 160.

The temperature sensor 160 is installed in the mounting hole of the right partition plate 166A. There is a minute gap of several mm or less between the outer shell case of the temperature sensor 160 and the rim of the mounting hole. The cooling air RF5 passes through this gap and is blown out from the detection window 161 of the temperature sensor 160 into the heating chamber 113.

On the other hand, most of the cooling air RF5 that has cooled the inverter circuit board 121 is guided from the communication port A138A to the passage 172. That is, the guide is guided to the passage 172 formed between the upper case 169 covering the upper part of the heating chamber 113 and the partition plate 171. This passage has an effect of preventing the high heat from being transmitted to the upper unit 100 side even if the upper heater 163A above the heating chamber 113 has a high temperature exceeding 300 ° C.

Looking at the position of the communication port 173 from the communication port A138A in a plane, the communication port 173 is located diagonally rearward across the passage 172. That is, the communication port 173 is located at the farthest position.
Therefore, the entire air in the passage 172 is guided to the communication port 173 and introduced into the exhaust duct 102 that passes through the communication port 173 and extends horizontally to the rear (see FIG. 15).

When the cooling air RF5 exits the exhaust duct 102, it merges with the cooling air RF6 rising from the lower side and is discharged into the room from the exhaust port 20.

Next, the flow of the cooling air RF6 by the fourth cooling fan 129 will be described.
When the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, air is sucked into the case A151 from the intake port B152B formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 to become the cooling air RF6. .. Then, the cooling air RF6 first cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122, passes through the radiating portion 122H, and reaches the inside of the duct 153.

The cooling air RF6 then enters the void GP5R adjacent to the right side of the heating chamber 113 from the duct 153 and proceeds to the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 17, it is introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the introduction port 201.

Since the introduction port 201 is located near the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113, a part of the cooling air RF6 also reaches the inside of the door 114 and eliminates the fogging generated on the heating chamber 113 side of the seal plate 196. ..

The cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 has the purpose of discharging water vapor, smoke, and the like generated from the object to be heated such as food inside the heating chamber 113. Specifically, the cooling air RF6 moves rearward from the front portion of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG. 15, and finally reaches the communication port 174 formed in the ceiling portion at the rear portion.

The cooling air RF6 is introduced into an exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward from the communication port 174. Then, when the cooling air RF6 exits the exhaust duct 102, it joins the cooling air RF5 so as to be attracted to the updraft, and is discharged from the exhaust port 20 into the room.

Even when the initial air volumes of the cooling air RF5 and the cooling air RF6 are the same, the air speed of the cooling air RF5 is faster when the cooling air RF5 is discharged from the duct 102 due to the difference in the path as in the first embodiment. Therefore, it has an action of attracting the cooling air RF6 discharged from below.

Since the cooling air RF5 and RF6 are forcibly discharged from the exhaust duct 102, an exhaust fan may be provided in the middle of the exhaust duct 102. In the first embodiment, since such an exhaust fan is omitted, it can be realized at low cost, and it is advantageous in considering the arrangement of parts inside the upper unit 100.

Next, FIG. 44 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a list showing the correspondence between the four cooling fans of the cooking device 1 and the types of cooking.
As is clear from FIG. 44, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated in the case of induction cooking. It is also operated in the case of microwave cooking and oven cooking.

On the other hand, the third cooling fan 128 is operated in the case of microwave cooking and oven cooking, respectively.
On the other hand, the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated only in the case of oven cooking.

Next, FIG. 45 will be described.
FIG. 45 shows a case where the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is used and "hamburger" is selected as the cooking menu for cooking.

This is an example of cooking in three stages: a preheating step using the induction heating source 9, a cooking step 1 using the induction heating source 9, and a cooking step 2 using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189.
FIG. 45 shows a case where at least one of the above-mentioned abnormalities 1 to 3 is detected among the main abnormalities that can be detected by the above-mentioned abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1). Note that the abnormality 4 (when the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the content of the control command) is not shown in FIG. 45.

Preheating step: When at least one of the above-mentioned "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, And the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are controlled as shown in FIG. 45.
That is, the drive of the induction heating source 9 is immediately stopped. Further, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for only the heat dissipation operation time "Th1" and "Th2" from the time when the drive of the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be described later.

Since the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have not been operated from the beginning in the preheating process, they are not affected by anything.

Cooking step 1: When at least one of the above-mentioned "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the induction heating source 9 during the heating operation is immediately stopped. Further, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for only the heat dissipation operation time "Th1" and "Th2" from the time when the drive of the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be described later.

Since the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have not been operated from the beginning in the preheating process, they are not affected by anything.

Cooking step 2: In cooking step 2, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are used. At the same time that the oven heating source 188 is driven, the operation of the third cooling fan 128 is started.
Further, when the microwave heating source 189 is driven, the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 is started at the same time in addition to the operation of the third cooling fan 128 (see FIG. 44).
When at least one of the above-mentioned "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the oven heating source 188 during the heating operation is immediately stopped. If the microwave heating source 189 is being driven, it is also immediately stopped.
When the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are operated, as will be described later, only the heat dissipation operation time "Tm1", "Tm2", "To1", and "To2" are operated. ..

As shown in FIG. 45, when at least one of the above-mentioned "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected during the period when the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated, from the beginning. Since it is not in operation, the fourth cooling fan 129 is unaffected.

As described above, at least one of the above-mentioned "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" was detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) in any of the stages of the preheating step, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2. In this case, the integrated control unit MC immediately cancels the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (in FIG. 45, the cooking menu is “hamburger”).

The effect of this "cancel" is the same as the effect of canceling the cooperative cooking mode KM3 itself by pressing the input key 43MT.
Therefore, this cancellation eliminates the "occupation" of the heating source used. In addition, "occupation" will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64.

Next, FIG. 46 will be described.
FIG. 46 shows a case where the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is used and "karaage" is selected as the cooking menu for cooking.

The preheating step by the induction heating source 9 is started, and the cooking step 1 using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 is started during the period in which the preheating step is energized. That is, the preheating step and the cooking step 1 overlap in time.
The cooking step 2 is an example in which the cooked object N, which has become hot in the preheating step, is further heated by the induction heating source 9 above the top plate 15 to cook.

FIG. 46 shows a case where at least one of the above-mentioned abnormalities 1 to 3 is detected, as in FIG. 45. Note that the abnormality 4 (when the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the control command contents) is not shown in FIG. 46.

Next, FIG. 46 will be described.
This is an example of cooking in three types: a preheating step using the induction heating source 9, a cooking step 1 using the induction heating source 9, and a cooking step 2 using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. It differs from the cooking mode of FIG. 45 in that the preheating step and the cooking step 1 overlap in time.

FIG. 46 shows a case where at least one of the above-mentioned abnormalities 1 to 3 is detected among the main abnormalities that can be detected by the above-mentioned abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1). Note that the abnormality 4 (when the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the control command contents) is not shown in FIG. 46.

Preheating step: The induction heating source 9 is first energized to start preheating the object N to be heated.
When at least one of the above-mentioned "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the driving of the induction heating source 9 is immediately stopped. Further, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for only the heat dissipation operation time "Th1" and "Th2" from the time when the drive of the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be described later.

Since the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have not been operated from the beginning in the preheating process, they are not affected by anything.
When at least one of the above-mentioned "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) in this preheating step, the integrated control unit MC operates the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (FIG. In 46, the cooking menu "karaage") is canceled immediately.

Cooking step 1: When at least one of the above-mentioned "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the oven heating source 188 during the heating operation is immediately stopped. Further, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for only the heat dissipation operation time "Th1" and "Th2" from the time when the drive of the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be described later.

The third cooling fan 128, which has been started to operate at the same time as driving the oven heating source 188, is operated for the heat dissipation operation time "Tо1" from the time when the driving of the oven heating source 189 is stopped, as will be described later.
Further, since the fourth cooling fan 129 has not been operated from the beginning, nothing is affected.

On the other hand, when the microwave heating source 189 is driven, the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 is started at the same time in addition to the operation of the third cooling fan 128 (see FIG. 44).
When at least one of the above-mentioned "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the microwave heating source 189 during the heating operation is immediately stopped.
When the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are operated, as will be described later, only the heat dissipation operation time "Tm1", "Tm2", "To1", and "To2" are operated. ..

Cooking step 2: Induction heating source 9 is used in the cooking step 2. Therefore, the operation of the first and second cooling fans 60 and 61 is started at the same time as the induction heating source 9 is driven.
When at least one of the above-mentioned "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the induction heating source 9 is immediately stopped.

As will be described later, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for the heat dissipation operation time “Th1” and “Th2” from the time when the induction heating source 9 is stopped.
Even in the stage of the cooking step 2, if at least one of the above-mentioned "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the integrated control unit MC is set to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Immediately cancel the operation (in FIG. 46, the cooking menu is "karaage").

The effect of "cancel" the linked cooking mode in the preheating step, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 as described above is the same as the effect of canceling the linked cooking mode KM3 itself by pressing the input key 43MT.
Therefore, this cancellation eliminates the "occupation" of the heating source used.

Next, FIG. 47 will be described.
FIG. 47 illustrates the operation of the integrated control device MC during the cooking operation of the cooking device 1, especially after the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detecting unit EM.

The abnormality detection unit EM does not target abnormality detection before the actual start of heating operation, as in step MS1 described with reference to FIG. 39. Therefore, it detects physical (electrical, mechanical, etc.) abnormalities in the cooking process after the heating operation is actually started.

In FIG. 47, steps S20 to S33 show the operation of the integrated control device MC.
In order to simplify the explanation, the case where the abnormality detection unit EM detects the abnormality 1 among the above-mentioned abnormalities 1 to 3 will be described.
The abnormality 1 is a case where the water or the cooking liquid contained in the object to be heated N is boiled on the top plate 15 and blown out to occur, and the abnormality is detected.

When it is detected that the liquid has overflowed from the object to be heated N by induction heating on the top plate 15, the integrated control device MC receives an abnormality occurrence signal (“Yes” determination in step S20). That is, if the liquid that has been blown off flows on the upper surface of the top plate 15 and the range of the liquid reaches the upper surface of the input operation unit 40, there is a concern that the input operation unit 40 may malfunction.

In the next step S21, the drive of the inverter circuit 81L is stopped in order to stop the heating of the IH coil 17L corresponding to, for example, the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9 during operation. In addition, the integrated display unit 30 displays that the unit has stopped due to an abnormality. In this case, the same display may be performed on the left side display unit 31L.

In the next step S22, it is determined whether or not a heating source other than the induction heating source 9 is being driven, and if "No", the process proceeds to step S23 to stop the operation of the two cooling fans 60 and 61. .. The operation stop process does not mean that the cooling fans 60 and 61 are immediately stopped immediately after the step S21. This point will be described in detail in FIGS. 48 and 49.

If it is determined in step S22 that a heating source other than the induction heating source 9 is being driven, the process proceeds to step S24.
In step S24, it is determined whether or not the cooking step by the microwave heating source 129 is being executed.

In step S24, if it is determined that the cooking step by the microwave heating source 189 is being executed, the process proceeds to step S25.
In step S25, it is repeatedly determined at regular short-time (less than several seconds) intervals whether or not the cooking process by the microwave heating source 189 is completed.

When it is determined that the cooking process by the microwave heating source 189 is completed, the driving of the magnetron 122 is stopped, and then the process proceeds to step S26.
In step S26, it is determined whether or not there is a cooking process by the oven heating source 188.

In step S26, it is determined that there is a cooking step of the oven heating source 188, "No", and the process proceeds to step S30.
On the other hand, if the determination in step S26 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the integrated display unit 30 displays that the cooking process by the microwave heating source 189 has been completed.
In the next step S28, the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is stopped by the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 that has been cooled by the cooling air RF6. The cooling air RF6 was introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the introduction port 201, but the supply of the cooling air is stopped.

The "operation stop processing" in step S28 does not mean that the cooling fan 129 is stopped immediately after the determination in step S27. This point will be described in detail in FIGS. 48 and 49.

On the other hand, if the determination is "No" in step S24, the process proceeds to step S30.
Further, even if the determination is "No" in step S26, the process proceeds to step S30.

In step S30, it is repeatedly determined at short intervals (less than a few seconds) whether or not the cooking process of the oven heating source 188 is completed.
When the energization of the oven heating source 188 is stopped and the cooking process is completed, a "Yes" determination is made and the process proceeds to step S31.

In step S31, the integrated display unit 30 indicates that the cooking process by the oven heating source 188 has been completed.
In the next step S32, the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is stopped by the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 that has been cooled by the cooling air RF6. The operation stop process does not mean that the cooling fan 129 is stopped immediately after the determination in step S31. This point will be described in detail in FIGS. 48 and 49.

Further, the operation of the third cooling fan 128 that has supplied the cooling air RF5 around the temperature sensor 160 is stopped. The operation stop process does not mean that the cooling fan 128 is immediately stopped immediately after the determination in step S31. This point will be described in detail in FIGS. 48 and 49.

The operation stop processing of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is completed by the steps S23, S28, S32, and S33, and when the cooling fan is stopped, the operation history information shown in the step S29 is recorded. That is, a series of operation contents after step S20 are stored in the operation history storage area prepared inside the storage device MM, and are subsequently used for control. It is also used for checking abnormalities of users and maintenance and inspection specialists.

Next, FIG. 48 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the case of cooperative cooking with the heating cooker 1.

As shown in FIG. 48, the start of operation of the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is basically the same timing as the start of cooking.
The solid line arrow shown in FIG. 48 indicates the period from the start to the end of the operation, and the broken line arrow following the solid line indicates the additional operation time for heat dissipation described below. The cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are not actually stopped once at the end of the solid line arrow, and the operation is continued as it is for the additional operation time.

In the first embodiment, the time from the start to the end of the operation of each of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is defined as follows.
First cooling fan 60: The operation is started at the timing when the induction heating operation is started. The operation is also started at the timing of starting microwave cooking and oven cooking. In the single cooking mode KM1, "heat dissipation operation" is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the cooking mode ends. This is for cooling the high heat portion such as the top plate 15. Depending on the length of the induction heating time and the size of the numerical value determined by the "product" of the maximum thermal power (power consumption of the inverter circuit) used, the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" is 3 minutes and 5 minutes. One of the three stages of 10 minutes is selected. This is done by the IH control unit 90.

In the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 in which the induction heating source 9 is used, the first cooling fan 60 is the heating source if there is a heating source whose heating operation is completed after the operation of the induction heating source 9 is stopped. The "heat dissipation operation" is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the heating operation is completed or until the temperature of the top plate 15 drops below the reference temperature. In the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the operation is controlled by the integrated control device MC.
In FIG. 48, the “time of heat dissipation operation” of the first cooling fan 60 is indicated by the reference numeral Th1.

Second cooling fan 61: “Time of heat dissipation operation Th2” is determined in synchronization with the operation of the first cooling fan 60. This is performed by the operation start command and the operation end command from the IH control unit 90. The operation starts at the same timing as the first cooling fan 60. In the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the operation is controlled by the integrated control device MC.

Fourth cooling fan 129:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: "heat dissipation operation" is performed for 3 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating operation is completed. That is, this "time of heat dissipation operation Tm2" is fixed in 3 minutes. This is done by the microwave heating control unit 130.
(2) In the case of oven cooking: Not operated.

Third cooling fan 128:
(1) In the case of microwave cooking: The "heat dissipation operation time Tm1" is the same as the "heat dissipation operation time Tm2" of the fourth cooling fan 129. Further, the control of the start and end of the operation is performed by the microwave heating control unit 130 as in the case of the fourth cooling fan 129.
(2) In the case of oven cooking: Immediately after the operation by either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is completed, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured, and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 becomes a constant temperature or less. It will be driven until it goes down. That is, the "time of heat dissipation operation Tо1" is determined under such conditions.
The temperature is measured by a temperature sensor 160 that measures non-contact using infrared rays and a contact-type temperature sensor TS10 (see FIGS. 15 and 30). The temperature measurement data is transmitted to the non-contact temperature measurement unit 158 and the heating chamber control unit 159, respectively. Eventually, the temperature measurement data is transmitted to the integrated control device MC, and the third cooling fan 128 continues to operate until the operation end command is issued to the third cooling fan 128.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the case of oven cooking, the “time of heat dissipation operation To1” of the third cooling fan 128 is important.
In oven cooking, the entire heating chamber 113 becomes hot (eg, 200 ° C.). Therefore, it takes time to cool such a heating chamber 113.
If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is not lowered, it is assumed that the heating chamber 113 is high from the beginning when microwave heating is performed immediately next time.

If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is too high, the microwave heating source 189 cannot be used for "warm" cooking. This is because the "warm" control menu employs a control in which microwave irradiation is automatically stopped when the food is heated and reaches, for example, 80 ° C (default value). Therefore, in order not to cause confusion for the user, for example, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is 80 ° C. or higher from the beginning, it is necessary to perform error processing so as not to accept cooking.

In the first embodiment, the relationship between the control menu of the first embodiment and the operation time (period) of the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is set as follows. There is.
That is, the control program of one control menu also includes the time such as "heat dissipation operation time Th1", "radiation operation time Th2", and "radiation operation time To1" as described above. .. That is, the operating time from the first cooling fan 60 to the fourth cooling fan 129 is also controlled by the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the integrated control device MC.

Therefore, when one control menu is set, a series of control operations from the end of the heating operation to the end of the heat dissipation operation are determined according to the control menu. Conversely, one control menu ends when the operation of the related first cooling fan 60 to the fourth cooling fan 129 ends. Therefore, for the induction heating source 9, the arrow indicating the execution period of one control menu indicates the execution period of one control menu until after the oven heating source 188 (after the execution period of the control menu) as shown in FIG. 48 in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. It's been a long time.

In the above explanation, the explanation is based on the premise that the amount of air blown (air blowing capacity) of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 during cooking is constant, but during cooking, the amount of air blown is increased to dissipate heat. In some cases, changes may be made such as reducing the amount of air blown. Further, when the temperature inside the lower unit 200 or the upper unit 100 is lower than when the temperature is high, the capacity variable operation may be performed so as to reduce the amount of air blown.

In FIG. 48, the induction heating source 9 is drawn as if it is driven (energized) until a time later than the time when the microwave heating source 189 is driven, but this is the object N to be heated by the induction heating source 9. For example, the frying pan is heated to a preheating temperature (for example, 180 ° C.) (preheating step), the object to be cooked is slightly heated (cooking step 1) with the heated frying pan, and then the object to be cooked is transferred to the heating chamber 113. This is an example of microwave heating, and it is not always necessary to stop the induction heating source 9 before starting the microwave heating.

Further, in FIG. 48, the fourth cooling fan 129 may be operated during cooking in the oven, as the operating period of the fourth cooling fan 129 is shown by the broken line.
In that case (for cooking in an oven), the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured immediately after the operation by either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is completed, and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 becomes a constant temperature or less. It will be driven until it goes down. That is, the "time of heat dissipation operation To2" may be changed from time to time. Alternatively, it may be adjusted to the "heat dissipation operation time To1" of the third cooling fan 128.

Next, FIG. 49 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when a plurality of heating sources are simultaneously driven by the cooking cooker 1.

In FIG. 49, since the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality in the middle of the cooking process in which both the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are being driven at the same time, the integrated control device MC sets the “abnormality processing mode A”. It is a time chart when it is executed.

When the induction heating source 9 ends the heating operation as shown in FIG. 49, as described with reference to FIG. 48, the first cooling fan 60 "heat-dissipates operation" for a maximum of 10 minutes with respect to the time when the heating operation ends. do. Specifically, as described above, only one "heat dissipation operation time Th1" is selected from 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes (this is performed by the IH control unit 90).
The second cooling fan 61 is also operated for the same “heat dissipation operation time Th2” as the first cooling fan 60.

On the other hand, the third cooling fan 128 is operated only for "time of heat dissipation operation Tm1" after the driving of the microwave heating source 189 is completed.
Further, the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated only for the "heat dissipation operation time Tm2" as described with reference to FIG. 46, with reference to the time when the driving of the microwave heating source 189 is completed. The "heat dissipation operation time Tm2" is fixed at 3 minutes.

When the abnormality detection unit EM detects, for example, "abnormality 1" (for example, blowout from the heated object N) on the top plate 15, when the abnormality detection signal is received by the integrated control device MC, the upper space 300A is immediately received. The operation of the induction heating source 9 arranged inside the above is stopped. For example, when induction heating is performed by the left heating unit 17HL, the drive of the inverter circuit 81L (see FIG. 30) dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL by the IH control unit 90 is stopped. The same applies to the above-mentioned "abnormality 2" and "abnormality 3".

In FIG. 49, ET1 shows the timing at which the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 is urgently stopped.
On the other hand, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (air flow amount) as before the abnormality occurred until the timing of ET2 shown in FIG. 49.

As shown in FIG. 49, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (air flow rate) as before the abnormality occurred while the microwave heating source 189 is being driven.
Then, based on the time when the driving of the microwave heating source 189 is completed, the operation is performed only for "heat dissipation operation time Th3" and "radiation operation time Th4".

The "heat dissipation operation time Th3" corresponds to the "heat dissipation operation time Th1". Further, the "heat dissipation operation time Th4" corresponds to the "heat dissipation operation time Th2".

The "heat dissipation operation time Th3" and the "heat dissipation operation time Th4" are defined as a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating source 189 ends the heating operation. To determine this time, the integrated control device MC grasps the operation information of the microwave heating control unit 130, and the IH control unit 90 determines the operation information from the integrated control device MC for 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or. Select only one from 10 minutes.

As described above, at the stage where induction heating cooking and microwave heating cooking are being performed at the same time, the abnormality detection unit EM suddenly detects an abnormality and urgently stops the drive sources such as the inverter circuits 81L and 81R of the induction heating source 9. Even in this case, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 cooling the inside of the upper space 300A are, as described with reference to FIG. 49, at least during the period until the driving of the microwave heating source 189 is completed. , The operation is continued under the same conditions (air flow amount) as before the abnormality occurred.

Therefore, not only the heat sink 82 of the induction heating source 9, but also the integrated control device MC that controls the entire heating cooker 1, the power supply circuit board 55, and the filter circuit board 54, which are important components related to each heating source, are used. The cooling effect such as is not affected at all. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects such as overheating and quality deterioration of each of these parts.

Next, FIG. 50 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when a plurality of heating sources are simultaneously driven by the cooking cooker 1.

In FIG. 50, since the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality in the middle of the cooking process in which both the induction heating source 9 and the oven heating source 188 are being driven at the same time, the integrated control device MC executes the “abnormality processing mode B”. It is a time chart when it is done.

When the induction heating source 9 ends the heating operation as shown in FIG. 50, as described with reference to FIG. 48, the first cooling fan 60 "heat-dissipates operation" for a maximum of 10 minutes with respect to the time when the heating operation ends. do. Specifically, as described above, only one "heat dissipation operation time Th1" is selected from 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes (this is performed by the IH control unit 90).
The second cooling fan 61 is also operated for the same “heat dissipation operation time Th2” as the first cooling fan 60.

On the other hand, the third cooling fan 128 measures the temperature of the heating chamber 113 and is operated until the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 drops below a certain temperature. That is, the "time of heat dissipation operation Tо1" is determined under such conditions.

When the abnormality detection unit EM detects, for example, blowout from the object to be heated N on the top plate 15, as described with reference to FIG. 49, the induction heating source 9 immediately arranged inside the upper space 300A The operation is stopped.

In FIG. 50, ET1 indicates the timing at which the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 is urgently stopped.
On the other hand, when the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 is urgently stopped in this way, if the cooking process of the oven heating source 188 has not been completed, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be used. Until the timing of ET3 shown in FIG. 48, the operation is continued under the same conditions (air flow amount) as before the abnormality occurred.

As shown in FIG. 50, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (air flow amount) as before the abnormality occurred while the oven heating source 188 is being driven.
Then, based on the time when the driving of the oven heating source 188 is completed, the operation is performed only for "heat dissipation operation time Th5" and "radiation operation time Th6".

The "heat dissipation operation time Th5" corresponds to the "heat dissipation operation time Th1". Further, the "heat dissipation operation time Th6" corresponds to the "heat dissipation operation time Th2".

The "heat dissipation operation time Th5" and the "heat dissipation operation time Th6" are defined as a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the oven heating source 188 finishes the heating operation. To determine this time, the integrated control device MC grasps the operation information of the heating chamber control unit 159, and the IH control unit 90 determines the operation information from the integrated control device MC for 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes. Select only one from the minutes.

In the case of cooking with the oven heating source 188 alone, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated, but may be operated as shown in FIG. 49. In this case, the "heat dissipation operation time To2" is the time until the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 drops below a certain temperature. That is, it may be changed from time to time. Alternatively, it may be adjusted to the "heat dissipation operation time To1" of the third cooling fan 128.

As described above, even if the abnormality detection unit EM suddenly detects an abnormality and urgently stops the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B at the stage of performing induction heating cooking and oven heating cooking at the same time, the upper space As described with reference to FIG. 50, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 cooling the inside of the 300A are the same as before the abnormality occurred, at least during the period until the driving of the oven heating source 188 is completed. The operation is continued under the same conditions (air volume).

Therefore, not only the heat sink 82 of the induction heating source 9, but also the integrated control device MC that controls the entire heating cooker 1, the power supply circuit board 55, and the filter circuit board 54, which are important components related to each heating source, are used. The cooling effect such as is not affected at all. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects such as overheating and quality deterioration of each of these parts.

The time of the heat dissipation operation (Th1, Tm1, Thо1, Th2, etc.) is guaranteed even if the user presses the operation button (key) 98 of the main power switch 97 to turn off the main power. That is, the integrated control device MC is a control program that disconnects its own power supply circuit after completing the heat dissipation operation as described above.

(Basic operation when cooking in the oven)
Next, in the cooking apparatus 1 according to the first embodiment, the basic operation of the oven heating device 140 will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC presumes that some kind of cooking is started and pre-starts. Therefore, even if the upper unit 100 does not actually perform the induction cooking or the microwave cooking, the oven cooking can be started as it is. However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, it is necessary to first turn on the main power switch 97 in order to start cooking in the oven.
If the main power switch 97 is pressed again, the switch is turned off, so that all the cooking during execution is stopped at once (however, the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 described later are immediately stopped. The operation is not stopped, and as will be described later, the heat is dissipated until certain conditions are met).

Next, the door 114 is opened to put food or the like into the heating chamber 113, and then the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40 selects a cooking control menu using the heating chamber 113. For example, in the case of cooking to bake fish or meat, the heating time and heating power are set. However, when the automatic baking control menu is selected, the heating power is automatically set by the heating chamber control unit 159. The selection of this control menu will be described later.

The heating chamber control unit 159 receives a command signal from the integrated control device MC and controls whether or not the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized, the energization time zone, the energization pattern (intermittent heating), the thermal power, and the like.

The temperature sensor TS2 detects the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 with an infrared signal, and transmits the detected temperature data to the heating chamber control unit 159 via the temperature measuring unit 158. The heating chamber control unit 159 controls energization of both the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, or one of them, by observing the difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature (feedback control). The temperature sensor TS2 may be referred to as a "second temperature sensor".

When the timer cooking control method is input by the central operation unit 40M, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, or one of them, is energized for a set time. That is, the heating chamber control unit 159 does not limit the energization time according to the detection temperature data of the temperature sensor TS2.

After closing the door 114, when the central operation unit 40M (input key 43MS) of the input operation unit 40 is instructed to start cooking in the oven (heating chamber 113), the integrated control device MC controls the heating chamber control unit. A drive command is issued to 159, and the operation of the third cooling fan 128 is started. The drive command signal may be directly output from the heating chamber control unit 159 to the third cooling fan 128.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is sucked into the case A150 from the intake port F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. However, unlike the case of microwave cooking, the inverter circuit board 121 does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF5 enters the communication port B138B and the communication port A138A, respectively, without cooling the inverter circuit 121 substrate.

Then, the cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is blown out from the gap between the outer shell case of the temperature sensor 160 and the mouth edge of the mounting hole into the heating chamber 113 through the detection window 161.

The cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is guided to the passage 172. Then, while cooling the upper case 169, the communication port 173 is reached, and then the upper case 169 is introduced into the exhaust duct 102 (see FIG. 15).

On the other hand, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated from the beginning in the case of oven cooking (see FIG. 44). If operated, the cooling air RF6 passes through the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and reaches the inside of the duct 153. However, since the magnetron 122 is not driven, it does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 enters the void GP5R with almost no temperature rise (see FIGS. 16 and 17).

Then, the cooling air RF6 is introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the introduction port 201 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 reaches the inner portion of the door 114.

The food or the like to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 may generate steam, oily smoke, or the like due to the radiant heat of the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B. As shown in FIG. 15, such steam, oil smoke, etc. are carried to the communication port 174 by the cooling air RF6 moving from the front portion of the heating chamber 113 to the rear portion.

After that, the cooling air RF6 is introduced into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward from the communication port 174. Then, when the cooling air RF6 exits the exhaust duct 102, it is attracted to the cooling air RF5 rising upward and is discharged into the room through the exhaust port 20 (see FIG. 15).

In the first embodiment described above, after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC controls the overall condition of the cooking cooker 1 up to a certain stage, and then temporarily the left operation unit 40L or the right operation. When the unit 40R was operated, the subsequent induction heating control was entrusted to the IH control unit 90. However, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed between the IH control unit 90 and the IH control unit 90.

Similarly, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed between the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

For example, after the control menu of either induction heating, microwave heating, or oven (heating chamber) heating is selected, either the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130 can be used. Basically, it may be possible to perform a control operation related to heating.

In that case, when a new input is made by the input operation unit 40 (including heating stop), it is once controlled by the integrated control device MC, but when no input is made, IH control is performed as it is. Cooking may be executed by any of the unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130.

(Control during cooking of fried food by IH control unit 90)
A specific control operation example of the IH control unit 90 will be described below with reference to FIG. 51.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the IH control unit 90 when fried food cooking (automatic), which is one of the independent cooking modes using the induction heating source 9, is performed in the heating cooker 1.

When "fried food (automatic cooking)" is selected in the control menu of induction heating by operating the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, it is edible placed in the object to be heated (metal pot) N. The temperature of the oil is monitored by the temperature detection circuit 93, and the thermal power of the IH coils 17L and 17R is automatically controlled.

When the user selects the fried food cooking (automatic) control menu, the IH control unit 90 sequentially executes the preheating step, the fried food cooking step, and the heating power up step as shown in FIG. 51.
Further, on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30, information indicating necessary information and reference information (for example, an estimated time required for preheating) appears in characters, figures, and the like. It is also displayed that the priority cooking is such that the electric power is not limited (suppressed) by the electric power control unit 72.

Therefore, during the cooking of the fried food, the user can recognize that the electric power is preferentially secured even if the microwave heating or the oven heating is used.

In the preheating process, when the target oil temperature set by the user is 180 ° C., the inverter circuit 81R (or 81L) is started to be driven at a predetermined thermal power value (maximum 1500 W) in the preheating process, and the oil temperature rapidly rises. The temperature rises from room temperature (for example, 20 ° C.) to 180 ° C., which is the target temperature T1.

Since this temperature rise is monitored in real time by the temperature detection circuit 93 described above, when the temperature detection circuit 93 detects that the target temperature T1 (first temperature) has reached 180 ° C., the IH control unit 90 is a control operation that adjusts the induced heating amount, that is, the inverter output, and tries to maintain the target temperature as it is (based on such temperature detection information, automatically adjusts the high frequency thermal power to approach the target temperature. Is hereinafter referred to as "temperature feedback control").

After that, a display command is issued to the integrated control device MC, and a voice guide such as "The temperature of the oil has reached an appropriate temperature. Please put in the ingredients" is given to the user via the voice synthesizer 95.

When the user puts an ingredient, for example, a frozen croquette, into the cooking oil, the cooking step 1 starts from this point.
Since the cooking oil is rapidly cooled by a cold ingredient (croquette) from the time of its addition, the temperature drops sharply as shown in FIG. 51. However, since the temperature detection circuit 93 monitors the movement of such a temperature drop, it immediately raises the thermal power of the inverter circuit 81R (81L) to a predetermined thermal power of 1500 W or 1800 W and drives it, so that the oil temperature rises again. (Temperature feedback control). In this way, as soon as the target temperature T1 is reached again (or after a predetermined time has elapsed), the process shifts from the fried food process to the heating power increasing process.

In the thermal power up step, the oil temperature is controlled to be maintained between 225 ° C. of the second temperature T2, which is higher than the target temperature T1, and 230 ° C. of the upper limit temperature (third temperature) T3 higher than this. The device 90 controls the inverter circuit 81R (81L).

As shown in FIG. 51, the thermal power value is intermittently driven at about 900 W.
The process after the temperature reaches the first temperature T1 is called the "fried food finishing process", and is an important process for finishing the fried food crisply. If you do not cook with sufficient heat in such a process to increase the heat, you will not be able to make fried food well. Since the fried food process is not limited to a predetermined time, if the user presses the input key 43R1 (or the input key 43L1), all the fried food cooking is completed.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the (automatic) fried food cooking control menu, the process from the fried food cooking process to the heating power up process is defined as the "priority control menu execution time zone", and other execution time zones are defined. Power is not reduced by starting the heating source or changing the operating conditions. That is, the IH control unit 90 of this induction heating always grasps whether or not the control menu being executed is in the "execution time zone of the priority control menu", and if it is in the execution time zone, the execution time zone is the same. It has a function to notify the outside to that effect.

As is clear from the above explanation, every time a specific heating process is entered, the integrated control device MC does not issue a control signal to the IH control unit 90, and the progress of the heating process is all the IH. It is left to the control of the control unit 90.

In the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" described in detail later, when a control operation including such a "preheating process" is performed, the "cooking process" starts from the stage of the "fried food cooking process" that actually heats the object to be cooked. become. That is, the preheating step is not included in the cooking step (cooking step 1, cooking step 2, etc.).

(Display of integrated display unit 30)
Next, the relationship between the integrated display unit 30 and various input keys of the central operation unit 40M, the right operation unit 40R, and the left operation unit 40L will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 59.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the cooking device 1 is started. FIG. 53 is an operation explanatory view 1 of the left operation unit of the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 54 is an operation explanatory view 1 of the left operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a display operation of the integrated display unit during combined cooking of the cooking device 1. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing a display operation of the integrated display unit during combined cooking of the cooking device 1. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing a display operation of the integrated display unit during combined cooking of the cooking device 1. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing a display operation of the integrated display unit during combined cooking of the cooking device 1. FIG. 59 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during combined cooking of the cooking device 1.

FIG. 52 will be described. Since the integrated display unit 30 is not activated in the state where the main power switch 97 is turned off, no information is displayed.
In the state where the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC displays the display screen 1 of FIG. 52 on the integrated display unit 30 after performing a self-diagnosis such as the presence or absence of an abnormality as described above.

In the display screen 1 of FIG. 52, 30A is a display statement notifying that the power is on. 30B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for guiding to a dedicated recipe posting site via the Internet. 30C is a sentence explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code.

When the two-dimensional code 30B is optically read by the information processing terminal 418, the information processing terminal 418 can be connected to an external server 417 that holds information on various cooking recipes. The two-dimensional information 30C and the display sentence 30A are one type of "standby common information" 30N.

After the display screen 1 of FIG. 52 is displayed, the display screen 2A or 2B may be automatically displayed. On the display screen 2A, the character display "Caution for bumping" is one of the caution displays 30E.

Here, "sudden boiling" means that when a viscous cooking object (liquid) such as curry or stew is heated, the inside of the cooking object is overheated above the boiling point and suddenly. It is a phenomenon that causes intense boiling. As steam erupts from the heated liquid, hot droplets may scatter and be dangerous. It is said that the timing and cause of bumping is the mixing of foreign matter from the outside or the impact. Therefore, when a metal pot or the like containing the food to be cooked is placed on the top plate 15 for induction heating, caution is given when the food to be cooked is stirred. The information displayed in this alert is one type of "standby common information" 30N.

The three display screens of the display screen 1, the display screen 2A, and the display screen 2B shown in FIG. 52 may be referred to as a common screen 30Z. In addition, a form other than these three may be included in the common screen 30Z.

On the display screen 2B, 30E is a caution display warning that the inside of the heating chamber 113 has a high temperature and does not come into contact carelessly. When the integrated control device MC detects that the heating chamber 113 has not been sufficiently cooled after the oven cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113, the state of the display screen 2 is automatically switched to. Although the display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed at the same time, they may be displayed alternately at intervals of several seconds to call attention to both the bumping display and the high temperature display. Further, the voice synthesizing device 95 may be used to simultaneously perform the contents of the alerts on the display screens 2A and 2B by voice.

As is clear from the display screens 1 to 2A and 2B of FIG. 52, these displays are performed by using the entire display screen 30D. That is, instead of partially displaying in any of the first area 30L to the third area 30R described above, the three areas 30L to the third area 30R cannot be identified in order to secure the widest possible display area. In this way, the integrated display is performed so that the user can see that the integrated display unit 30 is displayed as a whole.

The display screens 1 to 2A and 2B are the stages of ST3 in the operation step of FIG. 38.
After a certain period of time, for example, 10 seconds has elapsed from the display time of the display screens 1 to 2A and 2B, the display content changes to prompt the selection of the heating source (heating means) (corresponding to the stage of the operation step ST4 in FIG. 38). ..

Therefore, the case of induction cooking will be described with reference to FIG. 53. Note that FIG. 53 describes the case of the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, not the case of the combined cooking mode KM2 or the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

FIG. 53 is a plan view of the left display unit 31L and the left operation unit 40L for the left heating source 17HL. Before pressing the input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL, the state is shown in FIG. 53 (A).

When the input key 43L1 is pressed, the integrated control device MC detects that the left heating source 17HL has been selected by the user. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the integrated control device MC causes the individual light emitting unit 27L3 to emit light, and displays that the operation input has been accepted.

Since the input key 43L4 for selecting timer cooking is also waiting for input, the individual light emitting unit 27L1 is blinked. Further, since the selection of the control menu is also in the state of waiting for input, the individual light emitting unit 27L2 directly behind the input key 44L is blinked. In FIG. 53B, the star-shaped figure indicates that the light emitting display unit 27 is lit or blinking.

If the default heating power is set to "3", the heating power display unit 67L indicating the heating power stage during induction heating causes the light emitting unit of the heating power display unit 67L to continuously emit light from the left side (or until the heating power 3 is indicated). Change the blue color to red) and display the amount of firepower to the user.

When the user changes to a thermal power that is not the default setting, pressing the input key 43L2 or 43L3 reduces or increases the thermal power by one step each time the input key is pressed, and the light emitting unit of the thermal power display unit 67L (correspondingly Or the range of the red light emitting part) is expanded from the left side to the right or reduced to the left side, and the adjustment state of the thermal power is displayed to the user.

Next, FIG. 54 will be described.
FIG. 54 is an operation explanatory view of the left operation unit 40L and the left side display unit 31L of the cooking cooker 1.
In FIG. 54, the diagrams of states A to C drawn on the left side are schematic views of the left operation unit 40L and the left side display unit 31L. The state before the start of the operation is the state A in FIG. 54.

As described with reference to FIG. 53, when the input key 43L1 is operated, the light emitting display unit 27L3 emits light as shown in the state B of FIG. 54.
In the state B, the light emitting display unit 27L4 is also lit, and it can be seen that the input function is effective for both the input keys 43L2 and 43L3. Therefore, when the input key 43L2 on the left side is pressed, the thermal power is reduced. The increase / decrease in the thermal power can be seen from the light emitting state of the thermal power display unit 67L immediately behind.

Next, a case where the “single (heating) cooking mode” using the induction heating source 9 is performed will be described.
In order to simplify the explanation, a case where the left heating unit 17HL is used will be described.

When the input key 43L2 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed once, it means that the temperature is specified below the thermal power level 1, and the integrated control device MC determines that the control mode of "heat insulation" is specified, and the integrated display unit 30. On the display screen 30D of the above, the "third specific screen" 30ST of the heat insulating display is displayed.

Further, when the input key 44L is pressed once while the third specific screen 30ST is displayed, "fried food" is selected as one control menu from the control menu group, and the "third specific" corresponding to the fried food is selected. "Screen" 30ST is displayed.
Since the default temperature of the "third specific screen 30ST" for fried food is set to 180 ° C., the characters "fried food 180 ° C." may be displayed.

When the input key 44L is pressed once more, the "third specific screen 30ST" corresponding to preheating is displayed.
Information such as how to use the preheating menu and the recommended control mode for tamagoyaki may be displayed.

As can be seen from the display screen 3A of FIG. 54, a "schematic diagram of a container" 280 such as a pot is displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30, and the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined. , It has a wide horizontal display area.

In the space where the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined, the characters "heat insulation (left IH)" are displayed, indicating that the heat insulation temperature is about 80 ° C. The explanation 30F indicates that the control menu is recommended for soups and the like. At the stage of this display screen 3A, nothing is displayed on the left side display unit 31L. However, as shown in FIG. 54, the heat insulating temperature may be displayed as "80 ° C.".

Next, when the input key 44L is pressed in the state B of FIG. 54, one control menu is selected from the "IH control menu group" each time the input key 44L is pressed, and the display screen 3B is displayed. In the example of the display screen 3B, it is shown that "fried food" is selected. In this state B, when a certain period of time elapses, the control menu of the left heating unit 17HL is confirmed as "fried food", and the driving of the IH coil 17L is started. As described with reference to FIG. 39, the IH control menu group includes "boiled food", "boiled water heater", and the like in addition to "fried food".

In the case of the display screen 3B, since the default temperature is set to 180 ° C., the characters “fried food 180 ° C.” are displayed on the left side display unit 31L as shown in FIG. 54.
This temperature of "180 ° C" means that the cooking oil is heated by the IH coil 17L and maintained in the vicinity of 180 ° C, and when the temperature reaches 180 ° C, it is notified by voice by the voice synthesizer 95. In addition to that, the integrated display unit 30 displays "the preheating temperature has been reached", and is expected to have the effect of encouraging the user to input foodstuffs and the like.

If it is desired to change the preheating (target) temperature in the fried food (automatic) control menu, the temperature can be lowered by the input key 43L2 or raised by the input key 43L3.

As can be seen from the display screen 3B, the display screen 30D has a horizontally long and wide display area in which the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined, and the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined. In the space provided, a cautionary statement 30G indicating that the preheating is started and that the cooker 1 is not separated from the side during the preheating operation is displayed.

Next, in the state B of FIG. 54, when the input key 44L is pressed and "appropriate temperature" is selected as another control menu, the display screen 3C is displayed. As shown on the display screen 3C, the control menu "suitable temperature" is a recommended control mode for heating a pot or the like to a set temperature (default temperature is 180 ° C.) and for tamagoyaki or the like. The recommended sentence 30H is displayed so that such a meaning can be understood. At the stage of this display screen 3C, the character information "preheating 180 ° C." is displayed on the left side display unit 31L.

The "third specific screen" 30ST is displayed on the individual display unit (left side display unit 31L, right side display unit 31R) adjacent to the dedicated operation unit (right operation unit 40R, left operation unit 40L). Is also good.

Next, FIG. 55 will be described.
FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking device 1 is operated. The scene where the combined cooking mode KM2 is executed is shown.
Since the display screen 4ST is the default display screen defined by the integrated control device MC, "warm" is displayed in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

As described with reference to FIG. 21, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG. 55 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
As is clear from the display screen 4ST, a specific sentence 30J indicating the name of one control menu (of the RG control menu) called "warm" is displayed in a large size in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

The word "oven" is displayed in the rear BK of the specific sentence 30J of "warm" displayed in the center of the first area 30L, and conversely, the character "range manual" is displayed in a slightly smaller size on the front FR side. To.

And when the user selects the control menu, the next candidates are "oven" and "manual range". If the input key 43M1 at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once at this stage, the character "warm" (specific sentence 30J) changes to "range manual".
Further, when the input key 43M1 at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the character "warm" changes to "oven".

In FIG. 55, on the display screen 4ST, which is the default display screen, the target temperature information 30T of “80 ° C.” is displayed in the second area 30M. In the case of microwave heating at this target temperature, if the temperature of the food is 80 ° C., the microwave heating is automatically stopped when the temperature sensor TS1 detects 80 ° C.

In order to raise the target temperature (80 ° C.) of the second area 30M to 85 ° C., the input key 43M2 on the right side, which is located immediately before the second area 30M, is operated once. On the contrary, when it is desired to lower the temperature to 75 ° C., the input key 43M2 on the left side may be operated once.

A mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is displayed above the number of the target temperature (80 ° C.) in the second area 30M. Also, below the number at 80 ° C., a downwardly pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

Since this symbol 30UP and the shape of the input key 43M2 (on the right side) of the central operation unit 40M are similar, the user can operate the input key 43M2 on the right side when raising the temperature, thermal power, etc. Is easy to understand.

On the contrary, since the shape of the input key 43M2 (on the left side) of the symbol 30DN and the central operation unit 40M is similar, the user can operate the input key 43M2 on the left side when lowering the temperature, thermal power, etc. Easy to understand. This correspondence rule is also applied to the relationship between the display of the third area 30R and the pair of left and right input keys 43M3. In this way, we are devising ways to avoid operation mistakes (wrong input keys) during user input operations.

In FIG. 55, 30K is a heating source display unit that indicates in characters that the heating source is a microwave heating source 189. As described above, 30P is reference information that automatically displays that it is a recommended control menu for warming side dishes and the like. The content of this reference information may be another additional information 30Q, or two or more types of information may be alternately displayed on the display screen 30D for several seconds each.

Further, as shown in the classification 2 of FIG. 37, the information (reference information) 30P1 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed at any time according to the operation of the input key 43M3.
That is, in the first embodiment, there is a one-to-one correspondence with the control menu (for example, "warm") so that the user does not hesitate whether to select each control menu (for example, "warm"). Information 30P is displayed.
Further, when the reference information 30P is displayed as shown in FIG. 55, when the (two) input keys 43M3 located in front of the reference information 30P are touch-operated, the reference information 30P1 is changed to the reference information 30P. Instead of, it can be displayed in the third area 30R.

Next, FIG. 56 will be described.
FIG. 56 is another schematic view illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking device 1 is operated to carry out the combined cooking mode KM2.

The display screens 5ST, 5UPN, 5DN1 and the like shown in FIG. 56 are all one type of the second specific screen 30SC.
When the control menu is set to "range manual", the display screen 5ST is the default display screen defined by the integrated control device MC.
That is, in the second specific screen 30SC of the cooperative cooking mode, one control menu (in this case, "range manual" and the default value of the control condition (in this case, microwave output 500 W, heating for 1 minute) are set. Is displayed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 55, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG. 55 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as a kind of the second specific screen 30SC. Next, when the input key 43M1 on the left side of the central operation unit 40M is operated several times, the specific sentence 30J changes to "range manual", and the display screen 5ST of FIG. 56 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. ..

As is clear from the display screen 5ST, the specific sentence 30J of the control menu "range manual" is displayed in a large size in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

On the display screen 5ST, the microwave output value (watt value) information 30X of "500W" is displayed in the second area 30M. Further, in the adjacent third area 30R, the microwave heating time information 30MY of "1 minute 00 seconds" is displayed. As can be seen from this display screen 5ST, it is included in the combined cooking mode, but since it is known from the beginning that only the microwave heating source 189 is used in this "range manual", it is shown in FIG. 55. The heating source display unit 30K (indicating that it is a microwave heating source 189 in characters) may not be displayed.

If you want to lower the microwave output value (watt value) of 500W in the second area 30M of the display screen 5ST by one step to 200W, you can operate the input key 43M2 on the left side once.

Similarly, in order to lengthen the heating time of the second area 30R to 1 minute and 10 seconds, the input key 43M3 on the right side, which is located immediately before the third area 30M, is operated once. On the contrary, when it is desired to shorten the heating time by one step to 50 seconds, the input key 43M3 on the left side may be operated once.

In the display screen 5ST of FIG. 56, the mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is not displayed above the number of the output (500W) of the second area 30M. Also, below the number of 500 W, a downwardly pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

The display screen 5DNN in FIG. 56 shows the minimum thermal power (100 W) and the shortest time (10 seconds), and the display contents of the first area 30L are omitted.
The symbol 30UP is displayed only on the upper side of the minimum thermal power (100W) of the display screen 5DNN, indicating that only thermal power larger than this thermal power can be selected. Similarly, the symbol 30UP is displayed only on the upper side of the number of the shortest time (10 seconds), and the symbol 30DN is not displayed. In other words, the symbol 30UP also indicates that a shorter time cannot be selected.

Next, FIG. 57 will be described.
FIG. 5 is yet another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 is performed. That is, the display content of the second specific screen 30SC shows a situation in which the display content changes at any time according to the input operation of the user.

When the input key 43M1 on the left side corresponding to the first area 30L is operated once in the state of the display screen shown in FIG. 56, it changes from "range manual" to "boiled leaf vegetables" as shown in FIG. 57. can.

The display screen 6ST in FIG. 57 is the default display screen. In the first area 30L, "Boiled leafy vegetables", which is a specific sentence (name) 30J of the control menu, is displayed in large size.
In the second area 30M, the information 30V indicating the microwave output level is displayed as "standard", and if cooking is started as it is, it will be heated at 500W. The microwave output value in the case of "standard" may be 500 W, but may be other than this. That is, when the microwave heating source 9 is used, the "standard" of the thermal power level is different for each compound cooking menu and is not always the same output (for example, 500 W).

In the first area 30L of FIG. 57, as described with reference to FIG. 55, a heating source display unit 30K indicating that the heating source is a microwave heating source 189 is displayed. As described above, 30P is a recommended sentence (reference information) indicating that the control mode is recommended for warming side dishes and the like. The content of this recommended sentence may be another additional information 30Q, or two or more types of information may be alternately displayed on the display screen 30D for several seconds each.

Instead of the recommended sentence 30P of FIG. 57, as described with reference to FIG. 55, the reference information 30P1 indicating the main points of each control menu shown in the classification 2 of FIG. Is also good.

Next, FIG. 58 will be described.
FIG. 58 is still another schematic view illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 is carried out. The display content of the second specific screen 30SC shows a situation in which the display content changes at any time according to a user's input operation.
FIG. 58 shows a scene in which a range grill (RG) control menu called “RG cooking” is selected.

As described above, the above-mentioned "RG cooking" is a control menu that can be cooked by combining microwave heating and oven heating using the heating chamber 113.
A pattern in which microwave heating is performed first to heat food to some extent and then heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, a pattern in which heating is performed in the reverse order, and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed at the same time. There are three types. Note that "simultaneous" here does not mean that the timings of both the start and end of heating are exactly the same, and it is sufficient that the time zones of the heating operations overlap even at a part.

In the display screen 7ST1 shown in FIG. 58, first, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven to heat for 1 minute, then the microwave heating is stopped and the oven heating source 188 alone is used for 5 minutes. It can be seen that it is a heating control (time control) pattern of heating.

The reason why the abbreviated form "RG" is used instead of the term "range grill" is to minimize the number of characters that can be displayed in the first display area 30L. This is because if an attempt is made to display a larger number of characters, the occupied area of the first area 30L will increase.

In the display example shown in FIG. 58, the heating time information 30S is displayed in minutes in the second area 30M, and the heating time information 30GY for the subsequent grill cooking is also displayed in minutes (however, short). When the time comes, it is displayed in units of 10 seconds).
The heating time information 30S shown in the second area 30M and the heating time information 30GY in the third area 30R can be appropriately changed by the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M.

In FIG. 58, the display screen 7ST2 is first heated by the microwave heating source 189 alone for 1 minute (microwave output 500 W), and then heated only by the oven heating source 188 for 5 minutes, which is a heating control (time control) pattern. This is the case. This display screen 7ST2 is a default display screen. The display screen 7ST1 that drives both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating edge 188 for only the first minute is also the default display screen. The user can specify the default display screen in advance (“function setting” using the input key 43KP described above).

Next, FIG. 59 will be described.
FIG. 59 shows the state of the display screen 6ST in which the control menu of the “leafy greens boiled” shown in FIG. 57 is displayed at a predetermined position (center position in the front and back) of the first area 30L, and the central operation unit 40M. It is a plane schematic diagram explaining the operation of.

As shown in FIG. 59, at the stage when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M4 emit light in a unified light emitting color by the display unit drive circuit 63.

After that, when the selection input key 43M1 of the combined cooking mode KM2 is further operated, the display screen 6ST shown in FIG. 57 is displayed in the first area 30L by default.
At this display stage, a total of four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 corresponding to the first area 30L and the second area 30M can all accept inputs. Therefore, the two individual light emitting units 27M3 and 27M4 corresponding to the four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 continue to emit light.

On the other hand, after the display screen 6ST, the display screens 6UP1, 6DN1, etc. are displayed, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS for the start is shown by a dotted line circle in FIG. 59 from the continuous light emission. It changes to blinking. Then, the existence of the input key 43MS is emphasized by light.

If the user touches the input key 43MS in the state shown in FIG. 59, the mode shifts to the combined cooking mode KM2. In the case of a heating means other than the induction heating source 9, the heating operation is started immediately. However, in the case of the induction heating source 9, it is necessary to press the input keys 43R1 and 43L1 once after shifting to the combined cooking mode KM2. Even in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the same applies after the command to shift to the cooking process using the induction heating source 9 is given by (input key 43MS).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the input functions of the input key 43M1 and the input key 43MS are effective, the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are made to emit light in the first light emitting form (continuous light emitting). It is provided with light emitting means (display unit drive circuit 63).
When the reference information 30P and 30P1 are displayed, the integrated control device MC causes only the light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the start selection unit (input key 43MS) to emit light in the second light emitting mode (blinking). It is a composition.

Because of the above configuration, the user can easily identify the state of waiting for the command to start the heating operation (in the combined cooking mode KM2) by the blinking of the light emitting unit 27M6. Since the light emitting unit 27M6 also supports the touch-type input key 43MT that can stop the operation of microwave heating and oven heating, the light emitting unit 27M6 emits light even after the heating operation starts. In this case, the input function of the input key 43MT is also effective, and a command to stop heating can be transmitted by touch operation.

At the stage when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display unit drive circuit 63 may cause only the light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS, which is the start selection unit, to blink from the beginning. Further, the other light emitting units 27M1 to 27M4 may emit light continuously and emit light in a form different from that of the input key 43MS of the start selection unit.

(Basic operation during cooking in cooperative cooking mode)
Next, the basic operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 68.
FIG. 60 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M during cooperative cooking. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing each input operation and process when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is implemented and the single cooking mode KM1 is implemented. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode and the single cooking mode. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIG. 60 is displayed.
Even if the input key 43M1 is pressed first and the setting operation of the combined cooking mode KM2 as shown in FIGS. 55 to 59 is performed halfway, the input key 43MS is input before the input key 43MS is pressed. From the stage when the key 43MC is pressed, the input process for the linked cooking mode KM3 is changed. That is, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed from this stage.

When the input key 43MC is subsequently touched and then the input key 43M1 is touched, the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP) is subject to a plurality of cooperative cooking modes KM3 (cooperative cooking). Yet another identification information (including the graphic mark and the name of the cooked food) 330 for identifying the cooked food (which is a menu) is displayed.

In FIG. 60, the number of “foods to be cooked” that can be executed in the cooperative cooking mode displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is three. That is, there are three types, "hamburger", "gratin", and "roast beef", and the number of items to be cooked is called "the number of cooperative cooking menus".

In the first embodiment, the total number of linked cooking menus is eight. Details will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 83.

In FIG. 60, 330 is the identification information, and in the first embodiment, it is the information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak).
There are eight identification information 330. In other words, there are also eight cooperative cooking menus. Reference numeral 331 is additional information presented to the user regarding cooking of the object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak).

In FIG. 60, as additional information 331, "when the start button is pressed, heating of the left IH is started" is displayed. This means that if the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, induction heating can be started by the left heating unit 17HL. However, in the first embodiment, it is necessary to press the input key 43L1 with the left operation unit 40L after the input key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 60, the identification information 330A indicating the name of another cooked food (for example, gratin) is displayed on the identification information 330 shown on the first specific screen 30SP.
Further, below the identification information 330, identification information 330B indicating the name of another cooked food (for example, roast beef) is displayed. In the following description, when the identification information is generically referred to, the reference numeral 330 is used.

Similar to the switching of the display of the "composite cooking mode KM2" described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, the object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 by operating the two input keys 43M1 described above. The display of the identification information 330 indicating the name of the above changes in the form of sequentially moving upward or downward. That is, the identification information 330 can be sequentially displayed at a predetermined position (front-back center position) of the first area 30L by forward feed and reverse feed.

In the first embodiment, there are a total of eight types of cooked foods in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 as described above. Therefore, for example, if the input key 43M1 on the left side is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all the objects to be cooked goes around. On the contrary, if the input key 43M1 on the right side is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all the objects to be cooked goes around. This will be described in detail in FIGS. 82 to 84.

The default display for the linked cooking menu is "hamburger" as shown in FIG.
The identification information 330 indicating the name of the object to be cooked (hamburger steak) is displayed in the center in the front-rear direction (of the first area 30L). By operating the input key 43M1 in this state, the identification information of another object to be cooked can be displayed in the center (corresponding to step STR4 in FIG. 74).

The "first specific screen" 30SP in the first embodiment means the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 shown in FIG. 60. The display content of the first specific screen SP is not always the same because it changes at any time depending on the input of the central operation unit 40M by the user and the operating state of the cooking cooker 1.

The main information displayed on the first specific screen 30SP is as shown in FIG. 60.
(1) Identification information 330 is displayed in the first area 30L. This identification information 330 is always displayed in principle even if the heating process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 progresses. However, as shown in the display screen 10C of FIG. 93 (B), there are some exceptions.
(2) In the first half of the horizontally long area where the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined, a pair of heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L corresponding to the heating unit of the induction heating source 9 used is displayed. To. Either one of the heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L can be selected by operating the input key 43M2. The color and brightness of the selected heating unit specifying unit 333R and 333L change as shown in FIG. 60, for example, as shown in the white character "left", and the selected heating unit (either right or left). One) is shown.
(3) A horizontally long strip-shaped process display unit 332 is displayed in the latter half of the horizontally long area where the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined. The process display unit 332 is continuously displayed during the period from before the transition to the linked cooking mode KM3 to the end of all the cooking steps in the linked cooking mode. In addition, the contents are updated as needed by methods such as black-and-white inversion display and color change so that the current cooking process can be understood according to the progress of the cooking process. This will be explained in detail later.
(4) Additional information 331 that can be used as a reference for cooking is displayed on the right side of the heating unit specifying unit 333R and 333L, except that it is displayed in a wide range covering the entire integrated display unit 30. (See the display screen 10C in FIG. 93).

When the input key 43MS is pressed with the identification information 330 of the target object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak) displayed in the center of the first area 30L, a cooperative cooking mode for cooking the object to be cooked is performed. The execution command of KM3 is issued to the integrated control device MC (corresponding to step STR7 in FIG. 73).

In cooking using the induction heating source 9 in the cooking step 1 (for example, hamburger steak), either the left heating unit 17HL or the right heating unit 17HR may be recommended according to the cooperative cooking mode. For example, in order to recommend the use of the left heating unit 17HL, the default display screen of the first specific screen 30SP in the case of the hamburger is as shown in FIG. 60, and the left heating unit 17HL is recommended.

The additional information 331 changes according to the progress of the cooking process, and also changes depending on the object to be cooked. The example shown in FIG. 60 illustrates that the input key 43MS needs to be operated in order to start induction cooking.

Next, FIG. 61 will be described.
In the flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 38, the operation after step ST4 is shown in FIG.

After the display / notification step (ST4) prompting the selection of the heating means, the right operation unit 40R can select the cooking by the right heating unit 17HR (SP1). In addition, cooking by the left heating unit 17HL can also be selected by the left operation unit 40L (SP2).

Further, after that step (ST4), cooking by the microwave heating source 189 can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (SS1). In addition, cooking using the heating chamber 113 by the oven heating source 188 can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (SS2).

Further, the combined cooking mode KM2 can also be selected by the central operation unit 40M (SS3A). In addition, the single cooking mode KM1 can also be selected (SS3B).

After the step (ST4), the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be selected by operating the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M (SR1).
In FIG. 61, CH1 is a first layer selection means for selecting three types of heating sources. That is, as the selection means of the first layer, the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M, the input key 43M1, the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L which is an individual operation unit, and the input key of the right operation unit 40R are also used. There are a total of 4 of 43R1.

As described above, "cooperative cooking" means that one object to be cooked (including food, meat, vegetables, etc., hereinafter the same) has a different heating location and is independently heated under operating conditions (hereinafter, "control conditions"). Refers to cooking performed using two or more heat sources that can be set.

More specifically, in the "cooperative cooking" in the first embodiment, the heating place for one object to be cooked is on the top plate 15 and inside the heating chamber 113.
The two types of heating sources whose heating operation conditions can be independently set are an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are heated with the same time zone or time difference.

The "cooperative cooking" in the first embodiment is composed of two "first cooperative cooking" and "second cooperative cooking".
In the "first cooperative cooking", first, the induction heating source 9 is used for cooking in the left heating unit 17HL, and then the inside of the heating chamber 113 is cooked by microwaves. The cooking process of this "first cooperative cooking", that is, the one that defines the cooking sequence is the "first cooperative cooking mode" (SR2A).

On the other hand, the "second cooperative cooking" means that first, microwave heating, oven heating source 188, or (cooperative) heating cooking by these two heating sources is performed inside the heating chamber 113, and then induction. Cooking is performed in the left heating unit 17HL by the heating source 9.

The cooking process of this "second cooperative cooking", that is, the one that defines the cooking sequence is the "second cooperative cooking mode" (SR2B).
In the case of the second linked cooking mode, usually (default setting condition), the first used heating source, either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or both, is linked for a specific period of time. The integrated control device MC performs a process of limiting operations corresponding to menus other than the cooking mode KM3.

The selection (SR2A, SR2B) of the "first cooperative cooking mode" and the "second cooperative cooking mode" is not one in which the user judges and performs the selection operation each time, but the cooperative cooking menu is displayed in the cooperative cooking mode. When the corresponding identification information 330 (for example, the cooking name "hamburger") is selected, the integrated control device MC automatically selects (determines) it.

In the first embodiment, the heating unit of the induction heating source 9 used when executing the "cooperative cooking" menu is both the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL. Therefore, in the process of implementing the cooperative cooking mode KM3, for example, when only the left heating unit 17HL is used, the right heating unit 17HR can be freely used regardless of the cooperative cooking during the execution of the cooperative cooking mode. can. However, if the power control unit 72 finds that the total value of the power consumption during cooperative cooking and the power consumption of the right heating unit 17HR used individually exceeds the limit value, the right heating unit 17HR is used. The integrated control device MC issues a command to prohibit or forcibly reduce the thermal power.

In FIG. 61, CH2 is a second layer selection means for selecting a control menu. That is, as the selection means of the second layer, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is used.

On the other hand, as the selection means of the second layer, in the combined cooking mode KM2, the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is used.
Further, as the selection means of the second layer, in the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are used. Similarly, in the right operation unit 40R, there are two input keys 43R2 and 43R3.

That is, in the first embodiment, the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 are forward-forwarded and reverse-forwarded to be displayed at a predetermined display position of the integrated display unit 30. The keys are all input keys 43M1. Therefore, when the user selects a cooking menu or a control menu, the desired cooking menu or the like can be displayed by the same input key 43M1, and the operability is good.

As shown in FIG. 61, at the stage (SR5) when the induction cooking is started, the user operates the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L to specify the thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating unit 17HL. Can be done (SR6). Further, by operating the input key 43L1, the heating operation can be stopped at an arbitrary timing (SR7).

In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the cooking time of the left heating unit 17HL is basically not set in advance, so that the user can cook for any time desired.

Further, at the stage (SR5) when the induction heating cooking is started using the right heating unit 17HR, the user operates the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operating unit 40R to generate heat (power consumption) in the right heating unit 17HR. Can be specified (SR6).

Further, when the right heating unit 17HR is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at an arbitrary timing by operating the input key 43R1 (SR7).
Further, when the left heating unit 17HL is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at an arbitrary timing by operating the input key 43L1 (SR7).

When the cooking step 1 by the left heating unit 17HL is completed by the input key 43L1, the cooking step of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 proceeds to the next cooking step 2 (described in detail in FIG. 64).

When the induction heating step is completed in the cooking step of the first cooperative cooking, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M again (SR8). When this cooperative cooking restart command is issued (SR9), the microwave output value during microwave heating may be increased or decreased by operating the input key 43M2 or 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M (SR10). However, there are cases where the microwave output is controlled so that the cooking process proceeds while being fixed at 500 W, for example.

When the microwave heating cooking (cooking step 2) is terminated by the input key 43MT, the operation of all cooking processes of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is terminated at this termination point (SR11). That is, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is the same as the canceled state. However, when the cooking step 3 is performed after the cooking step 2, the set state of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is maintained.

Although it is not the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, after that, the user may operate the central operation unit 40M (in the combined cooking mode KM2 or the single cooking mode KM1) to further perform microwave cooking.

FIG. 61 will continue to be described.
SS1 to SS11 in FIG. 61 show the operation steps when microwave cooking and oven cooking are performed by the central operation unit 40M.
As described above, by operating the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M, the control menus (11 types) of the single cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2 for microwave heating and oven heating are displayed on the integrated display unit 30. (See FIG. 34).

Therefore, by pressing the input key 43M1, the control menu of one combined cooking mode KM2 or the control menu of the single control mode KM1 can be selected (SS3). However, as described above, since only the combined cooking mode KM2 can be selected in the central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40, the third specific screen 30ST is not displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

Next, if the input key 43MS is pressed, the execution of one combined cooking mode KM2 or the single control mode KM1 is instructed (SS4), and cooking can be started (SS5). In the description of FIG. 34, the whole is described as the combined cooking mode, but strictly speaking, the menu such as "range manual" is the control pattern of the single cooking mode KM1, but the combined cooking mode KM2 is desired to be selected. Cannot be selected. That is, the actual situation includes the control menu of the single heating mode KM1. This has been described in FIG. 37.

For example, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the control menu "range grill (RG) cooking" can be displayed on the integrated display unit, and this "RG cooking" combines microwave cooking and grill cooking ( This is one control menu (of the combined cooking mode KM2).

On the other hand, when the same input key 43M1 is operated, "warm" can be selected, which is cooking with the microwave heating source 189 alone, and is one control menu of the single cooking mode KM1. Due to the restriction that the central operation unit (shared operation unit) is 40M, the independent cooking mode KM1 cannot be directly selected for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the corresponding third specific screen 30ST. Can not be displayed.

The heating conditions (eg, heating time) may be changed after the start of microwave heating or oven heating (SS6).
When the input key 43MT is pressed, the execution of one control menu is instructed to be stopped (SS7), and the operation of microwave heating or oven heating is stopped (SS8).

FIG. 61 will continue to be described.
SP1 to SP8 in FIG. 61 show operation steps when induction cooking is performed by the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40R.
For example, if the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed, cooking by the right heating unit 17HL can be selected (SP2). Then, the induction heating control menu is automatically determined after a certain period of time without operating the input keys 43L2 or 43L3 (SP3). The "induction heating control menu" referred to here is an IH control menu.
In other words, the induction heating control menu is completely different from the cooking menu of the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by operating the input key 43MC. ..

Execution of one control menu is commanded (SP4), and cooking in the "single cooking mode KM1" can be started (SP5).
The "single cooking" in step SP5 means that the heating source used is the induction heating source 9 alone.
If the user operates the input keys 43R2 or 43R3 to command the change of the thermal power of the induction heating after the induction heating is started, the integrated control device MC changes the thermal power which is one of the control conditions. (SP6).

In both the case of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the start command of the cooking process for performing microwave heating is the input key 43MS. Further, the input key 43MS is also used to start the cooking process of the independent cooking mode KM1 that independently drives the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the dedicated switch (button or input key) for instructing the start of cooking for the induction heating source 9 is not provided, but the dedicated switch or input key is used (input). It may be provided (in addition to the key 43MS).

When the input key 43R1 is pressed, the right heating unit 17HR is instructed to stop (SP7), and the induction heating operation is stopped (SS8). In the case of the left heating unit 17HL, the input key 43L1 may be pressed. As described above, the input keys 43L1 and 43R1 are used both in the scene where the heating unit is selected and the operation is started, and in the case where the cooking is finished.

Next, FIG. 62 will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a priority relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1 by the induction heating source 9. Further, it is a schematic diagram showing that the heating source used is restricted in operation during cooperative cooking.
The linked cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 62 is the “first linked cooking mode” described with reference to FIG. 61.

In the "first cooperative cooking mode" of this example, the induction heating source 9 is used in the cooking step 1, and after the heating operation is completed, the microwave heating source 189 is operated in the cooking step 2. Further, in the cooking step 2, the oven heating source 188 is operated.

As shown in FIG. 62, one cooperative cooking mode KM3 is composed of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is a period from operating the input key 43MC to execute the cooperative cooking mode and then pressing the input key 43MS.

P2 is a cooking period (cooking step 1). It should be noted that this cooking step 1 does not include a "preheating step" in which the object to be cooked is not actually heated.
Since P3 switches from cooking by the heating means used in the cooking step 1 to cooking in the cooking step 2 in which another heating means is used, the operation of the heating means used in the cooking step 1 is temporarily stopped, and another heating means is used. It is a rest period (also referred to as “transition period TR”) until the heating of the heating means is started. The length of this pause period depends on the operation timing of the user. That is, if the user issues a command to start the cooking process 2 earlier, this pause time becomes shorter.
P4 is a cooking period (cooking step 2) by the heating means (either a single heating source or a plurality of heating sources) used in the cooking step 2.

In the first embodiment, the "cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4" is provided as one of the linked cooking modes KM3.
The linked preheating cooking mode KM4 will be described in detail later, but as a cooking menu using the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, for example, there is "hamburger steak". In the case of this "hamburger", the preheating step is performed by the induction heating source 9, but at the start of the cooking step 1, the heating operation of the preheating step does not stop (that is, energization for the induction heating of the preheating step). And, the energization of the heating source in the cooking step 2 becomes simultaneous and parallel at a certain time zone).

In other words, in the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the heating source (induction heating source 9 in the above description) that has started the operation before the cooking step 1 is not necessarily stopped at the start of the cooking step 1, and the cooking step is performed. During the period of 1, the induction heating source 9 and the oven heating source 188 or the microwave heating source 189 may be driven at the same time.

Unless there is a particular contradiction, the following description will be made on the premise that the linked cooking mode KM3 includes the linked preheated cooking mode KM4.

As is clear from FIG. 62, at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the object to be cooked is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (on the first specific screen 30SP). , The left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL becomes unusable.

Specifically, among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L, at least the input key 43L1 is invalidated by the integrated control device MC. The meaning of "invalidation" is that a valid command signal is not transmitted from the input key 43L1 to the integrated control device MC, and even if a valid command signal is transmitted, the integrated control device MC transmits the command signal. It has both meanings of not processing as a valid command signal. In any case, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be selected.

On the other hand, the right operation unit 40R of the right heating unit 17HR can be used even when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, that is, when the identification information 330 is displayed. This is because the integrated control device MC first determines (in the control program) that the right heating unit 17HR is not used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, the right operation unit 40R is not subjected to the above-mentioned "prohibition of use" processing. It is not restricted in any way if other cooking is in progress.

Therefore, in the induction heating source 9, only the left heating unit 17HL is in a state of being "occupied" by the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Further, when viewed from the whole of the induction heating source 9, the use of only a part (left side) of the two heating portions is "restricted". If the right heating unit 17HL is not in use for other cooking, the right heating unit 17HR may also be occupied in the same manner. The control program may be changed so as to be in the "occupied" state when the input key 43MS is pressed after the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is completed.

Here, the occupancy of the induction heating source 9 will be described focusing on the function of the input operation unit 40.
As described above, the input operation unit has an input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL.
After the heating operation of the left side IH coil 17L is started, the input key 43L1 can stop the operation at any time. That is, when it is pressed once for the first time, it exerts a function of selecting the left heating unit 17HL, and when it is pressed once after the induction heating is started, the heating operation can be stopped instantly.

On the other hand, the input operation unit has an input key 44L. The input key 44L is a touch-type input key that can select a "control menu" for induction cooking by the left heating unit 17HL.
In this case, the "control menu" includes "boiled water", "boiled", "cooked rice", "fried food (automatic)", and the like, and only one of them can be selected.

To select cooking in the linked cooking mode KM3, it is necessary to first press the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M. When the input key 43MC is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed when the above-mentioned "permission condition" is satisfied.
When the stage where the first specific screen 30SP is displayed (see FIG. 62) or when the "input command for starting" for shifting to the linked cooking mode is performed by the input key 43MS (see FIG. 63), the linked cooking mode is performed. The cooking mode shifts to KM3, and at the same time, the heating source to be used becomes "occupied state".

The left operation unit 40L when the induction heating source 9 is in the “occupied state” will be described.
There are two ways for the integrated control device MC to occupy the left heating unit 17HL.
(1) First method:
When the mode shifts to the linked cooking mode KM3, the input function of the input key 43L1 is enabled. All other input keys 43L2, 43L3, 43L4, 44L disable the input function.
In this case, after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the input key 43MS is pressed, the supply of high frequency power to the left IH coil 17L is started.
Therefore, when stopping the started induction heating (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3), the input key 43L1 may be pressed once. Further, at the same time as the supply of high frequency power is started, the input functions such as the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 whose input functions have been disabled are restored.
Further, in order to start heating again for additional heating in this state, the input key 43L1 may be pressed once (the cooperative cooking mode is not canceled even at this stage).

(2) Second method:
The input function of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3, 43L4 in the left heating unit 17HL is invalidated. However, even if the mode is changed to the cooperative cooking mode, only the input key 44L is enabled.
Therefore, the operation of the induction heating source 189 (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3) is determined for the first time only when the input key 44L is pressed once after shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
After that, when the supply of high frequency power to the left IH coil 17L is started and the induction heating is started, the input functions such as the input key 43L1 and the input key 43L2 are immediately restored. Therefore, if the input key 43L1 is pressed once, the induction heating operation can be stopped immediately. Further, by pressing the input key 43L1 again, the induction heating operation can be restarted (the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not canceled even at this stage).
These will be described later in FIG.

In both the first method and the second method, the input function of the input key 43L1 was disabled until a certain time in order not to select the left heating unit 17HL.
In the following description, the first method will be selected and described, but even if the second method is adopted, there is no effect on the basic effect obtained in the present disclosure.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the cooking step 1 (P2), after the induction heating is started, the user operates the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L to increase or decrease the heating power. can do.

In the cooking step 1, it is necessary to first press the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operation unit 40L only once, and at this point, the left operation unit 40L sends an induction heating start command to the integrated control device MC. ..

The operation of the heating start command by the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is omitted, and the induction heating cooking has a constant heating power (weak or standard heating power) within a certain time (for example, 10 seconds later) from the input time by the input key 43MS. You may start with.

Further, in the cooking step 1 (P2), the user can immediately stop the induction heating operation by touching the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.
When this operation of stopping the heating operation is performed, the cooking step 1 is immediately completed. However, the cooperative cooking mode itself is not canceled.

Therefore, the heating operation (coordinated cooking mode) by the left heating unit 17HL can be started. However, the operation for resuming the heating operation is the same as in the case of the single heating mode KM1 as described with reference to FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (B), and the input key 43L1 for resuming cooking by the left heating unit 17HL is used. You only need to press it once again. Further, when the user specifies (changes) the heating power after the induction heating operation is started, if the input key 43L2 or 43L3 is pressed, the heating power is reduced or increased by one step each time the input key is pressed. You can set the desired firepower.

As shown in FIG. 62, after the cooking step 1 (P2), the induction-heated object to be cooked is moved to the heating chamber 113. It is also possible to store the metal dish used for induction heating in the heating chamber 113 as it is and heat it with microwaves. However, if the food to be cooked is completely covered with metal, the metal dish is covered with metal. Since the food inside cannot be heated by microwave, it is necessary to transfer it to a metal container without a lid, heat-resistant glass, or a porcelain container.

In the heating pause period (P3), when the door 114 is closed and the input key 43MS is pressed, the microwave generated by the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189 is guided to the inside of the heating chamber 113, and the heating cooking period (P3). Cooking process 2) (P4) begins.

After being started by the input key 43MS, the control conditions for microwave heating can be arbitrarily set by the user by operating various input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M (default values can be changed). ). However, depending on the individual object to be cooked targeted by the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the change of control conditions may be partially restricted. For example, since the output of microwave heating is basically 500 W, the control program is such that the user cannot arbitrarily increase or decrease this during the cooking process.

As shown in FIG. 62, after the cooking step 2 (P4), a predetermined time (default time) specified by the control program is set without setting the microwave heating control condition (for example, heating time). There are two types, one is to automatically end the cooking process at the elapsed stage, and the other is to end at an arbitrary stage by the user operating the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M.

Further, once the cooking step 2 is stopped, it is treated as if all the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 have been completed. Therefore, since the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled, the input key 43M1 is operated again to set a control menu such as "range manual", and additional cooking is performed, as in the case of implementing the combined cooking mode KM2. You can also do. If the operation program of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 plans to have the cooking step 3 after the cooking step 2, the process proceeds to the cooking step 3 after the transition period TR after the cooking step 2.

As shown in FIG. 62, in this cooperative cooking mode KM3, only the left heating unit 17HL of the first heating source 9 is used, so that the right heating unit is used during the preparation period (P1) to the cooking step 2 (P4). The use of 17HR is not restricted in any way. Therefore, during the period of these cooking steps 1 and 2, another cooking can be performed in parallel with the right heating unit 17HR. For example, the right operation unit (first operation unit on the right side) 40R may be used to start, for example, "water heating" in the IH control menu at the right heating unit 17HR.

Next, FIG. 63 will be described.
FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source, and is an example in which the configuration of FIG. 62 is slightly modified.
FIG. 63 shows a slightly different start time from FIG. 62 when the heating source used (in this case, the induction heating source 9) is restricted in operation during the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

In the example shown in FIG. 63, the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, that is, the time when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP). Then, the left heating source 17HL is not yet occupied. Therefore, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL can be input-operated, and cooking of the IH control menu (for example, "boiler") can be selected by the independent cooking mode KM1.

That is, in this preparation period P1, a new input operation (independent cooking mode KM1) by the left operation unit 40L is possible.

When the start of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is commanded by the input key 43MS, at least the input key 43L1 among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L is invalidated by the integrated control device MC. This point is different from that of FIG. 62. All input keys of the left operation unit 40L may be invalidated. The meaning of "invalidation" in FIG. 63 is the same as that described in FIG. 62.

Next, the basic operations of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 70.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input key and the cooking process in the input operation unit 40 from the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 to the transition in chronological order. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operation and the display until each transition between the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3 in chronological order. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between various cooking processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between various cooking processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various cooking processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 69 is a flowchart 1 showing a notification operation of the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 70 is a flowchart 2 showing a notification operation of a cooking process in a cooperative cooking mode in a cooking cooker.

FIG. 64 will be described.
FIG. 64 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is performed by the left heating unit 17HL and the cooking step 2 is performed in the heating chamber 113 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4).
In FIG. 64, when the input function of the main input key is effective and is related to the start or end of the cooking process, it is shown by a white rectangular frame. Not all input keys are drawn.

In the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are effective. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP and the 43MS is pressed, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (at this stage, the cooking period P2 is entered).

When the user selects the left heating unit 17HL, the cooking step 1 is executed in the left heating unit 17HL.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64, it is necessary to press the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L. Since the control conditions such as the heating power and the heating time are automatically displayed by the default setting, it is not always necessary to operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when the cooking period P2 is entered, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are invalidated (actually, even if the input operation signal reaches the integrated control device MC, the integrated control is performed. Ignored by device MC).

In FIG. 64, the input function of the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is shown by a broken line frame.

When the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from the input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated control device MC, so that the induction heating operation is stopped at this stage and the cooking period P2 ends.

Next, the heating rest period P3 is entered. That is, the transition period TR is entered. At this stage, all the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are enabled (each input key is shown by a solid line frame).

In the first embodiment, "when the cooking step 1 is completed, the input function for the second heating means in the central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40M is restored, and the cooking step 2 is heated. The meaning of "the operation start and end are executed according to the command from the central operation unit 40M" will be described.

The above-mentioned "restoring the input function" does not mean that the cooking step 1 is unconditionally restored immediately after the end of the cooking step 1. For example, if the door 114 is still continuously closed from before to the end of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device MC does not enable the function of the invalidated input key. That is, it is effectively revived when the door 114 is opened. Considering the user's operation for the next cooking process 2, the conditions and timing for the restoration of the input function are appropriately determined so as to match the actual user's operation (including opening and closing the door). There is.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64, since the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are all effectively maintained, the left heating unit 17HL is separated in the transition period TR or the cooking period P4. May be used for cooking (in this case, the control menu will be selected in the single cooking mode KM1).

When the user touches the input keys 43M1 or 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started. Then, by pressing the input key 43MT, the cooking step 2 can be completed at an arbitrary timing.

The cooking step 2 may be automatically terminated when the time set by the timer cooking or the time determined by the default value has elapsed. The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled at the same time as the end of the cooking step 2 regardless of whether the user terminates the cooking step arbitrarily or automatically.

Therefore, if it is desired to perform additional heating in the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 again in the heating chamber 113 immediately after the end of the cooking step 2, the input keys 43M1 and 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M are input. The key 43MS may be operated to cook the single cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2. However, in the central operation unit 40M, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 cannot be directly selected to restart the single cooking mode KM1, so once the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected, at the stage of selecting the control menu. For example, the method of selecting "warm" is adopted.

It should be noted that the control may be such that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not automatically canceled at the same time as the end of the cooking step 2. Immediately after finishing the cooking step 2, for example, when the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain time (for example, within 1 minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, the cooperative cooking mode is used. It may be a process of giving guidance to be handled as a part of KM3 and waiting for user input (operation of input key 43MS).
In this way, after the cooking step 2 is completed, the user takes out the object to be cooked from the heating chamber 113, checks the degree of baking, etc., and if the heating is insufficient, immediately returns it to the heating chamber 113, and the user A method of touching the input key MS waiting for an additional operation can be adopted. This method can also improve the usability of the user.

FIG. 65 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 65, the operation procedure until the transition to the combined cooking mode KM2 requires four inputs. That is, the first input to the fourth input are performed by the input keys 43M1, 43M2, 43M3 and 43MS. Then, in the case of shifting to the combined cooking mode KM2, it is necessary to operate the input key 43R1 or 43L1 in order to actually operate the induction heating source 9.

On the other hand, the operation procedure until the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 requires four inputs as shown in FIG. 65. That is, the first input to the fourth input are performed by the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2 and 43MS.

In the case of shifting to the linked cooking mode KM3 as described above, the user can operate the right heating unit 17HR first after operating the input key 43M2 in the central operation unit 40M by operating the input key 43R1 in the right operation unit 40R. do.

Further, when the left heating unit 17HL is selected to be used in the cooperative cooking mode, the user operates the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.

In this way, after shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the operation unit corresponding to the heating source can command the start of the heating operation. In addition, the heating stop operation can be performed with the same operation unit, so that the user does not get lost in the position of the operation unit or the input key when the heating starts and ends.

Next, FIG. 66 will be described.
FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing various processes in the cooperative cooking mode on the horizontal axis and the vertical axis showing the operation contents of the main components such as the user's operation and the display unit.

FIG. 66 shows a process until the cooking operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started.
In the item A on the left side of FIG. 66, the "user operation" indicates various input operations in the central operation unit 40M and the right operation unit 40R. In this "user operation" process, A1 to A5 are performed five times.

"Pressing the relay button" of A1 means operating the input key 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The "menu selection" of A2 is to select one desired cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. This selection is made with the input key 43M1.

The "heating source selection" of A3 is an operation of selecting either one of the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and is performed by the input key 43M2. In this example, the case where the right heating unit 17HR is selected is shown.
"Pressing the start button" of A4 means operating the input key 43MS.
"Pressing the input button of the right IH" of A5 means operating the input key 43R1 of the right operation unit 40R.

In the item B on the left side of FIG. 66, the “cooking process” indicates the type of process until the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed. The process referred to here is different from the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2.
“Cooking mode selected” in B1 indicates a process of selecting an object to be cooked and selecting an operation program of the linked cooking mode KM3 corresponding to the object to be cooked.
“Waiting for grill heating source” in B2 indicates a period during which the oven heating source 188 is waiting. “During heating” of B3 indicates an induction heating period by the right heating unit 17HR.

In the item C on the left side of FIG. 66, the “left IH display unit” refers to the left side display unit 31L.
"Turning off (no operation is accepted)" of C1 means that no information is displayed on the left side display unit 31L. As described above, the user is operating the input while looking at the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 until the time of the input for instructing the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 66). It is a stage. Therefore, since the user may use the left heating unit 17HL in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the left side display unit 31 is not activated as part of setting the left heating unit 17HL to the “occupied state”. At the same time, the input function in the left operation unit 40L is not accepted.

“Turning off (accepting normal operation)” in C2 means that no information is displayed on the left side display unit 31L. However, at the stage after the time of the input for instructing the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 66), the input operation of the first specific screen 30SP is completed. Therefore, it has been confirmed that the user will use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the possibility of using the left heating unit 17HL has disappeared. Therefore, it is not necessary to put the left heating unit 17HL in the "occupied state". For this reason, the input function in the left operation unit 40L can be accepted at this stage. If the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is actually pressed, the control menu (for example, "water heater") of the independent cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL can be selected.

In the item D on the left side of FIG. 66, the “right IH display unit” refers to the display content of the right side display unit 31R.
"Turning off (no operation is accepted)" of D1 means that no information is displayed on the right side display unit 31R.
As described above, the user is operating the input while looking at the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 until the time of the input for instructing the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 66). It is a stage. Therefore, since the user may use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the right side display unit 31 is not activated when the right heating unit 17HR is set to the “occupied state”. At the same time, the input function of the right operation unit 40R is not accepted.

After that, at the stage after the time of the input for instructing the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 66), the input operation of the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is completed.
The "heating standby state" of D2 refers to a state of waiting for the user's operation A5 after it is confirmed that the user uses the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. That is, it is a stage of waiting for the start command of the cooking process 1 by the right heating unit 17HR.

The "preheating display" of D3 means that the information on the preheating state is displayed on the right side display unit 31R. For example, displaying information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature (eg, 180 ° C.) is reached.

In the item E on the left side of FIG. 66, the "center display unit" refers to the display content of the integrated display unit 30.
The "initial screen of cooperative cooking" of E1 indicates that the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 94).
The "menu change" of E2 means that the input key 43M1 is operated to select one target cooked object from the linked cooking modes and select the corresponding linked cooking menu (FIG. 95). See (A)).

The "selective heating source change (selecting the right IH)" of E3 means selecting the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is made by the input key 43M2 (FIG. 95 (FIG. 95). B) See).
The "right IH input button pressing guidance display" of E4 is an operation of the input key 43R1 arranged on the right operation unit 40R in order to start cooperative cooking on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30. It is meant to indicate that it is necessary. That is, it is recommended that the user press the input key 43R1 in order to start the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking (see FIG. 96 (A)).

The "IH preheating display" of E5 indicates that the preheating operation is started in the right heating unit 17HR. As described above, the right display unit 31R displays, for example, information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature reaches 180 ° C. On the other hand, in the integrated display unit (center display unit) 30, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating" or "preheating completed" is displayed in the first specific screen 30SP (additional information 331). See FIG. 96 (B)).

In the item F on the left side of FIG. 66, the “notification means” refers to the notification content notified by the voice synthesizer 95.
As shown in F1 to F5, when "hamburger" is selected as the cooperative cooking mode and cooked, a total of five voice notifications are performed.
The content of the F1 notification is, for example, "It's a hamburger steak. After cooking with IH, finish it with a microwave oven." That is, even on the first specific screen 30SP, the object to be cooked is displayed and the cooking process is displayed, but the same information is also notified to the user by voice.

The content of the F2 notification is, for example, "Karaage. Cook on a microwave oven and then finish with IH." That is, there is a result of selecting the cooperative cooking mode in real time and an explanation of the cooking process according to the operation A2 of the user's menu selection.

The notification content of F3 is, for example, "Right IH". That is, since the user performed the right IH (right heating unit) 17HR by the operation A3, the result of selecting the heating source is immediately notified.

The content of the notification of F4 is, for example, "press the input button of the right IH to start heating". That is, the user is requested to operate the start button (input key 43MS) A4 after the menu selection operation A3. When this operation A4 is performed, the operation of the "input key" in the right operation unit 40L is requested. The input key referred to here is the input key 43R1.

The content of the notification of F5 is, for example, "Start preheating the pot at 180 ° C.".
After the cooperative cooking is started in the right heating unit 17HR, the heating operation of the right heating unit 17HR is started so that the temperature of the object to be heated such as a pot placed on the top plate 15 becomes the target temperature of 180 ° C. The preheating operation is started and this fact is notified.

In the item G on the left side of FIG. 66, the “left IH drive unit” is the operation of the inverter circuit 81L.
In the item H on the left side of FIG. 66, the “right IH drive unit” is the operation of the inverter circuit 81R.
The "preheating process" of H1 indicates that the inverter circuit 81R is driven to perform the operation of the preheating process.

In item J on the left side of FIG. 66, the “range grill drive unit” refers to the operation of the heating chamber control unit 159 that controls the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B constituting the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source. Refers to the operation of the microwave heating control unit 130 of 189. That is, the operation of the drive unit that performs the above-mentioned "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is comprehensively shown.

Next, FIG. 67 will be described.
FIG. 67 shows a case where the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Similar to FIG. 66, various processes of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are shown on the horizontal axis, and the vertical axis is an explanatory diagram showing the operation contents of the main components such as the user's operation and the display unit.

The meanings of the items A to J on the left side of FIG. 67 are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 63.
In FIG. 67, the operation content of A11 is to start preheating to cook the hamburger steak, and then to perform cooking step 1 (corresponding part of cooking step B11 in FIG. 64), so that the left heating unit 17HL is first selected. Then, press the input key 43L1.

The "IH off / on button press" of A12 means that the user first selects the left heating unit 17HL as an input switch and presses the input key 43L1 in order to end the cooking process 1 of the hamburger steak.

"Opening the grill door" of A13 is an operation of opening the door 114 by the user.
"Pressing the start button" of A14 means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
"Pressing the time button" of A15 means pressing the input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M.

“Pressing the start button” of A16 means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
"Pressing the cancel button (cancelling in the middle of grill heating)" of A17 means pressing the oven heating source 188.
"Pressing the cancel button" of A18 means pressing the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M. By operating the input key 43MT, all the series of heating operations in the linked cooking mode are completed (cancellation of the linked cooking mode).

In item B (cooking step) of FIG. 67, the “IH heating step” of B11 indicates an induction heating step in the left heating portion 17HL selected by the user.
The “grill heating standby step” of B12 indicates a period during which the oven heating source 188 is on standby until the user operation A14 is performed.
The "grill heating step" of B13 indicates a heating step by an oven heating source 188 and a microwave heating source 189.

The "grill heating extension waiting process" of B14 indicates a waiting period in which the user is waiting for a determination as to whether or not to order the extension process after the grill heating process of B13 is once completed.
The "extended heating process" of B15 means that the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven again (energized) because the user performs operation A16 (pressing the start button) during the grill heating extension standby process of B14. This is the process to be performed. The extended heating step is started by pressing the input key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 67, the "extended heating step" B15 can be performed not only once but many times if the user performs operation A16 (pressing the start button). However, once the "cancel button is pressed" on A18, the linked cooking mode is canceled at the time of the cancel operation of the input key 43MT (for canceling the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode), so that the cooked cooking mode is heated again. In order to cook in the chamber 113, it is necessary to operate the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 in the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

In item C (left IH display unit) of FIG. 67, the “preheating display” of C11 is to display the target preheating temperature in the preheating process on the right side display unit 31R and the left side display unit 31L (FIG. 87, FIG. See 89). For example, the preheating target temperature (for example, 180 ° C.) is displayed.

C11a to C11d indicate progress display 1 to progress display 4. For example, the progress display 1 is a display of "preheating", and the "progress display 4" is a display of "appropriate temperature". This "appropriate temperature" means that the object to be heated (pot, etc.) N is heated to the preheating target temperature (for example, 180 ° C.). During the period of the preheating display (C11), the progress display 1 to the progress display 4 (C11a to C11d) are performed according to the progress (temperature rise) of the preheating. In FIG. 67, the preheating state display C11 by the left heating unit 17HL is performed on the left side display unit 31L.

The “cooking step” of C12 indicates that the left heating unit 17HL is cooking the object to be heated N after reaching the preheating target temperature (for example, 180 ° C.). That is, it indicates that the cooking process 1 has started. As is clear from the cooking process of C11 and C12, no user operation is performed (no operation is necessary) during this period. That is, after the operation A11 is performed, the user's operation input is not required until the operation A12.

Item E (center display unit) in FIG. 67 shows the display content of the integrated display unit 30.
The "IH preheating display" of E11 indicates that preheating has been started by the left heating unit 17HL on the first specific screen 30SP displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 97 (A)). ..

In FIG. 67, the “IH heating display” of E12 indicates that the preheating is completed and the left heating unit 17HL is ready for heating (see FIG. 97 (B)). That is, it indicates that it is a stage to proceed to the cooking step 1 using induction heating (IH heating).

The "grill door opening / closing operation guidance display" of E13 is to urge the object to be cooked to be moved to the heating chamber (heating chamber) 113 (where the cooking step 2 is performed) because the induction heating (cooking step 1) has been completed. Yes (see Figure 99). One example of the additional information 331 in this scene is the indication "Please put the food in the heating chamber".

As shown in FIG. 98, if the user wants to stop the heating operation at an arbitrary timing during induction heating cooking by the left IH coil 17HL, the additional information "Please press the left IH turn-off button". 331 may be displayed. The "off button" here means the input key 43L1.

In FIG. 67, the “alternate display of thermal power change display and start induction display” of E14 indicates that the thermal power in the range grill cooking (composite heating) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and further, in such a heating chamber. It indicates that the grill cooking can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS) (see FIG. 100).

In FIG. 67, the “grill heating indication” of E15 means that the object to be cooked is heated in the heating chamber 113 by the microwave heating source 189 and / or the oven heating source 188 (cooking step). 2) is shown (see FIG. 101).

In the first embodiment, a method is adopted in which both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven, and the object to be cooked is simultaneously heated from the inside and the outside by the synergistic effect of the microwave and the radiant heat.

In FIG. 67, “alternate display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display” of E16 means that since the grill heating step B13 has been completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M3) and the grill can be heated again. It is to be displayed (see FIG. 102 (A)).

Further, when the user does not want the extended heating, he / she can press the cancel button (input key 43MT) to display that the cooperative cooking mode can be ended without the extended heating (see FIG. 102 (B)). These two types of information are alternately displayed in the first specific screen 30SP, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

The "time setting display" of E17 is to extend the cooking time with the input key 43M3 and display the result of setting the extension time when the grill is heated again (see FIG. 103). After this time setting display, the "grill heating display" E15 and the "alternate display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display" E16 are performed.

In item F (notification means) of FIG. 67, the notification content of F11 is "start preheating of the pot at 180 ° C.". This is to notify by voice that the preheating step has been started by the right heating unit 17HR in the IH heating step B11.

In FIG. 67, the notification content of F12 is "The right IH has reached the set temperature. Start cooking." It notifies that the preheating by the right heating unit 17HR has reached the target temperature (for example, 180 ° C.), and prompts the heating start operation in the right operating unit 40R.

FA1 in FIG. 67 is a notification of the first reference information. This "first reference information" FA1 is referred to as "reference information 1" in the following description. The purpose of this reference information may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 31L and 31R by characters or figures. The display in that case is called "reference display 1".

The notification of the reference information 1 (FA1) is performed when a predetermined time (first time TN1) has elapsed from the time when the cooking step 1 (G12 in FIG. 67) by the left IH coil 17L is started. This will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 69.

In FIG. 67, the content of the notification of F13 is "The pan is hot. Please be careful not to get burned and put the food in the refrigerator." This is to call attention to the fact that the cooking step 1 (G12) by the right heating unit 17HR is completed, so that the food is moved to the heating chamber 113 for the cooking step 2 and the top plate 15 and the like are hot. be.

The content of the notification of F14 is "Start heating the range grill with the start button". This informs that the range grill cooking can be started by operating the input key 43MS.
The content of the F15 notification is "Starting the range grill finish standard". This informs that the cooking step 2 of the microwave oven is started to complete the cooking (for example, hamburger steak). In addition, "starting the standard" means that the heating power at the time of cooking the microwave oven is "standard".

FA2 in FIG. 67 is a notification of the second reference information. This "second reference information" FA2 is referred to as "reference information 2" in the following description. The purpose of this reference information may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 31L and 31R by characters or figures. The display in that case is called "reference display 2".

Reference information 2 (FA2) is notified by setting a predetermined elapsed time (second elapsed time TN2) from the time when the cooking step 2 (grill heating step B13 in FIG. 67) by the range grill driving unit in the heating chamber 113 is started. It will be done when it has passed. Alternatively, it is performed when the predetermined temperature (second rising temperature TN2) is exceeded from the time when the cooking step 2 (grill heating step B13 in FIG. 67) is started. These will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 69.

The notification content of F16 is to notify that the cooking of the range grill is completed and that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2). It also notifies that if the cancel button (input key 43MT) is operated, the series of cooperative cooking modes KM3 is terminated without extended heating. Further, since the heating chamber 113 has a high temperature, caution is advised to clean the inside of the chamber after it has cooled down.

The notification content of F17 is to notify that the user performs an extended heating operation after the cooking process (B13) of the microwave oven is completed, and further starts heating for 2 minutes and 20 seconds. After the notification of F17, the notification of F16 is performed again. If the user further commands the extended heating, such notifications F16 and F17 are repeated.

In item G (right IH drive unit) of FIG. 67, G11 shows an induction heating operation for the preheating step (B11).
G12 shows an induction heating operation for the cooking step 1 performed following the preheating step.

In item J (range grill driving unit) of FIG. 67, J11 shows a period in which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven, and the cooking step 2 is executed in this period.
J12 indicates a period of driving the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 for the extended heating step.

Next, FIG. 68 will be described. FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various processes and operations when "karaage", which is one of the cooperative cooking modes, is performed in the cooperative cooking mode. Similar to FIGS. 66 and 67, various processes of the cooperative cooking mode are shown on the horizontal axis, and the vertical axis shows the operation contents of the main components such as the user's operation and the display unit.

In FIG. 68, the operation content of item A (user's operation) A21 is to first select the left heating unit 17HL and press the input key 43L1 in order to cook the fried chicken. As a result, the preheating step (see G21 in FIG. 68) is started.

The operation of A22 indicates an operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113. At this stage, induction heating (preheating) in the left heating unit 17HL has already started.
The operation of A23 is called "pressing the start button", and pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
By this operation of A23, the "range grill drive unit" is driven, and the grill heating step B23 is performed. The "range grill drive unit" refers to the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

Before the IH preheating step G21 by the left heating section 17HL is completed, the grill heating step B23 of the "range grill driving section" in the heating chamber 113 is started.
In this way, even if the oven heating source 188 is energized, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 cannot be raised immediately. Therefore, considering the time required for raising the temperature, the time to start energizing the oven heating source 188 is taken into consideration. Has been decided.

The operation of A24 indicates an operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 after the grill heating step B23 by the “range grill driving unit” is completed. As a result, the food to be cooked can be taken out from the heating chamber 113.

On the other hand, from the time before the door 114 is opened and the cooked food (food) is taken out from the heating chamber 113, the fried chicken cooking utensil (heated food N such as a special pot) is heated in the left heating unit 17HL (cooking step G22). (In this case, no cooking oil is poured). Therefore, when the food to be cooked from the above-mentioned heating chamber 113 is placed on the preheated food N, the cooking step 2 is performed by the induction heating source 9 (at this point, cooking oil, seasonings, etc. are added). May be)
..

The operation of A25 is to operate the input key 43M3, which is called a time button, in order to perform the grill heating step B23 by the "range grill drive unit" again.
The operation of A26 is to press the input key 43MS in order to restart the grill heating step B23.
The operation of A27 is to press the input key 43MT in order to end the grill heating step B23 at an arbitrary point in the middle. As a result, the cooperative cooking mode is canceled.
The operation of A28 is to press the input key 43L1 in order to end the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, in FIG. 68, item B (cooking process) will be described.
B21 is an IH preheating step, which is a step of preheating with the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user.
B22 is a grill heating standby step, in which the user opens the door 114 and then waits for the heating start operation A23.
B23 is a grill heating step (cooking step 1).
B24 is a cooking step 2 in which heating is performed by the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user in the IH heating step.

Next, in FIG. 68, item C (left IH display unit) will be described.
The display of C21 indicates that the left heating unit 17HL is preheating.
The displays of C21a to C21d are sequentially displayed during the period of the display C21, C21a is a progress display 1, C21b is a progress display 2, C21c is a progress display 3, and C21d is a progress display 4.
The display of C22 is a display of the completion (cooking process) of the preheating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

In FIG. 68, item E (center display unit) will be described.
The display of E21 is an IH preheating display, and it can be seen that the preheating operation is performed by the left heating unit 17HL (see FIG. 104 (A)).
E22 is a grill door opening / closing operation guidance display, and prompts the user to put the food to be cooked (food) into the heating chamber 113 in order to open the door 114 and perform the grill heating step B23 (FIG. 104 (B). )reference).

E23 is an alternating display of the heat power change display and the start guidance display, and when cooking fried chicken by driving the "range grill drive unit", the heat power can be adjusted and cooking can be started by pressing the input key 43MS. It shows what can be done (see FIG. 105 (A)).

E24 is a microwave oven heating display, which can change the heating power of cooking when driving the "microwave oven drive unit", and displays the remaining time until the end of cooking after the start of cooking (FIG. 106). reference).
As shown in FIGS. 107 (A) and 107 (B), E25 is an alternate display of the extension operation guide display and the IH preheating completion display.
After the cooking step B24 that drives the "range grill driving unit" is completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) to indicate that the cooking time can be extended.
On the other hand, it is displayed that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL is completed. That is, these two types of information are alternately displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

E26 is a time setting display. This indicates that the cooking step B24, which is performed by driving the "range grill driving unit", is performed for, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds (see FIG. 108).
..

In FIG. 68, item F (notifying means) will be described.
The notification of F21 is to notify by voice that the preheating process has been started by the preheating target temperature and the left heating unit 17HL, for example, "Start preheating of the pot at 180 ° C.".
The F22 notification says, "Soon the temperature will be set by the IH on the left. Please put the food in the refrigerator." It notifies that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL has reached the target temperature (for example, 180 ° C.), while urging food or the like to be put into the heating chamber 113 so that the range grill cooking in the heating chamber 113 can be started. be.

The notification of F23 is that "the start button starts heating the microwave oven". That is, the input key 43MS is pressed to notify that the range grill cooking is started.
The notification of F24 is, for example, "starting range and finish standard". The "finished standard" in this case means that the thermal power is at the standard level.

FA3 in FIG. 68 is a notification of the third reference information. This "third reference information" is referred to as "reference information 3" in the following description. The purpose of the reference information 3 (FA3) may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by characters or figures. The display in that case is called "reference display 3".

The notification of the reference information 3 is a predetermined time (third) from the time when the cooking process 1 (B23 in FIG. 65) by the range grill driving unit in the heating chamber 113 is started by the user's operation input (A23 in FIG. 68). It is performed when the elapsed time TN3) has elapsed. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 70.

The notification of F25 is related to the operation of the user when the cooking of the microwave oven is completed. For example, "The cooking of the microwave oven is finished. You can extend the cooking with the time button. Please take out the food from the refrigerator and start cooking with IH."

The notification of F26 is to notify that the cooking of the microwave oven is to be performed again after the cooking of the microwave oven is completed. For example, the notification "range grill, start 2 minutes" is given. This means that since the extension time was set to 2 minutes, cooking of the microwave oven will be started for 2 minutes from now on.

FA5 in FIG. 68 is a notification of the fifth reference information. This "fifth reference information" FA5 is referred to as "reference information 5" in the following description. The purpose of the reference information 5 (FA5) may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by characters or figures. The display in that case is called "reference display 5".

The notification of the reference information 5 is a predetermined time (fifth) from the time when the cooking process 3 (B23 in FIG. 68) by the range grill driving unit in the heating chamber 113 is started by the user's operation input (A26 in FIG. 68). It is performed when the time TN5) has elapsed. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 70.

In FIG. 68, in item G (left IH drive unit), the preheating step of G21 is a preheating step by the left heating unit 17HL, and shows the driving period of the inverter circuit 81L.

In FIG. 68, G22 also shows a heating operation (driving of the inverter circuit 81L) period for the cooking process by the left heating unit 17HL.

In item J (range grill drive unit), the heating step of J21 indicates a drive period by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. Since the cooperative cooking mode described with reference to FIG. 68 is for cooking “karaage”, it is actually sufficient to drive only the microwave heating source 189.

Next, FIGS. 69 to 71 will be described.
FIGS. 69 to 71 show a process in which the "reference information 1" to "reference information 4" are notified when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed.

FIG. 69 shows a case where the hamburger is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart corresponding to various processes of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 67.
In the first embodiment, the hamburger steaks the cooking step 1 in, for example, the left heating unit 17HL, and the cooking step 2 in the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu). That is, in the cooking step 2, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are used in combination.

In the first step SA1, induction heating (cooking step 1) is started in the object N to be heated which has already been heated to the preheating temperature (for example, 180 ° C.) in the left heating unit 17HL, and as described in FIG. 67, “ The left IH has reached the set temperature. Please start cooking. " The "set temperature" is a preheating temperature set by the user. The default value is 180 ° C. Further, this cooking step 1 is not started from the time when the IH coil 17L starts the induction heating. The time when the food to be cooked (in this case, the hamburger steak) is placed on the food to be heated N which has reached the preheating temperature and the heating is started is the start time.

In the next step SA2, the measurement of the elapsed time of the elapsed time TN1 is started.
The measurement of the elapsed time TN1 is performed by the clock circuit 96.

In step SA3, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN1 is exceeded.
When baking a hamburger, the amount (weight) of the hamburger, the time to bake, and the amount of heat to bake are important. Assuming that the standard time is "7 minutes", the elapsed time TN1 is, for example, 5 minutes.

When the purpose of using the elapsed time TN1 is to know a guideline for the timing of turning the hamburger upside down (turning over) in the middle, in the above example, the user can set the timing of the upside down by the notification FA1 at the time when 5 minutes have passed. You can know. The actual content of the notification is, for example, "5 minutes have passed since the start of heating. The heating is scheduled to be completed in 2 minutes."

In the case of other cooperative cooking modes, for example, it is possible to know the timing of adding water, seasonings, and cooking liquid on the way.

When the elapsed time TN1 is exceeded, step SA3 becomes "Yes", the process proceeds to step SA4, and the first reference information (reference information 1) FA1 is notified by the voice synthesizer 95.
Further, in synchronization with this, the reference information 1 (FA1) may be displayed by the left side display unit 31L.

After this step SA4, it is determined whether or not the user stops the heating operation of the left heating unit 17HL (step SA5), and if there is a stop command, the process proceeds to step SA6.

In step SA6, the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL is stopped. As explained with reference to FIG. 67, the voice notification F13 to the effect that "the pot is hot. Please be careful not to get burned and put the food in the refrigerator" is performed.

The user moves the food to be cooked (in this case, the hamburger steak) into the heating chamber 113. In this case, if the metal pot used for induction heating is not used, instead use tableware made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, etc., or a special saucer 145 (not shown). .. Put the hamburger in such tableware or saucer and place it in the heating chamber 113.

Further, the object to be heated N used in the induction heating may be directly put into the heating chamber 113 for cooking. However, it is limited to the object N to be heated (radio wave transmissive or open type) capable of microwave cooking.

When the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is in the closed state, in the next step SA7, as described in FIG. 67, “the start button starts heating the range grill. The voice notification F14 to the effect is performed.

When the user operates the input key 43MS, step SA8 becomes “Yes”, and range grill cooking is started as the cooking step 2.
As described with reference to FIG. 67, the voice notification F15 with the content of "starting the range grill finish standard" is performed (step SA9).

In the next step SA10, the microwave heating source 189, which is the heating source of the range grill, is driven by standard thermal power. For example, as described above, the operation is started with an output of 500 W.
Further, the upper heater 163A of the oven heating source 188, which is the heating source of the range grill, is energized at 1000 W.

Next, the measurement of the elapsed time TN2 from the time point of the step SA10 is started (SA11). Then, when it is determined that the elapsed time TN2 has been exceeded (step: SA12), the process proceeds to step SA13, and the second reference information (reference information 2) is notified by the voice synthesizer 95. Further, in synchronization with this, the reference information 2 (FA2) is displayed by the integrated display unit 30.

The content of the notification of the reference information 2 (FA2) is, for example, that a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the cooking step 2 is started. If the standard time of cooking step 2 is, for example, 5 minutes, if the elapsed time TN2 is set to 4 minutes and 30 seconds, the end of cooking step 2 is completed 30 seconds before the end of cooking step 2. I can know.

Generally, it is said that when the food is heated to some extent, the degree of heating of the food rapidly progresses. In particular, if you are not accustomed to cooking using the ingredients, there is a concern that overheating will occur. Therefore, in the cooking step 1, the reference information 1 (FA1) is notified at a time point before the end of the cooking step 1.

Similarly, in the cooking step 2, the reference information 2 (FA2) is notified at a time point before the end of the cooking step 2. Therefore, it is possible to urge the user to finish cooking and to pay attention to and prepare for the next process.

After this, proceed to the next step.
After that, the notification of F16 shown in FIG. 67 is performed. That is, as described above, it is notified that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M3). Further, if the cancel button (input key 43MT) is operated, all the cooking processes of the "hamburger" in the cooperative cooking mode are completed.

Next, FIG. 70 will be described.
In FIG. 70, “karaage” is selected as the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the cooking step 1 is performed in the “range grill control menu” (RG control menu). The cooking step 2 is a case where, for example, the left heating unit 17HL is used.

Further, in the example of FIG. 70, there is also a cooking step 3, and the step is performed by the “range grill control menu” (RG control menu).
FIG. 70 is a flowchart corresponding to various processes of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 68.

As described with reference to FIG. 68, when the cooking step 1 is started (A23), for example, the voice notification F24 "starting the range and finish standard" is performed. The "finished standard" in this case means that the thermal power is at the standard level. For example, the heating operation is started by the microwave output of 500 W (step: SB1).

In the next step SB2, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 and the object to be cooked is measured. That is, the measurement of the rising temperature TN3 of the basic ingredient (chicken) for "karaage" cooking is started.
The temperature TN3 is measured by the temperature detection circuit 93.

In the next step SB3, it is determined whether or not the rising temperature TN3 has been exceeded.
When chicken meat, which is a food material for "karaage", is heated with microwaves, the temperature rises. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the measurement result of this temperature reaches the predetermined rise temperature TN3.

The rate of increase in temperature TN3 changes depending on the amount (weight) of fried chicken, the baking time, and the amount of heat. The temperature rise pattern when a predetermined amount (for example, 300 g) of "karaage" material is cooked with standard heating power (for example, microwave with an output of 500 W) is determined by the integrated control device MC as control data based on the results of prior experiments. I have it.

That is, the integrated control device MC has data that when finishing with a standard microwave output (500 W), it is better to rise to a certain temperature and continue heating at that temperature. Therefore, the user is notified when the temperature rises to the rising temperature (TN3) (step: SB4).

The user can know in advance by the voice notification of the reference information 3 (FA3) that the timing to end the fried chicken (microwave) heating is approaching. In synchronization with this, it can also be known by the reference display 3 of the integrated display unit 30.

After this step SB4, microwave heating is automatically stopped (due to overcooking time). The user may stop the operation in the middle. For example, in the case of a control program in which the integrated control device MC stops the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 via the microwave heating control unit 130 one minute after the temperature rises to the rising temperature TN3, the rising temperature is reached. The heating operation may be arbitrarily stopped 1 minute before the notification of the reference information 3 that the temperature has risen to TN3.

After that, the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 using the induction heating unit 17H. For this purpose, the user needs to move the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 onto the top plate 15. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

In FIG. 70, step SB7 is a notification of reference information 4 (FA4) in the cooking step 2. This is determined by the elapsed time TN4 or the rising temperature TN4 from the time when the user places the cooked object on the heated object N which has become hot due to the preheating after the preheating is completed in the induction heating unit 17H.

In this step SB8, the user does not perform any input operation on the input operation unit 40. It simply moves the food to be cooked. Therefore, as the starting point of the elapsed time TN4, the information in which the timing at which the temperature of the object to be heated N has decreased is detected is adopted. Since the temperature of the object to be heated N drops sharply once the object to be cooked is placed and charged, the time point may be detected by the temperature detection circuit 93 and the elapsed time from this detection time may be counted.

Subsequent step SB8 is a scene for determining a command for performing the cooking step 3 in the heating chamber 113 after the cooking step 2 is completed. The user performs the operation of A26 shown in FIG. 68. For that purpose, it is necessary to press the input key 43MS.
Before this step SB7, it is necessary for the user to return the object to be cooked, which has been subjected to induction heating (cooking step 2) on the top plate 15, to the heating chamber 113 again. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

In the next step SB9, the cooking step 3 of the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is started.
As described above, the notification of F26 notifies that the cooking of the microwave oven is to be performed again after the cooking of the microwave oven is completed. For example, the notification "range grill, start 2 minutes" is given.

In the next step SB10, the measurement of the elapsed time TN5 is started. That is, the measurement of the elapsed time TN5 from the start time of the cooking step 3 is started.
The measurement of the elapsed time TN5 is performed by the clock circuit 96.

In the next step SB11, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN5 has been exceeded.
If, for example, the cooking of the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is set to be performed for 2 minutes at the stage before the start of the cooking step 3 (the stage before the step SB8), the elapsed time is For example, it is set to 1 minute and 30 seconds. In other words, it is set 30 seconds before the cooking step 3 is completed.

If the elapsed time TN5 is exceeded, the process proceeds to step SB12.
In step SB12, the reference information 5 (FA5) is notified by voice. Reference information 5 is provided with guidance such as, for example, "The heating will be completed in 30 seconds. If you want to extend it further, please set the time." Further, since it is known that the final cooking process is completed, the user can start the preparation for taking out the "fried chicken" from the heating chamber 113 from the time of the notification of the reference information 5. Further, in synchronization with this, the reference information 5 (FA5) is displayed by the integrated display unit 30.

In the next step SB13, the cooking step 3 is automatically stopped.
Further, the notification of F25 shown in FIG. 68 is also performed. This notification is related to the user's operation when the cooking of the microwave oven is finished. For example, "The cooking of the microwave oven is finished. You can extend the cooking with the time button. Please take out the food from the refrigerator." To stop the cooking process 3, the door 114 may be opened without the user having to operate the input operation unit 40.

Next, FIG. 71 will be described.
FIG. 71 shows an operation step when “karaage” is performed in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. FIG. 71 is a time chart corresponding to FIGS. 68 and 70.
In FIG. 71, # 1 to # 9 show the user's operation and the state change of the cooking cooker 1. Other reference numerals correspond to FIGS. 68 and 70.

In FIG. 71, in order for the user to cook “karaage”, the left heating unit 17HL is first selected and the input key 43L1 is pressed before starting the cooking step 1 (operation A21 in FIG. 68). Then, the preheating of the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 is started. The object N to be heated in this case is a metal pan for tempura, and contains a certain amount or more of cooking oil.

On the other hand, the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 and puts the “karaage” ingredients (seasoned chicken, etc.) into the heating chamber 113 (# 1).
Then, after closing the door 114, the operation A23 called "pressing the start button" is performed. This is to press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.

At this point, the microwave heating source 189 operates and the cooking step 1 of the microwave heating cooking is started. Then, the reference information 3 is notified via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 70 (SB4 in FIG. 70).

Further, during this cooking step 1, the preheating of the left induction heating unit 17HL is completed (for example, the heated unit N is in a state of being heated to 180 ° C., which is the standard temperature for preheating). The completion of this preheating is notified to the user by voice, characters, etc. by the notification unit AN (# 2).

The user can stop the microwave heating cooking at an arbitrary timing in the middle of the cooking step 1. The door 114 may be opened to stop. If the input key 40MT of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the selection of "karaage" in the cooperative cooking mode is canceled.

When the door 114 is opened, the microwave heating operation is immediately stopped, and the cooking step 1 is completed (# 3).
Next, the user moves the food material heated in the heating chamber 113 into the preheated object N, which is in turn on the top plate 15 (# 4).

Then, the cooking step 2 is started in the left heating unit 17HL (# 5).
In the cooking step 2, since the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operation unit 40L is pressed at the beginning before the preheating is started, the start command of the induction heating is sent from the left operation unit 40L to the integrated control device MC at that time. Sent.

At the start of the cooking step 2 (# 5), the user does not need to particularly operate the input operation unit 40.
The time when the object to be cooked is placed on the actually preheated object N to be heated is the time point at which the cooking step 2 is started.
The end of the cooking step 2 can be ended at an arbitrary timing if the user operates the left operation unit 40L.

The user then moves the object to be cooked again.
First, the door 114 is opened, the food to be cooked is put into the heating chamber 113, and the door 114 is closed (# 6).
Then, the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed to start the cooking step 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu).

5
Reference information 5 (reference information 5) when a predetermined time (fifth time TN5) has elapsed from the time when the cooking step 3 by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113 is started by the user's operation input (A26 in FIG. 67). FA5) is notified.

The reference information 5 (FA5) is information including a guide such as "The heating will be completed in 30 seconds. If you want to extend it further, please set the time". Further, since it is known that the final cooking process is completed, the user can start the preparation for taking out the fried chicken from the heating chamber 113 from the time of the notification of the reference information 5. Further, in synchronization with this, the reference information 5 (FA5) is displayed by the integrated display unit 30.

After that, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and the cooking step 3 is completed (# 7). The cooking step 3 can be stopped immediately when the user opens the door 114.
Then, after this, the user moves the food material heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object to be heated N which is preheated on the top plate 15 (# 8). In this case, since the object N to be heated is maintained in a state of being heated by the induction heating, the induction heating (cooking step 4) may be further performed (# 9). In this case, if the object to be heated N has already been preheated, it is sufficient to simply move the object to be cooked to the object to be heated N on the top plate 15.

Induction heating cooking can be completed by operating the left operation unit 40L. That is, the user's operation A28 is to press the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL.

In the cooking sequence shown in FIG. 71, the time required from the start of the heating operation (start of the preheating step) of the induction heating source 9 to the end of the cooking step 1 can be shortened.
That is, without waiting for the completion of the preheating of the induction heating source 9 or the notification of the completion of the preheating, the food material (the object to be cooked) is put into the heating chamber 113 and the cooking step 1 is started before that.

Since the preheating of the induction heating source 9 is completed before the cooking step 1 is completed, the food to be cooked is immediately transferred into the food to be heated N on the top plate 15 immediately after the cooking step 1 is completed, and the cooking step is completed. 2 can be started.

It should be noted that the cooking step 3 and the cooking step 4 are not always required. Depending on the type of food to be cooked and the wishes of the user, the necessary cooking process may be completed.

Further, in FIG. 71, the “left IH coil drive period” continues even after the cooking step 2 is completed, but when the induction heating source 9 is not used after the cooking step 2 is completed. May stop driving the left IH coil 17L by the left operation unit 40L at any time after the cooking step 2 is completed. Specifically, if the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed, the overheating operation of the left heating unit 17HL is stopped. However, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 67, when the left IH coil 17L is also used in the cooking step 4, it is necessary to start the preheating again before the cooking step 4.

Next, FIG. 72 will be described.
FIG. 72 shows an operation step when "karaage" is performed as a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 as in FIG. 71. FIG. 72 is a time chart corresponding to FIGS. 68 and 70.
In FIG. 72, # 1 to # 9 show the user's operation and the state change of the cooking cooker 1 as described with reference to FIG. 71. Other reference numerals correspond to FIGS. 68 and 70.

The difference between FIG. 72 and FIG. 71 will be described.
FIG. 72 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is started in the heating chamber 113 after the completion of preheating of the object N to be heated by the induction heating source 9 and the notification (# 2) thereof.

When the user is notified by the first specific screen 30SP and the left and right display units 31L and 31R that the preheating of the object N to be heated by the induction heating source 9 is completed, and is notified by voice by the voice synthesizer 95, the heating chamber The door 114 of 113 is opened, and the ingredients of "karaage" (seasoned chicken, etc.) are put into the heating chamber 113 (# 1).
Then, after closing the door 114, the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed.

At this point, the microwave heating source 189 operates and the cooking step 1 of the microwave heating cooking is started. Then, the reference information 3 is notified via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 70 (SB4 in FIG. 70). After that, the process is the same as that shown in FIG. 71.

In the cooking sequence shown in FIG. 72, the time required from the start of the heating operation (start of the preheating step) of the induction heating source 9 to the end time of the cooking step 1 is longer than that in FIG. 71.
However, since the food material (the object to be cooked) is started to be heated in the heating chamber 113 after waiting for the completion of the preheating of the induction heating source 9 or the notification of the completion of the preheating thereof, the cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 113 is completed. If the cooked food is moved, there is a guarantee that the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 can be started immediately. Therefore, this method is suitable for users who are not very familiar with the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4.

Note that FIG. 72 is a diagram in which the “left IH coil drive period” continues even after the cooking step 2 is completed, but when the induction heating source 9 is not used after the cooking step 2 is completed. May stop driving the left IH coil 17L by the left operation unit 40L at any time after the cooking step 2 is completed. However, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 72, when the left IH coil 17L is also used in the cooking step 4, it is necessary to start the preheating again before the cooking step 4.

Next, FIGS. 73 to 75 will be described.
FIG. 73 is a flowchart 1 showing a control operation of the integrated control device before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 74 is a flowchart 1 showing a control operation of the integrated control device until the transition to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode.

FIG. 73 will be described. Since steps ST2 to ST4 have been described with reference to FIG. 38, they will be briefly described.
Step ST2 is a step in which the IH control unit 90 determines the presence or absence of an abnormality. The integrated control device MC also diagnoses the presence or absence of abnormalities in the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

At the stage of step ST3, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays that "cooking can be started because there is no abnormality". At this stage, the integrated control device MC also confirms whether or not a setting command has been received from the input operation unit 40 for the upper limit value of the total power consumption.

In step ST4, the integrated control device MC performs notification and voice guidance for prompting the selection of the heating means by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95.
In this step ST4, the standby initial screens (display screens 1, 2A, 2B) are displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and caution information is also displayed (see FIG. 52).

Then, it is determined whether or not an input key other than the input key 43MC (for example, 43M1) has been operated (STC). If the input key 43MC has been operated, the step STC becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step STR1. In step STR1, it is checked whether or not the "permission condition" is satisfied. For example, the usage state of the heating source used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is checked.
The permission condition and the determination result will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 75.

In step STC, the first input operation is checked. For example, before the input key 43MC is pressed, it is determined whether or not individual cooking is selected by the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, which is an individual operation unit, and the combined cooking mode KM2 is set by the central operation unit 40M. Determine if selected.

When the input key 43MC is first operated within a certain grace time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" is started as described above.
On the other hand, when the input key 43MC is not operated and the input key 43M1 is touch-operated, the step STC is determined to be "Yes", and the process proceeds to step ST5 (see FIG. 38).

In FIG. 73, steps STR1 and STR2 are determination steps of "permission conditions" for determining whether or not cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is permitted.
Step STR1 is a step of determining "permission condition 1".
Here, "permit condition 1" means
(1) The peak cut value setting is 5000 W or more.
(2) If there is a power reduction command signal received from an external home gateway 411, the peak cut value of the reduction command is 5000 W or more.
If these two are satisfied, step STR1 is determined to be "Yes".

The "permission condition 2" in the next step STR2 is the following three.
(1) When the central heating unit is provided in the induction heating source 9, the central heating unit is not in the heating operation.
(2) One or both of the oven heating means 188 and the microwave heating means 189 are not in the heating operation.
(3) Neither the right heating portion nor the left heating portion of the induction heating source 9 is in the heating operation (or only one is in the heating operation).

If the above three conditions are satisfied, step STR2 is determined to be "Yes". Then, the process proceeds to STR3 (see FIG. 74).
If "No" is determined in steps STR1 and STR2, the process proceeds to step STR12, and the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 notify the user that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected.

Here, the meaning defined in the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" as "5000 W or more" will be described. For the sake of simplicity, the following description does not particularly refer to the power consumption of electrical components other than the heating source, for example, the upper cooling fan 60 and the like.

The reason why the required demand (pre-securing the amount of power demand) required when implementing the linked cooking mode KM3 is 5000 W or more is that the maximum (instantaneous) power during operation of each heating source when the linked cooking mode is executed is as follows. Because it is a street.
(1) During range operation (microwave heating source 189): 1000 W
(2) When operating the oven: 2000W (upper heater: 1000W, lower heater: 10)
00W)
(3) When the range grill is operating: 1500 W (microwave heating source 189: 500 W, upper heater: 1000 W)

On the other hand, the maximum power of the automatic control menu (fried food and appropriate temperature) of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is 1500 W.
Therefore, in the cooperative cooking mode, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 189, and the induction heating source 9 may operate at the same time.
That is, the total maximum power of the microwave heating source 189 "1000W", the oven heating source 188 "1000W (2000W is 1000W each, alternating energization)" and the induction heating source 9 "1500W". Will be 3500W.

When the demand (pre-securing of power demand) is 5000W:
When heating 3000 W (normal heating) with the right heating unit 17HR, the rest of the demand is 2000 W.
When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed from this state, the remaining demand is 1500 W short of the electric power of 3500 W required for the cooperative cooking, so the heating power of the right heating unit 17HR is reduced to 1500 W (from 3000 W) and the cooperative cooking is started. can do.

When the demand (pre-securing of power demand) is 4000W:
When fried food (maximum 1500W is required) in the right heating unit 17HR, the rest of the demand is 2500W.
When cooperative cooking is performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W short of the electric power of 3500 W required for cooperative cooking, so it is necessary to reduce the heating power of the right heating unit 17HR. However, if the heating power is reduced while the automatic control menu is being executed, the cooking will not be successful, so the heating power of the automatic control menu cannot be reduced.
After all, at 4000W, it is not possible to secure the required thermal power for the automatic control menu (fried food and appropriate temperature).

As is clear from the above explanation, before starting the cooperative cooking mode, the electric power (3500 W) required for the cooperative cooking and the electric power (1500 W) required for the automatic control menu of the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL. It is necessary to determine (confirm) whether or not there is a demand (preliminary securing of power demand) of 5000 W, which is the total value.

Next, FIG. 74 will be described.
In the cooperative cooking mode of the first embodiment, a pattern (first cooperative cooking mode) in which the induction heating source 9 is first driven and then the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven (see FIG. 61). ).
There is also a second cooperative cooking mode in the reverse order.

The steps in FIG. 74 are common to both the first linked cooking mode and the second linked cooking mode.
In step STR3, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and information on the cooperative cooking mode is displayed. As shown in FIG. 60, in order to select the cooking menu of each cooperative cooking mode, the “name of the object to be cooked” (for example, “hamburger”) 330 is displayed as one kind of identification information.

In the next step STR4, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described with reference to FIG. 60, by operating the two input keys 43M1 described above, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode is sequentially moved upward or downward. The display changes as it moves. In the first embodiment, since there are eight types of food to be cooked in total, if the input key 43M1 on the left side is operated once in the state of FIG. 60, the identification information 330 is changed from "hamburger" to "gratin". Switch to.

If the input key 43M1 is not operated (within a certain period of time), step STR5 is determined to be "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step STR5.
Step STR5 is a step of selecting any one of the two heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L displayed in the first specific screen. When the user operates a pair of left and right input keys 43M1, one of the heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L can be selected.

The right heating unit 17HR may be set by default so that the heating unit specifying unit 333R is displayed first on the first specific screen 30SP and proceeds to step STR7 as it is. In the example described with reference to FIG. 60, when hamburger steak is performed by cooperative cooking, the left heating unit 17HL is set by default, and the heating unit specifying unit 333L preferentially selects the left heating unit 17HL. It was displayed.

In the next step STR6, it is determined whether or not an input operation for canceling the selection of the linked cooking mode has been performed. When the input key 43MT is operated, it is determined as "No", and the process returns to step ST4 (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT is not operated, it is determined as "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step STR7.
When the input key 43MS is operated, the process proceeds to step STR8 according to the operation program.
In step STR8, control conditions such as the finally selected heating unit (for example, the right heating unit 17HR) and the output value at the time of microwave heating are displayed in the first specific screen 30SP are displayed. The next step is STR9, and from this stage, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode. That is, after that, if the input key 43R1 is pressed, the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is automatically performed.

As the display content of the first specific screen 30SP of step STR8, process information such as that the right heating unit 17HR is used in the first cooking step 1 and the microwave heating source 189 is used in the next cooking step 2. Is displayed on the process display unit 332. The contents and transition of these display screens will be described in detail later.

When the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode, the induction heating cooking is started from the time when the input key 43R1 of the right operation unit 40R is pressed. It should be noted that the induction heating is not started immediately as described in FIG. 39. From step STR9 onward is step MS4 shown in FIG. 39.

If the input key 43MS is not operated in step STR7, it is determined as "No" and the process returns to step STR3. If, for example, 30 minutes have passed from the time when the input key 43MC is operated, but the circuit is patrolling between steps STR3 and STR7, the main power is automatically turned off or the step is described. You may return to ST4 (see FIGS. 73 and 76).

Next, FIG. 75 will be described.
FIG. 75 shows the determination process of steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG. 73.
Step STX1 is a stage in which the input key 43MC is operated.
The next step STX2 is a stage in which the integrated control device MC investigates the latest state of the cooking device with respect to the above-mentioned permission condition 1 and permission condition 2.

The next step STX3 is a stage of determination processing corresponding to steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG. 73. In this step STX3, the integrated control device MC compares the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 with the latest state of the cooking cooker, and determines whether the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are satisfied. ..

In step STX3 of FIG. 75, the notifications 1 to 4 indicate the contents notified to the user by the voice synthesizer 95.
Further, the display 1 to the display 4 indicate the contents displayed on the integrated display unit 30. It should be noted that the displays 1 to 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 30SP displayed from the time of step STR3 in FIG. 74, but are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in which the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed. It is a thing. That is, the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed unless the premise (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode is satisfied.

Next, FIG. 76 will be described.
The control mode of FIG. 76 is a case of a (second) cooperative cooking mode different from the (first) cooperative cooking mode of FIG. 74. There are two heating sources used in the coordinated cooking mode of FIG. 76, the first used is the microwave heating source 189, and the second heating source used is the left heating of the induction heating source 9. Part 17HL. The part where the control mode of FIG. 76 is significantly different from that of FIG. 74 is step STR11.

In the above-mentioned "warm" (microwave oven automatic) of the range grill cooking (composite cooking) menu, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113. Then, when the "target temperature" is reached, the microwave oscillation is automatically stopped. Therefore, when the heat during cooking previously performed remains inside the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated control device MC prohibits automatic microwave heating. The default value of the "target temperature" here is 80 ° C., but this can be set to a higher temperature side or a lower temperature side by the central operation unit 40M.

In step STR11, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference temperature (for example, 70 ° C.), the temperature measuring unit 158 detects the high temperature at an early stage, and the microwave is incompletely cooked. There is a concern that heating will stop.

Therefore, in the control shown in FIG. 76, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 exceeds the reference temperature, the right display unit 31R and the left side display unit 31L indicate that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be executed at that time. Display (STR12). Further, it may be displayed by the integrated display unit 30. Further, it is more reliable to notify by voice by the voice synthesizer 95. The reason why the left and right display units 31L and 31R are displayed is that the user has not yet selected any of the left and right heating units 17HL and 17HR at this stage.

Further, since the first specific screen 30SP displayed when the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are satisfied is not displayed at this stage, in addition to being displayed by the right side display unit 31R and the left side display unit 31L, it is also displayed. Alternatively, instead, it may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (STR12).
In other words, in FIGS. 73 and 75, the first condition (permission condition 1) and the second condition (permission condition 2) determine whether or not the transition to the cooperative cooking mode is possible. Can be said to correspond to the third condition (permission condition 3).

In this way, at the selection stage of the cooperative cooking mode, it is possible to notify the user that the heating source to be used first (in this case, the microwave heating source 189) cannot be used.

In addition, at the stage of step STR12, when displaying or notifying that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is too high to start cooking, if the door 114 is opened, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 drops quickly, which is beneficial to the user side. You may also convey the information.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device MC when the left heating unit 17HL is used regardless of the cooperative cooking during the execution of the cooperative cooking mode.
In the first embodiment of FIG. 77, the heating source used in the cooperative cooking mode is first the left heating portion 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and the heating source used next is the microwave heating source. 189 and oven heating source 188.

When the cooking process in the above-mentioned cooperative cooking mode has already advanced to the heating stage of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, the user wants to use the left heating unit 17HL for another cooking. When the left operation unit 40L is operated, the integrated control device MC receives the operation signal (step SH1).

In the next step SH2, it is determined that the use does not exceed, for example, the total power regulation value of 5000 W, as in the above-mentioned “permission condition 1”.

When the determination of "No" is received in step SH2, the process proceeds to step SH8, and the maximum amount of electric power when the left heating unit 17HL is used and the heating source (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) during cooperative cooking. For example, the maximum thermal power value of the left heating unit 17H is limited so that the total value with the electric energy does not exceed the regulation value of the power control unit 72, and the limit value is notified to the user by the notification unit AN.

On the other hand, when the electric power used in the left heating unit 17HL (heat power of induction heating) is reduced from the state of the heating source in which the cooking of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being executed also exceeds the allowable total electric energy. In step SH8, the left heating unit 17HL is disallowed. Specifically, the left side display unit 31L displays that the device cannot be used, and the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice. The reason why it cannot be used is also notified by the voice synthesizer 95.

In the next step SH3, the input operation result of the user is analyzed, and it is determined whether or not the "permission control menu" does not correspond to the prohibited control menu (hereinafter referred to as "prohibition control menu").

The "prohibited control menu" is determined in advance in consideration of the amount of electric power used (required for cooking). For example, the "(automatic) fried food" described in FIG. Is specified.
Both (automatic) fried food and rice cooking adopt a control method that is expected to use a large amount of electric power in the cooking process, so in order to secure that electric power, the heating source during the execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 There is a concern that the power supply of (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) may be hindered.

For the above reasons, in step SH3, it is determined whether or not the "permission control menu" is applicable. For example, one of the permitted control menus, "water heater", is checked.

In step SH3, when it is determined that the "permission control menu" does not apply, the above-mentioned disapproval process is performed and notification that the device cannot be used is performed.

When the determination of "Yes" is received in step SH3, the process proceeds to step SH4, the drive mode of the IH coil 17L of the left heating unit 17HL is automatically determined, and the thermal power value set by the user or the thermal power selected by the IH control unit 90 is automatically determined. The value etc. are determined. After that, when the input key 43L1 is pressed, the process proceeds to the next step SH5.

Next, the driving of the inverter circuit 81L is started, and the induction heating cooking is started (SH5). After that, it is monitored whether or not the stop command from the user is the input key 43L1 (SH6), and when the stop command is received, the induction heating operation is immediately stopped. Then, the end of cooking is displayed on the left side display unit 31L. In addition, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the end of cooking by voice (SH7).

If a change can be made to the permitted conditions (for example, lowering the thermal power), the step SH8 makes the change and notifies the change.
In addition, if there is a reason why the left heating unit 17HL to be used cannot be permitted to use, a notification of disapproval is given. Then, if the change processing can be performed, the process returns to step SH2.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device MC when additional heating is performed at the stage where the heating of the heating source used for the first time is completed in the cooking process of one cooperative cooking mode.

The control shown in FIG. 78 is in the case of cooking in which the second used microwave heating source 189 is driven for a time (for example, 5 minutes) set by the user in the cooperative cooking mode. For convenience of explanation, the operation of the oven heating source 188 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment shown in FIG. 78, the heating source used in the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode is the right heating unit 17HR which is set by default as described with reference to FIG. 74. The heating sources used in the next cooking step 2 are a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188.

A scene in which the user uses the microwave heating source 189 to perform the cooking step 2 by one of the cooperative cooking modes KM3 described with reference to FIG. 77 will be described.
When the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is operated next after the cooking step 1 in the right heating unit 17HR is completed, the operation signal is received by the integrated control device MC (step SJ1).

In the next step SH2, the drive of the inverter circuit 121A is started (SJ2), and the measurement of the set time of the timer cooking (in this case, 5 minutes) is started (SJ3).
The output value of microwave heating is the default value (500W), but the user can also operate the central operation unit 40M to change the heating power (SJ4, SJ5).

On the other hand, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B constituting the oven heating source 188 are energized by the heating chamber control unit 159.
In the first embodiment, the start of energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B coincides with the start of the oscillation operation of the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189.

The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized during the oscillation of the magnetron 122. In other words, the object to be cooked is heated simultaneously by microwaves and electric radiant heat (cooking step 2).

As described above, the energization period of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is the same as the microwave heating period. Therefore, in the following description, only the microwave heating time will be described, and the heating of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B will be described. The explanation of time is omitted.

In step SJ6, when the input key 43MT instructing the stop of microwave heating is operated (SJ6), the drive of the inverter circuit 121A is stopped and the time measurement is also reset (SJ7).
When the input key 43MT for instructing the heating stop is not operated, steps SJ4 to SJ6 and SJ10 are repeatedly performed within the set time of timer cooking. When the set time for timer cooking has elapsed, the process proceeds to step SJ7.

In step SJ8, a display is performed so that the user can determine whether or not to execute the once stopped microwave cooking for a predetermined time or a time specified by the user. Specifically, it is displayed in characters on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, for example, "Do you want to extend the time to heat? If you want to extend the time, press the time key."

The reason for allowing such an extension is that if the user determines that the heating is still insufficient as a result of looking at the heating state of the object to be cooked, it will be heated quickly (in this case, microwave heating and electric radiation type). This is to restart the heating) and finish the food to be cooked in a better condition.

When the user presses the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, it is determined in step SJ9 that the operation signal is present, and if there is an operation signal, the determination of "Yes" is performed.
Then, the process returns to step SJ3. If the input key 43M3 is operated once before the input key 43MS is pressed, the cooking time is extended by a fixed time (for example, 3 minutes), or if the input key 43M3 is pressed once, the cooking time is extended for 3 minutes. You may set the program so that if you press it twice in a row, it will take 5 minutes. Further, even if the cooking is started again, the heating operation can be stopped immediately by pressing the input key 43MT.

On the other hand, if the user does not press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M (for example, if the user does not press the input key 43MS within the "holding time: 15 seconds"), the process proceeds to step SJ11 and the operation of the final cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is completed. do. Then, the integrated display unit 30 displays to that effect, and the voice synthesizer 95 also performs a notification operation (SJ11). If the door 114 is not opened even once from step SJ8 and the holding time has elapsed, the voice synthesizer 95 may issue an alarm to alert the user.

When the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is completed, the integrated control device MC sets the control conditions in which the microwave heating source 9, the micro heating source, and the oven heating source 188 operate in the storage device MM in chronological order. Automatically memorize (at the time of this memorization, the end date and time of the cooking process is recorded at the same time).

After that, when a predetermined command signal is received from the central operation unit 40M, the stored linked cooking mode and control conditions immediately before being stored are called from the storage device MM and displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the next linked cooking mode KM3 is displayed. It has a reproduction function used for the implementation of. It should be noted that not only the one-time cooperative cooking mode immediately before, but all the cooking histories in the past several times or a certain period (for example, one month) are called (including the information on the cooking execution date and time), and the desired one is selected. The user may select the item. By pressing the input key 43KP to switch to the "function mode", the user can set various settings for the reproducibility of the cooking history.

As described above, since the energization of the oven heating source 189 is also started by the start of the RG cooking process, whether or not the integrated display unit 30 is to extend the heating time of the oven heating source 189 alone. Do not display information about. However, if the sequence is such that the microwave heating source 189 is operated first and then the oven heating source 188 is operated, or vice versa, the microwave heating time is extended and the oven heating source is operated. The time extension of 188 may be set separately.

Next, FIGS. 79 and 80 will be described.
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device MC when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.

FIG. 79 shows an input step in the central operation unit 40M, and in particular, shows a step of a support operation when the user makes a mistake in the input operation or is lost in the operation.

The steps in FIG. 79 are common to both the first linked cooking mode and the second linked cooking mode.
When the user operates the input key 43MC, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display unit 30 (step SL1).

On the first specific screen 30SP, identification information 330, 330A, 330B for selecting a cooperative cooking menu is displayed as information on the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (see FIG. 60) (step SL2).

In the next step SL3, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described with reference to FIG. 74, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode moves sequentially upward or downward. The display changes in shape, and the identification information 330 corresponding to another object to be cooked is displayed in the central portion of the first area 30L (step SL9).

In FIG. 79, the step of selecting any one of the heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L described with reference to FIG. 60 is omitted from the illustration.

In the next step SL4, it is determined whether or not an input operation for canceling the selection of the linked cooking mode has been performed. When the input key 43MT is operated, it is determined as "No", and the process returns to step ST4 in FIG. That is, it returns to the state of the initial standby screen.

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT is not operated, it is determined as "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step SL5.
Next, when an input key that is not necessary for setting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is operated among the input keys in the central operation unit 40M, step SL5 is determined to be "No" and the process proceeds to step SL11.

Here, the "input key not necessary for setting the cooperative cooking mode KM3" is, for example, the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M. Further, the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R.

As described with reference to FIG. 62, since the right heating unit 17HR is occupied when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input key 43MC, the input itself by the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R is invalid. .. However, it is possible that the user may not be aware of it.

Therefore, in step SL11, the notification unit AN notifies that the operation is incorrect. For example, when the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated by the voice synthesizer 95, an erroneous operation is immediately notified. When the right heating unit 17HR is occupied and controlled by the integrated control device MC so that the presence / absence of touch of the input key of the right operation unit 40R cannot be detected, erroneous operation of the input keys 43R1 and 44R cannot be detected. However, as described above, when the input itself from the input key 43R1 or the like is enabled and the integrated control device MC performs processing that is not regarded as a valid signal, an erroneous operation can be detected.

In step SL11, after notifying that the operation is incorrect, the process proceeds to step SL12. In step 12, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as the guide key, has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the content of the correct operation or the content of the incorrect operation is displayed in the third area 30R (step SL13). Then, it is recommended to return to step SL3 and redo the operation.

If there is no erroneous input key operation in step SL5, step SL5 determines "Yes" and proceeds to step SL6.
In this step SL6, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. When the operation is performed, the process proceeds to step SL13, and detailed information such as the correct operation content is displayed. Further, at this stage, the outline of the food to be cooked corresponding to the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP may be displayed.

If it is determined in the next step SL7 that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL8 for starting the cooking step 1 according to the program of the cooperative operation. In addition, before the cooking step 1, the preheating step for starting the preheating operation may be started. If the input key 43MS is not operated, the process returns from step SL7 to step SL3.

Next, FIG. 80 will be described.
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device MC when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.
FIG. 80 shows an input step in the central operation unit 40M, and in particular, shows a step of a support operation when the user makes a mistake in the input operation or is lost in the operation.

When the user operates the input key 43M1 (step SL20), the integrated control device MC displays the second specific screen 30SC on the integrated display unit 30.
Further, on the second specific screen 30SP, a control menu for cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed (see FIG. 55) (step SL21).

In the next step SL22, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been further operated. As described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, the specific sentence 30J indicating the name (including abbreviation) of the control menu that can be adopted in the combined cooking mode KM2 by operating the input key 43M1 of the pair of left and right is sequentially upward. Alternatively, the display changes in the form of moving downward, and the specific sentence 30J of another control menu is displayed in the central portion of the first area 30L.

If the input key 43M1 is not operated in step SL22, the display of the specific sentence 30J of the control menu "warm" defined as the default display is maintained, and the process proceeds to step SL23.

When the input key 43M1 is operated, step SL22 is determined to be "No", and the process proceeds to step SL28.
In step SL28, as described above, the specific sentence 30J indicating the name (including abbreviation) of another control menu that can be adopted in the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed in the central portion of the second area 30M, and in the next step SL23. move on.

In the next step SL23, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M2 has been operated. By operating the input key 32M2, the control condition such as the heating time information 30S shown in the second area 30M can be changed to another control condition (see FIG. 58).

When the user operates the input key 43M2, step SL23 is determined to be "No", and the process proceeds to step SL29. In step SL29, another control condition is displayed in the central portion of the second area 30M, and the process proceeds to the next step SL24.

In the next step SL25, when an input key that is not necessary for setting the combined cooking mode KM2 is operated among the input keys in the central operation unit 40M, it is determined as "No" and the process proceeds to step SL30.

Here, the "input keys not necessary for setting the combined cooking mode KM2" are, for example, the input keys 43KP and 43MC of the central operation unit 40M. Further, the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R.

In step SL30, the notification unit AN notifies that the operation is incorrect. For example, when the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated by the voice synthesizer 95, an erroneous operation is immediately notified. Then, the process proceeds to step SL31.

In step SL31, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3 that also serves as the guide key has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the content of the correct operation or the content of the incorrect operation is displayed in the third area 30R (step SL32). Then, it is recommended to return to step SL22 and redo the operation.

If there is no erroneous input key operation in step SL24, step SL24 determines "Yes" and proceeds to step SL25.

In step SL25, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. If it is operated, the process proceeds to step SL32, and detailed information such as correct operation content is displayed. Further, at this stage, the reference information 30P1 regarding the control menu displayed on the second specific screen 30SC may be displayed.

If it is determined in the next step SL26 that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL27 for starting the cooking step 1 according to the operation program of the combined cooking mode KM2.

(Various displays and input operation unit in linked cooking mode)
Next, FIGS. 81 to 108 will be described.
These figures show the control operation of the input operation unit 40 and the display unit (integrated display unit 30 / left side display unit 31L) when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.

FIG. 81 is a plan view showing a control operation of the input operation unit 40 and the display unit (integrated display unit 30 / left side display unit 31L) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
In the figure, the reference numeral FG is a user's fingertip.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as shown in FIG. 81, and the three identification information 330, 330A included in the cooperative cooking menu, The 330B corresponds to each of the three items to be cooked, "hamburger", "gratin", and "roast beef". These identification information 330, 330A, 330B are displayed at the same time.

In FIG. 81 and the following FIG. 82, the process display unit 332 is not shown on the first specific screen 30SP.
Additional information 331 is displayed on the right side of the identification information 330. In the examples of FIGS. 81 and 82, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating unit 17HL".

The individual light emitting unit 27M6, which is in close proximity to the input key 43MS, is blinking as shown by a broken line circle in FIG. 81, and guides the user to operate the input key 43MS.
On the other hand, when the heating source first used in the cooperative cooking mode is the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9, the light emitting display units 27L2 and 27L3 emit light as shown in FIG. 81.

Then, when the input key 43MS is operated, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. At that time, since the input function of the input key 43L1 is enabled, when the input key 43L1 is pressed, cooking is executed in the left side heating unit 17HL.

At the same time, the thermal power display unit 67L indicating the thermal power stage during induction heating cooking in the left heating unit 17HL lights up (the number of the thermal power display units to be lit is determined by the default value).
Even if the left heating unit 17HL is individually used (regardless of the cooperative cooking mode KM3) while the cooperative cooking mode is being executed, the integrated control device MC can be used to control the left heating unit 17HL. When the operation is prohibited (occupied state), the light emitting display unit 27L3 does not emit light as shown in FIG. 78. Also, the thermal power display unit 67L is not lit.

Further, as described above, even if there is an operation of temporarily using the left heating unit 17HL for cooking unrelated to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 during the cooking of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the left heating unit 17HL Cannot be used is displayed as reference information in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30. For example, the message "The left IH cannot be used because the cooking is in cooperation" or "The left IH and the heating chamber cannot be used now because the cooking is in cooperation" is displayed.

As is clear from the above explanation, since the operation unit (input key 43MS) for starting the execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is located in the center of the left and right on the upper surface of the top plate 15, the user's line of sight naturally shifts to the center. get together. Then, the selection of the cooperative cooking mode and the guidance display until the start of cooking are also concentrated on the integrated display unit 30 in the central portion.

Further, when the cooking step 1 of the left heating unit 17HL, which is the first heating source, is completed, the input key 43MS for advancing to the next heating source is also located in the central operation unit 40M.
That is, the main input operations such as the selection of the cooperative cooking mode, the start of the first cooking process 1, and the start of the next cooking process 2 are all concentrated in the left and right central parts (central operation part 40M) in front of the heating cooker 1. Can be done.

Next, FIG. 82 will be described.
FIG. 82 is a plan view showing the operation of the central operation unit 40M and the left operation unit 40L and the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP when the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated display unit 30 simultaneously displays the three identification information 330, 330A, and 330B included in the linked cooking menu, as shown in FIG. 82 (B). (Display screen 8A).

Further, additional information 331 is displayed on the right side of the identification information 330, 330A, and 330B. In the example of FIG. 82, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating unit 17HL".

When the input key 43M1 on the left side is pressed once more, the food identification information 330 (name "hamburger") displayed in the center of the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 moves backward, and instead. The identification information 330B of the "roast beef" displayed in the front is displayed in the center (display screen 8B).

Each time the input key 43M1 on the left side is pressed once as described above, the identification information 330 displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 (indicating the name of the food to be cooked) is in a fixed order one by one. It will be updated with.

When the input key 43M1 on the right side is pressed, each time the input key 43M1 is pressed, the display screen 8D in FIG. 82 (B) is selected in the reverse direction, such as from the display screen 8D to the display screen 8C.
Although only four linked cooking menus are shown in FIG. 82, there are a total of eight linked cooking menus as described above. These display screens 8A to 8D are all the first specific screens 30SP.

Next, FIG. 83 will be described.
FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of the linked cooking menu when the linked cooking mode of the cooking cooker is selected.
As is clear from FIG. 83, the eight linked cooking menus are sequentially displayed (forward or backward) in the first specific screen 30SP by the operation of the input key 43M1.

Next, FIG. 84 will be described.
FIG. 84 is a list showing the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP in the integrated display unit 30 when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.
As shown in FIG. 84, there are several types of process display units 332 at the stage immediately before the start of the cooking process, depending on the cooking menu (8 types from hamburger to gratin).

Further, the additional information 331 is unified throughout the cooperative cooking mode as shown in the additional information A and the additional information B. The additional information A and the additional information B are alternately displayed for a certain period of time (for example, every 5 seconds).
Further, in the additional information B, the reason why the heating part of the induction heating source 9 to be used is indicated as "changeable" is that there are two parts, the left heating part 17HL and the right heating part 17HR.

Next, the cooking process of the eight types of objects to be cooked shown in FIG. 84 will be briefly described.
Part 1: Cooking menu (4 types) that cooks on a microwave oven from an induction heating source 9
Hamburger: Suitable temperature preheating → Suitable temperature cooking → Range grill cooking
"Appropriate temperature preheating" means preheating an object to be heated N such as a frying pan to an appropriate temperature (example: 18).
0 ° C). In the appropriate temperature state, as cooking process 1, appropriate temperature heating cooking (
(By induction heating source 9). No cooking oil is added to the object to be heated N.
The range that the user can set as the above "optimal temperature" in the induction heating source 9 is 140.
The temperature is from ° C to 220 ° C, in increments of 20 ° C.
When cooking on the microwave oven, it takes a certain period of time (for example, 20 seconds) from the start of cooking.
During), the firepower can be changed so that the finished state can be changed.
Roast beef, paella, gratin: Same as the above hamburger.

Part 2: Cooking menu (4 types) from range grill cooking to cooking with induction heating source 9
Karaage: Deep-fried food preheating → Range grill heating → Deep-fried food cooking
"Fried food preheating" means that a specified amount of cooking oil (2) is added to the food to be heated N (pot such as tempura).
Add 00g or about 220CC or more) and specify with the induction heating source 9.
Preheat to the temperature of.
The range that the user can set as the above "fried food preheating" in the induction heating source 9 is 1.
The temperature is 40 ° C to 200 ° C, in increments of 10 ° C.
When cooking on the microwave oven, it takes a certain period of time (for example, 20 seconds) from the start of cooking.
During), the firepower can be changed so that the finished state can be changed.
Tonkatsu and Tempura: Same as "Karaage" above.
Stir-fried vegetables: Preheating at a suitable temperature → Heating in a microwave oven → Cooking at a suitable temperature
"Appropriate temperature preheating" means preheating the object to be heated N such as a frying pan to an appropriate temperature.
The optimum temperature state is realized by the induction heating source 9.
After that, as the cooking step 1, microwave oven cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113.
The range that the user can set as the above "optimal temperature" in the induction heating source 9 is 140.
The temperature is from ° C to 220 ° C, in increments of 20 ° C.

The following FIG. 85 is a plan view showing the control operation and display contents of the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30, and the left side display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode of the cooking cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82.
The identification information 330 of the three cooperative cooking modes is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP. That is, as shown in FIG. 85, the identification information 330 of the "hamburger" is displayed at the center in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30. At the same time, the additional information 331 and the cooking process display unit (cooking process information unit) 332 are displayed in a list state on the first specific screen 30SP.

At the time when the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, that is, at the initial stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, either the right heating unit selection mark 334R or the left heating unit selection mark 334L is displayed. The user can select one or the other.

The example of FIG. 85 is a case where the left heating unit 17HL is set by default as recommended. As shown in FIG. 85, the left heating unit selection mark 334L displayed as “left” and white characters is always displayed on the first first specific screen 30SP.

With the pair of left and right input keys 43M2, either one of the right heating unit selection mark 334R and the left heating unit selection mark 334L can be selected. For example, if the input key 43M2 on the left side is pressed, the left heating unit selection mark 334L can be selected and changes to white characters as shown in FIG. 85 to indicate that the selection has been made.
On the contrary, if the input key 43M2 on the right side is pressed in the state of FIG. 85, the right heating unit selection mark 334R can be selected.

At the time when the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (by pressing the input key 43MC) (see FIG. 62) or when the input key 43MS is pressed (see FIG. 63), the left heating unit 17HL It becomes an occupied state due to the execution of the cooperative cooking mode. Therefore, the left heating unit 17HL is in a state of not accepting the setting of other control menus (integrated control device MC).

Therefore, the user places the object to be heated N such as a frying pan above the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 43L1. Then, induction heating is automatically started. The operation of pressing the input key 44R is omitted, and the induction heating is automatically started in the left heating unit 17HL after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the input key 43MS is pressed. You may.
When the heating operation in the left heating unit 17HL is started as described above, the occupied state of the right heating unit 17HR is released. Therefore, the input of the independent cooking mode on the right side operation unit 40R can be started immediately.

There is also a method of canceling the occupied state of the right heating unit 17HR when the left heating unit selection mark 334L is selected by the pair of left and right input keys 43M2, but the selection of the heating unit by the input key 43M2 is easy. Since it can be changed, at the time of selecting the left heating unit selection mark 334L, as described above, the occupied state of the right heating unit 17HR is not released.

The "appropriate temperature of 180 ° C." means that the temperature for preheating the object to be heated N such as a metal pan or a frying pan, which is a container for containing the "hamburger" to be cooked in this case, is 180 ° C. That is, the IH control unit 90 automatically controls the thermal power level so that the temperature of the bottom surface portion of the object to be heated N becomes 180 ° C. by the action of the inverter circuit 81L and the temperature detection circuit 93.

Along with the increase in the preheating temperature, the thermal power display unit 67L for indicating the thermal power stage during induction heating cooking does not display the thermal power level, but the degree of increase in the preheating temperature and the degree of reaching the target preheating temperature (approaching). Demonstrates the function of displaying the degree).

In FIG. 85, what is indicated by a broken line circle at the thermal power display unit 67L indicates the current temperature range, and the broken line circle gradually moves to the right as the temperature rises. .. That is, the state of temperature rise can be understood from the light emitting state of the thermal power display unit 67L. Details will be described with reference to FIG.

The additional information 331 displays "Notify me when the set temperature is reached" as shown in FIG. 85.
On the other hand, the cooking process display unit (cooking process information unit) 332 is displayed in strip-shaped characters so as to laterally cross the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30.

As can be seen from the display unit 332 of the cooking process in FIG. 85, when the hamburger is cooked in cooperation, the preheating process is first started by the induction heating source 9, then the cooking process 1, and finally the range grill heating (RG). The cooking step 2 for performing heating) is started.

As shown in FIG. 85, until the moment when the cooperative cooking mode is started, the user's fingertip FG and the line of sight are on the right front side of the integrated display unit 30 in order to operate the input key 43MS, in other words, the central operation unit 40M. It is in.
After that, the user's line of sight shifts toward the left heating unit 17HL as indicated by the arrow. That is, when the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked is placed above the left heating unit 17HL, the user's line of sight moves to the left.

After starting the cooperative cooking mode, the user's line of sight and body move from the central part to the left side as shown by a long horizontal arrow in FIG. 85. However, this movement to the left is not a big one, and it does not put a burden on the user himself.

Next, FIG. 86 will be described.
FIG. 86 is a plan view showing the control operation of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, and shows changes in the preheating temperature in chronological order.

FIG. 86A shows a portion of the thermal power display unit 67L on the left side. What is shown by the broken line circle in FIG. 86 (A) shows the current temperature range. For example, when the target preheating temperature is 180 ° C., the four thermal power display units 67L emit light from the beginning of the cooking process of induction heating. The leftmost light emitting part is blinking as shown by the broken line circle. This blinking state indicates the current temperature level.

As the preheating temperature rises, the current temperature rises, so the position of the above-mentioned "blinking part" moves to the right side in sequence. When the preheating temperature is reached, the blinking part disappears.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), at the initial stage when the preheating step of induction heating is started, if any of the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L is operated, the target value of the preheating temperature described above can be obtained. Can be changed.

For example, each time the input key 43L2 on the left side is pressed once, the preheating temperature can be lowered by one step. On the contrary, each time the input key 43L3 on the right side is pressed once, the preheating temperature can be raised by one step. As shown in FIG. 86 (C), the process of changing the preheating temperature is displayed on the left side display unit 31L each time, so that the user can easily confirm the display content.

Next, FIG. 87 will be described.
FIG. 87 is a plan view showing the control operation of the left operation unit 40L and the left side display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.

When the object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17HL reaches the set preheating temperature, the thermal power display unit 67L does not blink.
When the product is heated to the preheating temperature in this way, the integrated display unit 30 displays "preheating has been completed" by the additional information 331 as shown in FIG. 87.

Further, the display content of the cooking process display unit (cooking process information unit) 332 changes. Specifically, from the display of IH preheating, the stage of "IH heating" in the next cooking step 1 is displayed in white characters.
From this information, the user can easily understand that the stage of full-scale induction heating has been reached. That is, it can be seen that the temperature of the object to be heated, such as a frying pan, placed on the left heating unit 17HL has reached a temperature suitable for heating the object to be cooked.

The pair of input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L has a function of designating the thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating unit 17HL. Therefore, in the transition from the preheating process to the full-scale heating process (cooking process 1), each time the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are touched once, the heat value is increased by one step in the specified thermal power value data table. You can select the firepower you have, or you can select a specific firepower that has been lowered by one level. As a result, the user can freely raise or lower the temperature of the object to be heated during induction heating.

Next, FIG. 88 will be described.
FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing a change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
As shown in FIG. 88A, when the preheating step is completed, the integrated display unit 30 indicates to the user that the cooking step 1 (full-scale induction heating) can be started. Further, the cooking step 1 can be stopped at any time by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L.

The display switching between (A) and (B) in FIG. 88 is automatically repeated at intervals of, for example, 5 seconds. Then, after the cooking step 1 of full-scale induction heating is started, only FIG. 88 (C) is displayed. The firepower at this point has been shown to be "slightly weak". It has also been shown that this thermal power level can be adjusted by the user (information 30V indicating the output level; in this case, the thermal power of induction heating). FIG. 88 (D) is an example showing the situation immediately after the cooking step 1 (induction heating) is completed.

Next, FIG. 89 is a plan view showing the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected. The display content of FIG. 88 is slightly changed, and the preheating temperature value (for example, 180 ° C.) is included in the additional information 331. The display content shown in FIG. 88 (B) may be changed as shown in FIG. 89.

FIG. 89 shows a stage in which the cooking step 1 of induction heating has not yet been started when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.
Therefore, in order to encourage the operation of the input key 43MS, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 is in a blinking state as shown by the broken line circle.

When the user is requested to press the input key 43MS again in order to clarify the timing when the preheating step is completed and the next cooking step 1 is started, the step of pressing the input key 43MS is added as shown in FIG. 89. You may. In that case, as shown in FIG. 89, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS may be used for notification. In FIG. 89, as shown by the broken line circle, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 is blinked to urge the user to operate the input key 43MS.

Even if the input key 43M1 is operated in the states of FIGS. 88 and 89, the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 including "range manual" and "range automatic" cannot be displayed on the integrated display unit 30. In order to stop the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 at this stage, it is necessary to press the input key 43MT. In other words, pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L can only end the cooking process 1 of the left side heating unit 17HL to be used first, and does not cancel (cancel) all the settings of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. ..

Next, FIG. 90 will be described.
FIG. 90 shows a scene in which the user finishes the cooking step 1 of the induction heating with the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L. Since the heating operation has already been completed, the thermal power display unit 67L does not emit any light.

On the other hand, in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, the cooking process information (cooking process information unit) 332 has advanced to the cooking process 2, that is, the stage of "range grill cooking" (RG cooking). indicate. Specifically, it is indicated by white letters that the progress from the white display of IH heating to the stage of RG cooking which is the final cooking step 2 is performed.
From this information, it is easily understood that the user has reached the stage of carrying out the cooking step 2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are combined.

The command to start the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 also needs to be given by the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS becomes a blinking state as shown by the broken line circle, prompting the user to operate the input key 43MS. ..

On the other hand, since the stage of FIG. 90 is after the user himself / herself finishes the cooking step 1 of the induction heating with the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, the occupancy state of the left heating unit 17HL is released. Therefore, by operating the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, the left heating unit 17HL can be started to be used for cooking in the independent cooking mode KM1 different from the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

At this stage, another cooking menu can be started at the induction heating source 189 by inputting with the left operation unit 17HL. However, since the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has not been canceled yet, another cooking using the heating chamber 113 (cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2) cannot be performed. The occupancy of the left heating unit 17HL has only been released.

Next, FIG. 91 will be described.
FIG. 91 shows that when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, the output level of microwave heating can be adjusted while proceeding to the “range grill cooking” (RG cooking) stage of the cooking step 2.

Specifically, the output level of microwave heating is displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30 in five stages such as "slightly weak" and "weak". This display information is the same as the "information 30V indicating the microwave output level" described with reference to FIG. 88. Therefore, by operating the pair of input keys 43M2, the user can select the output level of microwave heating.

Next, FIG. 92 will be described.
FIG. 92 shows that, as in FIG. 91, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, the output level of microwave heating can be adjusted when the stage of the cooking step 2 is advanced.

As shown in FIG. 92B, the output level of microwave heating is displayed in the second area 30M in a total of five stages from “strong” to “weak”. Such a microwave output level can be selected by the user by operating the input key 43M2.
Therefore, in the final step (cooking step 2), the user can adjust the heating intensity by microwaves according to the finished state of the object to be cooked. It should be noted that the heating intensity can be adjusted in this way only within a certain period of time (for example, 20 seconds) after entering the cooking step 2 as described above.

In the final cooking step 2 described with reference to FIG. 92, the user's operation and line of sight are concentrated in the range of the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M. Therefore, the user can stay in the central part of the front surface of the cooking device 1 and concentrate on the end of the cooking step 2.

In the middle of the cooking step 2, when it is desired to take out the object to be cooked inside the heating chamber 113 from the heating chamber 113 and check it directly, the user may open the door 114 at an arbitrary timing. When the door 114 is opened, the transmission of microwaves is instantaneously stopped by the action of the door open / close detection mechanism 131, and the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is also stopped.

If the door 114 is closed again and the input key 43MS is pressed again, microwave heating is instantly started again. When the door 114 is opened in the middle of the cooking step 2 as described above, the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 remains continuous.

Next, FIG. 93 will be described.
FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation in the final stage after the cooking step 2 of FIG. 92 and the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP).

When the user arbitrarily ends the final step of cooking (cooking step 2), the input key 43MT is operated once. When this is pressed, the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is completed. However, at this point, the series of control sequences has not been cancelled. Therefore, in order to perform microwave heating or oven heating again after stopping once in this way, it is necessary to perform an input operation again in the central operation unit 40M.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the RG cooking is finished, if the time is set again with the input key 43MS within a certain time so that the additional heating can be easily performed, the microwave heating is performed again. (Note that the additional time may be controlled to 1 minute if the input key 43M2 or 43M3 is pressed once, and 2 minutes if the input key 43M3 is pressed twice).

As shown in FIG. 93 (B), the first specific screen 30SP is the display screen 10A so that the user can know the timing of ending the RG cooking process which is the final process of cooking (cooking process 2). After, the display screen 10B changes to the displayed content. Then, it is configured to display that the cooking step 2 is about to be completed. On the display screen 10B of FIG. 93 (B), it is displayed that the cooking step 2 in the heating chamber 113 is completed in 12 seconds.

On the display screen 10B, the temperature detection circuit 93 detects the transition of the temperature rise inside the heating chamber 113, determines the load of the food or the like to be cooked, and the integrated control device MC determines the arrival time until the end. It performs the prediction process and is displayed as a result.

Instead of detecting the temperature rise of the object to be cooked or the heating chamber 113 to predict the cooking finish time, the user may set a timer in advance and finish the cooking step 2 by controlling the time. In this case, the load determination as described above is not necessary.

As described above, when the user sets a timer in advance and finishes the cooking step 2 by time control, the reference information 2 can be notified (step SA13. FA2) as described with reference to FIG. 69. .. That is, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), the first specific screen 30SP changes to the content displayed on the display screen 10B after the display screen 10A, and matches the reference information 2 as a part of the notification (FA2). It is displaying.

The display screen 10C of FIG. 93B shows that heating can be started again within a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds when the door 114 is opened, 15 seconds when the door 114 is opened) immediately after the cooking step 2 is completed. This is an example.
The "time button" on the display screen 10C is the input key 43M3. Since the heating chamber 113 has become hot due to cooking until just before this, additional information 331 such as "Caution for high temperature grill" is displayed to enhance the safety of the user.

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the user can stop the cooking process (induction heating) of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 at any timing even at the stage of the cooking process 1 (induction heating), but in that case, to stop it. , The input key 43MT may be pressed once. However, in order to cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and not proceed to the cooking step 2 as it is, it is necessary to continuously press the input key 43MT once.

On the other hand, at the stage of the cooking process 2 (in this case, the range grill) of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 as shown in FIGS. 93 (A) to 93 (C), the user stops the cooking process 2 at an arbitrary timing. Is sufficient to press the input key 43MT once. Further, in this case (assuming that there is no cooking step 3), there is no cooking step to proceed to, so it is not necessary to press the input key 43MT once more. It should be noted that pressing the input key 43MT twice does not start any inconvenient operation.

(Transition of the first specific screen)
Next, the content that the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 changes during the period until the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode described with reference to FIG. 66 will be described in detail.

94 to 96 show the correspondence between the contents of the displays E1 to E5 described in the “center display unit” of the item E and the input operation unit in the explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the various processes described in FIG. 66 and the operation. Is shown.

The state of FIG. 94 shows the stage of "E1: initial screen of cooperative cooking", and the initial screen when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M. Shows the relationship with.
FIG. 95A shows the relationship between the screen at the stage of “E2: menu change” and the central operation unit 40M. This is a stage in which the input key 43M1 is operated to select one target object to be cooked from the linked cooking modes, and the cooking menu of the corresponding linked cooking mode KM3 is selected.

FIG. 95 (B) is the stage of “E3: Selective heating source change (select the right IH)”. The stage where the user selects the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP is shown. This selection is made with the input key 43M2.

Next, FIG. 96A is the stage of "E4: Right IH input button pressing guidance display". On the first specific screen 30SP, it is a stage in which it is displayed that the operation of the input key 43R1 arranged in the right operation unit 40R is necessary in order to start the cooperative cooking. That is, it is recommended that the user press the input key 43R1 in order to start the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking.

FIG. 96 (B) is the stage of “E5: IH preheating display”. At this stage, on the first specific screen 30SP, it is shown that the preheating operation is started in the right heating unit 17HR. As described above, the right display unit 31R displays, for example, information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature reaches 180 ° C. On the other hand, in the first specific screen 30SP, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating", "preheating completed", and "notifying that the set temperature is reached" is displayed.

Next, FIGS. 97 to 103 show the relationship between the various processes and operations of the “hamburger” cooking (cooperative cooking mode) described with reference to FIG. 67, and in FIG. 2, the display E11 to the “center display unit” of the item E It shows the correspondence between the contents of E17 and the input operation unit.

FIG. 97A shows the stage of “E11: IH preheating display” described in item E (center display unit) of FIG. 67. On the first specific screen 30SP, it is displayed that the right heating unit 17HR has started preheating, so that it is notified that the set temperature is reached (additional information 331).

FIG. 97 (B) is the stage of “E12: IH heating display” also described with reference to FIG. 67. At this stage, since the preheating is completed, the additional information 331 indicates that the right heating unit 17HR is ready to heat. That is, it indicates that it is a stage to proceed to the process of induction heating (IH heating).

The stage of FIG. 98 shows the display content performed after a certain period of time (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the display of FIG. 97 is displayed. The display of FIG. 98 is not described in item E of FIG. 67.

At the stage of FIG. 98, it is shown that the user needs to press the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L in order to finish the cooking step 1 by the induction heating source 9 currently being executed.

The next FIG. 99 is the stage of “E13: Grill door opening / closing operation guidance display” described with reference to FIG. 67. Since this stage has completed the induction heating (cooking step 1), the additional information 331 urges the object to be cooked to be moved to the heating chamber 113 (to perform the cooking step 2).

The following FIGS. 100 (A) to 100 (C) are the stages of "E14: Alternate display of thermal power change display and start guidance display" described with reference to FIG. 67. At this stage, it is displayed that the heating power in the range grill cooking (composite cooking) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and further, it is displayed that the grill heating cooking in such a heating chamber can be started by the start button (input key 43MS). is doing.

In FIG. 100 (C), the input key 43MS is in a blinking state as shown by the broken line circle, indicating that it is waiting for the user's operation. It should be noted that the display of FIGS. 100 (A) and 100 (B) is alternately performed, for example, every 5 seconds.

The following FIGS. 101 (A) to 101 (C) are the stages of "E15: Grill heating display" described with reference to FIG. 67. Here, it is shown that the object to be cooked is heated by the microwave heating source 189 and / or the oven heating source 188 in the heating chamber 113 (cooking step 2).

FIG. 101 (A) shows that the heating power can be adjusted, and FIG. 101 (B) shows that the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven and are in the combined heating. FIG. 101 (C) shows that this RG cooking step (cooking step 2) is completed in 2 minutes and 30 seconds.

The following FIGS. 102 (A) and 102 (B) are the stages of "E16: Alternate display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display" described with reference to FIG. 67. Here, since the RG heating process is completed, it is displayed that the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M3) and the grill can be heated again.

If the user does not want extended heating, it is displayed that the linked cooking mode can be ended without extended heating by pressing the cancel button (input key 43MT) once. The first specific screen 30SP of the contents of FIGS. 102 (A) and 102 (B) is alternately displayed, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

The next figure 103 is the stage of “E17: time setting display”. Here, the cooking time can be extended with the input key 43M3, and when the input key 43MS is pressed, cooking can be performed again inside the heating chamber 113 for the extended time.

FIG. 103 shows the result of setting the extension time (extension time is 2 minutes and 30 seconds). After this time setting display, the above-mentioned "E15: grill heating display" and "E16: alternate display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display" are performed.

Next, FIGS. 104 to 108 will be described.
FIGS. 104 to 108 are shown in FIG. 3 for explaining the relationship between various processes and operations of “karaage” cooking (cooperative cooking mode) by the cooperative cooking mode KM3 described with reference to FIG. The contents of the displayed displays E21 to E26 and the state of the input operation unit are shown.

FIG. 104 (A) shows the stage of "E21: IH preheating display". Here, it can be seen that the left heating unit 17HL is performing the preheating operation. That is, the induction heating of the object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17HL has already started.
FIG. 104 (B) is the stage of "E22: Grill door opening / closing operation guidance display". Here, the door 114 is opened to encourage the cooked food (food) to be put into the heating chamber 113 in order to perform the grill heating step B23 (see FIG. 68).

The following FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (C) are the stages of "E23: Alternate display of thermal power change display and start guidance display". Here, it is displayed that the heating power can be adjusted when the fried chicken is cooked by driving the "range grill driving unit", and that the cooking can be started by pressing the input key 43MS.

The displays of FIGS. 105 (A) and 105 (B) are alternately displayed, for example, every 5 seconds.
Further, when the door 114 is left open, the display shown in FIG. 105 (C) is performed. Even if the input key 43MS is pressed with the door 114 open, the heating operation is not started. With the door 114 open, even if the command signal from the input key 43MS reaches the integrated control device MC, the heating start command is not issued from the integrated control device MC unless the door 114 is closed.

Next, FIGS. 106 (A) and 106 (B) are in the stage of "E24: microwave oven heating display".
FIG. 106 (A) shows that the cooking power can be changed when the “range grill driving unit” is driven. The period during which the heating power can be adjusted is limited to a certain period of time (for example, 20 seconds) after the cooking step 1 (microwave oven heating) is started.

FIG. 106 (B) is a content displayed after the start of cooking, and is an example of displaying the remaining time until the end of cooking. This stage is the stage at which the cooking step 1 is started.

The following FIGS. 107 (A) and 107 (B) are the stages of "E25: Alternate display of extension operation guidance display and IH preheating completion display". Here, after the cooking step B24 (see FIG. 68) that drives the "range grill drive unit" is completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) to extend the cooking time. ,it's shown.
The display screen of FIG. 107 (A) and the display screen of FIG. 107 (B) are alternately displayed as the first specific screen 30SP, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

FIG. 108 is the stage of “E26: time setting display”. Here, it is indicated that the cooking step B24 is further extended for, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds. If the "range grill (RG)" heating is completed at the stage of FIG. 108, the next step is to proceed to the cooking step 2 in the left heating unit 17HL where the preheating has already been completed.

(Operation management system for home appliances)
Next, FIGS. 109 to 118 will be described. FIGS. 109 to 118 relate to an operation management system of a home electric appliance using the cooking device 1 which is the subject of the present disclosure.

FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing in chronological order the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401 and the cooking device 1 during cooking in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 109 shows the control operation on the cooking device 1 side. FIG. 110 is a system configuration diagram 1 showing the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the cooking device 1 in the example shown in FIG. 109.

FIG. 111 is a system configuration diagram 2 showing the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the cooking cooker 1 in the example shown in FIG. 109.
FIG. 112 is a plan view showing the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 in the cooking device 1. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the start-up of the cooking device 1. FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start-up of the cooking device 1.

FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the start-up of the cooking device 1. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing a display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after activation. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway shown in FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the exchange of information between the cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 when the cooperative cooking mode is implemented.

FIG. 109 will be described.
The operation step shown in FIG. 109 is defined in the control program that executes the cooperative cooking mode of the integrated control device MC.
The inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted before the first step SD1. That is, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted at the stage of step ST2 in FIG. 38.

The operation step shown in FIG. 109 shows the operation after the user operation (A23) shown in FIG. 71. In step SD1, for example, when "karaage" is selected as the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the cooking step 1 is started, the heating of the foodstuff is started by the microwave.

This step SD1 corresponds to step SB1 in FIG. 70. At this stage, as in the notification F24 of FIG. 68, a voice notification is given as "range, finish standard is started".

Next, the measurement of the elapsed time TN3 from the time point of the step SD1 is started (SD2). This step SD2 corresponds to step SB2 in FIG. 70. Note that step SB2 in FIG. 70 measures the temperature rise, but step SD2 in FIG. 109 measures the elapsed time TN1.

In the next step SD3, the contents of the started cooperative cooking mode KM3 are collated. In this case, the identification information 330 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, and it can be verified by the integrated control device MC that the cooking of “karaage” is being executed.
It is also known at this point that the cooking step 1 uses the heating chamber 113 for the fried chicken cooking. In other words, it can be seen that when the cooking step 1 is completed, the heating chamber 113 is not used.

Note that step SD3 may be omitted, and dedicated programs may be prepared for each of the individual cooperative cooking modes (for example, karaage, hamburger, and gratin).

In the next step SD4, it is determined whether or not the mode is a specific cooperative cooking mode. This "specific cooperative cooking mode" is, for example, as follows.
From (1), hamburger steak, dumplings, and other foods that can generally be classified as side dishes.
(2) Items to be cooked in individual cooperative cooking modes (for example, hamburger steak) and items that are usually eaten at the same time (for example, soup, french fries).

If "No" in step SD4, the operation of FIG. 109 ends at this point.
In the next step SD5, it is determined whether or not the cooking step 1 is being executed in the heating chamber 113. If "No" in step SD5, the operation of FIG. 109 ends at this point.

If step SD5 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step SD6. In step SD6, an inquiry signal RQ3 (see FIG. 110) is issued to the home gateway 411 in order to inquire about the inventory information of the foodstuff stored in the refrigerator 401.

When the main power switch 97 of the cooking cooker 1 is turned on, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 has already been transmitted from the cooking cooker 1 as described with reference to FIG. 38.
In the first embodiment, the inventory inquiry signal RQ3 is transmitted at the stage where the conditions are further narrowed down and it is found that the inventory information is likely to be required (step SD6 in FIG. 109).

In the next step SD7, inventory information of ingredients is acquired from the home gateway 411. Then, the integrated control device MC temporarily stores the storage device MM.

In the next step SD8, the inventory information of the received foodstuff is analyzed.
In this step SD8, the presence or absence of ingredients that are highly related to the cooking (in this case, karaage) being executed in the cooperative cooking mode is searched. The "relevance" referred to here is typically rice as a staple food or a foodstuff (for example, frozen vegetables) that is often eaten together with a side dish called karaage. Therefore, in this step SD8, it is assumed that "frozen rice" is extracted, and the following description will be given.

If the determination in step SD7 is "No", the process of FIG. 109 ends as it is, and nothing is notified to the user.

In the next step SD9, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN1 has elapsed. Then, in the next step SD10, the notification that the cooking step 1 is about to be completed is performed. This notification is not shown in FIG. 67. Further, this notification may be omitted.

In the next step SD11, after the end of the cooking step 1, another cooking menu for effectively utilizing the heating chamber 113, which is not used in the fried chicken cooking, is notified.
As mentioned above, "frozen rice" is notified as a recommended cooking menu.

In the next step SD12, it is determined whether or not the user has performed an operation to stop the cooking step 1. If there is a stop operation by the user in this step SD12, the process proceeds to step SD13, and the microwave heating operation of the cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 113 is stopped.

In the next step SD14, notification of the end of the cooking step 1 (F25: see FIG. 65) is performed.
Then, when the user takes out the food to be cooked (fried food) from the heating chamber 113 and puts it in the food to be cooked (frying pan or the like) N which has already been preheated to a high temperature, the cooking step 2 is performed. It starts. At this stage, the cooking oil contained in the object to be heated N has already reached an appropriate temperature.

As can be seen from the above description, in step SD8, which is a step before the cooking step 1 is completed, the user can know the recommended cooking menu.
Moreover, since the recommended control menu is based on the inventory information from the refrigerator 401, the user can effectively use the heating chamber 113 to perform another cooking at the stage before the cooking step 2. can.

As mentioned above, for the cooking menu of "Karaage" cooperative cooking mode KM3, the staple food rice can be thawed and warmed food (rice) can be prepared in parallel, so start cooperative cooking. It is possible to shorten the actual total time from to the end. As a result, the convenience of the user can be improved.

As described above, when the heating chamber 113 that has completed the cooking step 1 in the cooperative cooking mode is used within a short time from the end of the cooking step 1, it is assumed that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is high.
As described above, in the "warm" (automatic range) control menu that uses microwaves, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113. Then, when the target temperature is reached, the microwave oscillation is automatically stopped. Therefore, when the high heat of the heating chamber 113 remains and the temperature is high from the beginning, automatic microwave heating is prohibited by the integrated control device MC.

Therefore, when the heating chamber 113 that has completed the cooking step 1 in the cooperative cooking mode is to be used after that, the control menu (single cooking) of "microwave oven manual" may be selected. That is, the heating time of the microwave may be set by the user.

As described with reference to FIG. 62, when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in order to perform cooperative cooking, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be used, but the cooking step 1 is completed. Until after the stage, the process of continuing the occupied state of the heating chamber 113 (by the integrated control device MC) is not performed. Therefore, there is no problem in executing the recommended control menu.

Further, if a control method is adopted in which even if the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking is completed in the heating chamber 113, the occupied state of the heating chamber 113 is continued until after that (after the cooking step 2). Only when there is a "recommended control menu" as described in step SD8, a control program may be used to release the occupied state of the heating chamber 113 as an exception.

Next, FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described.
FIGS. 110 and 111 are diagrams illustrating information exchange between the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 after the main power of the cooking cooker 1 is turned on, in chronological order.
The following will be described on the assumption that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed with reference to FIG. 110.

The home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 are always connected to the commercial (alternating current) power supply 99 from the time of installation in the kitchen KT.
The home gateway 411 issues a command signal to the alarm device 445 to monitor in the “home mode” (step SE1 in FIG. 110). The "home mode" refers to a driving pattern when there is at least one resident in the house HA. If all the residents are away, the mode will switch to "Answering mode".

The user presses the operation button 98 (see FIG. 19) of the main power switch 97 of the cooking cooker 1 to turn on the power (step SE2 in FIG. 110). Then, cooking is started according to the input operation of the user.

In the cooking apparatus 1, as described with reference to FIG. 109, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted at the start time (step SD1) of the cooking step 1. .. This inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent from the wireless communication unit 49 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411.

Since the central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives the detection information of the person detection unit 413H that detects the presence or movement of a person in the kitchen KT, it determines that it is a cooking scene and cooperates with the cooking device 1. Switch to operation (step SE3).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 further transmits an inventory data search command signal RQ2 to the refrigerator 401.
This inventory inquiry signal RQ2 is sent from the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411 to the wireless communication unit (not shown) of the refrigerator 401. The exchange of other signals is also performed by wireless communication between the communication unit 446 and the communication unit (not shown) of the refrigerator 401.

The refrigerator 401 searches the inventory of foods stored in the refrigerating chamber 401B and the plurality of freezing chambers 401A, updates the inventory information, and stores it in its own storage unit (step: SE4). The foods stored in the refrigerator come in various forms such as foods processed halfway at home and foods in bags purchased outside. Many proposals have already been made for the identification and search methods of such inventory information, and it is known to use images taken by a camera, RF tags, two-dimensional codes, and the like.

Further, when putting food in the refrigerator 401, a method of manually inputting data such as the name of the food and its attributes, or a method of automatically optically or magnetically reading information such as food and accumulating inventory information, etc. Various methods have been proposed.
In the first embodiment, any method may be used because there are no restrictions on the identification of the food when the food is put in the refrigerator 401 or after it is stored.

The refrigerator 401 collectively transmits the collected inventory information data as a reply signal RS1 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411.
The home gateway 411 temporarily stores the inventory data transmitted by the reply signal RS1 in the storage device 450 (SE5). Here, "temporary" is a period from the time when the inventory information data is transmitted again from the refrigerator 401 until the data is received, and does not mean that the storage is continued for a long period of time. The inventory data of the storage device 450 is always overwritten with the latest one and stored.

In the heating cooker 1, as described with reference to FIG. 109, when the cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, an inventory inquiry signal is sent to the home gateway 411 at a predetermined timing (step SD6 in FIG. 109). RQ3 is transmitted (SE6).

In the home gateway 411, the latest inventory data stored in the storage device 450 is transmitted from the communication unit 446 to the wireless communication unit 49 of the cooking device 1 as the inventory data signal RS2.

In the heating cooker 1, the inventory data received by the wireless communication unit 49 is stored in the storage device MM (SE7). Then, as described in step SD8 of FIG. 109, the integrated control device MC has another cooking menu (of ingredients and dishes) directly related to one cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode being executed from the inventory data. (Name, etc.) is notified (SE8).
In the example of FIG. 109, only "karaage" was described as a cooperative cooking mode in which the cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, but as shown in FIG. 84, "fried vegetables", "pork cutlet", "tempura", etc. But it's okay.

Next, FIG. 111 will be described.
FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating the operation after step SE8 in FIG. 110.
When all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode are completed (SE9), the heating cooker 1 provides the home gateway 411 with main data indicating the contents of the cooperative cooking (hereinafter referred to as “cooking implementation data”). Is transmitted as a signal BS1.

Here, the "cooking implementation data" means at least one of the following information.
(1) Identification information 330 that can identify the food to be cooked. For example, the names (including abbreviations) of cooked foods such as "karaage" and "fried vegetables".
(2) Information on the weight or volume of the object to be cooked (3) Information indicating the control conditions of the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 (for example, microwave output 500 W, thermal power 1500 W at the time of induced heating or "medium heat"). (4) Information indicating the time required from the cooking step 1 to the end of the cooking step 2 (5) Information indicating the end time of the cooking step 2 (or the final cooking step) (6) All from the start of the preheating process Information indicating the time required to complete the cooking step 2 (7) Information specifying the heating source (for example, the left heating unit 17HL) in which the cooking operation was performed (8) Information regarding the restrictions imposed on the user during the next cooking (8) Example: Since the heating chamber 113 has a high temperature, range (automatic) heating cannot be performed.)
(9) Information related to user safety such as the current temperature of the heating chamber 113.

The above-mentioned "(2) information on the weight or volume of the food to be cooked" is, for example, information such as "fried chicken: 300 g". This can be inferred from the temperature rise rate of the object to be cooked (fried chicken) in the cooking step 1 by the integrated control device MC.

The "cooking implementation data" can be useful information for the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401.
Further, the "cooking execution data" can be useful information for the alarm device 445.

For example, in the "cooking execution data", "(4) information indicating the time required to complete the cooking process 2", "(5) information indicating the end time", and "(6) the end of all cooking processes 2". "Information indicating the time required until" can be utilized by the schedule management unit 451 of the home gateway 411. By accumulating these data, it is possible to estimate the concentration time zone of cooking in the kitchen KT.

Further, among the "cooking execution data", "(9) information related to user safety such as the current temperature of the heating chamber" can be useful information for the temperature monitoring device 440. This is because the current temperature on the heating cooker 1 side and the estimated temperature "dissociation" can be known by optically measuring on the temperature monitoring device 440 side.

The "cooking execution data" can be useful information for the refrigerator 401. For example, since the "cooking execution data" can be utilized by the schedule management unit 451 to estimate the cooking concentration time zone, it is possible to assume the timing at which the food is stored in the refrigerator 401 after that.

A refrigerator that acquires environmental information indicating the state of the external environment from an external electric device (for example, an air conditioner or a cooking device) and controls the operating state of each part such as a cooling device is, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019. It is proposed in the publication No. -21153. However, in the conventional proposal, the environmental information provided from the cooking device 1 side is often ambiguous and is not necessarily useful from the refrigerator side. On the other hand, the "cooking implementation data" of the first embodiment is in line with a specific control menu and has high utility value.

In the home gateway 411, the "cooking execution data" transmitted by the transmission signal BS1 is transmitted to the refrigerator 401 as a signal BS2 including the "cooking execution data". The contents of the "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS1 and the "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS2 may be basically the same, but may be different. In the "cooking execution data" sent by the transmission signal BS1, useful information was also included in the temperature monitoring device 440 and the alarm device 445, but since they are not necessary for the refrigerator 401, the home gateway 411 is used. After deleting it, it may be sent to the refrigerator 401.

In the refrigerator 401, the contents of the "cooking execution data" are analyzed, and those useful for the operation of the refrigerator 401 are collected and analyzed (SE10).
Next, in the refrigerator 401, the operating conditions of the refrigerator 401 are changed from the analysis result of the “cooking execution data” (SE12).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 stores "cooking execution data" in the storage device 450. In addition, the "cooking history data" of the schedule management unit 451 is updated. As a result, the date and time, time zone, cooking menu (for example, cooking name "karaage"), and other related information (for example, estimated karaage "300 g") of this one cooking (coordinated cooking) are recorded.

Further, the schedule management unit 451 recommends specific ingredients such as "frozen rice" and a cooking menu from the inventory data specifically notified in step SE8 in the recorded "cooking history data". (See step SD8 in FIG. 109), the recommended facts may be included. When such daily cooking conditions are accumulated as data, the schedule management unit 451 using artificial intelligence will improve the ability of "learning and prediction", so the value of providing information to users will gradually increase. improves.

After all the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are completed, the operation end warning signal BS3 is transmitted from the heating cooker 1 to the home gateway 411 (SE9).
After that, the main power switch 96 is opened (OFF) (SE13).

When the main control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives the operation end warning signal BS3, the main control unit 417 ends the "mutual cooperation operation mode". Further, the alarm device 445 is switched to the "monitoring mode" (SE14). This allows the user to monitor the temperature change in the kitchen KT internal space regardless of whether or not the user is in the kitchen KT.

(Inventory information display example 1)
FIG. 112 is an enlarged plan view showing a peripheral portion of the central operation unit 40M of the cooking device 1 and the integrated display unit 30.
FIG. 112 shows the scene of step SD11 of FIG. 109.

The example shown in FIG. 112 is a stage in which "karaage", which is one of the cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode, is being executed.
While the cooking step 1 is being performed in the heating chamber 113, the integrated display unit 30 displays that there is "frozen rice" as inventory information. The voice synthesizer 95 is also notified by voice.

If the input key 43MT is pressed once in the state of FIG. 112, the microwave heating cooking in the cooking step 1 is stopped. The setting of the linked cooking mode is not canceled.
Therefore, if the door 114 is opened, the object to be cooked is taken out from the heating chamber 113, and the object to be cooked is placed on the object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17HL, from that point (cooking step 2). ) Induction cooking can be started. As shown by the integrated display unit 30, the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed at the first preheating start stage as described with reference to FIG. 68 (see operation A21 of FIG. 68). Therefore, it is not necessary to newly operate the left operation unit 40L.

As described in FIG. 89, the input key 43MS is input to the user when the cooking process 1 is performed so that the integrated control device MC can clearly grasp the timing of the transition from the preheating process to the cooking process 1 on the data. You may ask to press once.

(Inventory information display example 2)
FIG. 113 is an enlarged plan view showing the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking device 1.
FIG. 113 is an example in which the display content of the integrated display unit 30 of FIG. 112 is changed.

In the example shown in FIG. 113 (A), the time saving information 333 meaning that the time can be shortened and the recommended cooking information 338 "warming" are displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30.

The second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the widened display surface is used to display "because it is a heating chamber and can be thawed". That is, it is shown that "warming" and "thawing" can be performed using the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 113 (A), the symbols 335U and 335D are symbols indicating that there is other information, and if any of the input keys 43M2 (a pair of left and right) corresponding to this symbol is pressed, the following Information is displayed.

In FIG. 113 (A), the symbol 336, 336D is a symbol indicating that there is other information, and if any of the input keys 43M3 (a pair of left and right) corresponding to this symbol is pressed, the following Information is displayed.

In FIG. 113A, if the user operates with the input keys 43M2 or 43M3, the following information is displayed, so that the user is less likely to get lost in the operation.

In another example shown in FIG. 113 (B), the refrigerator information 334 in characters is displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30.
In addition, the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the widened display surface is used to display two types of individual food information 339, "frozen rice" and "oden". ing. That is, the refrigerator 401 informs the user that there are "frozen rice" and "oden" as ingredients.

The individual food material information is information that identifies one food. The "food material information" of the refrigerator 401 means an aggregate of the individual food material information 339.

The display of FIGS. 113 (A) and 113 (B) may be alternately performed, for example, every few seconds, or only one of them may be displayed. In any case, the user can understand that another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 by using the food material information stored in the refrigerator 401 in the middle of the cooking process 1.

The following FIG. 114 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display unit 30.
FIG. 114 is an example of improving the display content of FIG. 52.

In FIG. 114, the display screen 1, the display screen 2A, and the display screen 2B are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 52, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.
The display screen 2C is a screen displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B. On this display screen 2C, the recommended sentence 30R1 prompts the user to perform an input operation so as to select a heating source.

Next, FIG. 115 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display unit 30.
FIG. 115 is still another example in which the display content of FIG. 52 is improved.
In FIG. 115, the display screen 2D is a screen displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B.

On the display screen 2C of FIG. 115, the user is informed that the cooking device 1 automatically confirms the food information of the refrigerator 401. That is, it notifies that the inventory information acquisition operation is being executed.

In step ST2 shown in FIG. 38, it was explained that the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted. The operation in that step is displayed on the display screen 2D of FIG. 115.

Next, FIG. 116 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display unit 30.
After the display screen 2D shown in FIG. 115, the display screen 2E informs the user that the food material information has been acquired. Immediately after that, the display screen 2E informs that there are "frozen hamburger steak" and refrigerated "dumplings" as specific ingredients. The heating source can be freely selected before the display screens 2D to 2E are displayed. If the heating source is selected (see step STC in FIG. 38) immediately after the display screen 2C appears, the display screens 2D to 2E are not displayed.

(Example of home gateway operation)
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway.
As described with reference to FIG. 110, the home gateway determines whether or not the schedule management unit 451 has entered the “cooking time zone” during the period in which the alarm device 445 is being operated in the “home mode”.

The resident may manually input the "cooking time zone" by the input unit 449 (see FIG. 4). For example, it may be set that the cooking time zone is from 6:30 am to 7:30 am on weekdays.
In addition, the data processing unit built into the schedule management unit 451 analyzes the operating time zone of the cooker 1 for 30 days in the past, and the average time zone is changed from 6:20 am to 7:30 am. It is determined that there is.

In the above situation, in step SF1, it is determined whether or not the current time has entered the cooking time zone.
In step SF1, if the current time is 6:25, it means that the time has entered the average time zone (6:20 to 7:30 am) as described above, so "Yes". The determination is made and the process proceeds to step SF2.

In step SF2, it is determined whether or not the human detection sensors 452 and 453 of the human detection unit 413H have detected a person.
For example, when a resident moves in the space in front of the refrigerator 401 and the cooking device 1 or stops in front of the refrigerator 401 or the cooking device 1, such movement of a person is detected.

If a person is detected in step SF2, the process proceeds to the next step SF3.
In step SF3, it is determined whether or not the door (not shown) of the refrigerator 401 has been opened based on the operation information from the refrigerator 401 side. When the door is opened and then it is detected that the door is closed (SF4), in the next step SF5, the latest status of the food contained in the refrigerator 401 is confirmed.

The confirmation of the inventory information in step SF5 is the "inventory data search command signal RQ2" as described with reference to FIG. 110.

As described with reference to FIG. 110, the refrigerator 401 collectively transmits the collected inventory information data as a reply signal RS1 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411.
Therefore, the main control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 compares the latest inventory information data collected with the inventory information data sent from the refrigerator 401 last time, and if there is no change, processes in step SF6. To finish.

If there is a change from the previous inventory information data in step SF6, the inventory information data stored in the storage device 450 is rewritten (overwritten) with a new one (SF7).

Then, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 from the cooking device 1 is prepared.
As described above, the home gateway 411 acquires the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 even before the main power switch 97 of the cooking cooker 1 is turned on, and promptly receives an inquiry from the cooking cooker 1. It works so that it can provide inventory information.

It seems that it will take a certain amount of time to investigate the inventory of food contained in the refrigerator 401 in detail, and when the door of the refrigerator 401 is left open, the light from the outside will be ambient light. There is also a concern that it will interfere with optical detection and image analysis. Under such circumstances, inventory information is promptly acquired immediately after the door of the refrigerator 401 is closed.

With the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the inventory data collection reply signal RS1 described with reference to FIG. 110 is delayed from the inventory inquiry signal RQ3 of the cooking cooker 1. That is, the system is such that the heating cooker 1 can acquire the latest inventory information.

(Display of individual food information during the heating suspension period)
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing another operation program for acquiring the individual food ingredient information 339 of the refrigerator 401 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 of the cooking device 1.

In the operation program of FIG. 109, inventory information is automatically acquired in the middle of the cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 113, and the recommended cooking menu is notified.
On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 118 notifies that another cooking can be executed in the "heating pause period" between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 in the cooperative cooking mode, and responds to the user's command. It is designed to be notified.
Therefore, the operation by the operation program of FIG. 109 and the notification method by the operation program shown in FIG. 118 do not contradict each other. Therefore, both notification programs may be adopted (combined).

The cooking device 1 described up to FIG. 109 is
(1) Independent cooking mode KM1 for operating the induction heating source 9 (IH)
(2) Independent cooking mode KM1 for operating the microwave heating source 189 (range)
(3) (Oven) independent cooking mode KM1 for operating the oven heating source 188.
(4) The induction heating source with the microwave heating source 189 and / or one of the oven heating source 188 is subjected to a transition period TR in which the start and end timings are determined depending on the input operation of the user. Coordinated cooking mode KM3 that operates sequentially
Has a function to execute according to the input operation of the user.

Further, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 performed in the heating chamber 113 and a cooking step 2 performed outside the heating chamber after the transition period TR.
In the middle of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device MC has at least one of a cooking menu that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 after the end of the cooking step 1 and information on individual ingredients of the refrigerator related to the cooking menu. The configuration is characterized in that one is notified by the notification unit AN.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 118, after the cooking step 1 is completed, another cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113 even in the transition period TR (“heating rest period P3” in FIGS. 62 to 64). In, it is notified that it can be executed (in parallel with the cooking step 2), and it can be notified in response to a user's command.

In FIG. 118, step SG1 is a stage in which the cooperative cooking mode is selected and the cooking menu desired by the user (for example, “fried chicken”) is selected from the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.

In the next step SG2, similarly to step SD5 in FIG. 109, it is determined whether or not the cooking step 1 of the selected cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed in the heating chamber 113.
If this step SG2 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step SG3.

In the next step SG3, inventory information is inquired to the home gateway 411. In this step SG3, information on frozen foods and reheated foods is acquired from the inventory information. Although the description of the inventory information reception and temporary storage steps as in step SD7 of FIG. 109 is omitted in FIG. 118, the same processing is performed in the operation program of FIG. 118.

In the next step SG4, it is determined whether or not the cooking step 1 executed in the heating chamber 113 has been completed.

If the cooking step 1 is completed at the stage of step SG4, the transition period TR (“heating rest period P3” in FIGS. 62 to 64) starts from that point. That is, the heating operation of the cooperative cooking is suspended, and the user is waiting for a command to start the cooking process 2.

In such a transition period TR, in step SG5, it is determined whether or not another cooking can be performed. This is a process corresponding to step SD8 in FIG. 109.

When the step SG5 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SG6, and the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 notify that there is a proposal for another cooking menu that can be performed in the heating chamber 113. If the determination result in step SG5 is "No", the process ends.

When a specific input key of the central operation unit 30M or the input key 47 (see FIG. 19) is operated in the subsequent step SG6, it is determined as "Yes".

In step SG7, one or a plurality of different cooking menus (for example, “warming dumplings”) that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 are displayed. The place to display may be the integrated display unit 30 displaying the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode. Then, the process proceeds to step SG8 waiting for the start command of the cooking process 2.

(Inventory information display example 3)
FIG. 119 is an enlarged plan view showing a peripheral portion of the central operation unit 40M of the cooking device 1 and the integrated display unit 30. FIG. 120 is an enlarged plan view showing a peripheral portion of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30. FIG. 121 is an enlarged plan view showing a peripheral portion of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30.

FIG. 119 shows a display example of the integrated display unit 30 in the scene of step SG6 of FIG. 118. As is clear from FIG. 119, the first area 30L to the third area 30R (see FIG. 21) of the integrated display unit 30 are combined into one to form a horizontally long display area.

In FIG. 119, 338 is recommended information indicating that there is another cooking menu that can be performed in the heating chamber 113, and 337 is an operation of the input key 43M2 for displaying the proposed content of the cooking menu of the recommended information. It is a display guide unit that explains.

In the state of FIG. 119, in order to encourage the user's input operation, the individual light emitting unit 27M4 corresponding to the input key 43M2 is blinking as shown by the dotted circle. By pressing any one of the (two) input keys 43M2 in this state, individual foodstuff information 339 such as specific recommended cooking (for example, "frozen rice") can be displayed on this first specific screen 30SP. can.

In FIG. 119, when the input key 43M2 is pressed, the screen is switched to the display screen of FIG. 120. The recommended information 338 shown in FIG. 119 changes to the content shown in FIG. 120.
In FIG. 120, 339 is individual food information indicating another cooking menu (recommended cooking) that can be performed in the heating chamber 119 in characters. In the example shown in FIG. 120, the weight and freezing temperature of the refrigerated "dumplings" and the frozen "rice" are displayed. That is, the individual food material information also includes information on the name and weight of one food material, and the refrigerated or frozen state (temperature, etc.). In addition, related information such as expiration date information and storage start time (date) in the refrigerator 401 may be included.

Next, FIG. 121 shows the display content that is automatically switched after a few seconds while keeping the display content shown in FIG. 119. That is, after a few seconds have passed without pressing the input key 43M2 after the state shown in FIG. 119, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 121. Further, after a few seconds have passed in the state of FIG. 121, the display automatically returns to the display of FIG. 119.

As is clear from FIGS. 119 to 121, the integrated control device MC relates to a cooking menu that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 in the middle of the cooking step 1 and after the end of the cooking step 1 and the cooking menu. At least one of the inventory information of the refrigerator is notified by the notification unit AN.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 118 to 121, after the cooking step 1 is completed, the heating chamber 113 is separated during the transition period TR (“heating rest period P3” in FIGS. 62 to 64). It is possible to notify that the cooking of the above can be performed (in parallel with the cooking step 2), and to notify the information of the ingredients used for "another cooking" according to the user's command.

Therefore, for example, in a state where one cooking A (eg, fried chicken) in the cooperative cooking mode has entered the stage of the cooking step 2 in the left heating unit 17HL and is in the final finishing stage, the cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113. Cooking B (thawing to warming frozen rice), which is different from that, can be executed at the same time. That is, when cooking A and cooking B are eaten in one meal, cooking can be performed in parallel instead of the method of starting cooking B after finishing cooking A. As a result, the entire cooking time can be shortened, and the convenience of the user is improved.

Summary of Embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
Main body 110 and
The heating chamber 113 formed inside the main body 110 and
The first heating means HM1 for heating the object to be heated N placed above the heating portions 17HL and 17HR, and
A second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113, and
Notification unit AN (integrated control device 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) that provides information about cooking, and
The integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN,
An input operation unit 40 that gives a command to the integrated control device MC is provided.
The input operation unit 40 includes a shared operation unit 40M and individual operation units 40L and 40R for the heating unit.
The integrated control device MC has an execution function of a cooperative cooking mode KM3 that links the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2.
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 executes the cooking step 1 by the first heating means HM1 and the cooking step 2 by the second heating means HM2.
The integrated control device MC is
(1) In response to the input from the shared operation unit 40M, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.
(2) The start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed in response to commands from the individual operation units 40L and 40R.
(3) During the period of the cooking step 1, a part or all of the input function for the second heating means in the shared operation unit 40M is disabled.
(4) When the cooking step 1 is completed, the input function for the second heating means in the shared operation unit 40M is restored.
(5) The start and end of the cooking step 2 are executed according to a command from the shared operation unit 40M.
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

Therefore, in the central operation unit 40M, after selecting the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and shifting to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode, the heating operation start and end of the cooking step 1 is the first corresponding to the heating unit. The input function for the second heating means HM2 in the central operation unit 40M, which can be determined by the individual operation unit 40R or the second individual operation unit 40L, and during the period (from the start to the end) of the cooking step 1. Since some or all of them are disabled, even if the user accidentally operates the central operation unit 40M, the heating operation of the cooking step 1 does not stop unintentionally. That is, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation by the user and prevent cooking failure.

Further, when the cooking step 1 is completed thereafter, the input function for the second heating means HM2 in the central operation unit 40M is restored, and the cooking process 2 using the heating chamber 113 is controlled by the central operation unit 40M. Therefore, by improving the operability of the user, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can be widely used for various types of cooking.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The second heating means HM2 comprises a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) using different heating principles.
The integrated control device MC combines a single cooking mode KM1 using the first heating means selected by the individual operation units 40L and 40R with a plurality of the heating sources of the second heating means, and It also has a combined cooking mode KM2 that automatically advances cooking.
The integrated control device MC selects either one of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 in response to an input in the shared operation unit 40M.
The composition was disclosed.

Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can be widely used for various types of cooking in response to various types of food to be cooked.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The notification unit AN has an integrated display unit 30 corresponding to the shared operation unit 40M, and individual display units 31L and 31R corresponding to the individual operation unit.
The integrated control device MC displays cooking process information 332 including the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 on the integrated display unit 30 from before the start of the cooking process 1 until the end of the cooking process 2. Continue the display,
The composition was disclosed.

Therefore, since the user can easily know the information of the cooking process on the integrated display unit 30, it is possible to provide a cooking cooker having high operability while being a composite cooking cooker.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
Further having a door 114 for opening and closing the opening of the heating chamber 113 so as to be openable and closable.
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting the opening and closing of the door, and has a function of detecting the opening and closing of the door.
When the integrated control device MC detects that the cooking step 1 is completed and the door 114 is closed after the end time, the integrated control device MC is used for the second heating means in the shared operation unit 40M. Revive the input function,
The composition was disclosed.

Therefore, the heating operation is not started while the heating chamber 113 is open, and a highly safe cooking device can be provided.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
Before the linked cooking mode KM3 is selected, the integrated control device MC displays the standby initial screen (see FIG. 52) on the integrated display unit 30 of the notification unit AN, and the linked cooking mode KM3 is selected. If this is the case, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed instead of the standby initial screen.
On the first specific screen 30SP, a cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") to which the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be applied is displayed.
The composition was disclosed.

Therefore, the user can easily recognize the desired cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and can provide a cooking device with high operability.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
When the combined cooking mode is selected, the integrated control device MC displays the second specific screen 30SC on the integrated display unit 30 instead of the standby initial screen.
On the second specific screen 30SC, a control menu (for example, a “range grill menu) to which the combined cooking mode KM2 can be applied) is displayed.
The composition was disclosed.

Therefore, the user can easily recognize the desired control menu in the combined cooking mode KM2, and can provide a cooking device with high operability.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The integrated control device MC displays the standby initial screen on the integrated display unit 30 before the independent cooking mode KM1 is selected, and when the independent cooking mode KM1 is selected, the standby initial screen is displayed. Instead, the third specific screen 30ST is displayed, and
On the third specific screen 30ST, a control menu (for example, "water heater") to which the single cooking mode KM1 can be applied is displayed.
The composition was disclosed.

Therefore, the user can easily recognize the desired control menu (for example, "water heater") in the single cooking mode KM1, and can provide a cooking device with high operability.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
It has a first heating unit 17HR (on the right side) and a second heating unit 17HL (on the left side) separated in the left-right direction.
The individual operation units 40L and 40R have a first individual operation unit 40R corresponding to the first heating unit and a second individual operation unit 40L corresponding to the second heating unit 17HL.
The composition was disclosed.

Therefore, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, since the two heating units 17HR and 17HL can be used, the range of selection of the cooking place by the user is expanded, and a highly convenient cooking device can be provided.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The shared operation unit 40MC includes an input key 43M1 for selecting a cooking menu in the linked cooking mode, and an input key 43M2 for selecting a control condition corresponding to the cooking menu selected by the input key 43M1.
During the period from the start to the end of the cooking step 1, the input functions of the input keys 43M1 and 43M2 are invalidated.
The composition was disclosed.

Therefore, during the cooking process 1 (from the start to the end), the input key 43M1 for selecting the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43M2 for setting the control conditions are erroneously used in the central operation unit 40M. Even if the operation is performed, the heating operation of the cooking step 1 does not stop unintentionally. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of preventing erroneous operation by the user and preventing cooking failure.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The notification unit AN has an integrated display unit 30 corresponding to the shared operation unit 40M, and individual display units 31L and 31R corresponding to the individual operation units 40L and 40R.
The first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 and is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
The first specific screen 30SP includes identification information 330 of the cooking menu, information (331) indicating the heating source used in the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, and information (332) indicating the progress of cooking. , At least one of the information regarding the control conditions applied to the cooking menu (see FIG. 88, 30 V).
The composition was disclosed.

Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of allowing the user to know various information of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, eliminating the user's anxiety, and preventing the user's misunderstanding and erroneous operation. can.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The shared operation unit 40M is further provided with an input key 43MC for selecting the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
When the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input key 43MC, the shared operation unit 40M is limited to an input function for new cooking using the second heating means.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIG. 62).

Therefore, even if the input key 43M1 in the central operation unit 40M and the input key 43M2 for setting the control condition are erroneously operated, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 does not unintentionally stop. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of preventing erroneous operation by the user and preventing cooking failure.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
When it is confirmed by the start unit 43MS that the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started, the shared operation unit 40M is limited to the input function for new cooking using the second heating means. ,
The configuration was disclosed (see FIG. 63).

Therefore, even if the input key 43M1 in the central operation unit 40M and the input key 43M2 for setting the control condition are erroneously operated, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 does not unintentionally stop. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of preventing erroneous operation by the user and preventing cooking failure.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The shared operation unit 40M includes a selection unit 43M1 for displaying a second specific screen 30SC for selecting a control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2, a start unit 43MS for shifting to the operation of the combined cooking mode KM3, and the above. It is equipped with an end unit 43MT that cancels the operation of the combined cooking mode KM2.
The start unit 43MS and the end unit 43MT are shared for starting and canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIG. 21).

Therefore, in the central operation unit 40M where the installation space is restricted, there is an advantage that the required input key can be installed in the required size, and the user's operability can be improved by also using the input key. can.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
When the end portion 43MT is operated once in the cooking step 2, the cooking step 2 is terminated, and when the end portion 43MT is subsequently operated once, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is cancelled.
The composition was disclosed.

Therefore, the cooking process 2 can be terminated or the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM2 can be canceled according to the number of times the input key 43MT of the end unit is operated.
Thereby, one input key (end portion) 43MT can be used to provide a cooking device with good operability.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The main body 110 is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B.
In the upper space 300A, upper cooling fans 60 and 61 that introduce outside air and allow cooling air to pass through without passing through the lower space 300B are arranged.
In the lower space 300B, lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that introduce outside air and allow cooling air to pass through without passing through the upper space 300A are arranged.
The integrated control device MC is cooled by the upper cooling fans 60, 61.
The composition was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, the operation and cooling of the induction heating source 9 in the upper space 300A and the cooling of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the heating chamber 113, etc. in the lower space 300B influence (interfere) with each other. It can be executed independently without receiving it.
Further, since the integrated control device MC is also cooled by the cooling air flowing inside the upper space 300A, overheating of the internal components of the cooking cooker 1 can be prevented, and stable operation can be expected.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The central operation unit 40M has a start input key (start unit) 43MS for shifting to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and an end input key (end unit) 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. ,
The heating operation of the cooking step 2 is started by the start input key 43MS.
The end of the heating operation in the cooking step 2 is executed by the end input key 43MT.
The composition was disclosed.

Therefore, since the heating operation start and end of the cooking process 2 can be centrally performed in the central operation unit 40M, the user can operate the central operation unit 40M to start and end the cooking process 2. Thereby, it is possible to provide a cooking device having good operability.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the second disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
Main body 110 and
The heating chamber 113 formed inside the main body 110 and
The first heating means HM1 for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating portions 17HL and 17HR, and
A second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked housed in the heating chamber, and
Information department AN that provides information about cooking,
The first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, the control unit MC that controls the notification unit AN, and the control unit MC.
An input operation unit 40 that gives a command to the control unit MC is provided.
The input operation unit 40 includes a shared operation unit 40M and individual operation units 40L and 40R for the first heating means HM1.
The control unit MC has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode executes the cooking step 1 by the second heating means HM2 and the cooking step 2 by the first heating means HM1.
The control unit MC
(1) In response to the input from the shared operation unit 40M, the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
(2) The start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed in response to a command from the shared operation unit 40M.
(3) During the period of the cooking step 1, a part or all of the input functions in the individual operation units 40L and 40R are disabled.
(4) When the cooking step 1 is completed, the input function for the first heating means in the individual operation units 40L and 40R is restored.
(5) The start and end of the cooking step 2 are executed according to the instructions from the individual operation units 40L and 40R.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Therefore, in the central operation unit 40M, after selecting the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and shifting to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode, the start and end of the heating operation in the cooking step 1 can be determined by the shared operation 40M. Moreover, during the period (from the start to the end) of the cooking step 1, a part or all of the input function for the first heating means HM2 (induction heating source) in the individual operation units 40L and 40R is disabled. Therefore, even if the user mistakenly operates the individual operation units 40L and 40R, the heating operation of the cooking step 1 does not stop unintentionally. That is, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker that can prevent erroneous operation by the user and prevent cooking failure.

In the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the third disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
Main body 110 and
The heating chamber 113 formed inside the main body 110 and
The first heating means HM1 for heating the object to be heated N placed above the heating portions 17HL and 17HR, and
A second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113, and
Notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) that provides information about cooking, and
The integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN,
An input operation unit 40 that gives a command to the integrated control device MC is provided.
The input operation unit 40 has a shared operation unit 40M and individual operation units 40L and 40R for the heating units 17HL and 17HR.
The integrated control device MC has an execution function of a cooperative cooking mode KM3 that links the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2.
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes at least two cooking steps 1 and 2.
A first cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means HM1 is used in the cooking step 1 and the second heating means HM2 is used in the cooking step 2, and the second heating means HM2 is used in the cooking step. It has a second cooperative cooking mode, which is used in 1 and uses the 1st heating means HM1 in the cooking step 2.
In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a cooperative preheating cooking mode in which a preheating step by either the first heating means HM1 or the second heating means HM2 is executed in addition to the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 is executed. Including KM4
The integrated control device MC is
(1) When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 which is one of the notification units.
(2) Multiple candidates for cooking menus (for example, "hamburger" and "fried chicken") are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.
(3) When one of the candidates for the cooking menu is selected, either the first linked cooking mode or the second linked cooking mode is automatically determined.
(4) It is requested that the input of the control condition applied to the selected cooking menu be input from the shared operation unit 40M.
(5) During the period of the preheating step, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, the input functions in the individual operation unit and the shared operation unit 40M are restricted.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Therefore, in one cooking device 1, it is possible to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the heating place and the heating means are different, so that the cooking device is highly convenient and can be used for a wide range of cooking.

Further, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, it is possible to shift to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode after confirming the desired cooking menu candidate on the dedicated display screen (first specific screen 30SP).

Further, during the period of the preheating step, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, the input functions in the individual operation units 40L and 40R and the shared operation unit 40M are restricted, so that the user's erroneous operation is prevented and the cooking fails. It is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can prevent the problem.

In the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the fourth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
Main body 110 and
The heating chamber 113 formed inside the main body 110 and
The first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated placed on the upper surface of the main body 110,
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber,
Notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that provides information,
The integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN,
An input operation unit 40 that gives a command to the integrated control device MC is provided.
The input operation unit 40 includes individual operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means, and a shared operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1. death,
The integrated control device MC has an operation program of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 that drives the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in a predetermined order.
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 has a cooking step 1 and a cooking step 2, and has a "first cooperative cooking mode" of a type in which the first heating means is used for the cooking step 1, and the cooking. It has a "second cooperative cooking mode" of the type that uses the second heating means for step 1.
In both the "first cooperative cooking mode" and the "second cooperative cooking mode",
(1) In the shared operation unit 40M, the selection of the cooperative cooking mode and the decision to start the cooking step 1 are made.
(2) When the cooking step 2 is executed by the first heating means HM1, the cooking step 2 is completed by the individual operation units 40L and 40R, and the cooking step 2 is performed by the second heating. When it is executed by the means HM2, it is performed by the shared operation unit 40M.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Therefore, in one cooking device 1, it is possible to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the heating place and the heating means are different, so that the cooking device is highly convenient and can be used for a wide range of cooking.

Further, in both the first linked cooking mode and the second linked cooking mode, the shared operation unit 40M determines to select the linked cooking mode KM3 and start the cooking process, and the cooking step 2 is performed. Since the end is performed by the individual operation unit 40L, 40R or the shared operation unit 40M corresponding to the heating means in charge, the operation rule is simple, and it can be expected to prevent the user from causing an operation error or confusion. Therefore, it is possible to provide a cooking cooker having improved operability while having two or more heating sources and input operation units 40 (two or more places) each.

Further, with respect to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The shared operation unit 40M was configured to include an end unit 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode up to the cooking step 2 at the stage of the cooking step 1.

Therefore, when it is desired to cancel the operation of the cooperative cooking mode for some reason, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode can be easily performed by always using the end portion (input key) 43MT of the shared operation unit 40M regardless of the stage of the cooking process. Since it can be canceled, the user can easily cancel the linked cooking mode, which has the effect of good operability.

Further, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the cooking cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the integrated display unit 30 that performs the display operation at the stage of operating the shared operation unit 40MC and the display unit 30 at the stage of operating the individual operation unit are displayed. It was configured to include individual display units 31L and 31R for performing operations.

Therefore, in both the stage of operating the shared operation unit 40M and the stage of operating the individual operation units 40L and 40R, the user can acquire information that is helpful for the operation, and the operability can be improved.

Further, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the cooking cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the notification unit AN includes an integrated display unit 30 that performs a display operation at the stage of operating the shared operation unit 40M, and the individual operation. It is equipped with individual display units 31L and 31R that perform display operations at the stage of operating the unit.
The integrated display unit 30 is configured to display information indicating the progress of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 during the period from the start to the end of the cooperative cooking mode.

Therefore, the user can grasp the progress of the cooking process by looking at the display of the integrated display unit 30, and can improve the sense of security and convenience.

Further, with respect to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the user can arbitrarily perform the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 using the second heating means HM2 in the end portion 43MT. It has an exit function that can be terminated at the time of
When the end unit 43MT is operated once, the end function is exhibited, and when the end unit 43MT is operated twice in succession, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled. rice field.

Therefore, the cooking can be stopped and the cooperative cooking mode can be canceled according to the number of operations of the end unit 43MT of the shared operation unit 40M, and the operability of the shared operation unit 40MC can be improved.

Further, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, at the stage where the shared operation unit 40M is performing the operation for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and starting the cooking process, the above-mentioned Part or all of the input functions of the individual operation units 40L and 40R were restricted.

Therefore, even if the individual operation units 40L and 40R are erroneously operated at the stage where the shared operation unit 40M is performing the operation of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and shifting to the cooking process 1, the input of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is performed. Is not canceled until the beginning, and it can be expected to improve the user's sense of security and improve the operability.

Further, with respect to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode is started by the individual operation units 40L and 40R. The shared operation unit 40M has a configuration in which the input function for new cooking using the second heating means is restricted.

Therefore, at the stage where one cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being cooked by the individual operation units 40L and 40R, even if the shared operation unit 40M is erroneously operated, the execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not affected and the user. It can be expected to improve the sense of security and improve the operability.

Further, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, at the stage where the shared operation unit 40M is performing an operation for selecting the cooperative cooking mode and starting the cooking process, the above-mentioned The integrated display unit 30 is configured to display the first specific screen 30SP on which the identification information of the cooking menu for the cooperative cooking mode is displayed.

Therefore, it is possible to proceed with the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 while referring to the display content of the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, and it is possible to improve the operability of the user.

Further, with respect to the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the integrated control device MC has the cooking steps of the first linked cooking mode and the second linked cooking mode, respectively. At the time when 1 ends or before that time, the notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30 or voice synthesizer 95) completes the cooking step 1 or prompts preparation for the next cooking step 2. It was configured to notify "information for user operation support" and shift to a waiting period TR waiting for a command from the user.

Therefore, it is possible to efficiently proceed with cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, and it is possible to improve the operability of the user.

Further, with respect to the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the second heating means HM2 has a microwave heating source 189 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 113 and the heating chamber 113. It was configured to include an oven heating source 188 for heating.

Therefore, in the heating chamber 113, it is possible to heat the object to be cooked by a combination of microwaves and radiant heat, and it is effective and efficient for various objects to be cooked by two heating sources having different heating principles. Can be expected to heat up. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker 1 that can handle various types of food to be cooked.

Further, with respect to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the inside of the main body 110 is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B.
The upper space 300A has upper cooling fans 60 and 61 that introduce outside air without passing through the lower space 300B in order to cool the inside of the upper space.
The lower space 300B has lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that introduce outside air without passing through the upper space 300A in order to cool the inside of the lower space 300B.
The upper cooling fans 60 and 61 were configured to be operated during a period in which at least one of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 is driven.

Therefore, regardless of whether the first heating means HM1 or the second heating means HM2 is driven, the upper space 300A is cooled by the outside air by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61. Therefore, important electrical components related to the overall function of the heating cooker 1 such as the microcomputer, the power supply circuit board 55, the filter circuit board 54, etc., which are the core parts of the integrated control device MC housed in the upper space 300A. It is possible to maintain the same kind of cooling effect. This can be expected to have the effect of preventing quality deterioration and malfunction due to overheating.

Further, with respect to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking apparatus 1 of the first embodiment, the abnormality detection unit EM is further provided inside the main body 110, and the abnormality detection unit EM is the temperature of the upper space 300A. The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting an abnormality, and when the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality while the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being executed, the integrated control device MC performs the cooperation. The operation of the cooking mode KM3 was canceled, the driving of all the heating means during the heating operation was stopped, and even after the driving was stopped, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 were configured to perform heat dissipation operation.

Therefore, when the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality, all the heating sources automatically stop the operation, and the safety is high. Even in that case, since the upper space 300A is cooled by the outside air by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, the integrated control device MC, the power supply circuit board 55, the filter circuit board 54, etc. accommodated in the upper space 300A are used. It is possible to maintain the cooling effect of important electric components related to the overall function of the heating cooker 1. Therefore, the effect of preventing quality deterioration and malfunction due to overheating can be expected.

Further, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the abnormality detection unit EM further has a function of detecting an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 (“abnormality 4” detection). Has a function)
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality in one or both of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 while the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 is being executed, the integrated control device MC controls the linked cooking mode KM3. The operation was canceled, the driving of all the heating means during the heating operation was stopped, and the operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 was immediately stopped.

Therefore, when an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is detected, all the heating sources automatically stop the operation, and the safety is high. Further, since the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are immediately stopped, if the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are out of order, it is possible to avoid aggravating the situation.

Further, with respect to the fourth disclosure, in the cooking apparatus 1 of the first embodiment, the heating chamber 113 has a door 114 for opening and closing the front opening so as to be openable and closable.
The shared operation unit 40M has an input key 43MS for selecting the cooperative cooking mode and determining to start the cooking step 1.
The control unit MC has a function of detecting the opening and closing of the door 114 in the middle of the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, and the cooking step 1 or the cooking step is performed by the second heating means HM2. If the opening of the door 114 is detected during the execution of 2, the driving of the second heating means HM2 is stopped, and if the closing of the door 114 is subsequently detected, the shared operation unit 40M is stopped. In the above configuration, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is restarted only when the operation of restarting the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is performed.

Because of this configuration, when cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113 using the second heating means HM2, the door 114 is opened in the middle for confirmation of the object to be cooked, and then the door is opened. When the 114 is closed, the cooking is not restarted only by closing the door 114.
Therefore, when the door 114 is accidentally closed, it is possible to avoid the so-called "dry baking" state in which the heating operation is started in a state where the food to be cooked is not placed inside the heating chamber 113, and the safety is high. It is a composition.

In the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the fifth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 on the upper surface,
A heating chamber 113 inside the main body 110 whose opening is closed by a door so as to be openable and closable.
The first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N placed above the heating portions 17HR and 17HL arranged at least at least two places on the left and right of the top plate 15
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113,
Notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that notifies information of cooking
The upper cooling fans 60 and 61, which are started to operate when the first heating means HM1 is driven and when the second heating means HM2 is driven, respectively.
When the second heating means HM2 is driven, the operation of the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 is started.
An integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively.
Anomaly detection unit EM and
It has an input operation unit 40 that gives a command signal to the integrated control device MC, and has.
The input operation unit 40 includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2, and a left side operation unit 40L and a right side operation unit 40R for the first heating means.
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are linked.
In the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the cooking step 1 by the first heating means HM1 and the cooking step 2 by the second heating means HM2 are executed.
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device MC may detect an abnormality.
(1) The heating operation of the cooking step 1 is stopped, and the cooking step 1 is stopped.
(2) Cancel the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
(3) Notifying that the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has been canceled,
(4) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is continued until the stop condition A is satisfied.
The cooking cooker 1 was disclosed (see FIGS. 45 to 47 and 48 to 50).

Therefore, by using the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of widely supporting various kinds of cooking.
Further, if an abnormality occurs during the heating operation, the heating operation of the cooking step 1 is stopped, but the operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 for cooling the first heating means HM1 which is the heating source of the cooking step 1 is performed. Since the cooling operation is continued for a necessary period, it is possible to prevent the main body 110 of the cooking cooker 1 from overheating.

That is, since the upper space 300A houses the integrated control device MC, the power supply circuit board 55, the filter circuit board 54, the integrated display unit 30, etc., which are important functional components of the cooking device 1, these temperatures are set. Since it can be maintained normally, it does not cause malfunction or quality deterioration.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is continued until the stop condition A is satisfied.
The stop condition A depends on the temperature of the installation space of the first heating means HM1 (see FIGS. 48 to 51). Alternatively, the stop condition A has a configuration that depends on the elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 (see FIGS. 48 to 51).

For example, the first cooling fan 60 discloses a configuration in which "heat dissipation operation" is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes with respect to the time when the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 is completed or until the temperature of the top plate 15 falls below the reference temperature. (See time of heat dissipation operation Th1).

Therefore, even after an abnormality is detected in the middle of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the heating operation of the cooking step 1 is stopped, the sufficient cooling operation is continued, so that overheating of the main body 110 of the cooking cooker 1 can be prevented.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The integrated control device MC has a function of limiting the use of the heating means to be used in the cooking step 2 by other cooking during the period of the cooking step 1, and the function is the cooperative cooking mode. If the operation is canceled, it will be canceled,
The configuration was disclosed (see FIGS. 61 to 63).

For this reason, since the heating means up to the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be secured in advance, it is possible to avoid the situation where the desired heating means cannot be used in the second stage of the cooking process, and avoid confusion and inconvenience of the user. It is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can be used.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The input operation unit 40 includes an input key (decision unit) 43MS that determines the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a first individual operation unit 40R that commands the start and stop of the operation of the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2. Has an operation unit 40M, which commands the stop of the
The input operation unit 40 is provided with an input key (end unit) 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIGS. 60 to 65).

Therefore, since the heating operation start and end of the cooking process 2 can be centrally performed in the central operation unit 40M, the user can operate the central operation unit 40M to start and end the cooking process 2. Thereby, it is possible to provide a cooking device having good operability.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The central operation unit 40M is located in the left and right central portions of the main body 110 and is arranged so as to be operable from above.
The input key (decision unit) 43MS and the input key (end unit) 43MT are arranged in the central operation unit 40M.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIGS. 20, 21, 60-65).

Therefore, since the central operation unit 40M can be operated from above the main body 110 and the operation start and end of the cooperative cooking mode can be centrally performed, it is possible to provide a cooking cooker having good operability.

In the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the sixth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 on the upper surface,
A heating chamber 113 inside the main body 110 whose opening is closed by a door so as to be openable and closable.
The first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N placed above the heating portions 17HR and 17HL arranged at least at least two places on the left and right of the top plate 15
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113,
Notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that notifies information of cooking
The upper cooling fans 60 and 61, which are started to operate when the first heating means HM1 is driven and when the second heating means HM2 is driven, respectively.
When the second heating means HM2 is driven, the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are started to operate, and
An integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively.
Anomaly detection unit EM and
It has an input operation unit 40 that gives a command signal to the integrated control device MC, and has.
The input operation unit 40 includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2, and a left side operation unit 40L and a right side operation unit 40R for the first heating means HM1.
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are linked.
In the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the cooking step 1 by the first heating means HM1 and the cooking step 2 by the second heating means HM2 are executed.
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking step 2, the integrated control device MC may detect an abnormality.
(1) The heating operation of the cooking step 2 is stopped, and the cooking step 2 is stopped.
(2) Cancel the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
(3) The notification unit EM notifies that the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has been canceled.
(4) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is continued until at least the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped.
(5) The operation of the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 continues until the stop condition B is satisfied.
The cooking cooker 1 was disclosed (see FIGS. 45 to 47 and 48 to 50).

Therefore, by using the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of widely supporting various kinds of cooking.
Further, if an abnormality occurs during the heating operation, the heating operation of the cooking step 2 is stopped, but the operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 for cooling the first heating means HM1 which is the heating source of the cooking step 1 is performed. Since the cooling operation is continued for a necessary period, it is possible to prevent the main body 110 of the cooking cooker 1 from overheating.

That is, since the upper space 300A houses the integrated control device MC, the power supply circuit board 55, the filter circuit board 54, the integrated display unit 30, etc., which are important functional components of the cooking device 1, these temperatures are set. Since it can be maintained normally, it does not cause malfunction or quality deterioration.

As described above, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is continued until the "stop condition A" is satisfied.
The "stop condition A" depends on the temperature of the installation space of the first heating means HM1 (see FIGS. 48 to 51). Alternatively, the "stop condition A" has a configuration that depends on the elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 (see FIGS. 48 to 51).
Further, when the induction heating source 9 was not driven, it was operated at least for a period until the driving of the other heating source was stopped (see FIGS. 48 to 50).

On the other hand, the "stop condition B" is as follows.
As described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, the operation of the lower cooling fan 129 is "radiated operation" for only 3 minutes with reference to the time when the microwave heating operation is completed. That is, the "heat dissipation operation time Tm2" is fixed at 3 minutes.

As described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, the operation of the lower (third) cooling fan 128 is "radiated operation" for only 3 minutes with reference to the time when the microwave heating operation is completed. That is, this "time of heat dissipation operation Tm2" is fixed in 3 minutes.
On the other hand, in the case of oven cooking: Immediately after the operation by either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is completed, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured every 10 seconds, and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 is constant. It is operated until it drops below the temperature. That is, the "time of heat dissipation operation Tо1" is determined under such conditions.

In this way, even after the abnormality is detected, the cooling operation of the heating chamber 113, the microwave oscillation source 122, etc. in the lower space 300B continues, so that the temperatures thereof can be maintained normally, so that the malfunction and quality Does not cause deterioration.

In the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the seventh disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 on the upper surface,
A heating chamber 113 inside the main body 110 whose opening is closed by a door so as to be openable and closable.
The first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N placed above the heating portions 17HR and 17HL arranged at least at least two places on the left and right of the top plate 15
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113,
Notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that notifies information of cooking
The upper cooling fans 60 and 61, which are started to operate when the first heating means HM1 is driven and when the second heating means HM2 is driven, respectively.
When the second heating means HM2 is driven, the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are started to operate, and
An integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively.
Anomaly detection unit EM and
It has an input operation unit 40 that gives a command signal to the integrated control device MC, and has.
The input operation unit 40 includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2, and a left side operation unit 40L and a right side operation unit 40R for the first heating means HM1.
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are linked.
In the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the cooking step 1 by the second heating means HM2 and the cooking step 2 by the first heating means HM1 are executed.
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device MC may detect an abnormality.
(1) The heating operation of the cooking step 1 is stopped, and the cooking step 1 is stopped.
(2) Cancel the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
(3) The notification unit EM notifies that the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has been canceled.
(4) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is continued until at least the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped.
(5) The operation of the lower cooling fan 128 and 129 is continued until the stop condition B is satisfied.
The cooker 1 having a configuration was disclosed (see FIGS. 45 to 47 and 48 to 50).

Therefore, by using the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of widely supporting various kinds of cooking.
Further, if an abnormality occurs during the heating operation, the heating operation of the cooking step 2 is stopped, but the operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 for cooling the first heating means HM1 which is the heating source of the cooking step 1 is performed. Since the cooling operation is continued for a necessary period, it is possible to prevent the main body 110 of the cooking cooker 1 from overheating.

Further, since the operation of the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 is continued until the temperature of the lower space 300B provided with the heating chamber 113 and the like drops, it is possible to prevent the main body 110 of the cooking cooker 1 from overheating.

Since the upper space 300A houses the integrated control device MC, the power supply circuit board 55, the filter circuit board 54, the integrated display unit 30, etc., which are important functional components of the cooking device 1, these temperatures are set. Since it can be maintained normally, it does not cause malfunction or quality deterioration.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The stop condition B of the lower cooling fan 128 and 129 is determined by the temperature of the heating chamber 113 or the second heating means HM2.
The composition was disclosed.

The "stop condition B" is as follows, as described in the first embodiment.
First, as described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, the operation of the lower (fourth) cooling fan 129 is "radiated operation" for only 3 minutes with reference to the time when the microwave heating operation is completed. That is, the "heat dissipation operation time Tm2" is fixed at 3 minutes.

As described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, the operation of the lower (third) cooling fan 128 is "radiated operation" for only 3 minutes with reference to the time when the microwave heating operation is completed. That is, this "time of heat dissipation operation Tm2" is fixed in 3 minutes.
On the other hand, in the case of oven cooking: Immediately after the operation by either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is completed, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured every 10 seconds, and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 is constant. It is operated until it drops below the temperature. That is, the "time of heat dissipation operation Tо1" is determined under such conditions.

As a result, when the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are operated, if an abnormality is detected and the second heating means HM2 is urgently stopped, the temperature of the lower space 300B provided with the heating chamber 113 and the like is raised. The operation of the lower cooling fan 128 and 129 is continued until the temperature is lowered. This makes it possible to prevent the main body 110 of the cooking device 1 from overheating.

In the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the eighth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 on the upper surface,
A heating chamber 113 inside the main body 110 whose opening is closed by a door so as to be openable and closable.
The first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N placed above the heating portions 17HR and 17HL arranged at least at least two places on the left and right of the top plate 15
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113,
Notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that notifies information of cooking
The upper cooling fans 60 and 61, which are started to operate when the first heating means HM1 is driven and when the second heating means HM2 is driven, respectively.
When the second heating means HM2 is driven, the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are started to operate, and
An integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively.
Anomaly detection unit EM and
It has an input operation unit 40 that gives a command signal to the integrated control device MC, and has.
The input operation unit 40 includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2, and a left side operation unit 40L and a right side operation unit 40R for the first heating means HM1.
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are linked.
In the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the cooking step 1 by the second heating means HM2 and the cooking step 2 by the first heating means HM1 are executed.
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking step 2, the integrated control device MC may detect an abnormality.
(1) The heating operation of the cooking step 2 is stopped, and the cooking step 2 is stopped.
(2) Cancel the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
(3) The notification unit EM notifies that the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has been canceled.
(4) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is continued until the stop condition A is satisfied.
The cooker 1 having a configuration was disclosed (see FIGS. 45 to 47 and 48 to 50).

Therefore, by using the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of widely supporting various kinds of cooking.
Further, if an abnormality occurs during the heating operation, the heating operation in the cooking step 2 is stopped, but the operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is continued for a necessary period until the stop condition A is satisfied. Therefore, overheating of the main body 110 of the cooking device 1 can be prevented.

In the first embodiment, the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
The top plate 15 on which the object to be heated N is placed and
The abnormality detection unit EM of the top plate 15 and
Notification unit AN and
The top plate 15 is arranged at the upper part, and has the abnormality detection unit EM and the main body 110 provided with the notification unit AN inside.
The inside of the main body 110 is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B by a partition wall 16S.
In the IH coil installation space CK partitioned inside the upper space 300A, an induction heating source 9 for heating the object to be heated and an upper cooling fan for cooling the heat-generating electronic component (heat sink 82) of the induction heating source 9 are provided. (1st cooling fan 60, 2nd cooling fan 61)
In the lower space 300B, a heating chamber 113 whose front opening is closed by a door 114 so as to be openable and closable, a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and a cover housed in the heating chamber 113. The oven heating source 188 for heating the cooked food, the microwave heating source 189, and the heat-generating electronic components (heat dissipation unit 122H, inverter circuit board 121, etc.) of the oven heating source 188 are cooled by cooling air, and the cooling air is blown. A lower cooling fan (third cooling fan 128, fourth cooling fan) 129 that discharges via the outside of the IH coil installation space CK is provided.
Integrated control arranged in the upper space 300A to control the operation of the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the upper cooling fans 60, 61 and the lower cooling fans 128, 129. Has equipment MC,
When at least one of the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 is driven, the integrated control device MC drives the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 to blow the outside air. Introduced inside the upper space 300A,
The integrated control device MC includes a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated on the top plate 15 using the induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 for one object to be cooked. It has the function of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 that executes the cooking step of heating the object to be cooked by using at least one of the oven heating sources 188 at the same time zone.
The integrated control device MC drives at least one of the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 to generate an abnormality signal from the abnormality detection unit EM during cooking. When the notification is received, the notification unit AN notifies the notification, the induction heating source 9 is urgently stopped, and the upper cooling fans 60, 61 and the lower cooling fans 128, 129 are the same as before receiving the abnormality occurrence signal. Continue driving under conditions,
The cooker 1 having the configuration was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, even if the induction heating source 9 is urgently stopped when an abnormality occurs, the integrated control device MC, the power supply circuit board 55, the filter circuit board 54, and the integrated display unit 30, which are important functional components of the heating cooker 1, are used. The temperature of the above can be maintained normally, and they do not cause malfunction or deterioration of quality.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the integrated control device MC cooperates with at least one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9. Has KM3 and
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 has a cooking step 1 using the induction heating source 9 and a cooking step 2 performed in the heating chamber 113.
When the induction heating source is urgently stopped in the middle of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device MC cancels the setting of the linked cooking mode KM3 and cooks in the linked cooking mode KM3 or the linked preheated cooking mode KM4. To finish,
The cooker 1 having the configuration was disclosed.

Therefore, when the induction heating source 9 is urgently stopped due to an abnormality, the other heating sources are effectively utilized for cooking regardless of the restrictions of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 (occupancy of the heating source). Can be executed, and it can be expected to improve user convenience.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the outside air is directly introduced into the IH coil installation space CK by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 without passing through the lower space 300B, and the outside air is introduced. An upper air passage AH for discharging to the outside of the IH coil installation space CK is formed.
The integrated control device MC and the inverter circuit board 80 of the induction heating source 9 are arranged inside the upper air passage AH.
The cooker 1 having the configuration was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, the integrated control device MC and the inverter circuit board 80, which are important functional components of the cooking device 1, can be cooled by fresh outside air without passing through the lower space 300B, and malfunctions and quality deterioration due to overheating, etc. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly reliable cooking device 1.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the lower space 300B has a lower air passage UH in which outside air is introduced by the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 from the intake port at the lower part of the main body.
In the lower air passage UH, a first lower air passage accommodating the inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 9 and a second lower air passage in which the heat radiating portion 122H of the microwave heating source 9 is arranged. It was a configuration equipped with.

Because of this configuration, fresh outside air is introduced into the lower space 300B without passing through the upper space 300A, so that the heat radiating portion 122H of the microwave heating source 9 can be effectively cooled, and malfunction or quality deterioration due to overheating can be achieved. It is possible to provide a highly reliable cooking device 1 that does not cause such problems.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The integrated control device MC is
(1) The lower cooling fans 128 and 129 and the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are both operated during the period in which one control menu is being executed only by the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189. ,
(2) During the period in which one control menu is continuously executed by designating the combined cooking mode KM2 that automatically drives the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 in sequence, the above-mentioned The lower cooling fans 128 and 129 and the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are both operated.
(3) During the period in which one control menu is executed only by the induction heating source 9, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are operated, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are not operated. (See FIG. 44).

Because of this configuration, the temperature of the upper space 300A accommodating the integrated control device MC and the like is kept low by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and when only heating by the induction heating source 9 is performed, the lower space Since the 300B cooling fan is not operated, the power consumption of the cooling fan can be reduced as a whole.

Further, when only the oven heating source 188 is heated, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated, so that the energy saving operation is performed.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
When the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is selected, the integrated display unit 30 constituting the notification unit AN displays unique identification information 330 for identifying an applicable object to be cooked (for example, “hamburger”). (Display of the first specific screen 30SP).

With this configuration, the user can directly select the desired food to be cooked by looking at the first specific screen 30SP, so that the user's operation procedure can be simplified and the convenience can be improved. ..

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
Left side operation unit 40L, right side operation unit 40L as a first operation unit that sets the heating conditions (for example, heating power level, heating power value, heating time, etc.) of the induction heating source 9 and commands the start and stop of the heating operation. 40R and
It has a central operation unit 40M as a second operation unit that sets the heating conditions of the microwave heating source 189 and commands the start and stop of the heating operation.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is selected by the second operation unit (central operation unit 40M).
The preheating step was completed by the first operation unit (left side operation unit 40L, right side operation unit 40R).

Because of this configuration, the user selects the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 in the central operation unit 40M, and then the first operation unit (left operation unit 40L, corresponding to the heating units 17HL and 17HR of the induction heating source 9). In the right operation unit 40R), the heating operation can be started and stopped. Therefore, at the start and end of the cooking process using the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is possible to reduce the user's hesitation in operation and improve the operability.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The integrated control device MC automatically advances one cooking process by automatically combining the independent cooking mode KM1 that operates the induction heating source 9 independently, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188. Disclosed is a configuration having a function of executing the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooking mode KM2.

Because of this configuration, the user can use the single cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2 in addition to the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, and can use a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of supporting a wide range of cooking.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The integrated display unit 30 constituting the notification unit AN further includes a display screen 30D.
When the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is selected, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the display screen 30D.
The configuration is disclosed in which the second specific screen 30SC is displayed on the display screen 30D when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.

Because of this configuration, the user can easily select the desired object to be cooked and the control menu by the displayed first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC, and can support a wide range of cooking, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide a vessel.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The main body 110 is further provided with an input operation unit 40 as an input means.
The input operation unit 40 further includes a function setting input means (input key 43KP) for changing the function of the integrated control device MC.
At least one of the cooking menu display method of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the display method of each control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 can be changed by the function setting input means 43KP.
Disclosed is a cooking device 1 characterized by the above.
For example, the input key 43KP can be used to set the priority when displaying each cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 and each control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 on the integrated display unit 30.

Because of this configuration, if the function mode is set, the user can change the display method of the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2, the display method of the linked cooking menu KM3, and the display priority, which is wide. It is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle cooking.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The main body 110 is further provided with an input operation unit 40 as an input means.
The input operation unit 40 further includes a function setting input means (input key 43KP) for changing the function of the integrated control device MC.
The display priority between the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3 can be set by the function setting input means 43KP.
When the door 114 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned on and the integrated display unit 30 is activated, the integrated control device MC is preset by the function setting input means (input key 43KP). When the permission condition (for example, the maximum power consumption, that is, the upper limit of the total power consumption) is satisfied, the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode KM4 is preferentially displayed on the integrated display unit 30. there were.

Because of this configuration, if the function mode is set, after the door 114 is opened, the second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode KM2 and the first for the linked cooking mode KM3 are automatically set according to the user's request. The specific screen 30SP can be displayed, and the usability of the user can be improved.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
On the top plate 15, the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked, and
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber 113,
Notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking,
The integrated control device MC that controls the heating operation and
The first heating means HM1 and the input operation unit 40 for giving a command to the second heating means HM2 are provided.
The integrated control device MC has a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated N using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking object (for example, "for example,"" It has a function of executing a cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 having a cooking step 1 for heating "karaage") and a cooking step 2 using the first heating means HM1 after the cooking step 1.
The cooker 1 is disclosed (see FIGS. 68, 71 and 72).

Because of this configuration, the object to be heated N such as a frying pan or a pan placed on the top plate 15 is preheated, while the object to be cooked (for example, “karaage”) is secondly heated in the heating chamber 113. It is possible to execute a cooperative cooking menu in which cooking is performed by means (cooking step 1) and then cooking is performed by the induction heating source 9 (cooking step 2). This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As another cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated N using the first heating means HM1 and a preheating step of preheating the object N are preheated by the first heating means HM1. After the cooking step 1 in which the cooked food (for example, "hamburger") is placed on the cooked food (frying pan or the like) N and heated, and the cooking step 1, the cooked food is moved into the heating chamber 113 and described above. Also disclosed is a cooking step 2 in which the cooking step 2 is heated by the second heating means HM2, and a cooking device 1 having a function of executing the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 having the cooking step 2 (see FIGS. 60 and 67).

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, when the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is selected by the input operation unit 40 for the notification unit AN, the cooked food (for example, “hamburger”) is applied. A display unit (integrated display unit) 30 for displaying the identification information 330 is provided.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIG. 60).

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a highly operable cooking device in which a specific object to be cooked (for example, “hamburger”) to which the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is applied can be easily selected by the identification information 330.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The main body case HC is further provided with an integrated display unit 30 as a display means.
The integrated display unit 30 displays the selection result of the first selection unit 43MC and the selection result of the second selection unit 43M1, respectively.
The composition was disclosed.

With this configuration, the integrated display unit 30 can easily distinguish between the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode, and provides a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of supporting a wide range of cooking. Can be done.

Other features disclosed in Embodiment 1.
The following characteristic configurations were disclosed.

(1) Part 1:
Main body 110 and
The heating chamber 113 inside the main body and
An induction heating source 9 as a first heating means HM1 for heating an object to be heated placed above the main body,
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113,
Notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking,
The two upper cooling fans 60 and 61, which are started to operate when the first heating means HM1 is driven and when the second heating means HM2 is driven,
When the second heating means HM2 is driven, the two lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that start cooling of the second heating means HM2 and
An integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively.
Anomaly detection unit EM and
It has an input operation unit 40 that gives a command signal to the integrated control device MC, and has.
The main body 110 is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B.
The first heating means HM1 and the integrated control device MC are housed in the upper space 300A.
The second heating means HM2 and the heating chamber 113 are housed in the lower space 300B.
The upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are arranged in the upper air passage AH that introduces outside air from the ventilation holes 64 communicating with the outside of the lower space 300B without passing through the lower space 300B.
The lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are arranged in the lower air passage UH that introduces outside air from the intake ports 152F and 152B at the lower part of the lower space 300B.
The upper air passage AH and the lower air passage UH communicate with each other from the exhaust port 20 provided in the upper part of the main body 110 to the outside without intersecting in the middle.
The upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are composed of two adjacent cooling fans 60 and 61, and cooperate with each other to supply cooling air to the first heating means HM1.
The input operation unit 40 includes an operation unit (central operation unit 40M) of the second heating means HM2 and an operation unit (individual operation units 40R, 40L) of the first heating means HM1.
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are linked.
Cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 by the first heating means HM1 and a cooking step 2 by the second heating means HM2.
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, the control unit MC may detect an abnormality.
(1) The heating operation of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 that was executing the heating operation is stopped, and the heating operation is stopped.
(2) Cancel the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is continued from the stop of the heating operation of the heating means of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 in which the heating operation was executed until the stop condition A is satisfied.
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, if an abnormality is detected in either cooking step 1 or cooking step 2, all the driven heating means are stopped, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled, and then the operation is canceled. Since the upper cooling fan that was cooling the inside of the upper space 300A is stopped, it is highly safe and provides a highly convenient cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking using the cooperative cooking mode. can.

(2) Part 2:
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and in the middle of the cooking process 1, the first reference information FA1 or the second cooking process 2 is related. Reference information FA2, at least one of them is automatically notified by the notification unit AN.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide a vessel.

Further, it has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 by detecting, for example, the elapsed time or the rising temperature (TN1, TN2, etc.), and is in the middle of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2. Since the reference information is automatically notified to the user at the stage, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user is notified of the progress of cooking to dispel the anxiety, and the heating operation is temporarily performed for confirmation on the way. By stopping, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

(3) Part 3:
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 using at least one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and a cooking step 2 using the induction heating source 9.
The integrated control device MC automatically advances the cooking process 1, ends the cooking process 1 by a command from the user, and after the end, starts the cooking process 2 in response to the user's start command. The cooking process 2 is automatically advanced.
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2, and is a first reference of the cooking step 1 in the middle of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2. At least one of the information FA1 and the second reference information FA2 regarding the cooking step 2 is automatically notified by the notification unit AN.
Disclosed is a cooking device 1 characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide a vessel.

Further, it has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 by detecting, for example, the elapsed time, the rising temperature (TN1, TN2, etc.), etc., and is in the middle of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2. Since the reference information is automatically notified to the user at the stage, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user is notified of the progress of cooking to dispel the anxiety, and the heating operation is temporarily performed for confirmation on the way. By stopping, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

(4) Part 4:
It has a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are switched and operated by a user's operation.
When the cooperative cooking mode is set, the cooking step 1 for heating the cooked object housed in the heating chamber 113 and the cooked object N placed on the top plate 15 after the cooking step 1 is completed. The cooking step 2 in which the object to be cooked is induced and heated by the induction heating source can be reserved.
When a reservation for cooking in the above-mentioned cooperative cooking mode is made,
(1) The induction heating source 9 can be driven from before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step.
(2) During the preheating step, the cooking step 1 by the microwave heating source 189 can be started in the heating chamber 113.
(3) After stopping the driving of the microwave heating source 9 and ending the cooking step 1, the cooking step 2 can be started on the object to be heated N preheated by the induction heating source 9.
(4) In the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, the cooking device is disclosed, characterized in that information indicating the progress of the cooking step is notified by the notification unit AN.

Because of this configuration, the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used in combination. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, the cooking step 1 can be started while the preheating step by the induction heating source 9 is started before the cooking step 1, and then the cooked object is moved toward the preheated object N to be cooked. Step 2 can be performed.

Furthermore, since the reference information is automatically notified to the user in the middle of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user is notified of the progress of cooking and the anxiety is dispelled. By temporarily stopping the heating operation for confirmation on the way, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

(5) Part 5:
The integrated control device MC is
(1) IH independent cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is operated independently (2) Range independent cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 is operated independently (3) Oven alone in which the oven heating source 188 is operated independently Cooking mode (4) Transition period TR in which the start and end timings of the microwave heating source 189 and / or one of the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are determined depending on the input operation of the user. KM3, a cooperative cooking mode that operates sequentially after
Has an operating program of
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 comprises a cooking step 1 performed before the transition period using the heating chamber 113, and a cooking step 2 performed after the transition period in a place other than the heating chamber 113. Including,
The integrated control device MC provides reference information regarding the cooking step 2 or information indicating that cooking different from cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be performed in the heating chamber 113 in the transition period TR. Notify by,
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. Can provide a high-quality cooker.

Further, when cooking is performed in the cooperative cooking mode, the heating chamber 113 that has completed the cooking step 1 is separated during the transition period TR in which the heating operation is stopped (the preheating operation may be continued). It is possible to notify that cooking is possible.
Therefore, it is expected that the time spent by the user for cooking can be shortened, the cooking can be performed more quickly than before, the burden on the user can be reduced, and the usability can be improved.

(6) Part 6:
The integrated control device MC includes a group composed of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the induction heating source 9 is driven and started with a time lag.
The combined cooking mode KM2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven at the same time or at a time lag, or are automatically switched and driven, and the combined cooking mode KM2.
Has the function of doing
The integrated control device MC includes a cooking step 1 that occupies the heating chamber 113 in the cooperative cooking mode, and the microwave heating source in the heating chamber 113 before the cooking step 1 is completed. The notification unit AN notifies that cooking different from cooking in the cooperative cooking mode can be performed using either one or both of 189 or the oven heating source 188.
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. Can provide a high-quality cooker.

Further, in the case of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, when the cooking step 1 that occupies the heating chamber 113 is completed, it is possible to notify in advance that another cooking using the heating chamber 113 can be performed, so that the user heats the cooking chamber 113. It is expected that the time spent on cooking can be shortened, cooking can be performed more quickly than before, the burden on users can be reduced, and usability can be improved.

(7) Part 7:
The heating chamber 113 and
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
An oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113,
An induction heating source 9 that heats the object N to be heated,
A transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 that exchanges information with and from the information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly, and
Notification unit AN and
It has an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmission / reception unit 49, and the notification unit AN, respectively.
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which cooking is executed in cooperation with the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9.
In the cooperative cooking mode, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 started in response to a command from the user after the completion of the cooking step 1 are executed.
The integrated control device MC acquires reference information related to cooking to which the cooperative cooking mode is applied from the information processing device 411 via the transmission / reception unit 49.
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide a vessel.

Furthermore, when cooking in the linked cooking mode, information on the ingredients in the refrigerator 401 can be obtained as reference information related to cooking to which the linked cooking mode is applied, so that the burden on the user side of cooking can be reduced. It can be expected to improve usability.

(8) Part 8:
The heating chamber 113 and
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
An oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113,
An induction heating source 9 that heats the object N to be heated,
A transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 that exchanges information with and from the information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly, and
Notification unit AN and
It has an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmission / reception unit 49, and the notification unit AN, respectively.
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are linked by a cooperative cooking program to execute cooking.
The cooperative cooking program defines a cooking step 1 and a cooking step 2 that is started in response to a user's command after a transition period TR in which no heating operation is performed.
The integrated control device MC transmits cooking execution data related to cooking executed by applying the cooperative cooking mode to the information processing device 411 via the transmission / reception unit 49.
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide a vessel.

Further, when cooking is performed in the linked cooking mode, the execution data of the cooking is provided to the external information processing device (home gateway) 411, which can be useful information for the home gateway 4110 and the refrigerator 401. Finally, the utilization of such information can contribute to the improvement of user convenience, safety, maintenance and improvement of comfortable space, and the like.

(9) Part 9:
When the integrated control device MC receives the input for selection of the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, the display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, that is, the first specification as an example. By displaying either the screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC, the user can easily identify the cooking mode.

Because of this configuration, two heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 can be easily used properly. Can be provided.

Further, the input operation unit 40 for inputting to select one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and the integrated display for selectively displaying the first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC. It was a configuration including a part 30.
Therefore, one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be selected while checking the integrated display unit 30, which is convenient.

Further, the input operation unit 40 is common to the first and second heating means, and includes the operation unit 98 of the main power switch 97 that supplies electric power to the integrated control device MC, the cooperative cooking mode, and the linked cooking mode. It was configured to have an input key 43MS (cooking start input means) for instructing individual cooking start in the combined cooking mode.
Therefore, the input operation unit 40 can issue a command from the input of the main power to the start of heating, and the operability is good.

Further, the input operation unit 40 has an input key 43MT as a cooking mode canceling means for determining the end of each cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.
Therefore, both the operation of the cooperative cooking mode and the operation of the combined cooking mode can be canceled by the input key 43MT, and the operability is good.

Further, the integrated control device MC receives an input of any one of the combined cooking mode KM2, the linked cooking mode KM3, and the single cooking mode KM1 in the input operation unit 40, and a specific screen according to the cooking mode ( The first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST) are displayed by the integrated display unit 30.

Moreover, for each cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode, such as "hamburger" and "karaage", the heating sources of the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, and further, the above-mentioned first reference. Since useful information such as information FA1 and second reference information FA2 is displayed to the user, it is possible to reduce the user's cooking failure and provide a cooking device with improved convenience.

Further, the integrated control device MC displays the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) on the integrated display unit 30 after the main power is turned on by the input operation unit 40, and then the input operation unit 40. The first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the like are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in response to the input from.
Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the single cooking mode KM1 can be effectively used.

The specific screen is a first specific screen 30SP for a cooperative cooking mode and a second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode, and the first specific screen and the second specific screen are on the integrated display unit 30. It was a configuration that was displayed selectively.
Therefore, there is no concern that misunderstandings may occur between the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and the user-friendliness is good.
..

(10) Part 10:
Further, when the integrated control device MC determines that the input key 43M1 is pressed, the cooking process information 332 of one cooperative cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") and one or more "controls" applied to the menu. The "condition" information (including one or more combinations of thermal power, heating intensity information, target temperature information 30T, etc.) is displayed on the display screen 30D (first area 30L, second area 30M).
Then, the integrated control device MC displays additional information 331 such as guidance for prompting the user's operation, and when the start input 43MS key is pressed in this state, the execution of the cooperative cooking mode is started. There is (see FIG. 54).

According to the first embodiment, in the integrated display unit 30 shared by the three types of heating sources, the display screen 30D is used to cook with the heating source by one control menu selected from the cooperative cooking mode group. Since at least three pieces of information such as a process and a user's input operation can be displayed at once, even a compound type cooking cooker equipped with three heating sources can be a convenient cooking cooker.

(11) Part 11:
The integrated control device MC measures the elapsed time or the temperature rise from the start time of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 in order to detect the progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and the first reference information FA1 or The second reference information FA2 was notified.
Therefore, it is possible to ensure the notification operation of the reference information.

(12) Part 12:
The input operation unit 40
(1) IH independent cooking mode selection means 43L, 43R for operating the induction heating source independently, and
(2) A range independent cooking mode selection means 43M1 for operating the microwave heating source independently, and
(3) The oven independent cooking mode selection means 43M1 for operating the oven heating source independently, and
(4) A combined cooking mode selection means 43M1 for automatically switching and operating both the microwave heating source and the oven heating source at the same time or with a time lag.
(5) The configuration is provided with the cooperative cooking mode selection means 43MC.
Therefore, there is an advantage that each heating source can be easily selected without increasing the installation space of the three heating source selection means (input key or the like).

(13) Part 13:
The input operation unit 40 has a right operation unit 40R and a left operation unit 40L as two individual operation units dedicated to the induction heating source 9.
Further, it has a shared operation unit (central operation unit) 40M of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.
The shared operation unit 40M includes a first selection means (input key 43MC) for selecting the linked cooking mode KM3 and a second selection means (input key 43M1) for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2.
When the input operation of the first selection means (input key 43MC) is started before the second selection means (input key 43M1), the first specific screen (30SP) for input regarding cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is started. ) Is displayed,
When the input operation of the second selection means (input key 43M1) is started before the first selection means (input key 43MC), the second specific screen 30SC for input regarding cooking in the combined cooking mode is displayed. It was the configuration to be displayed.
Therefore, it is more effective to operate the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 first. Moreover, since different specific screens are displayed, there is no concern that an erroneous operation may occur in the selection between the two types of cooking modes.

(14) Part 14:
In the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, at least one of the microwave heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 is automatically determined by the integrated control device MC. Met. For example, in "manual range" (see FIG. 34), the user can select the microwave output during microwave heating from 100W, 200W, and 500W, but the default value is 500W. That is, unless otherwise specified, it is determined to be 500 W.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the input operation of the user and improve the usability.

(15) Part 15:
The end of the cooking step 1 using the induction heating source 9 and the end of the cooking step 2 were determined by an input operation to the dedicated operation unit (right operation unit 40R and left operation unit 40L). Specifically, the input keys 43L1 and 43R1 determine the timing of starting and stopping the induction heating operation.
Therefore, after selecting to execute the linked cooking mode KM3, the user can stand in front of either the right operation unit 40R or the left operation unit 40L and concentrate on the start and end of the induction heating. In other words, it is not necessary to use both the central operation unit 40M and the left and right operation units 40L and 40R properly to start and end the cooking process 1, so that the user's operation is not confused.

(16) Part 16:
In the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, the heating condition of at least one of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 is the input operation unit 40 (40M, 40L, 40R). ) Was determined by the user's operation.
Therefore, the heating conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.) according to the object to be cooked, the heating form, and the heating source can be set, and the cooking finish can be improved.

(17) Part 17:
The notification unit AN includes a first display unit (31L, 31R) that performs a display operation during the execution period of the IH single cooking mode KM1, and an integrated display unit 30 that performs a display operation during the execution period of the cooperative cooking mode. Had.
Therefore, especially when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 using a plurality of heating sources, one integrated display unit 30 intensively displays the cooking process, heating conditions, and the like, so attention is focused on the integrated display unit 30. be able to.

(18) Part 18:
In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the identification information 330 that identifies a plurality of objects to be cooked is displayed in a certain order on the first specific screen 30SP, and each time the input operation unit 40 is operated, the identification information 330 is sequentially displayed. It was a configuration that could be selected.
Therefore, when the desired cooking (for example, hamburger steak) is performed, the identification information can be sequentially displayed and selected, so that the selection method is simple and the user's operability can be improved.

(19) Part 19:
The combined cooking mode is divided by a control menu for driving the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (see FIGS. 34 and 37).
The second specific screen 30SC is configured to display information for specifying the control menu (for example, the specific sentence 30J of "warm" and "range manual" in FIG. 49).
Therefore, the user can easily select the control menu.

(20) Part 20:
The reference information acquired from the home gateway 411 by the integrated control device MC via the transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 discloses a configuration in which it is information on foodstuffs that can be cooked.
Therefore, in order to obtain information on the ingredients, it is not necessary to move to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking and check it, so that the labor of the user can be reduced.

(21) Part 21:
The integrated control device MC has a configuration in which the reference information (foodstuff information) is stored in the storage device MM until the cooking of one of the linked cooking modes is completed.
For this reason, it is not necessary for the user to operate the reference information for special recording each time or to write and record the reference information on paper.

(22) Part 22:
The food material information was information held by the refrigerator 401. Further, the food material information includes information on the refrigerating temperature or the freezing temperature of the food material.
Therefore, it can be used as a reference when determining control conditions (including one or more combinations of thermal power, heating intensity, target temperature, etc.) when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode with the cooking device 1. You can expect better-finished cooking.

(23) Part 23:
Prior to the start of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device MC sends a signal (see RQ1 and RQ3 in FIG. 103) requesting the provision of the food material information from the transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (see RQ1 and RQ3 in FIG. 103). Home gateway) It was configured to send to 411.
..
Therefore, in order to obtain information on the ingredients, it is not necessary to move to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking and check it, so that the labor of the user can be reduced.

(24) Part 24:
Before the start of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device MC transmits a signal requesting the provision of the reference information from the transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (home gateway) 411, and further. The integrated display unit 30, which is one of the notification units AN, notifies that the request for reference information is requested (see FIG. 112).
For this reason, the behavior of the user moving to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking and checking it can be postponed in advance, so that the user's labor can be reduced.

(25) Part 25:
The integrated control device MC was configured to store the cooking execution data in the storage device MM after the completion of the cooking step 2.
Therefore, the user does not need to perform any special operation or write and record the cooking execution data on paper.

(26) Part 26:
The cooking execution data was transmitted after the end of the cooking step 2, and the cooking execution data was configured to include at least one or more of the following information.
(1) Information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (2) Information regarding the weight or volume of the food to be cooked (3) Information indicating the control conditions of the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 (4) The cooking steps 1 to the above Information indicating the time required to complete the cooking process 2 (5) Information indicating the end time of the cooking process 2 (6) Information indicating the heating source used for cooking (7) The user at the time of the next cooking (8) Information related to user safety such as the current temperature of the heating chamber Therefore, in order to record cooking execution data accurately and in detail, the user may perform special operations or use paper. It is also possible to eliminate the work of describing and recording in.

(27) Part 27:
The integrated control device MC is configured to store information on the time required until the cooking is completed in the storage device MM after the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is completed.
Therefore, in order to record the information of the time required for cooking by the user each time, it is possible to eliminate the need for a special operation or the work of writing and recording on paper.

(28) Part 28:
In the operation management system of the home electric appliance of the first embodiment, the information processing device (home gateway) 411 detects that there is a person in the space where the cooking cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 are installed. In addition, when the start-up information from the cooking device 1 is received, it is determined that the cooking time zone is set, and a command for collecting inventory data to the refrigerator 401 is transmitted (step SD6 in FIG. 102). reference).
Therefore, when the user (resident) is in the vicinity of the refrigerator 401 or the cooking device 1 and there is a high possibility of cooking, the inventory data can be automatically collected, and moreover, during cooking. In addition, the user does not need to perform a special input operation for collecting the data, and useful information can be acquired without any effort, so that a highly convenient operation management system can be realized as a whole.

Embodiment 2.
122 to 123 show the cooking apparatus according to the second embodiment.
FIG. 122 is a block diagram showing the main control-related parts of the built-in type composite cooking device. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input key and the cooking process in the input operation unit from the selection of the cooperative cooking mode to the transition in the cooking device of FIG. 122 in chronological order. The same or corresponding parts as those in the first embodiment may be designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof may be omitted.

The second embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment in that a steam generator (boiler) 500 for blowing overheated steam into the heating chamber 113 is added to the second heating means HM2.

As shown in FIG. 122, the position and direction in which the steam generator (boiler) 500 blows steam into the heating chamber 113 may be from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, or plastic or porcelain having high heat resistance. , Tableware made of glass or the like, or a special saucer 145 may be blown from below to above.

Next, FIG. 123 will be described.
In FIG. 123, preheating is performed by the induction heating source 9, and the cooking step 1 is performed in parallel with this preheating operation. The cooking step 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2, and the cooking step 2 is a case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4) performed by the left heating unit 17HL.

In FIG. 123, when the input function of the main input key is effective and is related to the start or end of the cooking process, it is shown by a white rectangular frame. Not all input keys are drawn.

In the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are effective. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP and the 43MS is pressed, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (from this preparation period P1 stage, the next preheating step is started).

Further, when the user selects the left heating unit 17HL (at least pressing the input key 43L1), the preheating step (P2) is executed by the left heating unit 17HL. By pressing at least one of the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 in succession after the input key 43L1, the thermal power may actually be turned on (the standby state is set until the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are pressed).

As shown in FIG. 123, the preheating target temperature may be set by pressing the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 other than the input keys 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L. Further, since the control conditions such as the heating power and the heating time are automatically displayed on the left display unit 31L by the default setting, it is not always necessary to operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when the cooking period P2 is entered, the input functions of 43MC and 43M1 among the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43MS and 43MT of the central operation unit 40M become invalid (actually, the input operation signal to the integrated control device MC). Is ignored by the integrated controller MC).

In FIG. 123, the input function of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is shown by a broken line frame.

On the other hand, in the left heating unit 17HL, the preheating operation continues (preheating step). When the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from the input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated control device MC, so that the "preheating process" of the induction heating is stopped at this stage. However, the cooking period P2 ends. In order to maintain the preheating until the cooking step 2, the input key 43L1 is not pressed.

Further, although it depends on the size of the object N to be heated and the thermal power at the time of preheating, it may take several minutes after the induction heating source 9 is energized to reach a predetermined (target) preheating temperature. It is not necessary to temporarily shut off the preheating operation in the middle.

Next, when the input key 43MS is pressed again, the cooking step 1 (cooking period P3) in the heating chamber 113 is entered. The door 114 is opened in advance and the food to be cooked is placed on the 145. If the door 114 is not closed, even if the input key 43MS is pressed, the drive signal to the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 is not sent from the integrated control device MC.

Similarly, unless the door 114 is closed, steam is not blown out from the steam supply device 500 (energization of the steam supply device 500 is started when the input key 43MS in the preparation period P1 is pressed).

Since the inside of the heating chamber 113 is covered with high-temperature steam and irradiated with microwaves, even frozen foods are thawed in a short time. Further, by adding the radiant heat of the oven heating source 188, the atmosphere inside the heating chamber 113 becomes high, and the cooking (including thawing) of the object to be cooked is further promoted.

If the input key 43MT is pressed once, the cooking step 1 is completed, and at this stage, the heating pause period P4 is entered. That is, the transition period TR is entered. At this stage, among the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, all the input functions of 43MC and 43M1 are enabled.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123, since the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are all effectively maintained, the preheating control conditions can be changed by the left heating unit 17HL.

When the user presses the input key 43MT once to enter the transition period TR, the food to be cooked in the middle of cooking from the heating chamber 113 is placed on the food to be heated N already heated by the left heating unit 17HL. Move it. In this case, since the frying pan, the pan, and the like are preheated by the induction heating source 9, the dishes and containers used in the heating chamber 113 are not moved onto the left heating portion 17HL.

If the door 114 is opened in the middle of the cooking step 1 without pressing the input key 43MT even once, the cooking in the heating chamber 113 is stopped at that point, so that the object to be cooked is directly from the heating chamber 113. May be transferred to the object to be heated N on the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, when the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is touched, the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started by the left heating unit 17HL. That is, the object to be cooked is cooked on the object N to be heated, which has already become hot in the preheating step.
Then, by pressing the input key 43L1, the cooking step 2 can be completed at an arbitrary timing.

The cooking step 2 may be automatically terminated when the time set by the timer cooking or the time determined by the default value has elapsed. The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled at the same time as the end of the cooking step 2 regardless of whether the user terminates it arbitrarily or automatically (in FIG. 123, the input key 43MT is pressed to press the cooperative cooking mode KM3). Although the figure is such that the input key 43MT may be pressed in this way).

Therefore, if it is desired to perform additional heating with the left heating unit 17HL again immediately after the end of the cooking step 2, the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed again and the input keys 43M1 and 43M2 are operated to cook independently. Cooking may be performed in the mode KM1 (this is not a part of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, but the cooking process of the single heating mode KM1).

It should be noted that the control may be such that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not automatically canceled at the same time as the end of the cooking step 2. Immediately after finishing the cooking step 2, for example, when the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain time (for example, within 1 minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, the cooperative cooking mode is used. It may be a process of giving guidance to be handled as a part of KM3 and waiting for user input (operation of input key 43M1).
In this way, after the cooking step 2 is completed, the user can confirm the finished state of the object to be cooked, and if the heating is insufficient, the user can immediately touch the input key 43L1. This method can also improve the usability of the user.

Also in the second embodiment, when the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality between the preheating step and the cooking step 2, as described in the first embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 45 and 46). The heating source and cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are stopped and notified.

Modifications of Embodiments 1 and 2.
The cooking utensil 1 disclosed in the first and second embodiments may be modified as follows.
That is,
A main body 110 (main body case HC) having a top plate 15 on which the object to be heated N is placed, and
An induction heating source 9 as a first heating means HM1 that is arranged in the main body 110 and heats the object N to be heated.
The heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body 110 and
A microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 as a second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked, which are arranged inside the main body 110 and housed inside the heating chamber 113.
The first operation units 40R and 40L that set the heating conditions of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) and command the start and stop of the heating operation.
A second operation unit which is arranged separately from the first operation units 40R and 40L on the main body 110, sets the heating conditions of the second heating means HM2, and commands the start and stop of the heating operation. 40M (input keys 43MS, 43MT) and
A main operation unit (operation unit of the main power switch 97) 98, which is arranged in the main body 110 and collectively stops heating of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The integrated control device MC for controlling the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 based on the heating conditions set by the first operation unit 40R and the second operation unit 40M is provided. ,
The integrated control device MC has a preheating step of preheating the heated object N on the top plate 15 using the first heating means HM1 for one object to be cooked, and the second heating means. It has a function of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 that executes the cooking step of heating the object to be cooked by using the heating means HM2 at the same time zone.
In the integrated control device MC, in the execution process of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the first heating means HM1 executes the preheating step, and the second heating means HM2 executes the cooking step 1. At the stage of being
(1) Upon receiving a stop command from the main operation unit 98, the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 is stopped, and the setting of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is released. 1 stop function and
(2) When a stop command is received from the first operation units 40R and 40L, the preheating operation by the first heating means HM1 is stopped, the setting of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is maintained, and the second The cooking process 1 by the heating means HM2 has a second stop function to be continued.
It is a cooker 1 provided.

According to this configuration, in order to collectively shut off all the power sources after cooking, the main operation unit 98 can collectively shut off the power sources.

Further, in order to stop only the preheating operation in the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the preheating operation can be stopped by the first operation units 40R and 40L of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) that performs the preheating operation. ..

Moreover, even if the preheating operation is stopped in this way, the setting of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is still maintained. Therefore, even the execution of the cooking step 1 by the second heating means HM2 is not stopped, so that the cooking of the cooking step 1 is not adversely affected.

Because of this configuration, when the object to be heated N is temporarily lifted or moved on the top plate 15, even if the preheating operation is temporarily stopped, the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is used again. It is possible to return to cooking and provide a cooker that is highly convenient for users.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of this modification, the main body 110 detects an abnormal state due to the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9), and the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 is urgently performed. It also has an abnormality detection unit EM that stops.
When the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 is urgently stopped by the abnormality detection unit EM, the setting information of the preheating target temperature as the setting condition of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC. It may be configured to be stored (maintained) in the like.

With this configuration, it is not necessary to set the preheating target temperature once set and restart the preheating, and it can be expected to improve the usability of the user.

Other modifications of Embodiments 1 and 2.
In the first embodiment, the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 on which the object to be heated N is placed, and
An induction heating source 9 as a first heating means HM1 that is arranged in the main body 110 and heats the object N to be heated.
The heating chamber 113 arranged in the main body 110 and
A microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188, which are arranged in the main body 110 and serve as a second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber 113,
The first operation units 40R and 40L, which are arranged on the top plate 15, set the heating conditions of the first heating means HM1 and command the start and stop of the heating operation, and the like.
A second operation unit which is arranged separately from the first operation units 40L and 40R on the main body 110, sets the heating conditions of the second heating means HM2, and commands the start and stop of the heating operation. 40M and
A main operation unit (main power switch operation unit) 98, which is arranged in the main body 110 and collectively stops heating of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
An integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 based on the heating conditions set by the first operation unit 40R, 40L and the second operation unit 40M. Equipped with
The integrated control device MC has a preheating step of preheating the heated object N on the top plate 15 using the first heating means HM1 for one object to be cooked, and the second heating means. It has a function of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 that executes the cooking process of heating the object to be cooked by using the heating means HM2 at the same time zone.
In the integrated control device MC, in the execution process of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the first heating means HM1 executes the preheating step, and the second heating means HM2 executes the cooking step 1. At the stage of being
(1) Upon receiving a stop command from the main operation unit 98, the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 is stopped, and the setting of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is released. 1 stop function and
(2) When a stop command is received from the first operation unit 40R, the preheating operation by the first heating means HM1 is stopped, the setting of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is maintained, and the second heating is performed. Cooking process 1 by means HM2 has a second stop function to continue,
(3) Upon receiving a release command from the second operation unit 40M, the setting of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is released, and the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 and the heating by the second heating means HM2 are performed. The operation and the third stop function to stop each,
The provided cooking cooker 1 was disclosed.

Therefore, in order to collectively shut off all the power sources after cooking, the main operation unit 98 can collectively shut off the power sources. Further, in order to stop only the preheating operation in the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the preheating operation can be stopped by the first operation units 40R and 40L of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) that performs the preheating operation. ..
Further, by operating the second operation unit 40M (input key 43MT of the central operation unit), the setting itself of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 can be canceled.
As described above, the user can appropriately select the stop method according to the purpose. Further, if the first operation units 40L and 40R are operated, the execution of the cooking step 1 by the second heating means HM2 is not stopped, so that only the preheating operation is performed without adversely affecting the cooking of the cooking step 1. Can be stopped, and it can be expected to improve user convenience.

Summary of Embodiment 2.
In the second embodiment, the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
Main body 110 and
The heating chamber 113 formed inside the main body 110 and
The first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N placed on the upper surface of the main body 110,
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber 113,
The notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30, left side display unit 31L, right side display unit 31R) that provides information, and
The integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN,
An input operation unit 40 that gives a command to the integrated control device MC is provided.
The input operation unit 40 includes individual operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means HM1, and a shared operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1. Have and
The integrated control device MC has an operation program of a coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 that drives the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in a predetermined order.
In the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the preheating step of preheating the object to be heated N by the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 inside the heating chamber 113 in parallel with the preheating step. After the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 1 are completed, the cooked matter is transferred from the heating chamber 113 to the cooked object N preheated in the preheated step, and the cooked food is further heated. Has cooking process 2 and
The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is
(1) In the shared operation unit 40M, selection of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 (input key 43MC) and determination to start the preheating step and the cooking step 1 (input key 43MS) are performed.
(2) The start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed by the shared operation unit 40M (using the input key 43MS and the input key 43MT).
(3) The end of the preheating step and the end of the cooking step 2 are performed by the individual operation units 40L and 40R (input key 43L1).
The characteristic cooking device 1 was disclosed.

According to this configuration, in one cooking device, it is possible to select a linked preheating cooking mode, which is one of the linked cooking modes in which the heating location and the heating means are different, so that the cooking device is highly convenient and can handle a wide range of cooking. Will be.

Moreover, in the cooperative preheating cooking mode, the shared operation unit 40M may select the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 and decide to start the cooking process, and the shared operation unit 40M may start and end the cooking process 1. The subsequent start and end of the cooking process 2 and the end of the preheating process are all performed by the individual operation units 40L and 40R corresponding to the induction heating source 9, so that the operation rules are simple and the user's operation mistakes and confusion. It can be expected to prevent the inviting. Therefore, it is possible to provide a cooking cooker having improved operability while having two or more heating sources and input operation units.

Embodiment 3.
FIG. 124 is a plan view of a front portion for explaining the arrangement of an input operation unit and various display units in the cooking device 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input key and the cooking process in the input operation unit from the selection of the cooperative cooking mode to the transition in the cooking device of FIG. 124 in chronological order. The same or corresponding parts as those in the first embodiment may be designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof may be omitted.

In the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the preheating step is performed by the induction heating source 9, but the object N to be heated such as a large-diameter frying pan used at the time of preheating is individually corresponding to the induction heating source 9. The first embodiment is that the shared operation unit 40M can start and end all the steps from preheating to the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 in consideration of hindering the operation of the operation units 40L and 40R. And 2 are very different.

Next, FIG. 124 will be described.
Reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation unit formed on the front upper surface of the top plate 15, which includes a left operation unit 40L, a center operation unit 40M, and a right operation unit 40R (not shown).
The left operation unit 40L may be referred to as an "individual operation unit" because it performs an input operation only for the induction heating source 9.
On the other hand, the central operation unit 40M may be referred to as a "shared operation unit" because it is commonly used for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. The "shared operation unit" also includes a "cooperative operation unit" 40MC for executing the cooperative cooking mode.

A total of five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L are arranged on the left operation unit 40L. As described in the first embodiment, the input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R are assigned one or a plurality of input functions, and have the same functions as those in the first embodiment.

Further, the functions of various input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43MS, 43MT and the like arranged in the central operation unit 40M are also the same as those in the first embodiment.

The object to be heated N placed on the left heating portion 17HL is, for example, a frying pan having a diameter of about 300 mm and a relatively large diameter. The NH is a handle that is detachably attached to the mouth edge of the object to be heated N (frying pan). In other words, it is a handle that can be freely removed by the user.

The object to be heated N has a size that allows the door 114 to be closed by being inserted into the heating chamber 113 through the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113. However, in that case, the handle NH needs to be removed. The FG indicates the fingertip of the user.
Although the handle NH is elongated in the horizontal direction in FIG. 124, some of the handles are actually tilted diagonally upward. There is also a handle that rises vertically from the middle and is L-shaped when viewed from the side.

Next, FIG. 125 will be described.
In FIG. 125, preheating is performed by the induction heating source 9, and after this preheating operation, the cooking step 1 is performed as it is. The subsequent cooking step 2 is a case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4) performed by the second heating means HM2.

In FIG. 125, when the input function of the main input key is effective and is related to the start or end of the cooking process, it is shown by a white rectangular frame. Not all input keys are drawn.

In the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are effective. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP and the 43MS is pressed, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (from this preparation period P1 stage, the next preheating step is started).

Further, when the user selects the left heating unit 17HL (at least pressing the input key 43L1), the preheating step (P2) is executed by the left heating unit 17HL.
As shown in FIG. 125, the preheating target temperature may be set by pressing the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 other than the input keys 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L. Further, since the control conditions such as the heating power and the heating time are automatically displayed on the left display unit 31L by the default setting, it is not always necessary to operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when the cooking period P2 is entered, the input functions of 43MC and 43M1 among the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43MS and 43MT of the central operation unit 40M become invalid (actually, the input operation signal to the integrated control device MC). Is ignored by the integrated controller MC).

In FIG. 125, the input function of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is shown by a broken line frame.

On the other hand, in the left heating unit 17HL, the preheating operation continues (preheating step). When the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from the input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated control device MC, so that the "preheating process" of the induction heating is stopped at this stage. However, the cooking period P2 ends. In order to maintain the preheating until the cooking step 2, the input key 43L1 is not pressed.

When the object N to be heated reaches the (target) preheating temperature set by the user or the default set temperature, the voice synthesizer 95 is notified by voice that the preheating is completed. Further, the completion of preheating is also displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.

Therefore, the user places the object to be cooked on the object to be heated N (frying pan) maintained at a high temperature and cooks it by heating (cooking step 1).
During this cooking step 1, other cooking cannot be performed in the heating chamber 113. Since the input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 are disabled, the heating chamber 113 is occupied.

When the input key 43MT is pressed on the shared operation unit 40M, the user can finish the cooking step 1 at an arbitrary timing.

Next, the user lifts the object to be heated N from the left heating unit 17HL with the handle NH of the object to be heated N attached (locked state), and moves the object N to the heating chamber 113 in which the door 114 is opened. And finally, remove the handle NH.

In this way, the food to be cooked is housed in the heating chamber 113 while being placed on the food to be heated N.
If the door 114 is not closed, even if the input key 43MS is pressed, the drive signal to the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 is not sent from the integrated control device MC.
Then, when the input key 43MS is pressed next, the cooking step 2 (cooking period P5) in the heating chamber 113 is entered.

In the cooking step 2, high-temperature steam from the steam supply device 500 as shown in the second embodiment may be supplied.

As described above, the object to be cooked is cooked inside the heating chamber 113. Therefore, if the input key 43MT is pressed once, the cooking step 2 is completed. At this stage, the input key 43MT is further performed. When is pressed, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4) is all canceled.

Since the occupation of the left heating unit 17HL is released at the stage of the cooking step 2, other objects to be cooked can be cooked by the left heating unit 17HL.

The cooking step 2 may be automatically terminated when the time set by the timer cooking or the time determined by the default value has elapsed. The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled at the same time as the end of the cooking step 2 regardless of whether the user terminates it arbitrarily or automatically (in FIG. 125, the input key 43MT is pressed to press the cooperative cooking mode KM3). Although the figure is such that the input key 43MT may be pressed in this way).

It should be noted that the control may be such that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not automatically canceled at the same time as the end of the cooking step 2. Immediately after finishing the cooking step 2, for example, when the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain time (for example, within 1 minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, the cooperative cooking mode is used. It may be a process of giving guidance to be handled as a part of KM3 and waiting for user input (operation of input key 43M1).
In this way, after finishing the cooking step 2, the user can confirm the finished state of the object to be cooked, and if the heating is insufficient, the user can immediately touch the input key 43MS. This method can also improve the usability of the user.

Also in the third embodiment, when the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality between the preheating step and the cooking step 2, as described in the first embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 45 and 46). The heating source and cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are stopped and notified.

Summary of Embodiment 3.
As is clear from the above description, the cooking cooker 1 of the third embodiment discloses the following configuration.
That is,
Main body 110 and
The heating chamber 113 formed inside the main body 110 and
The first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N placed on the upper surface of the main body 110,
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber 113,
The notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30, left side display unit 31L, right side display unit 31R) that provides information, and
The integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN,
An input operation unit 40 that gives a command to the integrated control device MC is provided.
The input operation unit 40 includes individual operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means HM1, and a shared operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1. Have and
The integrated control device MC has an operation program of a coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 that drives the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in a predetermined order.
In the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, the preheating step of preheating the object to be heated N by the first heating means HM1 and the preheating step of using the object N to be heated by the first heating means HM1 are used. After the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 1 are completed, the cooked object N (frying pan) used in the cooking step 1 is moved to the heating chamber 113 to bring the cooked food into the heating chamber 113. It has a cooking step 2 of transferring and further heating the object to be cooked.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is
(1) In the shared operation unit 40M, selection of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 (input key 43MC) and determination to start the preheating step and the cooking step 1 (input key 43MS) are performed.
(2) The start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed by the shared operation unit 40M (using the input key 43MS and the input key 43MT).
(3) The end of the preheating step and the end of the cooking step 2 are performed by the shared operation unit 40M (input key 43MT).
The characteristic cooking device 1 was disclosed.

According to this configuration, in one cooking device, it is possible to select a linked preheating cooking mode, which is one of the linked cooking modes in which the heating location and the heating means are different, so that the cooking device is highly convenient and can handle a wide range of cooking. Will be.

Moreover, in the linked preheating cooking mode, the shared operation unit 40M can determine a series of operations from the start to the end of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, so that the operation rule is simple and the user's operation error or confusion can be caused. It can be expected to prevent the invitation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a cooking cooker having improved operability while having two or more heating sources and input operation units.

Further, when a heated object N such as a frying pan having a relatively large diameter is used as in the third embodiment, the position of the handle NH is set to the left operation unit 40L or the right as shown in FIG. 124. It may be shaped to cross directly above or near the operation unit 40R, and there is a concern that the fingertip FG may approach the handle NH when operating the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R to stop the heating operation. be. In particular, when trying to move the object to be heated N in a hurry, the fingertip may unintentionally touch the handle NH.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the heating control of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is considered in view of the fact that a large-diameter frying pan or the like is used to bake a large amount of dumplings or the like by using the cooperative cooking mode KM3. All of the operations can be performed in the shared operation unit 40M. Therefore, even if the individual operation units 40L and 40R and the handle NH intersect as described above, the shared operation unit 40M can be used to accurately give a control command such as heating stop. That is, it is possible to provide the cooking device 1 with enhanced safety.

Embodiment 4.
FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input key and the cooking process in the input operation unit from the selection of the cooperative cooking mode to the transition in the heating cooker 1 of the fourth embodiment in chronological order. The same or corresponding parts as those in the first embodiment may be designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof may be omitted.

The fourth embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment in that the preheating step is performed in the heating chamber 113.
Hereinafter, FIG. 126 will be described.
In the fourth embodiment, preheating is performed by the second heating means HM2, and after this preheating operation, the cooking step 1 is performed as it is in the heating chamber 113. The subsequent cooking step 1 is a case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4) performed by the first heating means HM1.

In FIG. 126, when the input function of the main input key is effective and is related to the start or end of the cooking process, it is shown by a white rectangular frame. Not all input keys are drawn.

In the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M (shared operation unit 40M) are effective. Press the input key 43MC to display the first specific screen 30SP. From the cooking menu displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, select the desired identification information 330 of the object to be cooked, and press the input key 43MS.
Then, the mode shifts to the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 (from this preparation period P1 stage, the next preheating step is started).

The integrated control device MC specifies that the preheating step is performed by the oven heating source 188 in the heating chamber 113 when the identification information 330 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP. Therefore, it can be understood that the user performs the preheating operation in the heating chamber 113 before pressing the input key 43MS.

Even if the user does not operate the shared operation unit 40M, if the door 114 is closed, the oven heating source 188 is energized and the cooking period P2 (preheating step) is executed.

On the other hand, when the cooking period P2 is entered, the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3 are used in the corresponding left operation unit (individual operation unit) 40L of the left heating unit 17HL scheduled to be used in the cooking step 2 in the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4. The input function of is disabled (actually, even if the input operation signal reaches the integrated controller MC, it is ignored by the integrated controller MC).

In FIG. 126, it is shown by a broken line frame that the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit (individual operation unit) 40L are disabled.
Since the input function of the right operation unit 40L is effectively maintained during this cooking period P2, the right heating unit 17HR can be used for another cooking (however, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2). Cannot be set).

When the internal atmospheric temperature of the heating chamber 113 reaches the (target) preheating temperature (for example, 200 ° C.) set by the user or the default set temperature, the voice synthesizer 95 is notified by voice that the preheating is completed. Further, the completion of preheating is also displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.

Therefore, the user opens the door 114 and ends the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113. At that time, in consideration of the next cooking step 2, the cooked food may be cooked while being placed on the object to be heated N (frying pan) as shown in FIG. 124. Even if the object N to be heated is made of metal, microwave cooking is possible as long as the entire upper surface is open, such as a frying pan. Alternatively, the food to be cooked may be placed on a cooking plate made of heat-resistant plastic or heat-resistant glass.

In the cooking period P3, not only the oven heating source 188 operates, but also the microwave heating source 189 may be driven to heat the object to be cooked by the synergistic action of radiant heat and microwave.

No other cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 between the preheating step 1 and the cooking step 1. Although the input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 are enabled, other cooking modes cannot be set unless the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 including the preheating process is canceled (by pressing the input key 43MT twice).

When the input key 43MT is pressed on the shared operation unit 40M, the user can finish the cooking step 1 at an arbitrary timing.

The integrated control device MC may inform the progress information at any time by the additional information 331 (see FIG. 60 or the like of the first embodiment) or the like so that the user can refer to the completion of the cooking step 1. In addition, the third reference information (see FIGS. 68 and 70 of the first embodiment) FA3 and the like are notified to notify that a predetermined time (TN3) has elapsed from the time when the cooking step 1 is started. May be.

When the input key 43MT is pressed, the cooking step 1 is completed and the heating pause period P4 is entered.
The user can end at any time.
When the heating pause period P4 is entered, the input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 of the shared operation unit 40M are restored, so that it is possible to start cooking other objects to be cooked in the heating chamber 113.

On the other hand, even in the individual operation unit 40L, when the heating pause period P4 is entered, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3 are restored. Can be started.

Next, in the heating pause period P4, the user opens the door 114 and takes out the food to be cooked from the heating chamber 113.
At that time, when the heated object N (frying pan) from which the handle NH is removed is used as described above, the heated object N with the handle NH attached and the cooked object is placed in the heating chamber. Take out from 113. Then, it is moved onto the left heating unit 17HL.

In this way, the object to be cooked remains on the object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17HL. Then, when the input key 43M1 is pressed, the cooking step 2 (cooking period P5) is entered. The heating power may be adjusted by pressing the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

Since the object to be cooked is cooked by the left heating unit 17HL as described above, the cooking step 2 is completed by pressing the input key 43L1 on the left individual operation unit 40L once.
At this stage, when the input key 43MT of the shared operation unit 40MC is pressed, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4) is all canceled.

Since the occupancy of the heating chamber 113 is released at the stage of the cooking step 2, other objects to be cooked can be cooked in the heating chamber 113.

The cooking step 2 may be automatically terminated when the time set by the timer cooking or the time determined by the default value has elapsed. The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled at the same time as the end of the cooking step 2 regardless of whether the user terminates it arbitrarily or automatically (in FIG. 126, the input key 43MT is pressed to press the cooperative cooking mode KM3). Although the figure is such that the input key 43MT may be pressed in this way).

It should be noted that the control may be such that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not automatically canceled at the same time as the end of the cooking step 2. Immediately after finishing the cooking step 2, for example, when the start switch (input key 43L2 or input key 43L3) is pressed within a certain time (for example, within 1 minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30. , The process may be such that the user is instructed to handle the cooking mode as a part of the KM3 and waits for the user's cooking restart input (operation of the input key 43L1).
In this way, after finishing the cooking step 2, the user can confirm the finished state of the object to be cooked, and if the heating is insufficient, the user can immediately touch the input keys 43L2 or 43L3. This method can also improve the usability of the user.

Also in the fourth embodiment, when the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality between the preheating step and the cooking step 2, as described in the first embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 45 and 46). The heating source and cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are stopped and notified.

Summary of Embodiment 4.

As is clear from the above description, in the fourth embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the ninth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
Main body 110 and
The heating chamber 113 formed inside the main body 110 and
The first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N placed on the upper surface of the main body 110,
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber 113,
The notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30, left side display unit 31L, right side display unit 31R) that provides information, and
The integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN,
An input operation unit 40 that gives a command to the integrated control device MC is provided.
The input operation unit 40 includes individual operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means HM1, and a shared operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1. Have and
The integrated control device MC has an operation program of a coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 that drives the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in a predetermined order.
In the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the preheating step of preheating the object to be heated N by the second heating means HM2 and the preheating step of using the object N to be heated by the second heating means HM2 are used. After the cooking step 1 for cooking and the cooking step 1 are completed, the object to be heated N (frying pan) used in the cooking step 1 is placed on the heating unit 17HL (or 17HR) of the induction heating source 9. It has a cooking step 2 and 2 in which the object to be cooked is further heated by moving.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is
(1) In the shared operation unit 40M, selection of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 (input key 43MC) and determination to start the preheating step and the cooking step 1 (input key 43MS) are performed.
(2) The end of the preheating step and the start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed by the shared operation unit 40M (input key 43MT).
(3) The start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed by the shared operation unit 40M (using the input key 43MS and the input key 43MT).
(4) The start and end of the cooking step 2 are performed by the individual operation units 40L and 40R (using the input key 43L1).
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

According to this configuration, in one cooking device, it is possible to select a linked preheating cooking mode, which is one of the linked cooking modes in which the heating location and the heating means are different, so that the cooking device is highly convenient and can handle a wide range of cooking. Will be.

Moreover, in the linked preheating cooking mode, a series of operations from the start to the end of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 can be determined in the shared operation unit 40M, and subsequently, the start and end of the cooking step 1 can also be determined. The rules are simple, and it can be expected to prevent user operation mistakes and confusion. Therefore, it is possible to provide a cooking cooker having improved operability while having two or more heating sources and input operation units.

Other embodiments.
In the first embodiment, with respect to the induction heating source 9 first used in the (first) cooperative cooking mode (see FIG. 61), the operation other than the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is prohibited or restricted from the input operation unit 40. Was the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR, but another induction heating unit may be added to the target.

Further, in the second cooperative cooking mode (see FIG. 61), the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, or both of them are driven at the same time to start the cooking process. In this case, the microwave heating source is used. The operation of the 189, the oven heating source 188, or both of them in a cooking mode other than the cooperative cooking mode KM3 may be prohibited or restricted. In both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode, by preferentially securing the heating source required in the cooking process, it is possible to perform a wide range of cooking using a plurality of heating means in the cooperative cooking mode. ..

In the description of the first embodiment, when the integrated control device MC receives the input for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, the display corresponding to the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3 is displayed. As an operation, the first display screen 30SP dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed, or the second display screen 30SC dedicated to the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, the left side display unit 31L, or the like. rice field.
Instead of such an aspect of switching the entire screen, the basic configuration of the first display screen 30SP and the second display screen 30SC is unified, and the design is such that the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3 are clearly distinguished. May be.

For example, on the first display screen 30SP, it is clearly displayed in characters that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed, while on the second display screen 30SC, it is clearly displayed in characters that the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed. It should be displayed in. This makes it even easier to distinguish between the two display screens.

Further, a light emitting display unit such as the light emitting display unit 27L described in the first embodiment is provided in each of the display units of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2, and when either one is emitting light. , It suffices to know that it is the cooking mode on the light emitting side.

As described above, when the integrated control device MC receives the input for selection of the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, and when the display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode is performed, this A cooking mode display unit (light emitting unit) may be provided.

The cooperative cooking mode is not limited to being composed of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2. For example, the purpose is to make up for the lack of heating by finally returning the food to be cooked in which the cooking step 1 is performed in the left heating portion 17HL of the induction heating source 9 and the cooking step 2 is performed in the microwave heating source 189 onto the top plate 15. , A cooking step 3 is provided for the purpose of adjusting, adding seasonings, other cooking liquids, and the like. This cooking step 3 is performed by the induction heating source 9. In this case, it is not necessary to unify the same heating units 17HL and 17HR in the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 3.

As one example, the final cooking is finished while directly visually checking on the right heating unit 17HR. In other words, it is a case where the food to be cooked substantially completed in the cooking step 2 is transferred onto the right heating unit 17HR and weakly heated for a long time to increase the maturity of ingredients such as meat and vegetables and broth.

In the above description, in the cooperative cooking mode, when one cooking menu (for example, hamburger steak) is specified, the heating source to be used and its order are automatically determined, but the user's intention is prioritized. You may change it to.

For example, "Cooking object X" and "Cooking object Y", which are one of the cooperative cooking modes, are relatively frequently used by the user, and both of them are used in the cooking process 1 in the right heating unit 17HR. Since this is done in, it is assumed that the user is accustomed to cooking in the right heating unit 17HR.

After that, when the user selects "Cooking item Z", which is one of the cooperative cooking modes, if the left heating unit 17HL is specified, the user is not accustomed to using it, so it is assumed that the operation may be confusing. To.

Therefore, if there is no problem with either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL from the determination result of the permission condition by the integrated control device MC, when the linked cooking mode is first selected, the user can see on the first specific screen 30SP. The right heating unit 17HR that you are accustomed to may be displayed preferentially. That is, for example, when selecting the heating unit, the "right heating unit" may always be displayed, and then the user may input to specify the left heating unit 17HR.

On the other hand, if the heating unit desired by the user cannot be heated properly due to restrictions such as the heating power value for cooking the object to be cooked and the energization control pattern of induction heating, the operation of the integrated control device MC side is performed. If only the heating part specified in the program (default setting) can be cooked, it will not be misused or misunderstood by the user. For example, in the case where a heating unit having a relatively weak heating power such as the central heating unit 17HM is provided in addition to the left and right heating units 17HL and 17HR, if the user selects it, the cooking cooker 1 side notifies the user. , It is good to give guidance to correct (move the object to be heated such as a pot to another heating part).

In the first embodiment, two are an internal path that passes through the inside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and an external path that passes through the outside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121. There was one, but this route may be replaced and changed as follows.
(1) Internal route: A route that cools the inverter circuit board 121 by the outside air sucked from the second intake port 152F by the third cooling fan 128, introduces the cooling air into the heating chamber 113, and reaches the exhaust duct 102.
(2) External path: The heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is cooled by the outside air sucked from the second intake port 152B by the fourth cooling fan 129, and the cooling air is guided to the outside of the heating chamber 113, and finally. The route leading to the exhaust duct 102.

Generally, the heat dissipation unit 122H of the magnetron 122 has a structure in which a plurality of heat sinks (heat sink fins) are laminated and cooling air passes through a narrow space between the heat sinks to exchange heat (heat dissipation). Therefore, the pressure loss of the cooling air is large. In other words, the air passage resistance is large.
Therefore, by exhausting the cooling air that has passed through the heat radiating section 122H of the magnetron 122 without entering the heating chamber 113 (shortening the length of the air passage), the improvement that the internal path and the external path are balanced. Is. This is effective when the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have the same performance. That is, as described in the first embodiment, in order to arrange the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 with exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rated specifications, and to realize the procurement cost at the time of manufacturing at a low cost. This is a promising plan.

Further, after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122, the internal path for the cooling air RF6 passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113 is abolished, and the entire amount of the cooling air RF7 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121 is used as it is. It may be discharged to the outside of the heating cooker 1 through the duct 307 to simplify the cooling air passage inside the lower unit 200. By reducing the air passage resistance, the rated air blowing capacity of the fourth cooling fan 129 can be changed to a lower level. This has advantages such as cost advantage.

For users who do not need both the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 at the same time as shown in the first to fourth embodiments, the sales of the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 and the installation work on the kitchen furniture 2 are separately performed. Become. The lower unit 200 is set as an optional item, for example. In such a case, for example, if the packing form for selling the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 as a set and the packing form for selling only the upper unit 100 are set separately, the convenience at the time of sale is impaired. Never.

In the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure, as shown in the first to fourth embodiments, it is not essential that the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 are configured in separate housings. Therefore, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 may be configured by one housing (main body case HC) from the beginning.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 are formed of a thin metal plate. However, either one or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be formed of a plastic material. For example, it may be formed of a thermoplastic plastic material. One example of the material is PET or PA, PP or ABS. "PET" refers to polyethylene terephthalate. Further, "PA" means polyamide and "PP" means polypropylene. It may be decided in consideration of the heat resistant temperature and the durability as a structure. Further, only a part of the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 may be formed of plastic, and the remaining portion may be formed of a metal plate material.

As the induction heating circuit, various drive methods such as a half-bridge circuit and a full-bridge circuit may be adopted depending on the form and number of the IH coils 17L and 17R. For example, the full bridge circuit is proposed in Japanese Patent No. 6130411 and Japanese Patent No. 617h23.

Further, the IH coil is arranged not only in a donut-shaped form but also in an annular main heating coil and close to both sides of the main heating coil, as shown in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 55338546. An induction heating unit including a flat first sub-heating coil and a second sub-heating coil having a width dimension smaller than the radius of the main heating coil may be used.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the induction heating is started, the induction heating operation is started under the default conditions (thermal power value and thermal power level) without setting the thermal power, and then the heating start in which the user decides the desired thermal power. The operation method was adopted. However, other methods may be used. For example, after turning on the main power, be sure to determine the target induction heating source, the thermal power value (watt) and the thermal power level (one of the stages such as thermal power "large" to "small"), and then input the specified values. An operation method in which a start command is given by a key or the like may be adopted, and such a method does not affect the effect and the essential effect of the present disclosure.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, the lower air passage at the time of microwave heating cools the air passage (internal path) of the cooling air that cooled the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and the inverter circuit board 121. There are two air passages (external path) for the cooling air, and these two air passages are finally gathered in one exhaust duct 102 and then heated via the common exhaust port 20. It was released to the outside of the cooker 1.

However, it is not always necessary to go through one (common) exhaust duct as such, and it is not necessary to collect the exhaust flow to one exhaust port 20. For example, an exhaust port 20 and another second exhaust port are provided at different positions (positions directly below the exhaust cover 19), and cooling air of either the internal path or the external path is blown from the second exhaust port. It may be exhausted. In particular, in the form in which the rear portion of the upper unit 100 is partitioned back and forth by the partition plate 52 (Embodiment 1), it is preferable that the exhaust port faces the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52.

In the first embodiment, the operation key 98 of the main power switch 97 is arranged on the input operation unit 40 (including the operation key 98) exposed on the upper surface of the main body case HC, and is operated from above the main body case HC. It was a form of The operation key 98 may be called an operation button, but it has basically the same structure.

However, the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure is not limited to the form of such an input operation unit 40. For example, the input operation unit 40 does not need to be constantly exposed when viewed from above the main body case HC, and may be stored inside the main body case HC when not in use. As a storage form, a method of moving in the horizontal direction such as a drawer and a method of rotating around one fulcrum have been conventionally known.

The method of rotating and storing is called an operation unit of the kangaroo pocket mechanism, and is proposed in, for example, JP-A-2004-28569, JP-A-2004-3845, JP-A-3-2h26, and the like. Has been done. Further, as the main power switch 97, a seesaw type switch as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-3845 may be used.

Even the input operation unit 40 that is rotated and stored can be operated from above (direction) of the main body case HC at the time of use. That is, since the user can perform the main power supply of the cooking cooker 1 while standing in the vicinity of the front of the cooking cooker 1, there is no problem in realizing the cooking cooker 1 of the present disclosure. In addition, the operability is good without forcing the user to take an unreasonable posture.
The input operation unit 40 that is rotated and stored in this way may be provided, for example, on the right front cover 112 described in the first embodiment.

In addition, a kangaroo pocket mechanism that includes a heating unit (gas burner, etc.) exposed (faced) on the top plate and a heating unit in the heating chamber (grill storage), and rotates and stores each operation unit. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-172941 also proposes a cooking device that employs the operation unit of the above.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the example in which the magnetron is used as the microwave generation source 122 has been described, but microwaves may be generated by other means. For example, a heating cooker using a semiconductor oscillator has been proposed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-509587, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-9562, and the like.

In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-509587, the microwave generator is composed of a small signal generator (s) configured to generate a high frequency signal at the first power level and the small signal generator. It includes a solid-state high-frequency signal amplifier (solid-state amplifier, one or more) that amplifies the high-frequency signal of the above. Then, the solid-state amplifier amplifies the first high-frequency signal having the first low power level into the second high-frequency signal having the second high power level, and supplies the signal to the heating chamber containing the food to be cooked (food). Was there.
In realizing the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure, a microwave generation source composed of such a semiconductor element may be used.

In the first embodiment, it has been described that the operation of the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 is performed independently of the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 of the upper unit 100. That is, it has been explained that when the induction heating source 9 is used, the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are not operated when the upper (first) cooling fan 60 for cooling is operated. However, this does not mean that the (first) cooling fan 60 and the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are never operated at the same time.

For example, as described in FIG. 38 of the first embodiment, all the cooling fans are set for a short time at the stage of checking for abnormalities at startup (see step ST2 of FIG. 38) before selecting the heating source to be used. It is also possible to adopt a method in which the integrated control device MC checks whether an abnormal current, voltage, etc. is generated on the circuit by performing a trial run only. In that case, for a certain short time period, each cooling fan 60, 61, 128, and 129 may be started all at once, or they may be started one by one for a short time. This does not impair the intrinsic effect of the present disclosure.

In the first embodiment, the user had to select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL (FIG. 74, step STR5). That is, first, either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL was selected by the input key 43M2.
However, the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure does not necessarily require such a step of selecting a heating unit.

For example, Japanese Patent No. 6230712 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-44852
A plurality of heating coils regularly arranged adjacent to each other below the top plate on which the object to be heated is placed, an inverter circuit that supplies a high-frequency current to the heating coils, and a heated coil directly above the heating coils. It is provided with a heated object placement determination unit for determining whether or not an object is placed, an input operation unit provided on the upper surface of the main body, and a control device.
The control device determines that the heated object is placed on the heating coil by the heated object placement determination unit, and based on the result, the heated object is placed in the display area of the display screen. Display the number of icons corresponding to
The control device operates so that the cooking conditions for the first heated object can be input by detecting that the user touches the first icon corresponding to the first heated object. The induction heating cooker is disclosed.

Further, in Japanese Patent No. 5202064,
A top plate on which an object to be heated such as a pot is placed, a plurality of induction heating coils dispersedly arranged below the top plate, a sensor for detecting the object to be heated, and a predetermined area near the top plate. It is equipped with continuously arranged strip-shaped operation display means and control means.
The control means identifies an occupied area on the top plate of the object to be heated based on the output of the sensor, and further drives the induction heating coil corresponding to the specified occupied area and the surrounding area. The area to be heated is specified, the center position and size of the specified occupied area are estimated, and the operation means is displayed in the specific area of the operation display means based on the estimation result to enable the operation means. An induction heating cooker that can be accessed by an external operation is disclosed.

In other words, instead of placing a heated object such as a pot in a specific position on the top plate for cooking, the heated object can be placed relatively freely over a wide area on the top plate and the position of the heated portion can be controlled. A technique has been proposed in which the device can detect and start cooking.

The above technique can also be applied to the cooking utensil 1 of the present disclosure. That is, as described in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to display the right heating unit selection mark 334R and the left heating unit selection mark 334L indicating that driving is permitted on the integrated control device MC side on the first specific screen 30SP. ..

Further, it is not necessary to first select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL by the input key 43M2, and the usability can be further improved.

Further, in the cooking utensils 1 of the first to seventh embodiments, a large number of input keys 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43R1 to 43R4, 43L1 to 43L4 and the like are provided in the input operation unit 40 for multi-functionalization. Therefore, there is a concern that users who are not accustomed to the operation cannot easily perform the desired operation.
Therefore, for users who do not want to use all the functions from the beginning, when a specific switch is operated, the display of the input key itself is turned off and the input function of the input key is disabled, so that the number of input operation units 40 is reduced. It may be in a form that expects such a visual effect. It should be noted that a heating cooker that limits the functions that can be used according to the wishes of such a user has already been proposed by Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-243771.

Further, either the cooperative cooking mode or the combined cooking mode may be set so as not to be used by the user's operation. In that case, the setting by the input key 43KP described in the first embodiment may be used, or it is preferable to provide an input key or a push button switch whose functions can be limited and expanded only by the user touching them.

Of each of the processes described in the embodiments, all or part of the processes described as being automatically performed can also be performed manually. It is also possible to automatically perform all or part of the processing described as being performed manually by a known method.

In the first to fourth embodiments, there are two induction heating units 17H, a left heating unit 17HL and a right heating unit 17HR, and the inverter circuits 81L and 81R are also arranged one by one corresponding to these two heating units. However, this may be changed to the following form.
(1) A method of coordinating and driving the IH coils of two adjacent heating parts when heating a large object to be heated that straddles two adjacent heating parts (as a representative example, Japanese patent). No. 5188215).

(2) Four IH coils having substantially the same shape and size and wound in the same direction under the top plate 15 and arranged close to substantially the same plane under the top plate, and the above four. It is equipped with two inverter circuits that supply electric power to the IH coils, and the four IH coils are divided into two coil groups (groups), and the two inverter circuits are divided into each of the two IH coil groups. A method for supplying electric power to each of them (see Japanese Patent No. 5299590 as a typical example).

(3) A circular IH coil (central IH coil) arranged below the top plate 15 and (plural) auxiliary IH coils arranged so as to surround the circumference of the circular IH coil. A method including a first inverter circuit that supplies electric power to the central IH coil and a second inverter circuit that supplies electric power to the auxiliary coil group (as a representative, see Japanese Patent No. 5257542). ..

(4) A main IH coil for heating an object to be heated placed on a top plate, and a sub-IH coil group consisting of a plurality of sub-IH coils installed adjacent to each other on the outside of the main IH coil. A main inverter circuit that supplies a high-frequency current to the main IH coil, a sub-inverter circuit group that independently supplies a high-frequency current to each of the sub-IH coils to the sub-IH coil group, and the main IH coil and the plurality. Controls the output of the main inverter circuit and the sub-inverter circuit group, as well as the heated object placement determination unit that determines whether or not the same heated object is mounted on at least one of the sub IH coils. The sub IH coil is provided with an energization control circuit, and a plurality of the sub IH coils are provided with a predetermined insulating space placed around the main IH coil at a predetermined distance from each other. The side edge portion adjacent to the outer peripheral edge of the main IH coil has a curved shape along the outer peripheral edge of the main IH coil, and the energization control circuit has the main inverter so as to have a thermal power value set by the user. The output of the circuit and the output of the sub-inverter circuit group are controlled to a predetermined distribution to perform the cooperative heating operation, and then the number of the sub-IH coils that perform the cooperative heating operation increases, decreases, or is switched to another sub-IH coil. If this is the case, a method for maintaining the output distribution before the change (as a representative, see Japanese Patent No. 5642168).

Further, each component of each circuit, component, and device shown in the figure is a functional concept and does not necessarily have to be physically configured as shown in the figure. Further, in particular, the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the display unit drive circuit 63 described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 122 can disperse and integrate the functions of each of these devices / circuits. The specific form is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and all or a part thereof can be functionally or physically distributed / integrated in any unit according to the function, the operating condition, and the like.

Each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 is realized by a processing circuit. The processing circuit that realizes each function may be dedicated hardware or a processor that executes a program stored in the memory.

When the processing circuit is a processor, each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 is realized by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. The software and firmware are described as a program and stored in a storage device MM which is a memory. The processor realizes each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 by reading and executing the program stored in the storage device MM.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedure of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90. The storage device MM is typically a non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, or EEPROM.

Further, a part of the data or the program of the storage device MM and the storage device 90R shown in FIG. 30 may be held in an external recording medium (storage server or the like) without being held by the cooking cooker 1. In this case, the cooking cooker 1 acquires necessary data and program information by accessing an external recording medium (storage server).

Further, in particular, the operation programs of the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the display unit drive circuit 63 described with reference to FIG. If desired, it may be possible to update to an improved one as appropriate. In this case, for example, the patch may be obtained through the wireless communication unit 49.

One heating unit 17HL, 17HR of the induction heating source 9 (first heating means HM1) to be cooked on the top plate 15 may be changed to a gas combustion burner. In this case, the gas flow rate valve is controlled by the control unit.
Further, the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, or the oven heating source 188 may be changed to a gas combustion burner.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the input operation unit 40, the left operation unit 40L, the cooperative operation unit 40MC, and the right operation unit 40R are all "contact type input" operation units in which the user touches an input key to give an input command. As explained in the above, a non-contact method may be used in which the movement of the user's finger or hand is detected and input in a non-contact manner. Further, it may be changed to a voice input method that recognizes and inputs the user's voice. In the case of the voice input method, a microphone or a voice receiving unit for receiving a user's voice and converting it into a voice recognition signal corresponds to an input operation unit.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the input operation unit 40 is a means for selecting various control menus, control conditions, etc. displayed on the first specific screen 30SC, the second specific screen 30SP, and the third specific screen 30ST. , May be provided in the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 which is a display means or the left and right display units 30L and 30R.

For example, in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent No. 583369, which proposes a compound cooking, a display screen of the compound cooking is displayed, the name of the menu of the compound cooking is displayed in the display screen, and the user selects the menu selection unit. A technique has been proposed in which a menu is selected by directly touching it with a finger.

Therefore, the menu of cooking and the name of the object to be cooked (a kind of identification information) that can be used in the combined cooking or the cooperative cooking mode are displayed on the first specific screen 30SC and the second specific screen 30SP, and the display portion (the display portion). The user may directly touch the "icon" part) with his / her finger to select the menu of the cooperative cooking mode or the like.

In the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 receives a command signal transmitted from the outside of the cooking cooker 1, and the cooking cooker 1 transmits each operation signal and command signals L1 to L10 to the outside. However, information indicating the progress such as the start and end of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 may be further transmitted. The user can know the progress information on the portable terminal device 418 or the like, and the convenience is improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 exchanges command signals, driving operation signals, etc. with the home gateway 411 inside the house HA, but it is also referred to as a power line transfer technology (“PLC technology”). You may use).

Further, in the first embodiment, the home gateway 411 having a function of receiving the search result data of the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is used as the information management device, but the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 are connected to the Internet (wide area). It may be connected to each of the communication circuit networks) 416 and connected to the external server 417 via the Internet 416. In that case, the external server 417 may store and retain the inventory information of the refrigerator 401.

Further, the external server 417 has various cooking recipe information that can be used in the cooking device 1. Then, in response to a request from the cooking device 1 or the information / communication terminal device 418, the recipe information is searched and the extracted recipe information is provided to the cooking device 1 or the information / communication terminal device 418. May be.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Substantial scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The cooking cooker according to the present disclosure can be widely used not only in the kitchen of a general house but also in a kitchen such as a public facility or a store.

1 Heat cooker 2 Kitchen furniture 2A Installation port 2B Front opening 2G Step 2P Top surface of mouth edge 2S Right side 3 Surface material 4 Surface material 5 Surface material 6 Surface material 7 Frame line 8 Wall 9 Induction heating source 10 Main body of upper unit 11 Partition member (partition wall)
12 Section board 13 Section board 14 Partition wall 15 Top plate 16 Upper case (upper housing)
16A Flange 16B Rear vertical wall 16BL Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BR Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BX Horizontal bend 16F Front vertical wall 16L Side vertical wall 16R Side vertical wall 16S Bottom wall (bottom wall surface)
17C coil base (coil support frame)
17CH arm 17CL coil wire 17H induction heating part 17HL left heating part (second heating part)
17HM Central heating unit 17HR Right heating unit (1st heating unit)
17L IH coil (induction heating coil)
17M IH coil (induction heating coil)
17R IH coil (induction heating coil)
18 Opening 19 Exhaust cover 20 Exhaust port 21 Decorative frame 22 Reinforcing plate 23 Right input control device 24 Left input control device 25 Decorative frame 26 Cushion material 27 Light emitting display 27L Light emitting display 27M Light emitting display 27R Light emitting display 27L1 to 27L4 Individual Light emitting unit 27M1 to 27M6 Individual light emitting unit 27R1 to 27R5 Individual light emitting unit 28 Power switch control device 29 Support plate 30 Integrated display unit (center display unit)
30A display text 30AD additional screen 30B display text 30C two-dimensional information 30D display screen 30E caution display 30F description text 30G caution text 30H recommended text 30J specific text 30K heating source display unit 30L 1st area 30M 2nd area 30MY microwave heating time information 30N Common information during standby 30GY Grill cooking heating time information 30P Guidance information 30P1 Guidance information 30Q Character information (additional information)
30R 3rd area 30S Heating time information 30T Target temperature information 30V Output level information 30W Display window 30X Output value (watt value) information 30Y Candidate display unit
31L left side display (individual display)
31LW display window 31R right side display (individual display)
31RW Display window 32 Central operation board 33 Rectifier circuit 34 Power supply circuit A
35 Rectifier circuit 36 Power supply circuit B
37L drive circuit 37R drive circuit 38 Exhaust window 39A Signal line 39B Signal line 40 Input operation unit 40L Left operation unit (second individual operation unit)
40M Central operation unit 40VR Audio signal reception unit 40VS Audio signal analysis unit 40R Right operation unit (1st individual operation unit)
41 Operation board
41L Left touch key board 41R Right touch key board 42 Input key 43L1 to 43L4 Input key 43M1 Input key 43M2 Input key 43M3 Input key (guide key)
43KP input key 43L1 to 43L4 input key 43M1 to 43R3 input key 43MC input key 43MS input key (starting part)
43MT input key (end)
43R1 to 43R4 Input key 43MX Input key 44L Input key 44R Input key 45L Input key 45M Input key 45R Input key 46L Window 46R Window 47 Input key 48 Infrared transmitter 49 Wireless communication unit (wireless communication module)
50 Holder 51 Screw 52 Partition plate 52A Exhaust window 52B Exhaust window 53L Exhaust port plate 53R Exhaust port plate 54 Filter circuit board 55 Power supply circuit board 56 Choke coil 57 Transformer 58 Condenser 59 Diode bridge circuit (diode module)
60 1st cooling fan (upper cooling fan)
60A outlet 60C fan case 60F rotary blade 60FL cooling air 60H suction port 60M motor 60P drive circuit 60T rotary shaft 61 second cooling fan 61A outlet 61C fan case 61F rotary blade 61M motor 61P drive circuit 62 cooling fan drive circuit 63 Drive circuit 63CS display command unit (for the second specific screen)
63SP display command unit (for the first specific screen)
63ST display command unit (for the 3rd specific screen)
64 Vents
64S Auxiliary ventilation hole 65 Right exhaust port 66 Magnetic shield ring 67L Thermal power display unit 67H Thermal power display unit 67R Thermal power display unit 68 Heat source display unit 68L Display unit 68M Display unit 68R Display unit 69 High temperature notification unit 70 Cover 70A Front notch 70B Wall 70E Extension 71 Support plate 72 Power control unit (demand control unit)
73 Signal transmission unit 74 Drive circuit 75 DC power supply circuit 75M DC power supply circuit 76 Resonant condenser 76m Resonant condenser 77a Input current detection unit 77am Input current detection unit 77b Output current detection unit 77bm Output current detection unit 78a Diode bridge 78am Diode bridge 78b Reactor 78bm Reactor 78c Smoothing Condenser 78cm Smoothing Condenser 79a IGBT
79am IGBT
79b IGBT
79bm IGBT
79c diode 79cm diode 79d diode 79dm diode 80 inverter circuit board 80F first inverter circuit board 80M second inverter circuit board 81 inverter circuit 81L inverter circuit (first inverter circuit)
81M inverter circuit (third inverter circuit)
81R Inverter circuit (second inverter circuit)
82 heat sink 82B heat sink (second heat sink)
82B1 heat sink (first heat sink at the rear)
82B2 heat sink (second heat sink at the rear)
82F heat sink (first heat sink)
82F1 heat sink (first heat sink in front)
82F2 heat sink (second heat sink in front)
82FN Heat sink 82M Heat sink 82MF Heat sink 82MF1 Heat sink 82MF2 Heat dissipation fin 83 Power control switching element 84 Vibration sensing device 85 Electrical parts 86 Water receiving member 87 Outer case 87A Vent hole 87B Drain hole 88 Inner case 88A Vent hole 88B Hole 90 IH control unit 90M1 Microcomputer 90M2 Microcomputer 90R Storage device 91 Power supply circuit 92 DC power supply conversion unit 93 Temperature detection circuit (abnormality detection unit)
94L Induction heating circuit 94R Induction heating circuit 95 Speech synthesizer 95S Speaker 96 Clock circuit 97 Main power switch 98 Main power switch operation button or operation key 99 Commercial power supply (commercial AC power supply)
100 Upper unit 101 Lower case (lower housing)
101A Flange 101B Rear wall surface (rear vertical wall)
101C Inclined part 101F Front plate 101H Body 101U Bottom plate 101L Side vertical wall 101R Side vertical wall 101T Front horizontal wall 102 Exhaust duct 102A Internal passage 102B Internal passage 102E End part 104 Cavity 105 Control device 106 Power cord 106A Plug 108A Connection port (Connecting terminal)
108B connection port (connection terminal)
109A Output terminal 109B Output terminal 109C Output terminal 110 Main body 111 Inclined part 112 Front cover 112P Mounting leg 113 Heating chamber 113A Opening 113B Back wall (rear wall surface)
113T Recess 114 Door 115 Handle 117 Through hole (guide hole)
118 Connecting member (reinforcing member)
119A electric wire 119B electric wire 120 microwave heating device 120P power supply circuit part 121 inverter circuit board 121A inverter circuit (drive circuit)
122 Magnetron (microwave source)
122A Oscillator 122H Heat dissipation 123 Waveguide 124 Antenna case 125 Antenna 126 Antenna drive motor 126A Rotating shaft 127 Power supply circuit board 128 Third cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan A)
129 4th cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan B)
130 Microwave heating control unit 131 Door open / close detection mechanism 132A Latch switch 132B Door switch 133 Monitor switch 134 pin 135 pin 136A Interlocking rod 136B Interlocking rod 137 Support plate 138A Communication port 138B Communication port 139 Closing detection unit 140 Oven heating device 141 Ceiling space)
142 space (side space)
145 saucer 150 case A
151 Case B
152B intake port (second intake port)
152F intake port (second intake port)
152S1 Auxiliary intake port 152S2 Auxiliary intake port 153 Duct 154 Case C
154A Lid body 154B Main body 158 Non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit)
159 Heating chamber control unit 160 Temperature sensor 161 Detection window 162 Cooking dish 163 Heater 163A Upper heater 163B Lower heater 164 Vent (first intake port)
165 Recess (intake duct)
166L Left partition plate 166R Right partition plate 167 Upper heat shield plate 168 Lower heat shield plate 169 Upper case 170 Lower case 171 Partition plate 172 Passage 173 Communication port 174 Communication port 176 Hinge 178A Relay 178B Relay 180 Power supply port 18 Material 185 Radio wave sealing chamber 186 Screw 188 Oven heating source (heating chamber heating source)
189 Microwave heating source 190 Frame 191 Cover 192 Inner frame 192W Peep window (opening)
193 Inner seal frame 194 Choke chamber 195 Seal plate 196 Seal plate 197 Upper shield plate 199 Wind direction plate 200 Lower unit 201 Introductory port 226 Leg 264 Vent hole 300A Upper space 300B Lower space 301R Right side gap (third gap)
301L left side void (third void)
302 Front gap (third gap)
303 Void 304 Support bracket 304V Vertical part 304H Horizontal part (flange part)
305 Vent hole 306 Communication window 307 Exhaust duct 308 Vertical part 309 Communication window 310 Spacer (cushion material)
311 Lower void (third void)
320 Exhaust port 326 Cushion material 330 Identification information 331 Additional information 332 Cooking process information (cooking process display)
333 Time saving information 334 Refrigerator display 335D symbol 335U symbol 336D symbol 336U symbol 337 Display guide 338 Recommended information (recommended cooking)
339 Individual food information 400 Home appliances 401 Refrigerator 402 Television receiver 403 Air conditioner 404 Air purifier 405 Ventilation device 406 Electric rice cooker (electric jar rice cooker)
408 Microwave oven 409 Lighting fixture 410 Kitchen 411 Home gateway 412 Main body case 413 Environmental detection unit 413A Sensor unit 413H Human detection unit 414 Electric energy meter 415 Power line (main trunk line)
416 Wide area communication network 417 External server 418 Information communication terminal equipment 419 Wireless router 420 Ceiling wall surface 422 Range hood 423 Exhaust port 424 Duct 425 Hood 425A Suction port 426 Electric fan 424 Blower fan 430 Filter 431 Air guide plate 432 434 Smell sensor 435 Communication unit 436 Vertical wall surface 440 Temperature monitoring device 441 Temperature detection unit 442 Communication unit 443 Temperature determination circuit 444 Light receiving unit 445 Alarm device 446 Communication unit (transmitter / receiver unit)
447 Central control unit 448 Electric energy control unit 449 Input unit 450 Storage device 451 Schedule management unit 452 Human detection sensor 453 Environmental sensor AH Upper air passage AL Top plate exposure range AN notification unit BL straight line (reference line)
BH depth dimension BT1 dedicated power supply (built-in battery)
CK IH coil installation space D5 Maximum size in the front-rear direction of the upper case D6 Maximum width in the front-back direction D7 Opposite spacing DP1 Depth (dimensions)
EM anomaly detection unit F1 1st air passage F2 2nd air passage FA1 to FA10 Reference information FG User's fingertip FI entrance FL1 outlet line FL2 outlet line FO exit GD1 step GP1 void GP2 void (first void)
GP5L gap GP5R gap GP6 gap GP7 gap GP8 gap GP9 gap GP10 gap GP11 gap GP12 gap (second gap)
GP13 Space between top plate and cover GP14 Space between first cooling fan GP16 Space GP17 Void GP18 Void HC Main body case H1 Maximum height dimension H2 Height dimension H3 Height dimension H4 Height dimension H5 Height dimension H6 Height Dimensions H7 Height dimensions H8 Height dimensions HA House HB Reference bottom HP1 First horizontal plane HP2 Second horizontal plane HV Effective height dimension HX Maximum height dimension IP1 Touch information (input operation information)
IP2 input information IP3 selection signal IP4 selection signal IP5 image signal JC human sensing sensor LA protrusion dimension LD1 distance LD2 distance LF exhaust port dimension MC integrated control device MM storage device N heated object QC seismic device RF1 cooling air RF2 cooling air RF3 Cooling air RF4 Cooling air RF4L Cooling air RF4R Cooling air RF5 Cooling air RF6 Cooling air TR Transition period UH Lower air passage W1 Width dimension of installation port W2 Maximum width dimension of installation space W3 Maximum width dimension of cooker W4 Maximum width dimension in the left-right direction Dimensions W5 Maximum width in the left-right direction of the upper case W6 Length of the inverter circuit board 80 W7 Width of the inverter circuit board 80 W8 Maximum (width) size in the left-right direction inside the upper case W9 Opposing distance of the hanging wall 70B (space in the front-back direction) Dimensions)
W10 distance W11 caliber W12 distance W13 distance W14 installation interval WB depth dimension WH inside width dimension (frontage dimension)
XB intersection XF intersection XG intersection.

Claims (110)

With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber, and
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit.
It is provided with an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit.
The input operation unit includes a shared operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode executes the cooking step 1 by the first heating means and the cooking step 2 by the second heating means.
The control unit
(1) In response to the input from the shared operation unit, the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
(2) The start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed in response to a command from the individual operation unit.
(3) During the period of the cooking step 1, a part or all of the input function for the second heating means in the shared operation unit is disabled.
(4) When the cooking step 1 is completed, the input function for the second heating means in the shared operation unit is restored.
(5) The start and end of the cooking step 2 are executed according to a command from the shared operation unit.
A cooking device that features that. The second heating means comprises a plurality of heating sources using different heating principles.
The control unit combines a single cooking mode using the first heating means selected by the individual operation unit and a plurality of the heating sources of the second heating means, and automatically proceeds with cooking. It also has a combined cooking mode to make it
The control unit selects either one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode according to the input in the shared operation unit.
The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The notification unit has an integrated display unit corresponding to the shared operation unit and an individual display unit corresponding to the individual operation unit.
The control unit displays cooking process information including the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 on the integrated display unit from before the start of the cooking process 1, and continues the display until the end of the cooking process 2. do,
The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. Further having a door for opening and closing the opening of the heating chamber so as to be openable and closable.
The control unit has a function of detecting the opening and closing of the door.
When the control unit detects that the cooking step 1 is completed and the door is closed after the end time, the input function for the second heating means in the shared operation unit is restored. Let,
The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. Before the linked cooking mode is selected, the control unit displays the standby initial screen on the notification unit, and when the linked cooking mode is selected, the first specific screen is replaced with the standby initial screen. And display
On the first specific screen, a cooking menu to which the cooperative cooking mode can be applied is displayed.
The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The control unit displays the standby initial screen on the notification unit before the combined cooking mode is selected, and when the combined cooking mode is selected, the second specific screen replaces the standby initial screen. And display
On the second specific screen, a control menu to which the combined cooking mode can be applied is displayed.
The cooking device according to claim 2, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. Before the single cooking mode is selected, the control unit displays the standby initial screen on the notification unit, and when the single cooking mode is selected, the third specific screen replaces the standby initial screen. And display
On the third specific screen, a control menu to which the single cooking mode can be applied is displayed.
The cooking device according to claim 2, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The heating unit has a first heating unit and a second heating unit separated in the left-right direction.
The individual operation unit has a first individual operation unit corresponding to the first heating unit and a second individual operation unit corresponding to the second heating unit.
The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The shared operation unit includes an input key for selecting a cooking menu in the linked cooking mode and an input key for selecting a control condition corresponding to the cooking menu selected by the input key.
During the period from the start to the end of the cooking step 1, the input function of the input key is invalidated.
The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The notification unit has an integrated display unit corresponding to the shared operation unit and an individual display unit corresponding to the individual operation unit.
The first specific screen is displayed on the integrated display unit, and is displayed on the integrated display unit.
The first specific screen includes identification information of the cooking menu, information indicating the heating source used in the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, information indicating the progress of cooking, and application to the cooking menu. Display at least one piece of information about the control condition,
The cooking apparatus according to claim 5. The first heating means is an induction heating source in which an IH coil is arranged in the heating portion.
The cooking device according to any one of claims 1 to 10. The second heating means includes a microwave heating source for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber and an oven heating source for heating the heating chamber.
The control unit can control the microwave heating source and the oven heating source independently of each other.
The cooking device according to any one of claims 1 to 10. The shared operation unit includes a start unit for shifting to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode and an end unit for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode.
The cooking device according to any one of claims 1 to 10. The shared operation unit is further provided with an input key for selecting the operation of the cooperative cooking mode.
At the stage when the operation of the cooperative cooking mode is selected by the input key, the shared operation unit is characterized in that the input function for new cooking using the second heating means is restricted. Item 9. The cooking apparatus according to Item 9. When it is confirmed that the operation of the cooperative cooking mode is started by the start unit, the shared operation unit is characterized in that the input function for new cooking using the second heating means is limited. The cooking device according to claim 13. The shared operation unit includes a selection unit for displaying a second specific screen for selecting a control menu for the combined cooking mode, a start unit for shifting to the operation of the combined cooking mode, and an operation of the combined cooking mode. With an end to cancel,
The start portion and the end portion are shared for starting and canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode.
The cooking device according to claim 2, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. When the end portion is operated once in the cooking step 2, the cooking step 2 is completed, and when the end portion is subsequently operated once, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode is canceled.
The cooking apparatus according to claim 16. The control unit displays the first specific screen before the start of the cooking step 1.
On the first specific screen, the identification information of the cooking menu and the cooking process information including the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 are displayed.
The cooking apparatus according to claim 5. The main body is divided into an upper space and a lower space, and is divided into an upper space and a lower space.
In the upper space, an upper cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the lower space and allows cooling air to pass through is arranged.
In the lower space, a lower cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the upper space and allows cooling air to pass through is arranged.
The control unit is cooled by the upper cooling fan.
The cooking device according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber, and
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit.
It is provided with an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit.
The input operation unit includes a shared operation unit and an individual operation unit for the first heating means.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode executes the cooking step 1 by the second heating means and the cooking step 2 by the first heating means.
The control unit
(1) In response to the input from the shared operation unit, the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
(2) The start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed in response to a command from the shared operation unit.
(3) During the period of the cooking step 1, a part or all of the input functions in the individual operation unit are disabled.
(4) When the cooking step 1 is completed, the input function for the first heating means in the individual operation unit is restored.
(5) The start and end of the cooking step 2 are executed according to a command from the individual operation unit.
A cooking device that features that. The second heating means comprises a plurality of heating sources using different heating principles.
The control unit combines a single cooking mode using the first heating means selected by the individual operation unit and a plurality of the heating sources of the second heating means, and automatically proceeds with cooking. It also has a combined cooking mode to make it
The control unit selects either one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode according to the input in the shared operation unit.
The cooking device according to claim 20, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The notification unit has an integrated display unit corresponding to the shared operation unit and an individual display unit corresponding to the individual operation unit.
The control unit displays cooking process information including the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 on the integrated display unit before the start of the cooking process 1, and continues the display until the end of the cooking process 2. ,
The cooking device according to claim 20, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. Further having a door for opening and closing the opening of the heating chamber so as to be openable and closable.
The control unit has a function of detecting the opening and closing of the door.
When the control unit detects that the cooking step 1 is completed and the door is opened after the end time, the input function for the first heating means in the individual operation unit is restored. Let,
The cooking device according to claim 20, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. Before the linked cooking mode is selected, the control unit displays the standby initial screen on the notification unit, and when the linked cooking mode is selected, the first specific screen is replaced with the standby initial screen. And display
On the first specific screen, a cooking menu to which the cooperative cooking mode can be applied is displayed.
The cooking device according to claim 20, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The control unit displays the standby initial screen on the notification unit before the combined cooking mode is selected, and when the combined cooking mode is selected, the second specific screen replaces the standby initial screen. And display
On the second specific screen, a control menu to which the combined cooking mode can be applied is displayed.
21. The cooking apparatus according to claim 21. The control unit displays a standby initial screen on the notification unit before the single cooking mode using the first heating means is selected, and when the single cooking mode is selected, the standby initial screen is displayed. Display the third specific screen instead of the screen,
On the third specific screen, a control menu to which the single cooking mode can be applied is displayed.
21. The cooking device according to claim 21. The heating unit has a first heating unit and a second heating unit separated in the left-right direction.
The individual operation unit has a first individual operation unit corresponding to the first heating unit and a second individual operation unit corresponding to the second heating unit.
The cooking device according to claim 20, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The shared operation unit includes an input key for selecting a cooking menu in the linked cooking mode and an input key for selecting a control condition corresponding to the cooking menu selected by the input key.
During the period from the start to the end of the cooking step 2, the input function of the input key is invalidated.
The cooking device according to claim 20, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The notification unit has an integrated display unit corresponding to the shared operation unit and an individual display unit corresponding to the individual operation unit.
The first specific screen includes identification information of the cooking menu, information indicating the heating source used in the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, information indicating the progress of cooking, and application to the cooking menu. Display at least one piece of information about the control condition,
The cooking device according to claim 24. The first heating means is an induction heating source in which an IH coil is arranged in the heating portion.
The cooking device according to claim 20, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The second heating means includes a microwave heating source for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber and an oven heating source for heating the heating chamber.
The control unit can control the microwave heating source and the oven heating source independently of each other.
The cooking device according to claim 20, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The shared operation unit includes a start unit for shifting to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode and an end unit for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode.
The cooking device according to any one of claims 20 to 28. The shared operation unit includes an input key for selecting the operation of the cooperative cooking mode, and an input key for selecting one from the cooking menus displayed on the first specific screen. ,
The cooking device according to claim 24. At the stage when the operation of the cooperative cooking mode is selected by the input key, the shared operation unit is characterized in that the input function for new cooking using the second heating means is restricted. Item 33. The cooking apparatus according to Item 33. When it is confirmed that the operation of the cooperative cooking mode is started by the start unit, the shared operation unit is characterized in that the input function for new cooking using the second heating means is limited. The cooking device according to claim 32. The shared operation unit includes a selection unit for displaying a second specific screen for selecting a control menu for the combined cooking mode, a start unit for shifting to the operation of the combined cooking mode, and an operation of the combined cooking mode. With an end to cancel,
The start portion and the end portion are shared for starting and canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode.
21. The cooking apparatus according to claim 21. When the end portion is operated once in the cooking step 1, the cooking step 1 is completed, and when the end portion is subsequently operated once, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode is canceled.
36. The cooker according to claim 36. The control unit displays the first specific screen before the start of the cooking step 1.
On the first specific screen, identification information of the cooking menu selected by the input key and cooking process information including the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 are displayed.
The cooking device according to claim 24. The main body is divided into an upper space and a lower space, and is divided into an upper space and a lower space.
In the upper space, an upper cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the lower space and allows cooling air to pass through is arranged.
In the lower space, a lower cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the upper space and allows cooling air to pass through is arranged.
The control unit is cooled by the upper cooling fan.
The cooking device according to claim 20, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber, and
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit.
It is provided with an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit.
The input operation unit includes a shared operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode includes at least two cooking steps 1 and 2.
The first cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means is used in the cooking step 1 and the second heating means is used in the cooking step 2, and the second heating means is used in the cooking step 1. It has a second cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means is used in the cooking step 2.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooperative preheating cooking mode in which a preheating step by either the first heating means or the second heating means is executed in addition to the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2.
The control unit
(1) When the cooperative cooking mode is selected, the first specific screen is displayed on the notification unit.
(2) Display multiple cooking menu candidates on the first specific screen, and display them.
(3) When one of the candidates for the cooking menu is selected, either the first linked cooking mode or the second linked cooking mode is automatically determined.
(4) It is requested that the input of the control condition applied to the selected cooking menu be input from the shared operation unit.
(5) During the period of the preheating step, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, the input functions in the individual operation unit and the shared operation unit are restricted.
A cooking device that features that. The second heating means comprises a plurality of heating sources using different heating principles.
The control unit combines a single cooking mode using the first heating means selected by the individual operation unit and a plurality of the heating sources of the second heating means, and automatically proceeds with cooking. It also has a combined cooking mode to make it
The control unit selects either one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode according to the input in the shared operation unit.
The cooking device according to claim 40. Before the linked cooking mode is selected, the control unit displays the standby initial screen on the notification unit, and when the linked cooking mode is selected, the first specific screen is replaced with the standby initial screen. And display
On the first specific screen, a cooking menu to which the cooperative cooking mode can be applied is displayed.
The cooking device according to claim 40. The control unit displays the standby initial screen on the notification unit before the combined cooking mode is selected, and when the combined cooking mode is selected, the second specific screen replaces the standby initial screen. And display
On the second specific screen, a control menu to which the combined cooking mode can be applied is displayed.
The cooker according to claim 41. The control unit displays a standby initial screen on the notification unit before the single cooking mode using the first heating means is selected, and when the single cooking mode is selected, the standby initial screen is displayed. Display the third specific screen instead of the screen,
On the third specific screen, a control menu to which the single cooking mode can be applied is displayed.
The cooker according to claim 41. The first heating means is an induction heating source.
The second heating means includes a microwave heating source for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber and an oven heating source for heating the heating chamber.
The cooking device according to claim 40. Further having a door for opening and closing the opening of the heating chamber so as to be openable and closable.
The control unit has a function of detecting the opening and closing of the door.
When the control unit starts the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 using the heating chamber, and detects that the door is opened and then closed, the control unit performs an input function in the shared operation unit. Revive,
The cooking device according to claim 40. When the combined cooking mode is selected, the control unit displays a control menu in which the plurality of heating sources constituting the second heating means are used independently in the second specific screen. , One of the control menus can be selected by the shared operation unit,
The cooking device according to claim 43. With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber,
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit.
It is provided with an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit.
The input operation unit includes a shared operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit.
The control unit has an operation program of a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order.
The linked cooking mode comprises a cooking step 1 and a cooking step 2, and for the first linked cooking mode in which the first heating means is used for the cooking step 1 and for the cooking step 1. A second cooperative cooking mode using the second heating means HM2, and the like.
In both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode,
(1) In the shared operation unit, the selection of the cooperative cooking mode and the decision to start the cooking step 1 are made.
(2) The end of the cooking step 2 is performed by the individual operation unit when the cooking step 2 is executed by the first heating means, and the cooking step 2 is executed by the second heating means. If so, use the shared operation unit.
A cooking device that features that. The shared operation unit includes an end unit for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode up to the cooking step 2.
The cooker according to claim 48. The shared operation unit includes an input key for selecting the linked cooking mode and an input key for determining to start the cooking step 1, respectively.
The cooker according to claim 48. The end portion has a function of allowing the user to end the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 using the second heating means at any time point.
When the end portion is operated once, the cooking process being executed is stopped, and when the end portion is operated twice in succession, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode being executed is canceled.
The cooking cooker according to claim 49. The notification unit includes an integrated display unit that performs a display operation at the stage of operating the shared operation unit, and an individual display unit that performs a display operation related to the operation of the individual operation unit.
The cooker according to claim 48. The integrated display unit displays cooking process information indicating the progress of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2.
The cooking cooker according to claim 52. At the stage where the operation for selecting the linked cooking mode is performed in the shared operation unit, a part or all of the input functions of the individual operation unit is restricted.
The cooker according to claim 48. At the stage when the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode is started by the individual operation unit, the shared operation unit is restricted from inputting for new cooking using the second heating means. Be done,
The cooker according to claim 48. At the stage where the shared operation unit is performing an operation for selecting the linked cooking mode, the integrated display unit displays a first specific screen displaying identification information of the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode. Be done,
The cooking cooker according to claim 52. The control unit notifies the end of the cooking step 1 or information on preparation for the cooking step 2 by the notification unit before the time when the cooking step 1 is completed, and then heats the cooking step 1 by the end of the cooking step 1. Transition to a dormant period,
The cooker according to claim 48. The first heating means is an induction heating source in which an IH coil is arranged in the heating portion.
The cooking device according to any one of claims 48 to 57. The second heating means includes a microwave heating source for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber and an oven heating source for heating the heating chamber.
The control unit can control the microwave heating source and the oven heating source independently of each other.
The cooking device according to any one of claims 48 to 57. The main body is divided into an upper space and a lower space.
In the upper space, an upper cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the lower space and allows cooling air to pass through is arranged.
In the lower space, a lower cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the upper space and allows cooling air to pass through is arranged.
The control unit is cooled by the upper cooling fan.
The cooker according to claim 48. An abnormality detection unit is provided inside the main body.
The abnormality detecting unit has a function of detecting an abnormality in temperature in the upper space.
When the abnormality detecting unit detects an abnormality during the operation in the cooperative cooking mode, the control unit stops driving all the heating means, and even after the driving is stopped, the upper cooling fan performs heat dissipation operation. ,
The cooking device according to claim 60. An abnormality detection unit is provided inside the main body.
The abnormality detecting unit has a function of detecting an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fan.
When the abnormality detecting unit detects an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fan during the operation in the cooperative cooking mode, the control unit stops driving all the heating means and operates the upper cooling fan. To stop,
The cooking device according to claim 60. With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber,
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
An upper cooling fan whose operation is started when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven, and
A lower cooling fan whose operation is started when the second heating means is driven, and
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan, respectively.
Anomaly detection unit and
An input operation unit that gives a command signal to the control unit is provided.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 by the first heating means and a cooking step 2 by the second heating means.
When the abnormality detecting unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking step 1, the control unit may detect an abnormality.
(1) The heating operation of the cooking step 1 is stopped, and the cooking step 1 is stopped.
(2) Stop the operation of the cooperative cooking mode and
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan continues until the stop condition A is satisfied.
A cooking device that features that. The stop condition A corresponds to the temperature of the installation space of the first heating means.
The cooker according to claim 63. The stop condition A corresponds to the elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the first heating means.
The cooker according to claim 63. The control unit limits the heating means to be used in the cooking step 2 from being used by other cooking during the period of the cooking step 1, and the limitation is determined by the abnormality detection of the abnormality detection unit. When the operation of the cooperative cooking mode is stopped, it is canceled.
The cooker according to claim 63. The heating portions are arranged in a plurality of places on the upper part of the main body.
The input operation unit has an individual operation unit installed for each of the plurality of heating units and a shared operation unit arranged in the upper central portion of the main body.
The cooker according to claim 63. The shared operation unit includes a selection unit for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, a start unit for determining to start the cooking process 1, and an end unit for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode up to the cooking process 2. And, with each
The cooker according to claim 67. During the period of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode, the end portion stops the cooking step being executed when the operation is performed once, and is executed when the cooking process is continuously operated twice. Cancel the operation of the above-mentioned cooperative cooking mode in
The cooker according to claim 68. The end of the cooking step 1 should be performed by input from the individual operation unit.
The cooker according to claim 68. The shared operation unit can be operated from above the main body.
The selection portion, the start portion, and the end portion are arranged in a horizontal straight line.
The cooker according to claim 68. The first heating means is an induction heating source in which an IH coil is arranged in the heating portion.
The cooking cooker according to any one of claims 63 to 69. The second heating means includes a microwave heating source for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber and an oven heating source for heating the heating chamber.
The control unit can control the microwave heating source and the oven heating source independently of each other.
The cooking cooker according to any one of claims 64 to 69. The inside of the main body is divided into an upper space and a lower space.
In the upper space, the upper cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the lower space and allows cooling air to pass through is arranged.
In the lower space, the lower cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the upper space and allows the cooling air to pass through is arranged.
The control unit is cooled by the upper cooling fan.
The cooking cooker according to any one of claims 64 to 69. With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber,
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
An upper cooling fan whose operation is started when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven, and
A lower cooling fan whose operation is started when the second heating means is driven, and
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan, respectively.
Anomaly detection unit and
An input operation unit that gives a command signal to the control unit is provided.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 by the first heating means and a cooking step 2 by the second heating means.
When the abnormality detecting unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking step 2, the control unit may detect an abnormality.
(1) The heating operation of the cooking step 2 is stopped, and the cooking step 2 is stopped.
(2) Stop the operation of the cooperative cooking mode and
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan is continued until at least the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped.
(4) The operation of the lower cooling fan continues until the stop condition B is satisfied.
A cooking device that features that. The stop condition B corresponds to the temperature of the heating chamber or the second heating means.
The cooking cooker according to claim 75. The stop condition B corresponds to the elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the second heating means.
The cooking cooker according to claim 75. The heating portions are arranged in a plurality of places on the upper part of the main body.
The input operation unit has an individual operation unit installed for each of the plurality of heating units and a shared operation unit arranged in the upper central portion of the main body.
The cooking cooker according to claim 75. The shared operation unit includes a selection unit for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, a start unit for determining to start the cooking process 1, and an end unit for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode up to the cooking process 2. And, with each
The cooker according to claim 78. During the period of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode, the end portion stops the cooking step being executed when the operation is performed once, and is executed when the cooking process is continuously operated twice. Cancel the operation of the above-mentioned cooperative cooking mode in
The cooking cooker according to claim 79. The shared operation unit can be operated from above the main body.
The selection portion, the start portion, and the end portion are arranged in a horizontal straight line.
The cooking cooker according to claim 79. The first heating means is an induction heating source in which an IH coil is arranged in the heating portion.
The cooking device according to any one of claims 75 to 80. The second heating means includes a microwave heating source for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber and an oven heating source for heating the heating chamber.
The control unit can control the microwave heating source and the oven heating source independently of each other.
The cooking device according to any one of claims 75 to 80. The inside of the main body is divided into an upper space and a lower space.
In the upper space, the upper cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the lower space and allows cooling air to pass through is arranged.
In the lower space, the lower cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the upper space and allows the cooling air to pass through is arranged.
The control unit is cooled by the upper cooling fan.
The cooking device according to any one of claims 75 to 80. With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber,
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
An upper cooling fan whose operation is started when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven, and
A lower cooling fan whose operation is started when the second heating means is driven, and
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan, respectively.
Anomaly detection unit and
An input operation unit that gives a command signal to the control unit is provided.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 by the second heating means and a cooking step 2 by the first heating means.
When the abnormality detecting unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking step 1, the control unit may detect an abnormality.
(1) The heating operation of the cooking step 1 is stopped, and the cooking step 1 is stopped.
(2) Stop the operation of the cooperative cooking mode and
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan is continued until at least the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped.
(4) The operation of the lower cooling fan continues until the stop condition B is satisfied.
A cooking device that features that. The stop condition B corresponds to the elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the second heating means.
The cooking cooker according to claim 85. The control unit limits the heating means to be used in the cooking step 2 from being used by other cooking during the period of the cooking step 1, and the limitation is determined by the abnormality detection of the abnormality detection unit. When the operation of the cooperative cooking mode is stopped, it is canceled.
The cooking cooker according to claim 85. The heating portions are arranged in a plurality of places on the upper part of the main body.
The input operation unit has an individual operation unit installed for each of the plurality of heating units and a shared operation unit arranged in the upper central portion of the main body.
The cooking cooker according to claim 85. The shared operation unit includes a selection unit for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, a start unit for determining to start the cooking process 1, and an end unit for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode up to the cooking process 2. And, with each
The cooker according to claim 88. During the period of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode, the end portion stops the cooking step being executed when the operation is performed once, and is executed when the cooking process is continuously operated twice. Cancel the operation of the above-mentioned cooperative cooking mode in
The cooking cooker according to claim 89. The end of the cooking step 1 should be performed by input from the individual operation unit.
The cooking cooker according to claim 85. The shared operation unit can be operated from above the main body.
The selection portion, the start portion, and the end portion are arranged in a horizontal straight line.
The cooking cooker according to claim 89. The first heating means is an induction heating source in which an IH coil is arranged in the heating portion.
The cooking cooker according to any one of claims 85 to 90. The second heating means includes a microwave heating source for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber and an oven heating source for heating the heating chamber.
The control unit can control the microwave heating source and the oven heating source independently of each other.
The cooking cooker according to any one of claims 85 to 90. The inside of the main body is divided into an upper space and a lower space.
In the upper space, the upper cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the lower space and allows cooling air to pass through is arranged.
In the lower space, the lower cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the upper space and allows the cooling air to pass through is arranged.
The control unit is cooled by the upper cooling fan.
The cooking cooker according to any one of claims 85 to 90. With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating unit, and
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber,
A notification unit that provides information about cooking,
An upper cooling fan whose operation is started when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven, and
A lower cooling fan whose operation is started when the second heating means is driven, and
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan, respectively.
Anomaly detection unit and
An input operation unit that gives a command signal to the control unit is provided.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 by the second heating means and a cooking step 2 by the first heating means.
When the abnormality detecting unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking step 2, the control unit may detect an abnormality.
(1) The heating operation of the cooking step 2 is stopped, and the cooking step 2 is stopped.
(2) Stop the operation of the cooperative cooking mode and
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fan continues until the stop condition A is satisfied.
A cooking device that features that. The stop condition A corresponds to the temperature of the installation space of the first heating means.
The cooker according to claim 96. The stop condition A corresponds to the elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the first heating means.
The cooker according to claim 96. The control unit limits the heating means to be used in the cooking step 2 from being used by other cooking during the period of the cooking step 1, and the limitation is determined by the abnormality detection of the abnormality detection unit. When the operation of the cooperative cooking mode is stopped, it is canceled.
The cooker according to claim 96. The heating portions are arranged in a plurality of places on the upper part of the main body.
The input operation unit has an individual operation unit installed for each of the plurality of heating units and a shared operation unit arranged in the upper central portion of the main body.
The cooker according to claim 96. The shared operation unit includes a selection unit for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, a start unit for determining to start the cooking process 1, and an end unit for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode up to the cooking process 2. And, with each
The cooking device according to claim 100. During the period of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode, the end portion stops the cooking step being executed when the operation is performed once, and is executed when the cooking process is continuously operated twice. Cancel the operation of the above-mentioned cooperative cooking mode in
The cooking cooker according to claim 101. The end of the cooking step 1 should be performed by input from the individual operation unit.
The cooker according to claim 96. The shared operation unit can be operated from above the main body.
The selection portion, the start portion, and the end portion are arranged in a horizontal straight line.
The cooking cooker according to claim 101. The first heating means is an induction heating source in which an IH coil is arranged in the heating portion.
The cooking cooker according to any one of claims 96 to 102. The second heating means includes a microwave heating source for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber and an oven heating source for heating the heating chamber.
The control unit can control the microwave heating source and the oven heating source independently of each other.
The cooking cooker according to any one of claims 96 to 102. The inside of the main body is divided into an upper space and a lower space.
In the upper space, the upper cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the lower space and allows cooling air to pass through is arranged.
In the lower space, the lower cooling fan that introduces outside air without passing through the upper space and allows the cooling air to pass through is arranged.
The control unit is cooled by the upper cooling fan.
The cooking cooker according to any one of claims 96 to 102. With the main body
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on the upper surface of the main body,
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber,
A notification unit that provides information and
A control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit.
It is provided with an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit.
The input operation unit has an individual operation unit dedicated to the first heating means, and a shared operation unit for the second heating means and the first heating means.
The control unit has an operation program of a coordinated preheating cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode includes a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated by the second heating means, a cooking step 1 of cooking by the second heating means following the preheating step, and the cooking step 1. After the cooking step 1, the cooked object used in the cooking step 1 is moved onto the heating unit of the first heating means to further heat the cooked object.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode is
(1) In the shared operation unit, the selection of the cooperative preheating cooking mode and the decision to start the preheating step and the cooking step 1 are made.
(2) The end of the preheating step and the start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed by the shared operation unit.
(3) The start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed by the shared operation unit.
(4) The start and end of the cooking step 2 are performed by the individual operation unit.
A cooking device characterized by that. The second heating means comprises a plurality of heating sources using different heating principles.
The control unit combines a single cooking mode using the first heating means selected by the individual operation unit and a plurality of the heating sources of the second heating means, and automatically proceeds with cooking. It also has a combined cooking mode to make it
The control unit selects either one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode according to the input in the shared operation unit.
The cooking cooker according to claim 108. The first heating means is an induction heating source.
The second heating means includes a microwave heating source for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber and an oven heating source for heating the heating chamber.
The cooker according to claim 108 or 109.

Images